Strata BVPU, EOCU, IMDU, KCDU, PCOU1,2, PDKU2, PDKU1, PEKU, PEMU, PEPU, PESU, PIOU2, PIOUS2, RATU, RCIU, RCIS, RCOU, RDDU, RDSU, RDTU, REMU, RGLU2, RMCU, RMDS, RSIS, RSIU, RSSU, RSTS, RSTU2, RWIU universal slot pcbs User manual
Below you will find brief information for BVPU, EOCU, IMDU, KCDU, PDKU2, PEKU, PEPU, PIOU2, PIOUS2, RATU.
PDF
Download
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
9 Universal Slot PCBs This chapter contains information on Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) which can be used in the universal slots of either the Strata DK40i Expansion KSU, the Strata DK424 or DK424i cabinets. Although the system architecture of these systems is very different, the PCBs described in this chapter are common to both systems. When installing these circuit boards in the DK40i Expansion KSU, you must install them in the universal slots designated in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. PCBs which are not installed in the universal slots of the system can be found in the installation chapter for the system. For example, the TCOU PCB for the DK40i system appears in Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation. Paragraph headings identify information which is specific to a particular system and minor exceptions are mentioned in text. Note Prior to PCB installation, the power supply must be tested and the ground checked. Universal Slot PCBs Important! PCB Compatibility The following is a list of PCBs that appear in this chapter: Compatible with: PCB Function DK40i DK424 DK424i BVPU X X X Voice Over Internet Protocol (IP) Gateway Unit. EOCU X X X Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (See PEKU for installation/programming instructions.) IMDU X X X Remote Maintenance Modem Unit (See PIOU2, PIOUS2 for installation/programming instructions.) KCDU X PCOU1,2 X X X (See RCOU for installation/programming instructions.) PDKU2 X X X Digital Telephone Interface Unit PEKU X X X Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PEMU X X X See REMU. PEPU X X X External Page Interface Unit PESU X X X Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit Strata DK I&M 5/00 CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit 9-1 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Compatibility Compatible with: PCB Function DK40i DK424 DK424i PIOU2, PIOUS2 X X X PSTU X X X (See RSTU2 for installation/programming instructions.) X X Attendant Console Interface Unit X X Adds four additional Caller ID lines to RCIU2. X X (See RCIU2 for installation/programming instructions.) X X Caller ID Interface X X Adds two ports per card (maximum of two) to E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface card (RMCU) RATU RCIS X RCIU1 RCIU2 X RCMS RCOS X X X Adds four loop start lines. (See RCOU for installation/ programming instructions.) RCOU X X X Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit RDDU X X X Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit RDSU X X X Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit X X T1 Interface Unit RDTU 9-2 Option Interface Units REMU X X X E&M Tie Line Unit RGLU2 X X X Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit RMCU X X CAMA E911 Trunk Direct Interface card RMDS X X Optional built-in modem. (See RSIU for installation/ programming instructions.) RSIS X X Optional RS-232 ports. (See RSIU for installation/ programming instructions.) RSIU X X RS-232/Modem Interface Unit RSSU X X X PC Interface Unit RSTS X X X Optional Standard Telephone Interface Subunit (See RDSU for installation/programming instructions.) RSTU2 X X X Standard Telephone Interface Unit RWIU X X X Strata AirLink Wireless Interface Unit (see Strata AirLink Installation Guide) Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout PCB Chapter Layout Each PCB outline begins with the PCB’s designation and title (the outline appears in the chapter in alphabetical order by designation). A brief synopsis of the PCB appears next and includes a notation of the system(s) that the PCB can be used in, the circuits supplied by the PCB, what equipment the PCB interfaces with, and a list of the PCB’s older version(s) with a brief description of their differences. Installation and programming instructions follow the synopsis with a table showing the PCB’s controls, indicators and connectors and an illustration of the board. DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout PCB Title RDDU - Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit System: Circuits per PCB: Interfaces with: Older Versions: DK16e Expansion KSU, DK424 four DID lines DID lines None The RDDU provides four Direct Inward dialing (DID) lines, each of which can have a single office code along with a block of extensions. If an RDDU is installed, an RRCS must be installed for DTMF operation, but not for dial pulse operation. Gives the type of system that is compatible with the given PCB. Be sure to read this information before attempting to use a PCB with your system application. RDDU controls, indicators and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-10 and described in Table 7-8. Circuits per PCB: RDDU Hardware Option Type and number of circuits available on the PCB. There are no hardware options supported by the RDDU. Interfaces with: Type of line/hardware the PCB can accept. Universal Slot PCBs Each extension can be assigned to ring a station [DN] that appears on one or multiple stations, Distributed Hunt or ACD Group (DK424 only), or an external telephone number selected in system programming. This enables calls over the same line to be routed to different stations or group of stations. An extension can also be assigned to ring the maintenance modem. Each RDDU can be set for either wink start or immediate. All RDDU lines support DNIS and ANI features. System: Older Version(s): Describes older version or versions of the PCB. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-3 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout BVPU – Internet Protocol (IP) Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: four Tie line circuits; one 10BaseT Ethernet connection Interfaces with: Appears as: H.323 terminals over an IP network 4 E&M Tie lines 2- or 4-wire transmission Type I and II Signaling Immediate and Wink Start Older Version(s): none BVPU Configuration With DK424, Tie lines can route per Program 04 [DN] assignments or Program 71 and 72 DNIS/ ANI assignments (see Program 17). Note For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming Tie lines, a DTMF DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3 or on any DK424 or DK424i processor PCB. BVPU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-1 and described in Table 9-1. BVPU Installation 1. Insert the BVPU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, the BVPU can be installed only in place of the RDDU per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) 2. Attach the 10BaseT Ethernet connection to the LAN Connector. 3. Connect a PC equipped with Maintenance Console Software (MCS) to the Serial Port according to the drawing below. A serial connection is necessary to establish the IP address of the BVPU. Once the IP address is established, maintenance may be conducted over the Ethernet port. 9-4 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout 4. After installing the BVPU, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. BVPU PC with maintenance console software Monitor jack PC DB9 or DB25 Com port Dealer-supplied 6-wire telephone modular cord (cross-pinned) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Call-monitor jack (RJ12) pin numbering 5243 Figure 9-1 BVPU Monitor Jack Universal Slot PCBs RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG Toshiba PPTC9 or PPTC25F BVPU Programming Note For programming purposes, the Strata DK regards the BVPU card as an REMU and identifies it as such. Programming instructions for the gateway component are included in the Voice Over IP Installation Guide. ♦ Program 03: Specify Code 13 for slots that support REMUs (BVPUs) and make sure RRCS is enabled for DTMF operation. ♦ Program 04: Specifies [PDNs]. These are also the numbers that must be received by incoming Tie lines to route calls to the proper telephones (see Program 17, LED 05). ♦ Program 10-1: Enables/disables two-line conference. ♦ Program 15: Assigns tandem connections and dial pulse option to Tie lines. ♦ Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start to BVPU Tie lines. Important! Note Also used to turn on Tie line dial tone return. When a BVPU is installed in a system, it automatically assumes the next four consecutive CO line and station port numbers. ♦ Program 30: Disables RRCS for dial pulse operation. ♦ Program 71 (1~5) and Program 72: Tie/DID DNIS assignments. ♦ Program *71~*73: DH/Tie/DID to [DN] ringing assignments. ♦ Program 93: Assigns a name to a Tie line Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-5 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Table 9-1 BVPU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Serial Port Description RS-232C Maintenance Connection LAN Connector RJ45 SW0 Dipswitch 10BaseT Ethernet Connection LED 1 Green LED On = Tie trunk 4 active LED 2 Green LED On = Tie trunk 3 active LED 3 Green LED On = Tie trunk 2 active LED 4 Green LED On = Tie trunk 1 active LED 5 Green LED Power On/Off LED 6 Yellow LED Line Status (On=Busy / Off = Idle) LED 7 Red LED Unused. All switches = Off Alarm (On = Abnormal) On-Line On = Operating LED 8 Green LED Off = Starting up or Off Slow Flash = Detected error in BVPU Fast Flash = Shut down mode 9-6 LED 9 Yellow LED Link Indication (On = Normal) LED 10 Green LED Data (On = Data communication in progress) LED 11 Yellow LED Collision (On = collisions occurring) Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout 4 3 2 1 VPIS1A Line in Use LEDs UP CN2 SPORT Serial Port LEDs JTAG LINK ONLINE ALARM BUSY POWER BDM Backplane Connector LAN ON CN1 5031 TBO Ground Terminal Figure 9-2 Strata DK I&M Universal Slot PCBs LSB 12345678 MSB LED7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BVPU1A BVPU PCB 5/00 9-7 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout KCDU – CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU Circuits per PCB: two CO loop start/four digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: central office loop start lines digital telephones (with or w/o RPCI-DI or ADM) PDIU-DS DDCB cordless digital telephones (DKT2004-CT, DKT2104-CT) Older Version(s): none Up to four KCDU PCBs may be installed in the Expansion KSU. For controls, connectors, and indicators, see Figure 9-3 and Table 9-2. KCDU Configuration The KCDU may have to be configured to control excessive loudness if the system is close to a CO or installed behind a PBX telephone system. It does not have to be configured for anything else. The decibel (dB) PAD switches, SW501 (CO1) and SW601 (CO2), control the loudness by providing a 3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or CO when set to the PAD position. The switch comes from the factory set at NOR (for normal) meaning no PAD loss. KCDU Installation 1. If the system is located within one mile of the CO or PBX telephone system, set dB PAD switches SW501 and SW601 to the PAD position. 2. Insert the KCDU into the appropriate slot in the Expansion KSU, per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of the connectors. 3. After installing the KCDU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt. Note If KCDU CO lines receive Caller ID, RCIU2 must be installed. KCDU Programming See “RCOU Programming” on Page 9-33 and “PDKU2 Programming” on Page 9-10 for KCDU programming information. When running Program 03 for the KCDU slot(s), specify code 65 if the KCDU does not support OCA or PDIU-DI telephones or code 66 if the KCDU supports OCA or PDIU-DI telephones. Do not specify code 11, 61, 62, or 64. 9-8 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Table 9-2 KCDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 1 indicator SW501 Red LED CO line circuit 2 indicator SW601 Red LED J7 connectors Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits,1 and 2. PAD switch SW501 Two-position slide Enables 3 dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 1 (when set in PAD position). PAD switch SW601 Two-position slide Enables 3 dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 2 (when set in PAD position). Lights to indicate CO line circuit is in operation. 25-Pair Amphenol Connector (Female) J7 CO1 SW601 (CO2) PAD NOR Universal Slot PCBs CO2 SW501 (CO1) PAD NOR 1857 Backplane Connector Figure 9-3 Strata DK I&M KCDU PCB 5/00 9-9 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout PDKU2 – Digital Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: eight digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: digital telephones (with or w/o RPCI-DI or ADM) DDSS console (circuit 8 only) PDIU-DS (must have dedicated circuit) DDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) cordless digital telephones (DKT2004-CT, DKT2104-CT) DKT2001 single line digital telephones (see Note below) Older Version(s): PDKU1 (identical to PDKU2 except it does not support continuous DTMF tones w/DKT2000-series telephones, DIUs can only be connected to circuits 1~7) PDKU2 Hardware Options PDKU2 does not have to be configured for any option. Refer to Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for instructions on how to connect digital telephones, DDCBs, and DDSS consoles to the PDKU2, as well as how to upgrade digital telephones with these options: an Integrated Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DI, RPCI-DI), a Speaker Off-hook Call Announce upgrade (DVSU), and a Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface (HHEU). Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation to connect the Standalone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS) to the PDKU. Note DKT2001 telephones do not support HHEUs, DADMs, DDSSs, RPCI-DIs, or DVSUs. There are no controls or indicators on the PDKU (Figure 9-4). PDKU2 Installation 1. Insert the PDKU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, PDKU2 must be installed per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) 2. After installing the PDKU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PDKU2 Programming Program 03 ♦ Specify Code 61 to indicate a station line PDKU2. ♦ Specify Code 62 to indicate a PDKU2 supporting Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) and/or DIUs and RPCI-DI Data mode. ♦ Specify Code 64 to indicate a PDKU2 supporting a DDSS console, Speaker OCA, DIUs, and RPCI-DI Data mode. ♦ For RPCI-DI TAPI mode only and Handset OCA, code 61 can be used and the PDKU2 can be in any universal cabinet slot. Note If there are no PDKU2 options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91-1 or 91-9 can be run instead. Programs 20, 21, and 22: Configures DIUs and RPCIs. Programs 28 and 29: Digital Direct Station Selection Consoles (DDSS) assignments. 9-10 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Program *29: Enables ADMs on 2000-series digital telephones. Program 27: Adjusts initial off-hook volume level for digital telephone handsets. Programs 30, 31: Enables OCA. Programs 77-1, 77-2, 79, *79: Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (DDCB) and door phone ringing assignments. Program 92-5: Initializes initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring volume levels of digital telephones. Backplane Connector Universal Slot PCBs 1371 50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector Figure 9-4 Strata DK I&M PDKU2 PCB 5/00 9-11 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout PEKU – Electronic Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: eight electronic telephone circuits Interfaces with: electronic telephones HDSS console (circuits 7 and 8 only–each console requires two circuits) alternate BGM source (circuit 3 only) EOCU PCB for OCA external conference amplifier (circuits 2 and 3 only–ports 09 and 10, 17 and 18, 25 and 26, 33 and 34–each amplifier requires two circuits) HDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) Older Version(s): none PEKU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-6 and described in Table 9-3. Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) Installation onto the PEKU (Internal Option) Note PEKU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60 are positioned to allow installation of the EOCU only in the proper position (Figure 9-5). 1. Mate EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40, J50, and J60 with PEKU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60. 2. Apply firm, even pressure to EOCU to ensure proper mating of connectors. J60 J40 J50 3. Use a three-pair cable for making connections between the PEKU and the speaker OCA electronic telephone. 4. Refer to “Electronic Telephone Upgrades” on Page 11-19 for procedures to upgrade electronic telephones for Speaker OCA. J20 Note Electronic telephones do not support handset OCA. External Options Note J10 1373 Figure 9-5 Off-Hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) Installation Refer to Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus and Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for installation of electronic telephones (including the following upgrades: HVSU2 or HVSU, HVSI for Off-hook Call Announce and HHEU for headset and/or loud ringing bell interface) and external options, respectively. PEKU Configuration to Support an HDSS Console Option 1. Set the SW1 switch to DSS. 2. See “HDSS Console” on Page 11-24 for console installation instructions. Each HDSS console requires dedicated use of circuits 7 and 8 of a particular PEKU PCB. 9-12 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout PEKU Configuration to Support Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (HDCB) 1. Cut the W9 Door Phone jumper wire on the PEKU PCB. 2. Refer to “Door Phone (MDFB)” on Page 11-25 for HDCB, associated Door Phones (MDFBs) and door lock control installation procedures. Only circuit 5 of a PEKU associated with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 can support HDCBs. PEKU Configuration to Support Separate BGM Source Connection 1. Cut the W5 (BGM) jumper wire on the PEKU PCB. 2. Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for installation procedures for BGM connection. Only circuit 3 can support a BGM source. 3. In Program 10-2, set LED 09 on to enable the PEKU (Port 002) BGM source to be sent to digital and electronic telephone speakers and/or PIOU2, PIOUS2, PEPU PCBs. 4. Use Program 19 to identify the slot in which the PEKU supporting the BGM source will be installed. PEKU Installation 2. Insert the PEKU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, the PEKU can be installed only in place of the RSTU2, PDKU, or RDSU. See Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) 3. After installing the PEKU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt. Universal Slot PCBs 1. Make sure the PEKU has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. See previous pages for more information. PEKU Programming Program 03: Door phones, the BGM source connection, and external amplifiers do not require a special code. ➤ Specify Code 21 to indicate a non-optioned station line PEKU. ➤ Specify Code 22 to indicate a PEKU configured for Speaker OCA. ➤ Specify Code 23 to indicate a PEKU configured for an HDSS console. ➤ Specify Code 24 to indicate a PEKU configured for Speaker OCA and an HDSS console. Note If there are no PEKU options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91 can be run instead. Programs 10-2 and 19: BGM connection. Programs 10-3: Assigns external amplifiers to ports. Programs 28 and 29: HDSS console assignments. Programs 77-1, 77-2, 79: HDCB and door phone ringing assignments. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-13 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Table 9-3 PEKU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Off-hook call announce P10 Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call Announce subassembly connector (used with P20, P40, P50, and P60). Off-hook call announce P20 Used with P10, P40, P50, and P60. Off-hook call announce P40 10-pin connector Used with P10, P20, P50, and P60. Off-hook call announce P50 Used with P10, P20, P40, and P60. Off-hook call announce P60 Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call Announce subassembly connector (used with P10, P20, P40, and P50). DSS/EKT HDSS Console/ Electronic Telephone SW1 Switch 2-position slide switch Door phone W9 jumper wire BGM source connection W5 jumper wire White jumper wire Configures PEKU for operation with an HDSS console or electronic telephones. When cut, configures PEKU for installation of an optional HDCB. When cut, configures PEKU for BGM source connection. Backplane Connector P60 P50 P20 W9, cut for HDCB option P10 P40 W5, cut for BGM option EKT DSS SW1 1372 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Figure 9-6 9-14 PEKU PCB Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout PEPU2 – External Page Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: see interfaces) Interfaces with: built-in paging amplifier or page speaker door lock control external amplifier control external paging 600 ohm (duplex) interface (one zone) MOH control night relay control Older Version(s): none The PEPU is similar to the PIOU2 and PIOUS2, but supports fewer peripherals than both PCBs. PEPU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are illustrated in Figure 9-7 and described in Table 9-4. PEPU does not support the following PIOU2 and PIOUS2 options: Alarm sensor ♦ Four-zone page ♦ SMDR port ♦ Remote maintenance modem or ASCII terminal connector ♦ IMDU connection Note Refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring and Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for installation of external options. Universal Slot PCBs ♦ PEPU2 Installation 1. Make sure P15 is in the Mu Law position for U.S. and Canada. 2. Ensure the PEPU2 has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. (Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation.) 3. Insert the PEPU2 (component side facing right) into the last slot (S16) of the Base KSU/ cabinet if the system has only a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/cabinets. If there are Expansion KSU/cabinets, install the PEPU2 in the highest slot number of the highest numbered KSU/cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 4. After installing the PEPU2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PEPU2 Programming Program 03: Specify Code 41 for the slot that will support a PEPU. Program 10-2: Activates External Page with All Call Page (with access code only, not with $OO&DOO3DJH button). Program 77-1: Assigns relay control options. Program 78: Sets Night Ringing over External Page. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-15 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Table 9-4 PEPU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component M/B make/break jumper plug P10 3-terminal jumper plug M/B make/break jumper plug P11 Description External page/door lock control relay make or break jumper plug. Night/hold relay make or break jumper plug. SPI/SPO internal/external amplifier switch SW4 2-position slide switch Selects built-in 3-watt amplifier (SPI) or 600ohm output (SPO) for external page/BGM operation. Volume control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume of built-in 3-watt amplifier. Backplane Connector SPO SW4 P10 M M SPI P11 B B VR1 1390 50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector Figure 9-7 9-16 PEPU PCB Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout PESU – Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: two standard telephone or two-wire device circuits (circuits 1,2)/ four electronic telephone circuits (circuits 5~8) Interfaces with: standard telephone circuits standard telephones voice mail ports off-premises stations alternate BGM source auto attendant digital announcer electronic telephone circuits electronic telephones alternate BGM source (circuit 8 only) EOCU PCB for OCA HDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) external conference amplifier Older Version(s): none Note For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone port), a DTMF receiver unit (RRCS4, 8, or 12) must be installed on the DK40i K4RCU3, DK424 or DK424i processor PCB. Universal Slot PCBs The PESU provides a ring generator that can be set for either 130V P-P or 190V P-P for the two standard interface circuits. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are nonfunctional, but they are each assigned a port in system programming. PESU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-8 and described in Table 9-5. DK40i General Information The PESU must be installed in the DK40i Expansion KSU in place of RDSU, RSTU or PDKU. See Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the PESU in slot 18 of the DK40i system. Installing the Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) (Internal Option) 1. Mate the EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40, J50, and J60 (Figure 9-8) with the PESU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60. Note PESU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60 are positioned to allow installation of the EOCU only in the proper position. 2. Apply firm, even pressure to the EOCU to ensure proper mating of connectors. 3. Use three-pair cable for connecting the PESU and the Speaker OCA electronic telephone. Refer to Chapters 10 for wiring/ interconnecting details. 4. See “PDIU-DI Installation into 1000-series Digital Telephone” on Page 11-10 for procedures to add required speaker OCA upgrade to electronic telephones. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-17 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout External Options Note Refer to Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus to connect electronic telephones (including the following upgrades: HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI for Off-hook Call Announce and HHEU for headset and/or Loud Ringing Bell interface), standard telephones, and HDCBs to the PESU. See Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation to connect peripherals. PESU Configuration to Support Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (HDCB) 1. Cut the W9 door phone jumper wire on the PESU PCB. 2. See “Door Phone/Lock Programming” on Page 11-27 for installation procedures for the HDCB and associated door phones (MDFBs) and door lock control. 3. Each HDCB requires dedicated use of circuit 5 of a particular PESU PCB. PESU Configuration to Support Background Music (BGM) Source 1. Cut the W7 (BGM) jumper wire on the PESU. 2. Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for BGM installation procedures. PESU Configuration for Square Wave Ring Generator ➤ Ensure the P90 jumper plug is set to the “H” (190V P-P) position for initial installation. The “L” (130V P-P) position is used if devices connected to the PSTU1 or PSTU2 experience ring trip. PESU Installation 1. Make sure that the PESU subunit (ESTS) is securely attached to the PESU (Figure 9-8). WARNING! The protective shield on the back of the PESU is designed to protect the installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not remove this shield. 2. Ensure the PESU has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. “PESU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors” on Page 9-19. 3. Insert the PESU into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the PESU in slot 18 of the DK40i system. 4. After installing the PESU, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt. 9-18 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout PESU Programming Enter Code 25 in Program 03 for a non-optioned PESU or Code 26 for a PESU supporting Offhook Call Announce. To program the PESU standard telephone ports, see “PESU Programming” on Page 9-19. To program the PESU electronic telephone ports, see “PESU Programming” on Page 9-19. If there are no PESU options, skip Program 03 and run Program 91 instead. Table 9-5 PESU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call Announce subassembly connector (used with P20, P40, P50, and P60). Off-hook call announce P10 Off-hook call announce P20 Description 10-pin connector Used with P10, P40, P50, and P60. Off-hook call announce P40 Used with P10, P20, P50, and P60. Off-hook call announce P50 Used with P10, P20, P40, and P60. Off-hook call announce P60 Used with P10, P20, P40, and P50. 3-terminal jumper When cut, configures PESU, circuit 5 for installation of an optional HDCB. Door phone W9 jumper wire White jumper wire BGM W7 jumper pack Strata DK I&M 5/00 H=190V P-P (factory setting) L=130V P-P When cut, configures PESU, port 07, circuit 8, for BGM source connection (slot 01 only with PCTU2 and PCTU1). Universal Slot PCBs Ring voltage jumper plug P90 Sets ring generator voltage level for circuits 1 and 2. 9-19 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Cut W7 Only if BGM Is Connected to Port 07, Circuit 8 P60 W7 PESU P40 P50 Optional EOCU, Equip. for OCA Feature Cut W9 for Door Phone Option (HDCB on Circuit 5) W9 P10 P20 ESTS 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) P80 Backplane Connector P70 Up L H P90 PESU 1378 Ring Voltage Option (Ports 1 & 2): L = Low Level (130V P-P) H = High Level (190V P-P) ESTS: Standard Telephone Interface, Always Equipped From Factory Note Connect two ringers maximum per port (H or L). Figure 9-8 9-20 PESU PCB Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout PIOU2, PIOUS2 – Option Interface Units System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: (see interfaces) Interfaces with: night transfer/music hold control relay door lock/external amplifier control relay remote maintenance (IMDU) TTY port–terminal, modem, SMDI, ACD/MIS (DK424 only) SMDR output alarm sensor zone page interface–four zones (PIOU2 only) built-in paging amplifier (PIOU2 only) unamplified page output Older Version(s): none The PIOU2 and PIOUS2 both provide a circuit interface with the system peripheral options. A maximum of three PIOU2 or PIOUS2 PCBs can be installed in the system. (see “PIOU2, PIOUS2 Installation” on Page 9-22). PIOU2 controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-10 and described in Table 9-7. PIOUS2 information is provided in Figure 9-11 and Table 9-8. IMDU Compatibility with PIOU and PIOUS The compatibility of the IMDU1 and IMDU2A PCBs are shown in Table 9-6. Table 9-6 Universal Slot PCBs DK40i General Information: On the DK40i, the Base KSU provides the 600 ohm page output; the 600 ohm page output on the PIOU2, PIOUS2 is not used on the DK40i. IMDU and PIOU/PIOUS Compatibility PIOU/PIOUS IMDU1 IMDU2A PIOU1A/PIOUS1A Available Available PIOU2A/PIOUS2A N/A Available IMDU2 Installation onto a PIOU2 or PIOUS2 (Internal Option) 1. Make sure IMDU2 P3 is set for PCM Mu Law operation in the U.S and Canada. Mu A P3 H J1 H M L P1 J2 3. Make sure IMDU2 P2, modem receive gain is set on L in the U.S and Canada. 4. On the PIOU2 or PIOUS2, set the SW3 switch to the “MODEM” position for IMDU2 operation. 5. Set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 to the “BELL.” L P2 2. Make sure IMDU2 P1, modem transmit gain is set on L in the U.S and Canada. 3651 Figure 9-9 Remote Maintenance Modem (IMDU2) Installation 6. Mate IMDU2 connector J1 with PIOU2 or PIOUS2 connector P1 and IMDU2 J2 with P2 and P3 (see Figure 9-9). Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-21 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Note PIOU2 or PIOUS2 connectors P1, P2, and P3 are positioned to allow installation of the IMDU2 only in the proper position. 7. Refer to the Strata DK Programming Manual and turn LED 14 on in Program 77-1 to enable IMDU2 operation. Note The IMDU2 default station intercom or [DN] is #19. 8. Apply firm, even pressure to the IMDU2 to ensure proper mating of connectors. 9. Set the SW2 baud rate switch on the front panel to 300 or 1200, as appropriate, after the PCB has been installed in the KSU/cabinet (in for 300 bps, out for 1200 bps). Note Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for external option installation procedures. PIOU2, PIOUS2 Installation 1. Make sure that P15 is in the Mu Law position for USA and Canada. 2. Ensure that the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. (Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for more details.) 3. Insert the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 (component side facing right) into the last slot (“S16”) of the Base KSU/cabinet if the system only has a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/ cabinets. If there are Expansion KSUs/cabinets, install the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 in the highest slot number in any KSU/cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Note In DK40i, PIOU2 or PIOUS2 can be installed in any available Expansion KSU. 4. After installing the PIOU2 or PIOUS2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PIOU2, PIOUS2 Programming Program 03: Specify Code 41, 42, or 43 for the slot that will support a PIOU2 or PIOUS2. (See “Multiple Serial Port Installation” on Page 13-2.) Note Program 76 assignments for RSIU, RSIS, RMDS will override Program 03 assignments (41, 42, and 43) for SMDI, SMDR, TTY, and maintenance modem. Program 10-2: Activates External Page with All Call Page (with access code #39 only, not with $OO &DOO3DJH button). Program 60: Assigns SMDR options. Program 77-1: Assigns relay control and IMDU2 options. Program 78: Sets Night Ringing over External Page 9-22 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout 3692 Backplane Connector P15 P2 P1 Mu A P3 N.C N.O MODEM P12 SP1 SW3 CCITT BELL SP0 SW1 J3 TTY 600/600 1200 SW2 Universal Slot PCBs PIOU2A M B P10 P11 M 300 B P13 SW4 TTY SMDR ON 300 OFF 1200 PIOU2 Figure 9-10 PIOU2 PCB 3719 Backplane Connector P2 P1 P15 MODEM Mu A IMDU2 P3 SW3 N.C N.O TTY P12 300 P13 P10 M B M P11 SW1 B CCITT BELL SW2 600/600 SPT CD4 PIOUS2 SPR DET DER NHT NHR ALMT ALMR PIOUS2 1200 ON 300 OFF 1200 Figure 9-11 PIOUS2 PCB Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-23 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Table 9-7 PIOU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component SMDR/TTY interface connector J3 Dual modular connector IMDU2 connector P1 10-pin connector IMDU2 connector P2 9-pin connector IMDU2 connector P3 3-pin connector Interface connector for remote maintenance modem piggy-back module. External Page/Door Lock Control Relay Make or Break jumper plug. M/B make/break jumper plug P10 M/B make/break jumper plug P11 Alarm sensor N.O./N.C. jumper plug P12 Description Interface connector for SMDR printer/call accounting device and maintenance terminal/ modem. Night/Hold Relay Make or Break jumper. Plastic jumper Alarm sensor normally open or closed jumper. IMDU2 or external modem operating specification jumper plug. CCITT/BELL plug P13 SMDR baud rate switch SW1 2-position slide switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for SMDR printer or call accounting device. TTY baud rate switch SW2 2-position locking pushbutton switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for Remote Maintenance Modem piggy-back module (IMDU2) or external TTY jack. Enables PIOU2 for operation with IMDU2 modem or TTY jack. Modem/TTY switch SW3 SPO/SP1 internal/external amplifier switch SW4 Volume control VR1 PCM A Law/Mu Law option P15 2-position slide switch Selects built-in 3-watt amplifier (SPI) or 600ohm output (SPO) for external page/BGM operation. Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume of built-in 3-watt amplifier. 3-terminal jumper plug Default set for Mu Law standard (applies to the U.S., Canada and Japan). A Law is used in Mexico, the United Kingdom, and other parts of Europe and Asia. *Most modems in USA require BELL specification. **Top modular is TTY and Bottom modular is SMDR. 9-24 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Table 9-8 PIOUS2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component SMDR/TTY interface connector J3 Dual modular connector (top modular is TTY, bottom is SMDR) IMDU2 connector P1 10-pin connector IMDU2 connector P2 9-pin connector IMDU2 connector P3 3-pin connector Interface connector for remote maintenance modem piggy-back module. External Page/Door Lock Control Relay Make or Break jumper plug. M/B make/break jumper plug P10 M/B make/break jumper plug P11 Alarm sensor N.O./N.C. jumper plug P12 Description Interface connector for SMDR printer/call accounting device and maintenance terminal/ modem.** Night/Hold relay make or break jumper plug. 3-terminal jumper plug Alarm sensor normally open or normally closed jumper plug. IMDU2 or external modem operating specification jumper plug. CCITT/BELL jumper plug P13 2-position slide switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for SMDR printer or call accounting device. TTY baud rate switch SW2 2-position locking pushbutton switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for Remote Maintenance Modem piggy-back module (IMDU) or external TTY jack. Modem/TTY switch SW3 2-position slide switch Enables PIOUS2 for operation with IMDU2 modem or TTY jack. 3-terminal jumper plug Default set for Mu Law standard (applies to the U.S., Canada and Japan). A Law is used in Mexico, the United Kingdom, and other parts of Europe and Asia. PCM A Law/Mu Law option P15 Universal Slot PCBs SMDR baud rate switch SW1 *Most modems in USA require BELL specification. **Top modular is TTY and Bottom modular is SMDR. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-25 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout RATU – Attendant Console Interface Unit System: DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: four attendant console circuits Interfaces with: up to four conventional and/or PC attendant consoles Older Version(s): none RATU controls and indicators are illustrated in Figure 9-12 and described in Table 9-9. RATU Installation 1. Insert the RATU (component side facing right) into the slot following the last station PCB. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors (consoles will assume the next four station port numbers). (See Worksheets in DK424 or DK424i Configuration Chapters 4 or 6 for RATU slot assignment recommendations. 2. After installing the RATU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Table 9-9 RATU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Console 1 indicator CD3 Console 2 indicator CD4 Console 3 indicator CD5 Red LED Console 4 indicator CD6 Description Lights when a PC or conventional console is not operating. The LED will turn off when the console is operational. The LED temporarily flashes when the console is first installed and the DK424 RCTU processor or DK424i BCU and attendant console or RATI initialize. 1391 Backplane Connector 4 3 2 1 CD3 CD4 CD5 CD6 Female Amphenol Connector Figure 9-12 RATU PCB 9-26 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS – Caller ID Interface System: RCIU1–DK424, DK424i RCIU2 –DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i RCIS–DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: four Caller ID circuits Interfaces with: loop or ground start lines w/Caller ID (requires RCOU or RGLU2) Older Version(s): none The RCIU1, RCIU2 PCB provides the Caller ID feature, also known as Calling Number Delivery (CND). There are two types of RCIU PCBs, RCIU1 and RCIU2. RCIU1 can be used in DK424 and DK424i systems. RCIU2 can be used in DK40i, DK424 and DK424i systems. CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install RCIU1 in the DK40i system. ➤ An RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS circuit must be available in addition to each RCOU, RGLU, etc., line that is to receive Caller ID. When ordered from the factory, the RCIU1, RCIU2 PCB comes equipped with four caller ID circuits. Universal Slot PCBs Caller ID can be provided on analog loop start lines (PCOU, KCDU, RCOU PCBs) and analog ground start lines (RGLU2 PCB) only. It is not available on any other type of analog lines (RDDU/ DID and/or REMU, PEMU Tie) or any type of digital lines (RDTU- T1, including ground start, loop start, DID and Tie lines). RCIS PCB An RCIS piggy-back PCB can be installed onto the RCIU to provide an additional four caller ID circuits. Hence, an installed RCIU/RCIS can provide a maximum of eight caller ID circuits per cabinet slot. To provide up to eight circuits, always install RCIS onto RCIU1 (DK424 and DK424i only) or RCIU2 (DK40i, DK424 and DK424i) instead of installing two RCIU PCBs (Program 03 code 81 always assigns each RCIU slot with eight software caller ID circuits). Each RCIU/RCIS Caller ID circuit has a two-wire tip/ring interface which must be bridge-wired across its corresponding ground or loop start CO line tip/ring on the MDF (see Figure 10-28 on Page 10-30). Each RCIU/RCIS modular jack provides interface for two Caller ID circuits. DK40i RCIU2 Installation ➤ Install RCIU2 in slot 17 only (see Figure 9-14 and Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) DK424 and DK424i RCIU1 or RCIU2 Installation ➤ Install the RCIU1/RCIU2 PCBs in any universal cabinet slot of the DK424 and DK424i (except slot 11 or slot 12 if the RSIU is installed in slot 11). Note It is not necessary to install the RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS, or RCIU2/RCIS PCBs in the same cabinet as their associated CO lines or in slots adjacent to the lines. DK424i RCIU1 or RCIU2 Installation ➤ Strata DK I&M Install the RCIU1/RCIU2 PCBs in any universal cabinet slot of the DK424i. 5/00 9-27 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout DK424 and DK424i RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Installation 1. Install the RCIS onto the RCIU1 or RCIU2 as required (see Figures 9-13 and 9-15). 2. Install the RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS into the appropriate cabinet slot. The circuit modular jack numbering and the tip/ring cross connect wiring of RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS to RCOU, PCOU, or RGLU is shown in Figure 10-26 on Page 10-28. Note It is not necessary to install the RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS, or RCIU2/RCIS PCBs in the same cabinet as their associated CO lines or in slots adjacent to the lines. RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS Programming Program 03: Program each RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS (four or eight Caller ID circuit) slot with code 81. Note RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS caller ID circuits are numbered automatically in numerical order starting with the RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS installed in the lowest slot number. Slots with code 81 increment the Caller ID circuit numbers by eight circuits even if RCIS is not installed on the RCIU1 or RCIU2. Program *50: Assigns CO lines that will receive Caller ID to an associated RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Caller ID circuit number. This assignment is flexible, i.e., any RCOU, PCOU, RGLU Caller ID CO line can be assigned to any RCIU1, RCIU2 or RCIS caller ID circuit number. Note After assigning CO lines to caller ID circuits, turn system power Off for approximately five seconds and then back On or run Program 91-2 to activate Program *50 assignments. Program *51: Sets the Caller ID (CLID)/Automatic Dialed Number Identification (ANI) memory allocation for the appropriate stations. This memory is used to save CLID/ANI telephone numbers for calls that are received but not answered (abandoned calls). CLID/ANI numbers are not saved in station memory if they are answered. Stations can be allocated with memory to save up to 100 numbers in 10-number increments. The total memory allocated to all stations in a system is: ♦ RCTUE/F and B5CAU/BU = 2000 numbers ♦ RCTUC/D, B3CAU/BU and B2CAU/BU = 1000 numbers ♦ RCTUBA/BB, B1CAU = 400 numbers ♦ RCTUA and DK40i = 200 numbers Note When a CO line rings multiple stations, a station must be the owner of the Caller ID or ANI CO line to be able to save abandoned call (Caller ID and/or ANI) telephone numbers. (See Program *52.) Program *52: Assigns stations as owners of Caller ID CO lines. These stations will store the Caller ID telephone numbers received on abandoned (not answered) calls for the lines which they own. Typically all common CO lines are assigned to one designated telephone or attendant console and private lines are assigned to individual private line telephones. 9-28 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout J12 J13 RCIU1 P12 P13 20K/20K J4 Secondary Protectors RCIS1A (reverse) 20K/20K RCIU1A or RCIU2A (front) J3 20K/20K J2 20K/20K J11 J1 P11 P10 RCIU1A V.1 1392 Universal Slot PCBs J10 Figure 9-13 DK424 and DK424i RCIU1/RCIS or DK40i RCIU2/RCIS PCB P12 P13 20K/20K RCIU2 Secondary Protectors 20K/20K RCIU2A (front) 20K/20K 20K/20K J2 J1 P10 RCIU2A P11 V.1 1862 Figure 9-14 DK40i RCIU2 PCB Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-29 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout RCIS RCIU1 or RCIU2 4-wire Modular Jack (4) Not Used T2 T1 R1 R2 Not Used CKT 7 & 8 CKT 3 & 4 CKT 5 & 6 CKT 1 & 2 SXX 1393 Figure 9-15 DK424 and DK424i RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS PCB Modular Jack Positions Note A station must also be allocated with Caller ID/ANI storage memory in Program *51 to store abandoned call telephone numbers. Program 39, Code 462: Assigns the Caller ID/ANI /RVW&DOO$XWR'LDO button to LCD telephones that store Caller ID and/or ANI abandoned call telephone numbers. A user can scroll through the stored abandoned call telephone numbers and auto dial the selected number using this button. Program 59, Code 462: Assigns the CLID/ANI /RVW&DOO$XWR'LDO button to the attendant consoles that store Caller ID and/or ANI abandoned call telephone numbers. A console user can scroll through the stored abandoned call telephone numbers and auto dial the selected number using this button. Program 10-3, Key 08: Determines if CLID and/or ANI telephone numbers will be sent out the system SMDI port: ➤ Turn LED 08 On if the CLID and/or ANI numbers received should be sent out the system SMDI port. ➤ Turn LED 08 Off if the CLID and/or ANI numbers received should not be sent out the system SMDI port. Note 9-30 The system will initialize with LED 01 Off, i.e., no CLID/ANI information will be sent out the SMDI port. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Program 60-1, Key 01: Determines which information will be sent out the system SMDR port, i.e., system Account Codes or CLID and/or ANI telephone numbers: ➤ Turn LED 01 On if CLID and/or ANI information should be sent out the system SMDR port. ➤ Turn LED 01 Off if Account Codes information should be sent out the system SMDR port. Note The system will initialize with LED 01 Off, i.e., Account Codes information will be sent out the SMDR port. Program 77-4, LED 01/LED 02 (DK424 Release 3.2 and above, and DK424i): Enables CLID, ANI, and/or Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) information to be sent from the RSIU Open Architecture (OA) port on ACD calls only: ➤ Turn LED 01 On if the OA port should send CLID and/or ANI information. ➤ Turn LED 01 Off if the OA port should not send Caller ID/ANI. ➤ Turn LED 02 On if the off port should send DNIS information. ➤ Turn LED 02 Off if the OA port should not send DNIS information. ● ● Strata DK I&M Program 77-4 allows LED 01 and LED 02 to be turned On simultaneously to allow CLID, ANI, and DNIS information to be sent from the OA port on ACD calls. The system will initialize with LED 01 and LED 02 Off, i.e., no CLID, ANI, or DNIS information will be sent from the OA port on ACD calls. 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs Notes 9-31 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout RCOU, RCOS – Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit System: RCOU–DK40Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i RCOS–DK40i, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: four loop start CO line circuits Interfaces with: loop start lines Older Version(s): PCOU2 (does not have ABR circuitry, uses RCTU, K4RCU ABR circuits) PCOU1(has ABR circuitry, identical and interchangeable w/PCOU2) The RCOU also provides ring detection, dial outpulsing, and hold circuitry. Each RCOU line can be programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signaling and gas tube secondary protection. RCOU PCBs are shown in Figure 9-16 and described in Table 9-10. RCOS Installation (Internal Option) An RCOS PCB can be installed on the RCOU of the DK40i, DK424 and DK424i for four more loop start lines (for a total of eight lines–the RCOS circuits provide the same options as the RCOU). Each RCOS circuit has gas tube secondary protection. Excessive loudness which is caused by close proximity to a CO or PBX telephone can be fixed through the RCOS and RCOU decibel (dB) PAD switches. RCOS dB switches SW501, SW601, SW701, and SW801 and RCOU dB switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 provide a -3 dB signal level drop between the PBX and CO when set to position 3. Switches are factory-set at the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. See Figure 9-14 and Table 9-11 for RCOS controls, indicators, and interface connectors. ➤ To install an RCOS PCB 1. If the Strata DK system is within one mile of the PBX or CO, set the RCOS dB PAD switches SW501, SW601, SW701, and SW801 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. Set the RCOU dB PAD switches to position 3 also. Note RCOU male connectors P11, P12, P13, and P14 are positioned to allow installation of the RCOS only in the proper position. 2. Mate the RCOS female connectors J11, J12, J13, and J14 (Figure 9-18) to the RCOU male connectors P11, P12, P13, and P14 (Figure 9-16). 3. Apply firm, even pressure to the RCOS to ensure proper mating of connectors. 9-32 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout RCOU Installation Note The decibel (dB) PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 control excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to a Central Office or PBX telephone office by providing a -3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or CO when set to the 3 position. Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. ➤ To install an RCOU PCB 1. If the Strata DK system is within one mile of the PBX or Central Office, set the RCOU dB PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. 2. Insert the RCOU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. PCOU2 can be installed in place of RCOU, see the appropriate Configuration chapter. 3. After installing the RCOU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Program 03: Specify Code 11 for each slot that will support an a four-circuit RCOU (without an RCOS). Specify Code 17 for each slot that will support an RCOU equipped with an RCOS. Note Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91 can be run instead. Program 91 recognizes the RCOS. Universal Slot PCBs RCOU Programming Program 10-1: Enables or disables line-to-line Conference and Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Program 15: Assigns DTMF/Dial Pulse dialing, DISA, and additional attributes to each line. Automatic Release (AR) assignments only need to be made for loop start lines; AR is automatically enabled for ground start CO lines. Program *15: Makes tenant assignments. Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups. Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones. Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing). Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only). Program 42-0, 1~8: Assigns behind PBX/Centrex operation to each line. Programs 45 ~ 48: Defines Toll Restriction for any line. Programs 50 ~ 56: Defines Least Cost Routing assignments. Program *50: Assigns Caller ID circuits (RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS) to CO lines. Program *52: Caller ID line owner station assignment. Program 78: Assigns special ringing of lines: includes Night Ring Over Page, DISA, Remote Maintenance via the Internal Maintenance Modem (IMDU), and Integrated Auto Attendant. Programs 81 ~ 89: ♦ Assigns lines to ring selected stations and DH groups. ♦ Assigns Delayed Ringing to any line. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-33 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Programs *81, *84, *87: Assigns which [DN] will flash when the CO line rings a telephone. Program 93: Assigns names to lines. Table 9-10 RCOU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 1~4 indicators Red LED Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. (CO line indicator will not light unless RCOU is connected to a CO line). J1 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and 2. J2 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 3 and 4. 2-position slide switch Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit. 10-pin male connector Interface connector for RCOS 4-circuit loop start CO line unit. PAD switch SW101 (circuits 1) PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) RCOS connector P11, P12, P13, P14 Backplane Connector P12 P14 SW401 SW301 SW201 SW101 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 P11 P13 RCOS Connectors CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 3 and 4 RCOS Connectors CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 1 and 2 4 3 2 1 Red LEDs J2 J1 1379 Figure 9-17 RCOU PCB 9-34 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Table 9-11 RCOS Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 5~8 Red LED Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. (CO line indicator will not light unless RCOU is connected to a CO line). J3 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 5 and 6. J4 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 7 and 8. 2-position slide switch Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit. Female connector Interface connector for RCOU 4-circuit loop start CO line unit. PAD switch SW501 (circuit 1) PAD switch SW601 (circuit 2) PAD switch SW701 (circuit 3) PAD switch SW801 (circuit 4) RCOU connector J11, J12, J13, J14 Backplane Connector Universal Slot PCBs SW101 SW401 0 3 PAD 4 3 2 SW301 SW201 0 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 1 1381 CO Line LEDs CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 3 and 4 CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 1 and 2 Figure 9-18 RCOS Controls, Indicators, and Connector Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-35 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Table 9-12 PCOU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 1 CD112 Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. CO line circuit 2 CD212 Red LED CO line circuit 3 CD312 CO line indicator will not light unless PCOU is connected to a CO. CO line circuit 4 CD412 J1 connector Modular connector J2 connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and 2. Interface connector for CO line circuits 3 and 4. PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1) PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) 2-position slide switch PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit. PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) Red LEDs Trunk Modular Jack Circuits 7 and 8 8 7 6 5 Trunk Modular Jack Circuits 5 and 6 J4 J3 J13 J11 RCOU Connectors 3 J14 RCOU CONNECTORS 0 SW801 3 0 SW701 3 0 SW601 3 0 SW501 J12 1380 Figure 9-19 PCOU2 PCB 9-36 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout RDDU – Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: four DID lines Interfaces with: DID (one or two-way) lines Older Version(s): none The RDDU provides four Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines, each of which can have a single office code along with a block of extensions. Note For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming DID lines a DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3, or on any DK424 RCTU or DK424i BCU. BRCS is not required for RDDU dial pulse operation (see Program 30, LED 11). RDDU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-20 and described in Table 9-13. Universal Slot PCBs Each extension can be assigned to ring a station [DN] that appears on one or multiple stations, Distributed Hunt or ACD Group (DK40i, Release 4.2 and higher or DK424 or DK424i), or an external telephone number selected in system programming. This enables calls over the same line to be routed to different stations or groups of stations. An extension can also be assigned to ring the maintenance modem. Each RDDU can be set for either wink start or immediate. All RDDU lines support DNIS and ANI features. RDDU Installation Note Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. 1. If the KSU is located within one mile of the PBX or CO, set dB PAD switches SW101 through SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position to control excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to the PBX or CO. 2. Sensitivity jumpers P101~P401 are used mostly for dial pulse operation, to adjust for dial pulsing at different loop lengths. If close to the central office, the sensitivity should be set for low (L); as the loop length increases, it should be set to medium (M), then high (H). 3. Insert the RDDU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Important! Each RDDU PCB does not use uses four station ports in software with DK40i, DK424 or DK424i Release 4.0 and higher. DK40i must be installed per Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration (see Configuration Worksheets for recommended RDDU slot assignments). 4. After installing the RDDU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-37 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout RDDU Programming Program 03: Specify Code 16 for slots that support RDDUs and make sure RRCS is enabled for DTMF operation. Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91 can be run instead. Program *09: Assigns DID line extensions to route to station [PDNs] and IMDU or RMDS Remote Maintenance (see Program 17 below). Program 10-1: Enables or disables two-line conference. Program 15: Assigns DTMF/dial pulse dialing, and additional attributes to each line. Program *15: Makes tenant assignments. Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups. Program *17: Assigns intercept port for DID calls to wrong or vacant numbers. Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start to DID lines. Also used to assign Auto camp-on and no-dial tone return for DID lines. Program 17 also Assigns DID lines to route per DNIS and ANI options (Program 71 and 72) or DID numbers (Program *09). Program 30: Disables RRCS for dial pulse operation. Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones. Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing). Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only). Program 42-0, 1~8: Assigns behind PBX/Centrex operation to each line. Programs 45~48: Defines toll restriction for any line. Programs 50~56: Defines least cost routing assignments. Programs 71 (1~5): Assigns DNIS or ANI option to DID lines. Programs *71~*73: Assigns telephone to ring called [DN]. Program 93: Assigns names to lines. 9-38 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Table 9-13 RDDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1) PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) 3-position slide switch Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit. J1 connector Modular connection Interface connector for DID line circuits 1 & 2 J2 connector Modular connection Interface connector for DID line circuits 3 & 4 DID line circuit 1 CD122 Red LED (top) DID line circuit 2 CD222 Red LED PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) Lights to indicate line circuit is in operation. (Trunk indicator will not light unless RDDU is connected to a DID line.) DID line circuit 3 CD322 Red LED DID line circuit 4 CD422 Red LED (bottom) Jumper plug P101 Jumper plug P201 3-terminal jumper plug Jumper plug P301 Adjusts for dial pulsing at different loop lengths. Universal Slot PCBs Jumper plug P401 Backplane Connector P401 3 0 P201 3 0 HML SW201 P101 3 0 HML SW101 RDDU HML SW401 P301 3 0 HML SW301 4 3 2 1 RDDU J2 LEDs J1 1385 Figure 9-20 RDDU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-39 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout RDSU – Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU only, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: (with RSTS) four standard telephone (circuits 1~4)/four digital telephone (circuits 5~8) (without RSTS) two standard telephone circuits (1 and 2)/four digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: digital circuits digital telephones (with or w/o RPCI-DI or ADM) PDIU-DS DDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, 028) cordless digital telephone (DKT2004-CT) standard circuits standard telephones voice mail ports off-premises stations other similar devices alternate BGM source (circuit 2 only) auto attendant digital announcer message waiting lamp Older Version(s): none An optional Standard Telephone Interface Subunit (RSTS) can be attached to the RDSU to provide two more standard telephone ports (circuits 3 and 4). RDSU and RSTS controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-21. RDSU interface connectors are described in Table 9-14. Note For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming DID lines a DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3, or on any DK424 RCTU or DK424i BCU. CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the RDSU in slot 18 of the DK40i system. Installing R48S Ring Generator (Internal Option) An optional R48S unit can be connected to the RDSU or RSTU to change the standard telephone loop voltage from -24VDC to -48VDC, extending the standard telephone circuit loop length (including the resistance of the phone) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. The features provided by the R48S apply to the RSTS circuits as well as the basic RDSU standard telephone circuits. ➤ To install the R48S on the RDSU ➤ Mate the R48S connectors R6 and R7 with the RDSU connectors R6 and R7. RDSU connectors P6 and P7 are positioned to allow installation of the R48S only in the proper position (Figure 9-28). Installing RSTS (Internal Option) ➤ 9-40 Mate the RSTS connectors P2~P5 with the RDSU connectors P2~P5. RDSU connectors P2~P5 are positioned to allow installation of the RSTS only in the proper position (Figure 9-21). Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout RDSU Installation 1. Ensure the SSTU subunit and optional subassemblies are securely attached to the RDSU (Figure 9-21). WARNING! The protective shield on the back of the RDSU is designed to protect the installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not remove this shield. 2. Insert the RDSU into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (See Figure 10-23 on Page 10-25.) CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the RDSU in slot 18 of the DK40i system. See Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. 3. After installing the RDSU gently pull the RDSU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a light resistance is felt. ➤ Enter Code 27 in Program 03 for a non-optioned RDSU, or enter Code 28 for an RDSU that support off-hook call announce and data interface units. To program the RDSU standard telephone ports (including the RSTS), see “RDSU Programming” on Page 9-41. To program the RDSU digital telephone ports, see “PDKU2 Programming” on Page 9-10. ➤ If there are no RDSU options, skip Program 03 can be skipped, and run Program 91 instead. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDSU Programming 9-41 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit Table 9-14 RDSU, RSTS Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component RSTS connector P2/P3 Description Connector for RSTS subassembly that provides two standard telephone circuits. 10-pin connector RSTS connector P4/P5 R48S connector to P6 8-pin connector R48S connector to P7 6-pin connector Interface connector for R48S. P3 P2 RSTS P5 P4 P6 R48S P7 P6 P3 P2 P7 P5 P4 RDSU1 1377 Figure 9-21 RDSU, RSTS PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit See Chapter 8 – T1 for RDTU PCB installation and programming information. 9-42 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit REMU – Tie Line Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: four Tie line circuits Interfaces with: E&M Tie lines 2- or 4-wire transmission Type I and II Signaling Immediate and Wink Start Older Version(s): PEMU (Type I signaling & immediate start only, does not provide PAD switches) Tie lines can route per Program 04 [DN] assignments or Program 71 and 72 DNIS/ANI assignments (see Program 17). The REMU has four decibel (dB) PAD switches which can be set to reduce excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to a central office or PBX by providing a -3 dB signal level drop to the PBX or central office. (PAD is for Transmit and Receive for 2W operation, and Transmit only is for 4W operation.) For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming DID lines a DTMF Receiver Unit (BRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3 or on any DK424 or DK424i processor PCB. BRCS is not required for REMU dial pulse operation (see Program 30, LED 11). REMU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-22 and described in Table 9-15. Universal Slot PCBs Note PEMU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-23 and described in Table 9-16. REMU Installation Important! Each REMU decreases the maximum system CO lines by four. REMU circuits do not use station ports with DK40i, DK424 or DK424i Release 4.0 and higher. See Worksheets in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration for recommended REMU slot assignments. 1. Set the 2W/4W jumper plugs SW103~SW403 to the appropriate positions. 2. Set the P102/104, P202/204, P302/304, and P402/404 jumper plugs for Type 1 or Type 2 signaling. 3. If the system is located within one mile of the PBX or central office, set the REMU dB PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. 4. Insert the REMU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, the REMU, PEMU can be installed only in place of the RDDU per configuration chapter.) 5. After installing the REMU, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-43 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit PEMU Installation 1. Determine if the E&M Tie lines will be configured for 2- or 4-wire transmission. 2. Set the 2W/4W jumper plugs P103, P203, P303, and P403 to the appropriate positions. 3. Set the FG jumper plug P3 to the “2-3” position. 4. Set all GND/BAT jumper plugs to the “BAT” position for connection to the telephone network. Note The “GND” position is used to connect PEMU circuits back-to-back on premises only, 1000 feet maximum (E&M lead wires must be crossed). 5. Insert the PEMU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.(For DK40i, the REMU, PEMU can be installed only in place of the RDDU per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) Important! Each PEMU decreases the maximum system CO lines by four. Tie lines do not use station ports in DK40i, DK424 and DK424i in Release 4.0 and higher. See Worksheets in the appropriate configuration chapter for recommended PEMU slot assignments. 6. After installing, gently pull the PEMU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PEMU, REMU Programming Program 03: Specify Code 13 for slots that support PEMUs and make sure RRCS is enabled for DTMF operation. Program 04: Specifies [PDNs]. These are also the numbers that must be received by incoming Tie lines to route calls to the proper telephones (see Program 17, LED 05). Program 10-1: Enables/disables two-line conference. Program 15: Assigns tandem connections and dial pulse option to Tie lines. Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start to REMU Tie lines. Important! Note Also used to turn on Tie line dial tone return. When a PEMU or REMU is installed in a system, it automatically assumes the next four consecutive CO line and station port numbers. Program 30: Disables RRCS for dial pulse operation. Program 71 (1~5) and Program 72: Tie/DID DNIS assignments. Program *71~*73: DH/Tie/DID to [DN] ringing assignments. Program 93: Assigns a name to a Tie line 9-44 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit Table 9-15 REMU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Tie trunk circuits 1~4 (CD102, 202, 302, and 402) Red LED Lights to indicate that Tie line is in operation. E&M Tie trunk connector circuits 1~4 (J101, 201, 301, and 401) Modular connector Interface connector for E&M Tie line circuit. 2-position slice switch Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit. 3-terminal jumper Enables line circuit to be set for Type 1 or Type 2 signaling. 2-position slice switch Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration for E&M Tie line circuit. PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1) PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P102/ 104 TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P202/ 204 TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P302/ 304 2W/4W switch 102 (circuit 1) 2W/4W switch 202 (circuit 2) 2W/4W switch 302 (circuit 3) 2W/4W switch 402 (circuit 4) Universal Slot PCBs TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P402/ 404 Backplane Connector SW102 SW202 SW302 SW402 4W 2W 2W 4W 4W 2W 4W P304 P202 P204 P104 P302 P404 TYP1 TYP1 P402 TYP1 TYP2 TYP2 TYP2 3 SW401 TYP1 TYP2 0 4 3 2 1 3 0 TYP1 TYP1 TYP2 TYP2 SW301 SW201 3 TYP1 TYP2 TYP1 TYP2 0 SW101 3 0 REMU 2W P102 LEDs J401 J301 J201 J101 1383 Figure 9-22 REMU PCB Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-45 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit Table 9-16 PEMU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Tie trunk circuit 1~4 (CD102, 202, 302, and 402) Red LED Lights to indicate that Tie line is in operation. E&M Tie line connector J101, 201, 301,and 401 (circuit 1~4) Modular connector Interface connector for E&M Tie line circuit. FG jumper P3 3-terminal jumper Enables or disables -48VDC ground to FG. GND/BAT jumper P101 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 1) GND/BAT jumper P102 Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit. GND/BAT jumper P201 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 2) GND/BAT jumper P202 GND/BAT jumper P301 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 3) GND/BAT jumper P302 GND/BAT jumper P401 M-lead origination for Tie line (must be in BAT position per FCC requirements. 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 4) GND/BAT jumper P402 2W/4W switch P103, 203, 303, and 402 (circuit 1~4) Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration for E&M Tie line circuit. 3-terminal jumper Backplane Connector 2W P403 4W 2W P303 4W P203 P103 2W 4W 2W 4W SP1020 -48 Volt Supply Ground/Battery Jumpers (Leave In Factory Positions) P401 P402 P202 P201 P102 P302 P301 FG LEDs P3 P101 123 4 3 2 1 J401 J301 J201 J101 1384 Tie Line 4 Tie Line 3 Tie Line 2 Tie Line 1 Figure 9-23 PEMU PCB 9-46 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit RGLU2 – Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: four line circuits Interfaces with: loop or ground start lines Older Version(s): RGLU1 (does not have hookflash to CO) The RGLU2 also provides ring detection, dial outpulsing, and hold. Each RGLU2 line can be programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signaling and gas tube secondary protection. RGLU2 controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-24 and described in Table 9-17. RGLU2 Installation Note ➤ To install an RGLU2 PCB 1. If the DK KSU is within one mile of the PBX or central office, set the dB PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. 2. Set each line for ground start (GND) or loop start (LOOP) by setting the following jumper plugs: SW103 for line 1, SW203 for line 2, SW303 for line 3, and SW403 for line 4. Universal Slot PCBs The decibel (dB) PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 control excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to a central office or PBX telephone office by providing a -3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or central office when set to the 3 position. Switches are factory set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. 3. Insert the RGLU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. RGLU2 can be installed in place of RCOU, per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. 4. After installing the RGLU2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. RGLU2 Programming Programming for the RCOU and RGLU2 is essentially the same. See “RCOU Programming” on Page 9-33, for an overview of RGLU2 programming. Table 9-17 RGLU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Line circuit 1 Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. Line circuit 2 Red LED Line circuit 3 CO line indicator will not light unless RGLU2 is connected to a line. Line circuit 4 J1 connector Modular connector RJ14 modular Interface connector for trunk circuits 1 and 2. J2 connector Modular connector RJ14 modular Interface connector for trunk circuits 3 and 4. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-47 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit Table 9-17 RGLU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors (continued) Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1) PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) 2-position slice switch Enables -3dB signal level drop for trunk circuits. 3-terminal jumper Used to configure line for loop or ground start. PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) LOOP/GND jumper SW103 (configures line 1) LOOP/GND jumper SW203 (configures line 2) LOOP/GND jumper SW303 (configures line 3) LOOP/GND jumper SW403 (configures line 4) Backplane Connector LOOP GND LOOP GND LOOP GND LOOP GND SW403 SW303 SW203 SW103 Red LEDs 4 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 0 SW401 SW301 SW201 SW101 3 2 1 RGLU J2 J1 1382 Figure 9-24 RGLU2 PCB 9-48 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit RSIU, RSIS, RMDS – RS-232/Modem Interface Unit System: DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: four interface ports Interfaces with: SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary RS-232 voice mail ACD SMIS computer SMDR printer or SMDR call accounting machine DKi Admin/DKi Backup PC or maintenance terminal (locally or remotely) Open-architecture application computer system–receives ANI, DNIS or CLID digits from the DK424 and DK424i on ACD calls Older Version(s): none The RSIU is a standard plug-in type PCB that must be installed into the first universal slot of the DK424 or DK424i base cabinet. The RSIU PCB provides one standard RS-232 port (modular jack) when ordered from the factory; this port can be configured in system programming to support any one of the hardware options listed above. The RSIS PCB can support any one of the hardware devices listed above via its RS-232 modular jack. The RMDS PCB can function two ways: the RMDS can operate like an RSIS allowing it to support any one of the hardware devices listed above locally from its RS-232 modular jack; or, the RMDS can operate as a 1200 bps (bits-per-second) or 2400 bps system remote maintenance modem. Universal Slot PCBs The RSIU can be equipped with up to three more optional RS-232 ports (total of four RS-232 ports) or with two optional RS-232 ports and one modem port (total of three RS-232 ports and one modem port). The optional RS-232 ports are provided by installing RSIS piggy-back PCBs onto the RSIU PCB. The optional built-in modem is provided by installing an RMDS piggy-back PCB onto the RSIU (see Figure 10-37 on Page 10-40). The RMDS PCB function (modem or RS-232 port) is set in a system program option. The RMDS can be set for one function only; it cannot support both functions simultaneously. When configured as a modem, the RMDS PCB supports only the DK424 and DK424i remote maintenance, ASCII terminal, or DKi Backup, and DKi Admin functions, and does not simultaneously support SMDI, SMIS, SMDR, etc. (See Figure 10-37 on Page 10-40.) The total bits-per-second (bps) data rate of the four RSIU, RSIS, RMDS (RS-232/modem) ports combined cannot exceed 9600 bps. The RSIU, RSIS RS-232 ports can be individually set in system programming to operate at 1200 bps, 4 ports max.; 2400 bps, 3 ports max.; 4800 bps, 2 ports max.; or 9600 bps, 1 port max.; or, any other combination that does not exceed 9600 bps. The RMDS modem function can be set to operate at 1200 bps or 2400 bps; however, if the RMDS port is used as a RS-232 port instead of a modem, it can also be set for 4800 bps or 9600 bps. The TTY and modem function cannot operate on separate RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports simultaneously. If both functions are programmed at the same time on separate ports, the function of the lowest numbered RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port (TTY or modem) will be active.The communication parameters for all RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port function types except the SMDR are: ♦ Data word bits = 7 ♦ Parity = even ♦ Stop bits = 1 The communication parameters for an RSIU, RSIS SMDR port is: ♦ Data word bits = 8 ♦ Parity = none Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-49 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit ♦ Stop bits = 1 Only one RSIU can be installed per DK424 or DK424i system. When the RSIU PCB is installed, the RSSU, PIOU2, PIOUS2, IMDU modem, and PEPU PCBs can still be installed with all of their respective paging, modem, and RS-232 port functions available; however, five RS-232/modem ports can be installed in one DK424 or DK424i system. When installed together in the same DK424 or DK424i system, the RSIU, PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU port functions are identified and enabled (turned On/Off) in system programming. If the same function is programmed for an RSIU port and a PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU port, only the RSIU port will function. RSIS, RMDS Piggy-Back Installation 1. Install all RSIS and RMDS PCBs on the RSIU PCB before installing the RSIU into the DK424 or DK424i. Each RSIS or RMDS piggy-back PCB is installed on the RSIU PCB as shown in Figure 4-38. Up to three RSIS PCBs can be installed on the RSIU PCB; only one RMDS PCB can be installed on the RSIU. The function and bit-per-second (bps) data rate of each RSIS and RMDS circuit port is set in Program 76 as described in the Programming Part that follows. 2. After installing all RSIS, RMDS PCBs, install the RSIU into the DK424 or DK424i per the following instructions. RSIU Installation 1. The RSIU must be installed only in slot 11 of the base cabinet (see Figure 9-25 to install the RSIU PCB). 2. A PDKU or PEKU PCB must be installed in slot 12 of the base cabinet to support the programming telephone. 3. The first 8-station ports (000-007) appear on the PDKU or PEKU as installed in slot 12. The programming telephone will then be on the 6th circuit (port 005; or, 013 until Program 03 Code 49 is set for slot 11) of the PDKU in slot 12. The function and bit-per-second (bps) data rate of the RSIU or RMDS, RS-232 circuit port is set in Program 76 as described in the Strata DK Programming Manual. All information provided in the “RSIU Installation” on Page 9-50 applies to installing an RSIU in an existing system. Hence, most PCBs must be moved to the next highest slot. 9-50 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit Each position on the RSIU card can accept either an RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) card. Only one RMDS card can be used per RSIU. (See Note 1) 1 UP 17 J2 J3 J4 RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) P4 Port #1 3-Pair Modular Jack 1 Port #2 3-Pair Modular Jack UP J1 P5 J1 P3 17 1 UP 17 J2 1 RSIU1 Port #3 3-Pair Modular Jack 17 1 J3 J4 RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) P7 UP J1 1 17 1 UP 17 J4 J3 RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) P2 UP P11 J1 17 1 17 Bottom View (solder side) Universal Slot PCBs J2 1 Port #4 3-Pair Modular Jack 17 P8 P9 RSIU1A V.1 RMDS Top View RSIS Top View J3 J1 17 J3 J1 J4 CAUTION: RSIS1A 1 1 17 1 RMDS1A 1 J4 Do not connect telephone circuit Tip/Ring to J4 (See Note 2) J2 J2 1 17 17 17 17 1 1814 Notes 1. Maximum of one RMDS per RSIU, maximum of three RSIS per RSIU. 2. On RMDS, is not used for modem, operation. It is used when RMDS is configured for TTY, SMDI, or MIS operation like RSIS. Figure 9-25 RSIU, RSIS, RMDS PCB Installation Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-51 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit DK424 Base Cabinet with RCTUA3 DK424 Base Cabinet with RCTUC3 / D3 or RCTUBA3 / RCTUBB3 / RCTUE3 / RCTUF3 Port 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 2 Ribbon Cable Install ribbon cables as shown 2-connector Ribbon Cable (supplied with RCTU) Ribbon Cable Port 3 Port 3 Install ribbon cables as shown 3-connector Ribbon Cable (supplied with RSIU) Port 4 Port 4 SLOT PCB TYPE R11 RCTU RCTUC3 or RCTUBA3 or RCTUE3 S11 RSIU RSIS or RMDS S12 PDKU or PEKU S13 SLOT R11 RCTU RCTUA3 PCB TYPE RCTUD3 or RCTUBB3 or RCTUF3 S11 RSIU RSIS or RMDS S12 S13 PDKU or PEKU 1815 Figure 9-26 RSIU Installed into an Existing System without DID and/or Tie Lines ➤ To move the PCB to the next highest slot 1. Identify (mark) the attendant console and all station PCB wiring connectors so they can be removed and then reinstalled on the same PCB later (console station PCBs include: PDKU, RDSU, PEKU, PESU, RSTU, PSTU and RATU PCBs). 2. Turn system power Off. 3. Disconnect the connectors from the attendant console and all station PCBs listed in Step 1. 4. Remove all station PCBs listed in Step 1. 5. Install each PCB that was removed in Step 4 into the next highest empty station PCB slot number. Skip over all other types of PCBs that were not removed. Example: If a PDKU was originally in slot 11 and a PSTU was in slot 12, the PDKU is moved to slot 12 and the PSTU is moved to slot 13. The programming telephone will then be on the 6th circuit (port 005; or, 013 until Program 03 Code 49 is set for slot 11) of the PDKU in slot 12. 6. Connect all PCB connectors that were removed back into the same PCBs they were removed from in Step 3. 7. Turn the system power On and note that the programming telephone is on port 13 and all other ports are shifted up by eight ports. Program slot 11 with Code 49 and all other slots with the appropriate codes using Program 91-1 and/or 03. Next, cycle system power Off (five seconds) and On, or, run Program 91-2 to transfer Program 03 data from temporary to working memory. At this time the programming telephone changes from port 13 to port 005 and all other ports shift down by eight ports. 9-52 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit ➤ To install an RSIU PCB into an existing system with DID and/or Tie lines Note The steps in “RSIU Installation” on Page 9-50 apply to installing an RSIU into an existing system. Hence, most PCBs must be moved to the next highest slot using the following steps. 1. Identify (mark) all PCB wiring connectors so they can be removed and then reinstalled onto the same station PCB later. 2. Turn system power Off. 3. Disconnect the connectors from all PCBs except PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU, PEPU, RCIU, and RCIS. 4. Remove all PCBs except PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU, PEPU, RCIU, and RCIS. 5. Each PCB that was removed must be installed into the next highest empty PCB slot number. Skip over all other types of PCBs that were not removed. Note This step may have to be modified for the RDTU PCB, depending on the configuration to meet the requirements of RDTU slot assignments per tables in Chapter 8 – T1. 7. Turn the system power on and note that the programming telephone is on port 13 and all other ports are shifted up by eight ports. Program slot 11 with Code 49 and all other slots with the appropriate codes using Program 91-1 and/or 03. Next, cycle system power Off (5 seconds) and on or, run Program 91-2 to transfer Program 03 data from temporary to working memory. At this time the programming telephone changes from port 13 to port 005 and all other ports shift down by eight ports. Universal Slot PCBs 6. Connect all PCB connectors that were removed back into the same PCBs from which they were removed. RSIU, RSIS, RMDS Programming Program 03: Programs slot 11 with code 49 to identify that the RSIU PCB is installed in slot 11. Program 76-1X-Y: Assigns each installed RSIU port to a function. Where X identifies the RSIU port no. 1~4 (see Figure 9-25 for RSIU port number configuration) and Y identifies the RSIU port function: ♦ Y=1, RS-232 TTY (Program 77-1, LED 14 Off) ♦ Y=1, RMDS modem (Program 77-1, LED14 On) ♦ Y=2, SMDR ♦ Y=3, MIS or SMIS ♦ Y=4, SMDI ♦ Y=5, Open Architecture ♦ Y=0, No function - this should be used for any of the four RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports that are not used. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-53 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit Notes ● ● ● Function codes set in Program 76-1X-Y will override RSSU, PIOU2, and/or PIOUS2 function codes (41, 42, 43) set in Program 03. The TTY and modem function cannot operate on separate RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports simultaneously. If both functions are programmed at the same time on separate ports, the function of the lowest numbered RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port (TTY or modem) will be active. When uploading Program 76-1 with DKi Admin or DKi Backup, the data will not change until the system power is cycled. Program 76-2X-Z: Assigns each installed RSIU port to operate at a specified transmission rate. Where X identifies the RSIU port no. 1~4 (see Figure 9-25 for RSIU port number configuration) and Z identifies the RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port transmission rate in bits-per-second (bps). Notes ● ● The sum of the used RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports transmission rates cannot exceed 9600 bps. Ports assigned as “non-function” (code 0) in Program 76-2X-Y will not be included in the transmission rate sum. The RMDS will only function at 1200 or 2400 bps. When uploading Program 76-2 with DKi Admin or DKi Backup make sure that Program 76-2 bps rate for the TTY/ modem port is set the same in: DKi Admin communications setup, DKi Admin customer database, and any DK424 and DK424i RCTU. If the bps rate is not the same in all three areas, uploading will fail on Program 76 Program 77-1, LED 14: Enables the RMDS modem function. If the RMDS should function as a modem, turn On LED 14. If the RMDS should function as a RS-232 port, turn Off LED 14. Program 77-1, LED 15: Sets the RMDS communications standard type to CCITT/V.22bis (2400 bps) or Bell 212A (1200 bps). The standard set in this program must match the standard of the modem communicating with the DK424 and DK424i RMDS. If the RMDS modem standard should be CCITT/V.22bis, turn LED 15 On. If the RMDS standard should be Bell 212A, turn LED 15 Off. Most Hayes compatible modems will function with either standard. Check with the modem manufacturer’s documentation to verify which protocol should be used. When the system is initialized the Bell 212A standard is set (LED 15 Off). Program 77-4, LED 01/LED 02: Enables CLID, ANI, and/or DNIS information for ACD calls to be sent from the RSIU OA port. ➤ Turn LED 01 On if the OA port should send CLID and/or ANI information for ACD calls. ➤ Turn LED 02 On if the OA port should send DNIS information for ACD calls. Program 77-4 allows LED 01 and LED 02 to be turned On simultaneously, allowing CLID, ANI, and DNIS information to be sent from the OA port for ACD calls. The system will initialize with LED 01 and 02 Off—no CLID, ANI, or DNIS information will be sent from the OA port for ACD calls. 9-54 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit RSSU – PC Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: one RS-232 connection Interfaces with: TTY jack Older Version(s): none The RSSU contains one RS-232 serial port for connecting an SMDI, SMIS processor, DKi Admin/DKi Backup PC or external modem. One optional RSSU maintenance interface PCB can be used for connecting a maintenance PC or external modem (local or remote) to the DK40i. A maximum of three RSSU cards can be supported per DK424 or DK424i. The RSSU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-27 and described in Table 9-18. 1. Insert the RSSU (component side facing right) into the last slot (“S16”) of the Base KSU/ cabinet if the system only has a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/cabinets. If there are Expansion KSUs/cabinets, install the RSSU in the highest slot number in any KSU/ cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Note In DK40i, RSSU can be installed in any available Expansion KSU. Universal Slot PCBs RSSU Installation 2. After installing the RSSU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. RSSU Programming Program 03–Specify Code 41, 42 and 43 for slots that support RSSUs. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-55 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit Table 9-18 RSSU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector TTY interface connector J3 Type of Component Dual modular connector Description Interface connector for maintenance terminal/ external modem. 1878 Backplane Connector J3 RSSU TTY SMDR (not used) Figure 9-27 RSSU PCB 9-56 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit RSTU2 – Standard Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: eight standard telephone circuits Interfaces with: standard telephones voice mail ports off-premises stations other similar devices alternate BGM source (circuit 2 only) auto attendant digital announcer message waiting lamp (RSTU2 only) Older Version(s): RSTU1–80-VRMS sine wave ring generator, optional R48S unit increases the loop voltage from -24VDC to -48VDC, extending the loop length (including the resistance of the phones from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. PSTU2–190V P-P or 130V P-P W1 jumper PSTU1 v.3–square wave ring generator fixed at 190V P-P PSTU1 v.4–square wave ring generator set at 190V P-P or 130V P-P with the W1 jumper Notes ● ● For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone port), a DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS-4, -8, or -12) must be installed on any DK424i BCU, DK424 RCTU or the DK40i K4RCU3. Universal Slot PCBs Only one telephone (or device) can be connected to a RSTU2 port. If more than one telephone or device is connected to a port, ringing or message waiting may not function. RSTU2 only provides a 90-volt square wave message waiting generator to drive standard telephone 90V message waiting lamps. Most standard telephones and two-wire devices require the 190V P-P level; however, some devices may experience ring-trip with 190V P-P and should be set for 130V P-P. See Figure 9-29 for an illustration of the PSTU1, PSTU2. Figure 9-30 shows the RSTU2. See Table 9-19, for details of the PSTU and RSTU2 controls and indicators. R48S -48 Volt Supply Installation (Internal Option) ➤ Mate the R48S connectors P6 and P7 (Figure 9-28 and Figure 9-30) with the R48S connectors P6 and P7 on the RSTU or RSTU2. Note RSTU connectors P6 and P7 are positioned so that the R48S only fits in the proper position. P6 1374 P7 Figure 9-28 R48S Interface Connectors Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-57 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit External Options W1 Ring Generator Switch Configuration (PSTU1 and PSTU2) ➤ On the PSTU1 or PSTU2, ensure the W1 switch is set to the “H” (190V P-P) position for initial installation. The “L” (130V P-P) position is used if devices connected to the PSTU1 or PSTU2 experience ring trip. Standard Telephone Message Waiting Lamp Control No steps required here. RSTU2 Installation 1. Make sure the factory-installed SSTS or SSTU subunit is securely attached to the RSTU2 (Figure 9-29 and Figure 9-30). WARNING! The shield on the back of the RSTU2 is designed to protect the installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do NOT remove this shield. 2. Insert the RSTU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. RSTU2 must be installed per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. 3. After installing the RSTU2, gently pull the RSTU2 outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a light resistance is felt. Table 9-19 RSTU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Ring voltage W1 jumper (PSTU1 (V.4) and PSTU2 only) 3-terminal jumper Sets ring generator voltage level for all circuits. H=190V P-P, L=130V P-P. R48S connector P6 (RSTU or RSTU2 only) 9-pin connector Interface connector to P6 of R48S. R48S connector P7 (RSTU or RSTU2 only) 6-pin connector Interface connector to P7 of R48S. Backplane Connector W1 Ring Voltage H = 190V P-P L = 130V P-P (for PSTU (V.4) and PSTU2 only) SSTU Subunit W1 H L 1375 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Figure 9-29 PSTU and Subunit (SSTU) 9-58 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit SSTU Subunit Backplane Connector R48S Installed on RSTU1 P6 P7 UP R48S R48S P6 P7 UP RSTU OR RSTU2 R48S Installed on RSTU2 1376 Optional Figure 9-30 RSTU2 Controls and Interface Connectors RSTU2 Programming Universal Slot PCBs 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Program 03: Specify code 31 for all slots that have RSTUs and PSTUs installed. Note If there are no RSTU, RSTU2 or PSTU options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91-1 or 91-9 can be run instead. Program 10-2: Sets standard telephone ringing option. Program 19: Used for BGM connection. Program 21: Assigns standard telephone ports to modem pools. Programs 10-3, 23, 24, 25, 26: Integrated Auto Attendant Digital Announcer assignments. Program 31: Configures all RSTU, RSTU2 and PSTU ports connected to voice mail or external Auto attendant devices. Program *34, LED 01: Standard telephone Camp-on/Busy Override tone option. Program 35, LED 03: Standard telephone message waiting lamp control option. Strata DK I&M 5/00 9-59 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit RMCU/RCMS – E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface System: DK424, DK424i Circuits per PCB: four circuits Interfaces with: enhanced 911 locator services Older Version(s): none The E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface card (RMCU) enables cost-effective connection to the Enhanced 911 locator services without third-party equipment. Figure 9-33 shows the RMCU. The RMCU supports two subassemblies (RCMS) that provide a total of up to four ports as shown in Figure 73. The RMCU has no CAMA circuits. It requires one RCMS subassembly to provide one or two CAMA trunks and two RCMS PCBs to provide up to four CAMA trunks. When RMCU code 19 is entered for a slot in Program 03, that slot assumes the next four consecutive CO line numbers in the system. Only one RMCU PCB can be installed in a DK424 system. If more than one slot is programmed with code 19 in Program 03, the lowest slot having code 19 will be the CAMA trunk active slot. The controls, indicators, and connectors for the RCMS are listed in Table 90. Location of the RCMS LEDs are shown in Figure 76. Functions of the RCMS LEDs are given in Table 91. A wiring diagram is shown in “RCMS Subassembly (stand-alone)” on Page 9-61. RCMS Subassemblies Installation 1. Attach one or two subassemblies (RCMS) to the connectors on the RMCU as shown in Figure 9-31. If only one RCMS is to be installed, install it in the bottom position. 2. Apply firm even pressure to ensure that the connectors are properly seated in the RMCU connector blocks. If they are seated properly, a light resistance is felt when you pull the units away from the RMCU. 9-60 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit RCMS1A ® UP RMCU1A RMCU1A ABCDEFGHK P6 P5 UP P7 P3 RCMS1A P2 ® UP ABCDEFGHK P4 R MC U 1 A - C M V.1 UP 2758 Universal Slot PCBs Figure 9-31 Placement of RCMS Subassemblies on the RMCU Interface Card RCMS1A RCMS1A -CM V.1 CB J2 NB 600 / 600 0 3 J1 SW101 PAD J5 CB NB 600 / 600 RCMS1 0 J3 SW201 J4 PAD 3 2762 Figure 9-32 RCMS Subassembly (stand-alone) Table 9-20 RCMS Subassembly Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Controls, Indicators, & Connectors Type of Component SW101 Switch 3-dB PAD switch for circuit 1 or 3. SW201 Switch 3-dB PAD switch for circuit 2 or 4. Jacks to connect to RMCU. J1 J2 Connector Blocks 5/00 Jacks to connect to RMCU. Jacks to connect to RMCU. J3 RJ11 Strata DK I&M Description 6-pin modular connector Network interface jack to CAMA trunk. 9-61 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit RMCU Installation 1. Insert the RMCU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of the connectors. 2. Gently pull the unit outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a light resistance is felt. 3. Wire the RCMS jacks, J4 and J5, to the network CAMA trunks per Figure 10-27 on Page 10-29. 4. Test the CAMA trunk and set the 3-dB PAD switches, SW101 and SW 201, for the appropriate volume level. RMCU1A R MC U 1 A P6 P5 RMCUV.1 P7 TC35354F P3 P2 RMC21B P4 RMCU1A -C M V.1 3005 Figure 9-33 RMCU Interface Card TOP RMCU1A RCMS1A (2/2) RJ11 2-Pin Modular Connector CAMA #4 Network Busy (NB) LED Customer Busy (CB) LED CAMA #3 LEDs (indicate Trunk Condition) NB LED CB LED RCMS1A (1/2) CAMA #2 NB LED CB LED CAMA #1 NB LED CB LED 2796 Figure 9-34 Location of the RCMS LEDs 9-62 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit Table 9-21 LED Indications (Normal Operation) NB LED CB LED 1 No network connection. RMCU is in stand-by mode. Status On Off 2 Network connected. RMCU is in stand-by mode. Off1 Off Off On Flashing On On On 3 4 5 Network is in stand-by mode and the RMCU is off hook. Network is connected and the RMCU MF sending dial tone. Network is seizing and the RMCU is off- hook. Network is connecting, before ANI is sent, and the RMCU is sending. Network is connecting and the RMCU is communicating. Network is disconnecting first and then the RMCU disconnects. On then Off On then Off 7 RMCU is disconnecting first and then the network disconnects. On then Off On then Off 1. If the NB LED stays On, even if the modular connector of the network is connected, check the following: Tip and Ring could be reversed. Network could be busy. Universal Slot PCBs 6 RMCU/RCMS Programming Program 03: Specify code 19 for the RMCU slot. Program *11, *12, *13: Refer to the E911, CAMA trunk tab in the Strata DK Programming Manual and set Programs *11, *12, and *13 as required. Note Strata DK I&M Program *10 is required only when using third-party adjunct CAMA interface and not used with RMCU CAMA interface. 5/00 9-63 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU – T1 Interface Unit Network Requirements The system network requirements are provided in Table 9-22. Table 9-22 DK424i Network Requirements PCB/Interface Network Jack Ringer Equivalence Universal Service Order Code RJ21X N/A 9.0F 02LS2 RJ14C/RJ21X 0.3B N/A 02RV2-T RJ14C/RJ21X 0.0B AS.2 TL11M, 2-wire TL31M, 4-wire TL12M, type 2, 2-wire TL32M, type 2, 4-wire RJ2EX RJ2GX RJ2FX RJ2HX Not Available (N/A) 9.0F 02GS2 (ground) 02LS2 (loop) RJ14C/RJ1CX 0.3B N/A (See last bullet note on Note 2 below.) RJ48C/RJ48X/ RJ48M N/A 6.0P N/A RJ21X/RJ14C 0.3B N/A 04DU9-1SN RJ48C/RJ48M N/A 02IS5 RJ48C/RJ48X N/A 02IS5 RJ48C/RJ48X N/A 02RV2-O RJ11C/RJ21-X N/A Facility Interface Code OL13A (PESU) 1 PESU/RSTU2/RDSU (Off-premises Station) OL13B (RSTU2, –24V) OL13C (RSTU2, RDSU with R48S-48V) RCOU/RCOS (loop start line) RDDU REMU type 1 or type 2 RGLU2 (ground or loop start line) RDTU (DS-1/T1)2 RCIU2/RCIS (Caller ID) RPTU (PRI) 3 RBSU/RBSS (S/T, BRI) RBUU/RBUS (U, BRI) 3 RCMU/RCMS (CAMA) 3 6.0P 1. Only PESU circuits 1 and 2, and RDSU circuits 1~4 provide Off-premises Station (OPS) capability. PESU must use OL13A or equivalent line conditioning for OPS connection. RDSU must use OL13A or OL13B if providing –24 volt loop voltage. If equipped with the –48 volt loop option PCB (R48S), OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C may be used for OPS connection. 2. When ordering DS-1/T1 circuits, six items must be specified: ● The number of channels per T1 circuit, fractional increments are normally 8, 12, or 16 channels, full service is 24 channels. Unused channels must be bit-stuffed. ● Type of CO line assigned to each channel: Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie (Wink or Immediate Start), DID (Wink or Immediate). ● Frame Format Type: Super Frame (SF) or Extended Super Frame (ESF). The T1 provider normally specifies the Frame Format to be used, either is adequate for DK424i CO digital voice lines. ESF provides a higher level of performance monitoring, but requires trained personnel and the ESF CSU normally costs more than an SF only CSU. ● Line Code Type: Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) or Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). The T1 provider normally specified the Line Code to be used, either is adequate for DK424i T1 CO digital voice lines. ● The customer may have to provide the Channel Service Unit (CSU) to interface the DK424i T1 circuit to the Telco T1 circuit. (CSUs are a Telco requirement.) ● RDTU Network Channel Interface Codes: 04DU9-BN, 04DU9-DNZZ, 04DU9-1SN, 04DU9-1KN, 04DU9-1ZN. 3. For information on how to order ISDN PRI/BRI circuits, you should refer to the Toshiba ISDN Training CBT. ISDN circuits may require a customer-provided CSU for PRI and/or Terminal Adapter or Network Terminal units for BRI. In U.S. CSU/TAs must be UL-listed in the U.S. In Canada, they must be CSA certified. 9-64 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 10 This chapter contains point-to-point wiring diagrams for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supplies for the universal slot PCBs of the Strata DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 and DK424i systems. Wiring diagrams are divided into groups according to the PCB which provides the interface for, or controls the operation of, the associated equipment, as listed below: ♦ Station Wiring: ♦ Digital Stations ♦ Electronic Stations ♦ Attendant Consoles ♦ Analog Stations Power Failure Cut-through (DPFT) Pin-outs ♦ CO Line Wiring ♦ DID and Tie Line Wiring ♦ Option Interface PCBs Note Before using the Connect Record Sheets (following each Wiring Diagram), make copies for future use. Universal Slot PCB Wiring ♦ Diagrams which apply to only one system (e.g., DK40i) are in the installation chapter which relates to the system. Wiring diagrams appear at the end of these two chapters: ♦ Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation ♦ Chapter 2 – DK40i Installation The RDTU cable connection information for DK40i, DK424 and DK424i is in Chapter 8 – T1. Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-1 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths Cable Lengths In a single site installation, the Base and optional Expansion Cabinets must be placed within the allowed maximum distance of each other as designated by Table 10-1. Table 10-1 Station Loop Requirements Device Digital telephones1 Interface PCB Circuits PDKU (8) PDIU-DS PDKU (1~8) or RDSU (5~8) DDCB PDKU or RDSU (5) Attendant Console RATU (1~4) HDCB PEKU (5) or PESU (5)2 PEKU or PESU RPCI-DI or PDIU-D12 PDKU (1~8) or RDSU (5~8) DADM PDKU (1~8) or RDSU (5~8) RATI RATU (1~4) HDSS consoles PEKU (7 & 8) Maximum Distance from Cabinet to Device 40 ohms 1000 ft. (303 m) 20 ohms 500 ft. (152 m) 300 ohms Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m) with 150 ohm device.3 600 ohms Approx. 9000 ft. (2727 m) with 150 ohm device.3 1,200 ohms Approx. 21000 ft. (6363 m) with 150 ohm device.3 1-pair 2-pair 2-pair (3-pair required for OCA) Shares digital telephone wirepair1 1 or 2-pair 2-pair PSTU (1~8) or PESU (1 & 2)1 Standard telephones, voice mail, Auto Attendant, etc. Max Loop Resistance (including device) PDKU (1~8) or RDSU (5~8) DDSS consoles Electronic telephones No. of Wire Pairs (use 24 AWG twisted pair) RSTU (1~8) RDSU/RSTS (1~4) without R48S option 1-pair RSTU (1~8) RDSU/RSTS (1~4) with R48S option 1. Two-pair wiring or optional telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range with DADM, OCA, Headset, or Data Interface Unit. 2. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are not used. 3. See manufacturer’s product specifications for exact resistance of device. 10-2 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths Building #1 Building #2 HESB PSTU RSTU/RSTU2 RDSU/RSTS Standard Telephone HDSS or DDSS Console PEKU PESU PDKU RDSU Electronic or Digital Telephone Electronic or Digital Telephone or Cordless Base POW DTR PC Attendant Console DSR RATI RATU Conventional Attendant Console HDCB or DDCB MDFB DDCB or HDCB RDTU or RPTU MDFB 2077 CSU T1 Span Line or ISDN PRI Line E&M Tie Line REMU PCOU, RCOU/RCOS RGLU, RCIU/RCIS, RBUU/RBUS, RBSU/RBSS, RMCU/RCMS Ground/Loop/ISDN BRI/ E911 CAMA Lines Universal Slot PCB Wiring Earth Ground DID Line RDDU Secondary protectors – standard voltage Earth Ground Important! Figure 10-1 Strata DK I&M Secondary protectors – low voltage To protect against transient voltages and currents, solid state secondary protectors must be installed if there is outside wiring, and on all DID and E&M Tie lines. These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in addition to fuses, shall comply with the requirements for secondary protectors for communication circuits, UL 497A. Care must be taken to ensure that they are very well grounded to a reliable earth ground. Recommended protectors are available in the fast Series 6 line from ONEAC Corp., Libertyville, Illinois 60048, (800) 327-8801. Install and test the secondary protectors precisely to the installation instructions of thee manufacturer. DK424i Secondary Protector Diagram 5/00 10-3 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths Station Wiring Diagrams Digital Station Wiring 25-Pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To PDKU W/Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T1 (Voice/Data) R1 (Voice/Data) PT1 (Add. Power) PR1 (Add. Power) Circuit 2 to DKT 2 or PDIU-DS Circuit 3 to DKT 3 or PDIU-DS Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG (1 or 2 pair. See Note 1.) R GN BK Y W BL R1 T1 PT1 PR1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 to DKT 4 or PDIU-DS 2 3 4 5 PR Circuit 5 to DKT 5 or PDIU-DS or DDCB TR PT Modular Cord Circuit 6 to DKT 6 or PDIU-DS (-) T GND R (-) PT Circuit 7 to DKT 7 or PDIU-DS T8 (Voice/Data) R8 (Voice/Data) PT (Add. Power) PR (Add. Power) (See Note 1) R GN BK Y W BL R8 T8 PT8 Not Used PR8 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 PR TR PT Modular Cord GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT DDSS Console (Circuit 8 Only) or... Notes 1. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs per Table 10-1. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also. 2. Voltage levels: T, PT = -26.3~27.8 VDC R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND). Reference to SG ground. 10-4 GND PR Digital Telephone (With or Without PDIU-DI) 66M150 Split Block Figure 10-2 RJ11 Digital Telephone (DKT 8) or... PDIU-DS (with PDKU2) 1593 MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones (DKTs) and DDSS Console to PDKU Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths To PDKU with Female Connector 25-pair Cable W/male Amp Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24AWG (1 or 2 Pair, See Note 1) Station Cabling 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T8 R8 PT8 PR8 T1 (Voice/Data) R1 (Voice/Data) PT1 (Add Power) PR1 (Add Power) Circuit 2 to DKT 2 or PDIU-DS GN BK Y W BL T1 PT1 Circuit 3 to DKT 3 or PDIU-DS PR1 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 to DKT 4 or PDIU-DS 2- Or 4-Wire Modular Cord to RJ11 Jack on Bottom of RPCI-DI Circuit 5 to DKT 5 or PDIU-DS Circuit 6 to DKT 6 or PDIU-DS R R1 DB25 Female Connector GND PR (-) T GND (-) R PT To PC or ASCII Terminal, etc. RS-232 Cable2 (See Note 1) T7 (Voice/Data) R7 (Voice/Data) PT (Add Power) PR (Add Power) Digital Telephone (with or without PDIU or RPCI-DI) Circuit 8 to DKT8 or DDSS R GN BK Y W BL R8 T8 PR8 PT8 Not Used RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 GND (-) DB-25 PR T Female Connector 2- or 4-wIre Modular Cord To RJ11 Jack on the Back Side of PDIU-DS (-) PT To Modem, Printer, or Host Computer etc. DIU POWER GND R Universal Slot PCB Wiring GN-R Bridging Clips TOSHIBA READY CONNECT RS-232 Cable2 PDIU-DS 1594 Notes 1. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs per Table 10-1 on Page 10-2. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also. 2. RS-232 cable length is max 50 ft. with 24 AWG wire. See Figure 10-31 on Page 10-33. General Notes ● ● ● ● Voltage levels: T, PT = -26.3~27.8 VDC R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND). Reference to SG ground. DIUs can be connected to Circuits 1~7 only if connected to PDKU1; or Circuits 1~8 on PDKU2. DK40i: Slots 15 and 16 only support data applications. KCDU provides circuits 1~4 only. Configuration chapters 4 or 6 for allowed data slots. Figure 10-3 MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones with RPCI-DI and PDIU-DS to PDKU Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-5 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths 25 Pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To PDKU With Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 Figure 10-4 10-6 GN BK Y W BL 2 1 Circuit 2 L1 L2 Not Used 6 5 4 3 2 1 Door Phone A MDFB (Rear View) 3 4 DDCB Circuit 3 Door Phone MDFB Modular Cord Circuit 4 - T5 (Voice/Data) (GND) R5 (Voice/Data) PT PR Circuit 6 HKSU 2-pair Modular Cords R GN BK Y W BL MDFB Door Phone B or Door Lock Control Circuit 7 Circuit 8 ABC 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 MDFB Door Phone C Modular Cord See Note 1 MDFB (Door Phone) Station #s Not Used See Note 2 Port # A B C 43 004 #151 #152 #153 44 44 012 #154 #155 #156 45 45 46 46 020 #157 #158 #159 47 47 028 #161 #162 #163 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block 1596 Circuit 1 R Screw Terminals Notes 1. DDCB “B” output options: ● SW1: Always in DOOR position. ● SW2: DOOR position; “B” connects to door phone LOCK position; “B” connects to door lock. 2. Door phones may be connected to circuit 5 on ports 04, 012, 0202, and 028 only. 3. See Table 10-1 on Page 10-2 for loop lengths. MDF Wiring-DDCB/Door Phone/Lock to PDKU Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths 25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR PDKU Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 (-) T1 (Voice/Data) (GND) R1 (Voice/Data) PT1 (Not Used) RT2 T2 DC Output R2 CKT 2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 T8 R8 PT8 PR8 R GN BK Y W BL R1 AC/DC External Power Source CKT 3 T1 AC Input 6 5 4 3 2 1 CKT 4 To 120VAC Commercial Power Outlet 2 3 4 5 TR 2-Pair Modular Cord Required CKT 5 RJ11 CKT 6 CKT 7 (-) T GND R CKT 8 Digital (1000 or 2000 Series) Telephone (With Or Without RPCI-DI) or... DDSS, DDCB, PDIU-DS AC/DC External Power Source Specifications: AC IN: 120VAC ± 10% DC OUT: 24VDC ± 10% 160 MA (Min.) DC Current 200 MV P-P (Max) AC Ripple On DC Output AC/DC power supplies that meet the above requirements are available from most telephone equipment supply houses. Universal Slot PCB Wiring BK-BR 1 8 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24AWG (1 Pair) Station Cabling Bridging Clips External Power Straps: If the external power is installed, cut the external power straps located inside the digital telephone DDSS, DDCB, or PDIU-DS. See Loop Limits at the front of this section for external power requirements. 1597 Figure 10-5 Strata DK I&M External Power for PDKU Digital Telephone Connection 5/00 10-7 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl Bl-W W-O O-W W-G G-W W-Br Br-W W-S S-W R-Bl Bl-R R-O O-R R-G G-R R-Br Br-R R-S S-R Bk-Bl Bl-Bk Bk-O O-Bk Bk-G G-Bk Bk-Br Br-Bk Bk-S S-Bk Y-Bl Bl-Y T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Location 1 2 3 4 51 6 7 8 1. DDCBs connect only to Circuit 5, Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028. Note Figure 10-6 10-8 Indicate if PDIU-DS, digital telephone (with or without RPCI-DI), DSS console (number 1~8), or DDCB is connected. PDKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths To RDSU W/Female Connector 25-Pair Cable With Male Amp Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Station Cabling Jacketed Twisted Pairs (24 AWG) Tip 1 Ring 1 RJ11 Not Used Tip 2 (See Note) RJ11 Ring 2 R R GN BK Y W BL GN 654321 T3 R3 Not Used T4 R4 Not Used T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) Standard Telephone Circuits 3 and 4 available with optional RSTS PCB. Wire the same as Circuits 1 and 2. BK Y W BL Tip Standard Telephone 1 Voice Mail Port Or Similar Device 654321 TIP Ring RING Standard Telephone 2 Voice Mail Port Or Similar Device Circuit 5 to DKT 5 or PDIU-DS or DDCB Circuit 6 to DKT 6 or PDIU-DS Circuit 7 to DKT 7 or PDIU-DS T8 (Voice/Data) R8 (Voice/Data) PT (Add Power) PR (Add Power) R GN BK Y W BL R8 PT8 T8 Universal Slot PCB Wiring BR-W Bridging Clips 1 PR8 RJ11 Not Used 6 5 4 3 2 1 DPFT Power Failure Transfer Box (J1) DG (J1, 50) DG -24V -24VDC (J1, 25) 2 3 4 5 PR TR PT GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT Modular Cord 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK Digital Telephone 1603 CAUTION! Figure 10-7 Strata DK I&M To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the RDSU in Slot 18 of the DK40i system. RDSU Wiring 5/00 10-9 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl T Bl-W R W-O Not Used O-W Not Used W-G T G-W R W-Br Not Used Br-W Not Used W-S T S-W R R-Bl Not Used Bl-R Not Used R-O T O-R R R-G Not Used G-R Not Used R-Br T Br-R R R-S PWRT S-R PWRR Bk-Bl T Bl-Bk R Bk-O PWRT O-Bk PWRR Bk-G T G-Bk R Bk-Br PWRT Br-Bk PWRR Bk-S T S-Bk R Y-Bl PWRT Bl-Y PWRR Note Figure 10-8 10-10 KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Directory Number 1 (Standard) 2 (Standard) 3 (Standard) (RSTS) 4 (Standard) (RSTS) Device/Standard Telephone/ Electronic Telephone Location Indicate if separate BGM source connected to Circuit 2. DDCBs connect only to Circuit 5, Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 5 (Digital) 6 (Digital) 7 (Digital) 8 (Digital) Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc. RDSU Station MDF Cross Connect Record Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths Electronic Station Wiring Diagrams W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Voice T1 (VT) Voice R1 (VR) Data T1 (DT) Data R1 (DR) VT VR VR R GN DT BK Y DR OCAT W BL OCAR DT Circuit 2 Strata DK I&M VT DR VT VR DT Circuit 3 DR VT VR DT 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 DR 1 2 3 4 5 6 VT VR DT Circuit 5 DR Modular Cord VT VR DT Station Circuit 6 DR VT VR DT Circuit 7 DR VT VR DT Electronic Telephone Circuit 8 DR Only if Electronic Telephone Receives "Off-Hook" Calls OCA T1 (OT) OCA R1 (OR) OT OR Circuit 2 OT OR Circuit 3 OR Notes • To receive OCA, the 6500-series electronic telephone must have an HVSU2 or the combined HVSI and HVSU installed. Circuit 5 • Program 31, button/LED 03 must be ON for electronic telephone to receive OCA. Circuit 6 • An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series electronic telephones for headset or HESB, Loud Ringing Bell option. • All cable 24 AWG, max 40 ohm loop resistance from PEKU to electronic telephone (1000 ft). OT Circuit 4 OT OR OT OR OT OR Circuit 7 OT OR Circuit 8 Not Used 66M150 Split Block Figure 10-9 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PEKU w/Female Connector 1578 MDF Wiring/Electronic Telephone to PEKU 5/00 10-11 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths 25 Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PEKU w/Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Voice T1 Voice R1 Data T1 Data R1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Jacketed Station Cable X Twisted Pair To 24 AWG OCA Circuit 4 R GN BK Y W BL Y To OCA R1 6 5 4 3 2 1 T1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Circuit 5 Modular Cord Station Circuit 6 Electronic Telephone Associated with HDSS Voice Pait - Not Used Circuit 7 Data Tip 7 Data Ring 7 Voice Pait - Not Used Circuit 8 Data Tip 8 Data Ring 8 OCA T1 X OCA R1 Y Circuit 4 Circuit 5 Circuit 6 R GN T8 T7 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 R8 Only if Electronic Telephone Receives Off-Hook Calls Circuits 7 & 8 T/R pair order must be wired as shown. BK Y W BL R7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 Modular Cord Circuit 7 Circuit 8 Not Used 66M150 Split Block DSS EKT SW1 Notes • Place PEKU SW1 to HDSS. • All cable 24 AWG max loop resistance: 20 ohms from PEKU to HDSS (500 ft). • See Program 29 to assign HDSS feature buttons. • See Program 28 for telephone to HDSS assignments. DSS Console 1579 Figure 10-10 MDF Wiring/HDSS Console and Associated EKT to PEKU 10-12 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths 25 Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PEKU or PESU w/Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Circuit 1 R GN BK Y W BL 2 1 Circuit 2 L1 L2 Not Used 6 5 4 3 2 1 Door Phone A MDFB (Rear View) 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 VR 22 22 R GN 23 23 24 24 25 25 BK Y 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Screw Terminals 3 4 HDCB Circuit 3 Modular Cord Circuit 4 Voice T5 Voice R5 Data T5 Data R5 2-Pair Modular Cords See Note 1 Circuit 6 Circuit 7 Door Phone MDFB A B C HKSU VT DT DR W BL 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 8 MDFB Door Phone B or Door Lock Control 2 3 4 5 OCA T1 OCA R1 MDFB Door Phone C Circuit 2 Modular Cord Circuit 3 Circuit 4 See Note 1 See Note 2 Circuit 5 MDFB (Door Phone) Station Nos. Port # A B C 004 151 152 153 012 154 155 156 020 157 158 159 028 161 162 163 Circuit 6 Circuit 7 Circuit 8 Not Used Universal Slot PCB Wiring BK-BR Bridging Clips Notes 1. On PEKU or PESU, cut W9. See Programs 39, 77-1, 77-2, and 79. 2. HDCB “B” output options: SW1: Always in DOOR position. SW2: DOOR position; “B” connects to door phone LOCK position; “B” connects to door lock. 1580 3. Door phones may be connected to Circuit 5 on Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 only. Figure 10-11 MDF Wiring-Door Phone/Lock to PEKU/PESU Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-13 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PEKU w/Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling (24 AWG, Twisted Pairs) Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Voice T1 (VT) Voice R1 (VR) Data T1 (DT) Data R1 (DR) to Electronic Telephone 1 (Port 000) VT2 VR2 DT2 Circuit 2 to Electronic Telephone (Port 001) DR2 VT3 Background Music Source Output (600 OHMS; 1V RMS MAX) VR3 DT3 DR3 Not Used VT VR DT Circuit 4 to Electronic Telephone (Port 003) DR VT VR DT Circuit 5 to Electronic Telephone or HDCB DR VT VR DT Circuit 6 to Electronic Telephone DR VT VR DT Circuit 7 to Electronic Telephone or DSS DR VT VR DT DR Notes • A separate BGM source is available. • Program 10-2, button/LED 09 ON, for BGM connection. • Program 19 for slot assignment. • Cut W5 jumper on PEKU. • Provide BGM to external page with PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU. • Volume is adjusted at BGM source only (not at PEKU). Circuit 8 to Electronic Telephone or DSS OCA T1 (OT) OCA R1 (or) to Electronic Telephones that receive OCA OT OR Circuit 2 OT OR Circuit 3 OT OR Circuit 4 OT OR Circuit 5 OT OR to Electronic Telephones that receive OCA Circuit 6 OT OR Circuit 7 OT OR Circuit 8 Not Used 66M150 Split Block 1581 Figure 10-12 MDF Wiring PEKU Background Music Connection 10-14 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths To PEKU W/Female Connector 25-Pair Cable With Male Amp Connector W-BL Bridging Clips 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Customer-supplied Two-way amplifier or Line repeaters (see Note 1) VT1 VR1 DT1 Circuit 1 to EKT DR1 VT2 VR2 DT2 DR2 PEKU, Circuit 2 Voice Pair Port A (CO Side) Not Used VT3 VR3 PEKU, Circuit 3 Voice Pair Port B (Subscriber side) Not Used (See Note 2) DT3 DR3 VT4 To 115 VAC ± 10 VAC VR4 DT4 Circuit 4 to EKT DR4 Circuit 5 to EKT or HDCB Notes 1. Refer to Manufacturer’s installation documentation for amplifier or line repeater pin numbering. Circuit 6 to EKT 2. Connect to PEKU circuits only, do not connect to PESU, PSTU, RSTU, RDSU or PDKU circuits. VT5 VR5 DT5 DR5 VT6 VR6 DT6 DR6 VT7 VR7 DT7 DR7 Circuit 7 to EKT or DSS General Note • Amplifier or repeater must have automatic gain control and be registered FCC Part 68. VT8 VR8 DT8 Circuit 8 to EKT or DSS DR8 OCA T1 (OT) OCA R1 (OR) PEKU Slot Position LED 01, ON 2nd LED 02, ON 3rd Circuit 4 LED 03, ON 4th Circuit 5 LED 04, ON 5th Circuit 2 OT3 OR3 Circuit 3 OT4 OR4 • Program 10-3, circuit assignments: Program 10-3 Button/LED OT2 OR2 System Programs OT5 OR5 OT6 OR6 PEKU Circuit A = 009 B = 010 A = 017 B = 018 A = 025 B = 026 A = 033 B = 034 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 Circuit 6 Program 10-1, button LED 19 and 20 ON. Circuit 7 Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO lines for tandem connection. Circuit 8 Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO lines if amplified DISA is required. Not USED Program 10-2, key LED 18 and 19 ON. OT7 OR7 PEKU Port Number Universal Slot PCB Wiring BR-BK 1 OT8 OR8 66M150 Split Block 1595 Figure 10-13 MDF Wiring/PEKU Amplified Two-CO Line Conference Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-15 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl VT Bl-W VR W-O DT O-W DR W-G VT G-W VR W-Br DT Br-W DR W-S VT S-W VR R-Bl DT Bl-R DR R-O VT O-R VR R-G DT G-R DR R-Br VT Br-R VR R-S DT S-R DR Bk-Bl VT Bl-Bk VR Bk-O DT O-Bk DR Bk-G VT G-Bk VR Bk-Br DT Br-Bk DR Bk-S VT S-Bk VR Y-Bl DT Bl-Y DR KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Location 1 See Note 1. 2 See Notes 1 and 2. 3 4 See Note 3. 5 6 See Note 4. 7 See Note 4. 8 1. Indicate if two-way amplifier or line repeater 2. Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected (see Program 10-2 and 19); BGM connects to VT and VR, Circuit 3 only (DT and DR not used). 3. Indicate if electronic telephone or HDCB (allowed HDCB port numbers: 004, 012, 020, 028). 4. Indicate if electronic telephone or HDSS Console number (1~8). Figure 10-14 PEKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record 10-16 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths 1585 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PESU w/Female Connector 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Station Cabling Jacketed Pairs (24 AWG) Tip 1 Ring 1 Not Used Tip 2 RJ11 Ring 2 R Circuit 3 Not Used Y W BL Tip Voice Mail Port or Similar Device Voice Mail Port or Similar Device R Circuit 6 to EKT 2 VT VR DT DR BK DT DR DR VT RJ11 VR VT DT Ring Standard Telephone 1 Standard Telephone 2 Voice T1 (VT) 5 Voice R1 (VR) 5 Data T1 (DT) 5 Data R1 (DR) 5 VR BL Ring Tip 24 AWG Circuit 4 Not Used DT Y W GN BK 654321 (Port count in software) VR GN BK 654321 Not Used OCAT W Circuit 7 to EKT 3 VT GN Y DR BL OCAR 654321 123456 Circuit 8 to EKT 4 or BGM (see Notes) Modular Cord OT and OR: Only if EKT Receives OCA Calls Station EKT 1 or HDCB See Program 77-1 Not Used OCA T1 (OT) 5 OCA R1 (OR) 5 OT OR Circuit 6 OT OR Circuit 7 OT OR Circuit 8 Strap Options: W9 - Cut if HDCB is connected to Circuit 5 P90 - Ring Voltage Option Circuit 1 & 2): L = Low Level (130VDC P-P) H = High Level (190VDC P-P) Notes • Two-ringers max may be connected (high or low) to Tip/Ring. HDSS connection is not available with PESU; HDCB may be connected to circuit 5, BGM to circuit 8 (see Program 77-1). (Electronic telephone circuits 5~8) • Not Used 66M150 Split Block Notes (Standard telephone circuits 1 & 2) • All cable 24 AWG; max loop resistance - 300 ohms from PESU to standard telephone/VM port. • Standard telephones may be on- or off-premises. Off-premises connection is made via OL13A FIC, and RJ21X jack. • Two ringers max per port. CAUTION! RJ11 R • • • Universal Slot PCB Wiring W-BL Bridging Clips To receive OCA, the 6500-series EKT must have an HVSU2 or the combined HVSI and HVSU installed. Program 31, button/LED 03 must be ON for the EKT to receive OCA. An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series EKTs for headset or HESB; Loud Ringing Bell option. All cable 24 AWG, max 40 ohm loop resistance from PESU to electronic telephone (1000 ft). To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the PESU in Slot 18 of the DK40i system. Figure 10-15 PEKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record PESU Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-17 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths MDF Block Number Color Code Designation KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Location W-Bl T Bl-W R 1 W-O Not Used O-W Not Used W-G T G-W R 2 W-Br Not Used Br-W Not Used W-S Not Used NA NA S-W Not Used 3 R-Bl Not Used Bl-R Not Used R-O Not Used NA NA O-R Not Used 4 R-G Not Used G-R Not Used R-Br VT See Note 1. Br-R VR 5 R-S DT S-R DR Bk-Bl VT Bl-Bk VR 6 Bk-O DT O-Bk DR Bk-G VT See Note 2. G-Bk VR 7 Bk-Br DT Br-Bk DR Bk-S VT See Notes 2 and 3. S-Bk VR 8 Y-Bl DT Bl-Y DR 1. Indicate if HDCB or electronic telephone. 2. HDSS console number 1~8 is not allowed. 3. Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected; BGM connects to VT and VR, circuit 8 only (DT and DR not used). Notes ● ● Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, electronic telephone, HDCB (allowed HDCB port numbers: 004, 012, 020, 028) or separate BGM source. OCA wiring not shown, see MDF-to-electronic telephone wiring. Figure 10-16 PESU Station MDF Cross Connect Record 10-18 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths Attendant Console Wiring Diagrams 25-pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To RATU PCB W/Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block 1607 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T1 (Voice/Data) R1 (Voice/Data) PC Attendant Console #2 PC Attendant Console #3 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG (2 Pair, See Note 1) R GN BK Y W BL R1 T1 PT1 PR1 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 PC Attendant Console #4 2 3 4 5 PR TR PT GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT Customer-supplied PC Attendant Console 1-pair Modular Cord to PC COM Port Customer-supplied 9-pin computer cable 9 ft. max. (female DB9 connectors on each end) Handset RATHC Headset 2-pair modular cord (RJ11 plugs on each end) 8-pair modular cord (RJ45 plugs on each end) RATI (Rear Connections) To AC 2 Outlet 150~200 W 2-pair Modular 4 (–22 dBv Output) (–25 ~ –30 dBv Audio Input – Future Use) Audio Plugs Universal Slot PCB Wiring GN-R PC Attendant 3 Console Cabling REC AUX OUT IN RJ11 RJ45 DB9 (Female) Notes 1. RATI is wired with 1-pair wiring - maximum distance from KSU (RATU PCB) is 1,000 feet (303 m). 2. PC Attendant Console and CRT require local AC power. 3. Attendant console cable runs must not have the following: • Cable splits (single or double) • Cable bridges (of any length) • High resistance or faulty cable splices 4. To tape recorder “REC” input. 5. Audio input is for future use. Figure 10-17 PC Attendant Console MDF Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-19 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths 25-pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To RATU PCB W/Female Connector Bridging Clips W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Console Cabling3 (-) T1 (Voice/Data) (GND) R1 (Voice/Data) (-) T1 (GND) R1 T2 R2 Attendant PT2 Console #2 PR2 T3 R3 Attendant PT3 Console #3 PR3 T4 R4 Attendant PT4 Console #4 PR4 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG (2-pair, See Note 1) R GN BK Y W BL R1 PT1 T1 PR1 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 PR TR PT GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT 2-pair Modular Cord 9-wire Cable W/DB-9 Male Plug Not Used EGA Color Monitor Or EL Display Modular Plug RJ11 Modular Jack RS-232C Connector (Not Used) DB-9 Female Jack 3-Prong AC Plug To 120VAC2 ATTENDANT CONSOLE #1 Notes 1. Console must be wired with 2-pair wiring - max. distance from KSU (RATU PCB) is 1,000 feet (303 m). 2. EGA monitor or EL display require local AC power. 3. Attendant console cable runs must not have the following: • Cable splits (single or double) • Cable bridges (of any length) • High resistance or faulty cable splices 1606 Figure 10-18 Attendant Console MDF Wiring Diagram 10-20 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths Analog Devices Wiring W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Jacketed Twisted Station Cable 24 AWG Tip 1 Ring 1 Not Used T2 R2 (See Notes) R GN BK Y W BL Not Used T3 R3 Not Used T4 R4 6 5 4 3 2 1 Not Used 1 2 3 4 5 6 T5 R5 Not Used Modular Cord T6 R6 Tip Ring Not Used Standard Telephone, Voice Mail Port, ACD/Auto Attendant Digital Announcer, or Similar Device T7 R7 Not Used T8 R8 Notes • An alternate BGM source can be connected to Circuit 2 of RSTU or PSTU. An isolation transformer may be required when connecting BGM to RSTU or PSTU (see Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation, Alternate BGM Source to RSTU). • See Table 10-1 for loop requirements. • Two ringers maximum. Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To RSTU2 or PSTU or PSTU2 w/Female Connector Bridging Not Used DPFT Power Failure Transfer Box (J1) DG (J1, 50) -24 Volts (J1, 25) DG -24V 1583 66M150 Split Block Figure 10-19 MDF Wiring/Standard Telephone, Voice Mail, DPFT to RSTU/RSTU2/RDSU/RSTS/PSTU/PSTU2 Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-21 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Cable Lengths MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl T Bl-W R W-O Not Used O-W Not Used W-G T G-W R W-Br Not Used Br-W Not Used W-S T S-W R R-Bl Not Used Bl-R Not Used R-O T O-R R R-G Not Used G-R Not Used R-Br T Br-R R R-S Not Used S-R Not Used Bk-Bl T Bl-Bk R Bk-O Not Used O-Bk Not Used Bk-G T G-Bk R Bk-Br Not Used Br-Bk Not Used Bk-S T S-Bk R Y-Bl Not Used Bl-Y Not Used Note KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Location 1 Indicate if separate BGM source. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc. Figure 10-20 RSTU/RSTU2/RDSU/RSTS/PSTU/PSTU2 Station MDF Cross Connect Record 10-22 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs Pair Pin Color Code Lead Designation 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 W-BI BI-W W-O O-W W-G G-W W-Br Br-W W-S S-W R-BI BI-R R-O O-R R-G G-R R-Br Br-R R-S S-R Bk-BI BI-Bk Bk-O O-Bk Bk-G G-Bk Bk-Br Br-Bk Bk-S S-Bk Y-Bl Bl-Y Y-O R 17 O-Y T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R Spare Spare 18T 43 Y-G Spare R 18 G-Y Spare 19T 44 Y-Br Spare R 19 Br-Y Spare 20T 45 Y-S Spare R 20 S-Y Spare 21T 46 V-Bl Spare R 21 Bl-V 22T 47 V-O Spare Spare R 22 O-V Spare Spare 23T 48 V-G R 23 G-V Spare Spare 24T 49 V-Br R 24 Br-V Spare 25T 50 V-S Spare R 25 S-V Spare Function TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU PSTU/RSTU PCB Position #1 #1 #1 #1 #2 #2 #2 #2 #3 #3 #3 #3 #4 #4 #4 #4 #5 #5 #5 #5 #6 #6 #6 #6 #7 #7 #7 #7 #8 #8 #8 #8 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 1t R 2T R 3T R 4T R 5T R 6T R 7T R 8T R 9T R 10T R 11T R 12T R 13T R 14T R 15T R 16T R 17T Figure 10-21 DPFT Connector J2/Terminal Sequence & Designations/Station Line Connection Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-23 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs Pair 1t Pin 26 Color Code W-BI Lead Designation T Function PSTU/RSTU PCB Position TIP-CO #1 #1 R 1 BI-W R RING-CO 2T 27 W-O T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #1 R 2 O-W R RING-PCOU/RCOU #1 3T 28 W-G T TIP-CO #2 R 3 G-W R RING-CO #2 4T 29 W-Br T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #2 R 4 Br-W R RING-PCOU/RCOU #2 5T 30 W-S T TIP-CO #3 R 5 S-W R RING-CO #3 6T 31 R-BI T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #3 R 6 BI-R R RING-PCOU/RCOU #3 7T 32 R-O T TIP-CO #4 R 7 O-R R RING-CO #4 8T 33 R-G T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #4 R 8 G-R R RING-PCOU/RCOU #4 9T 34 R-Br T TIP-CO #5 R 9 Br-R R RING-CO #5 10T 35 R-S T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #5 R 10 S-R R RING-PCOU/RCOU #5 11T 36 Bk-BI T TIP-CO #6 R 11 BI-Bk R RING-CO #6 12T 37 Bk-O T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #6 R 12 O-Bk R RING-PCOU/RCOU #6 13T 38 Bk-G T TIP-CO #7 R 13 G-Bk R RING-CO #7 14T 39 Bk-Br T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #7 R 14 Br-Bk R RING-PCOU/RCOU #7 15T 40 Bk-S T TIP-CO #8 R 15 S-Bk R RING-CO #8 16T 41 Y-Bl T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #8 R 16 Bl-Y R RING-PCOU/RCOU #8 17T 42 Y-O Spare R 17 O-Y Spare 18T 43 Y-G Spare R 18 G-Y Spare 19T 44 Y-Br Spare R 19 Br-Y Spare 20T 45 Y-S Spare R 20 S-Y Spare Spare 21T 46 V-Bl R 21 Bl-V Spare 22T 47 V-O Spare R 22 O-V Spare 23T 48 V-G Spare R 23 G-V Spare 24T 49 V-Br Spare R 24 Br-V Spare 25T 50 V-S PFT DG PFT GROUND (INPUT) RDSU/RSTU/PSTU/PIN50 R 25 S-V PFT -24V PFT -24V (INPUT) RDSU/RSTU/PSTU/PIN25 Figure 10-22 DPFT Connector J1/Terminal Sequence & Designations/CO Line Connection & DPFT Control 10-24 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams CO Line Wiring Diagrams To Network T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Y W BL T2 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 PCOU #4 #3 #2 #1 2 3 4 5 Modular Cord Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 CO3+4 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 12 BK R2 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 PCOU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 02LS2 6-1 11 12 T1 6-1 11 GN 6 543 21 10 R R1 6 543 21 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 CO1+2 1586 Figure 10-23 MDF Wiring/CO Lines to PCOU Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-25 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams MDF Block Number CO Line Number PCB Type and Cabinet Slot Number MDF Block Number CO Line Number PCB Type and Cabinet Slot Number MDF Block Number CO Line Number PCB Type and Cabinet Slot Number Figure 10-24 CO Line (RCOU/RCOS, RGLU2, RDDU, PEMU, REMU, RDDU, RDTU) MDF Cross Connect Record 10-26 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams To Network T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Y W BL T2 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type Or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 RGLU or PCOU #4 #3 #2 #1 2 3 4 5 Modular Cord Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 CO3+4 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 CO1+2 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 24 BK R2 6-1 11 12 T1 6-1 11 GN 6 543 21 9 10 R R1 6 543 21 9 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 PCOU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 02LS2 (PCOU), 02GS2 (RGLU2) 1598 Figure 10-25 MDF Wiring/CO Lines to RGLU2 or PCOU Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-27 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams To Network T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-type or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 4 3 2 1 Modular Cord Same 5 4 3 2 R8 R7 T7 T8 Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 Same 5 4 3 2 R6 R5 T5 T6 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 8 7 6 5 7+8 3+4 5+6 1-6 14 15 BL 1-6 13 14 W T2 1+2 6-1 13 Y 6-1 12 BK R2 6 543 21 11 12 T1 6 543 21 11 GN 6 543 21 9 10 R R1 6 543 21 9 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 02LS2 RCOU RCOS 1602 Figure 10-26 MDF Wiring/CO to RCOU/RCOS 10-28 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams RJ-11 2-pin To Network or PSAP T1 R1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Ring Bridging Clips Tip 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 T1 R1 R 6 5 4 3 2 1 GN R1 T1 BK Y W BL T2 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 Ring 21 21 Tip 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 Ring 27 27 28 28 Tip 29 29 NB LED 30 30 CB LED 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 Ring 35 35 36 36 Tip 37 37 NB LED 38 38 CB LED 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 NB LED 44 44 CB LED 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 6 5 4 3 2 1 RMCU1A RCMS1A (2/2) 4 3 CAMA #4 RJ11 2-Pin Modular Connector Network Busy (NB) LED Customer Busy (CB) LED 4 3 CAMA #3 RCMS1A (1/2) Ring Tip 4 3 4 3 CAMA #2 LEDs (indicates trunk condition) Universal Slot PCB Wiring 66M150 Split Block R2 CAMA #1 Only one circuit is shown connected. 2798 NOTE: Make sure Tip and Ring are connected properly, CAMA lines are polarity sensitive. Figure 10-27 RMCU/RMCS Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-29 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams Bridging Jumper Wires R1 R GN R T1 R2 BK W BK 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 W GN T1 R1 BK T2 Y R2 Dealer Supplied Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent (See Notes) BL R T1 T2 Y GN R1 R2 Dealer Supplied Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent (See Notes) BL 6 5 4 3 2 1 T2 Y W Dealer Supplied Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent (See Notes) BL 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 CKT 7&8 1-6 R4 R3 T3 T4 Same Same CKT 3&4 6-1 Same 5 4 3 2 6 54 3 2 1 CKT 3&4 6-1 R4 R3 T3 T4 6 54 3 2 1 Same 5 4 3 2 Modular Cords 1-6 4-Wire Modular Cord 4-Wire Modular Cord Telco RJ14C Modular Jack CKT 5&6 Telco RJ21X CKT 1&2 Pin-out Network Jack: RJ14C/RJ21X FIC: 02LS2 (Loop Start) OR 02GS2 (Ground Start) Telco Jacks RJ14C CKT 1&2 Pin-out RGLU/RCOU/RCOS/PCOU/TCOU RCIU RCIS Installer Cross Connect Customer Supplied Modular Jacks 4-Wire Modular Cord Network R2 R1 T1 T2 6-1 5 4 3 2 6 54 3 2 1 R2 R1 T1 T2 6-1 5 4 3 2 6 54 3 2 1 T1 LINE X R1 T2 LINE Y R2 1 RCOU 4-Wire Modular Cord 2 RCIU/RCIS 4-Wire Modular Cord RJ14C Duplex Modular Jack (AA-104A-4 or Equivalent) RJ21X 4-Wire Connector (267A2 Or Equivalent) Telco RJ21X 1 RCOU 4-Wire Modular Cord 2 RCIU/RCIS 4-Wire Modular Cord Network 1608 4-Wire Single Modular Jack (RJ14C) from Telco 1. 4-wire modular jacks such as graybar part number AA-104A-4 could be used in place of the two modular jacks; or, a T-connector such as graybar part number 267A2 Adaptor could be used as shown below: 2. Assign RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS circuits to the appropriate CO line using Program *50. CAUTION! RCIU1 cannot be used in DK40i. Install RCIU2 in slot 17 only of the DK40i Expansion Unit; it must never be installed in slot 18. Figure 10-28 RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS MDF Wiring Diagram 10-30 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams DID and Tie Line Wiring To Network T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Y W BL T2 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 RDDU 4 3 2 1 Modular Cord Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 J2 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 12 BK R2 J1 6-1 11 12 T1 6-1 11 GN 6 543 21 10 R R1 6 543 21 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 RDDU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 1605 Figure 10-29 MDF Wiring/DID CO Lines to RDDU Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-31 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams REMU #4 #3 #2 #1 To Network Jack Same Pinout as Line #1 8-1 Line #4 To Network Jack Same Pinout as Line #1 8-1 Line #3 To Network Jack Same Pinout as Line #1 8-1 Line #2 8-1 Line #1 To Network Jack (USOC: RJ1CX) LEAD — PIN # SB M — — 8 7 SG T — — 6 5 R — 4 E — 3 4WR1 — 2 4WT1 — 1 1600 Figure 10-30 MDF Wiring REMU 2/4 Wire Type I/II 10-32 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams To Network T R E M Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 M 6 5 4 3 2 1 PEMU 2-Wire #4 #3 #2 #1 1 2 3 4 5 6 * * *Not Used Modular Cord 66M150 Split Block Same Same Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E 6 5 4 3 2 1 E 6 5 4 3 2 1 E 6 5 4 3 2 1 E *R T *M *R T *M *R T *M *R T *M #4 #3 #2 #1 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 14 15 BL E 6-1 14 W Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent * 6-1 13 Y 6-1 13 BK 6-1 12 * 6543 21 11 12 T 6543 21 11 GN 6543 21 9 10 R R 6543 21 9 10 T R E M PEMU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ2EX FIC: TL11M 1587 Figure 10-31 MDF Wiring/2-Wire Tie Line to PEMU Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-33 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams To Network T R T1 R1 E M Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 T R T1 R1 E M R R GN T 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 DK Wire Pair Functions 50 DK, Transmit T, R DK, Receive T1, R1 BK Y T1 E W BL M PEMU 4-Wire #4 #3 #2 #1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 6-1 #4 Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 65 43 21 6-1 #3 Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 65 43 21 6-1 #2 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 65 43 21 6-1 Modular Cord 65 43 21 50 R1 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type Or Equivalent #1 Network Jack: RJ2GX FIC: TL31M 66M150 Split Block Signaling PEMU Pin-out E, M 1588 Figure 10-32 MDF Wiring/4-Wire Tie Line to PEMU 10-34 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams This section covers wiring for the option interface PCBs, which includes paging, TTY, SMDR, and serial interface features. The wiring diagrams involving paging zones reference Table 10-2, shown below. Table 10-2 External Paging Zones External Paging Zone Access Code External Paging Zone Access Code Paging All Call, External Page Zone DK14/DK40/DK40i/DK424/DK424i (all processors) Paging All Call Page Zone DK40i/DK40/DK424 (RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D) and DK424i (BCAU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU) Zone A Zone C Zone B Zone D DK424 (RCTUE/F) and DK424i (B5CAU/B5CBU) Note Zone A Zone E Zone B Zone F Zone C Zone G Zone D Zone H Four-digit access codes are for RCTUE/F and B5CAU/B5CBU only. Zones E-H require a second PIOU PCB. Universal Slot PCB Wiring Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-35 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams PIOU 25PR. Connections MDF 66M Block PG.OUT 1 PG.IN 1 PIN COLOR 15 . S-Bk 40 . Bk-S PIN 30 29 PG.OUT 2 PG.IN 2 42 . . O-Y Y-O 34 33 PG.OUT 3 PG.IN 3 19 . Br-Y 38 44 . Y-Br 37 PG.OUT 4 21 46 . Bl-V V-Bl 42 . DE.T DE.R 32 7 . . R-O O-R 13 14 SP.T0 38 . Bk-Gn 25 Mute 13 . Gn-Bk 26 V-S Amplifier Multi-zone 50 . 49 25 . S-V 50 23 . Gn-V 46 ALM T. 36 . Bk-Bl 21 ALM R. 11 . Bl-Bk 22 PEPU/PIOU PCB PIOU Only PG.IN 4 17 Multi-zone Page 30W max./Composite Impedance 300 OHMS Zone A or E Zone B or F All Zone Page (#39) Zone C or G Zone D or H 41 Select Relay Function with Program 77-1: Door Lock Or Amp. Control BREAK PI0 MAKE 600W (Duplex) SP.R0 SW4 SP0 Page or BGM From PCTU SP1 VR1 8W SP.T1 3 WATT SP.R1 PG. Common Door Lock Control 8Ω Speaker Alarm System (PIOU Only) N.C. P12 N.O. BREAK Alarm Sensor AMP. Tape Player P11 NH T. NH R. 34 9 . . R-Br Br-R 17 18 Control MAKE External Background Music Source 1589 Select Relay Function with Program 77-1: Night Relay Or MOH Control Note MDF Connections All Wires Should Be Jacketed 24 AWG. Twisted Pairs Night Bell To Music-on-hold Input On PCTU PCB P6 Connector. See Table 10-2 for paging zone access codes. Figure 10-33 MDF Wiring/PIOU or PEPU Peripherals (25-pair) 10-36 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams 6 1 3-Pair Modular Cord Max. 50 Ft With 24 AWG (cross-pinned) PPTC 6 Programmable RS-232 Port TYSG TYCD TYDTR TYDSR TYTD TYRD SMSG SMCD SMDTR SMDSR SMTD SMRD PIOU Card TTY (6-pin Modular Jack) 6-1 PPTC connects to: Call Accounting Device or Printer PPTC 6-1 PPTC connects to any one of these devices: DKi Admin PC and DKi Backup PC COM Port External RM Modem VM SMDI Port MIS Device SMIS PC COM Port CCV PC COM Port Insight DK PC COM Port SMDR (6-pin Modular Jack) 6 1 6 1 Station Message Detail Recording RS-232 Port SW2 LED CD4 1 (25-pair Female Amp. Jack) Notes See Figure 8-27 for futher details on the PPTC. See PIOU/MDF Drawing in this Section 2377 Universal Slot PCB Wiring PIOU option settings: SW1 —Sets the SMDR baud rate to be 300 or 1200 BPS. SW2 —Sets the PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY jack). LED CO4 ON = 300 BPS/SW2 set IN. LED CO4 OFF = 1200 BPS/SW2 set OUT. SW3 —Sets the PIOU to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular jack. MODEM — For IMDU operation. — For ASCII terminal or TTY external modem. W4 — Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for bell or CCITT specification. Figure 10-34 PIOU/TTY and SMDR Wiring (with PPTC Adapter) Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-37 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams KSU Backplane TBI MDF SPT Page and BGM 600 SPR Break Mute Control DET W1 Make DER K1 Break DE Door Lock Control NH MOH Source Unit NHT W2 Make K2 HESB or Page Amplifier NHR Night Bell Normal Open ALMT Alarm Sensor W3 ALM Facility Alarm Unit ALMR Normal Close PIOUS Relay Options: • K1 (DE): Door Lock or Amp Mute Control; Program 77-1, LED 07 • K2 (NH): Night Relay or Music-on-hold Control; Program 77-1, LED 05 • K1 & K2: 24 VDC, 1 Amp Maximum Notes • • All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs. Dotted lines show optional connections; only one optional connection is allowed. 1591 Figure 10-35 PIOUS Page/Relay/Alarm Connections 10-38 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams 1 6 3-Pair Modular Cord Max. 50 Ft With 24 AWG (cross-pinned) PPTC 1 PIOUS CARD Programmable RS-232 Port TYSG TYCD TYDTR TYDSR TYTD TYRD SMSG SMCD SMDTR SMDSR SMTD SMRD Station Message Detail Recording RS-232 Port 6 TTY (6-Pin Modular Jack) 6-1 PPTC connects to: Call Accounting Device or Printer PPTC 6-1 PPTC connects to any one of these devices: DKi Admin or DKi Backup PC COM Port External RM Modem VM SMDI Port MIS Device SMIS PC COM Port CCV PC COM Port Insight DK PC COM Port SMDR (6-Pin Modular Jack) 6 1 6 1 SW2 LED CD4 TB1 to MDF: 600 OHM Page Notes See Figure 8-27 for futher details on the PPTC. Door Lock/ Amp, Mute PIOU option settings: SW1 —Sets the SMDR baud rate to be 300 or 1200 BPS. SW2 — Sets the PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY jack). LED CO4 ON = 300 BPS/SW2 set IN. LED CO4 OFF = 1200 BPS/SW2 set OUT. SW3 —Sets the PIOU to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular jack. MODEM — For IMDU operation. — For ASCII terminal or TTY external modem. W4 — Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for bell or CCITT specification. Night Relay/ MOH Control Alarm Universal Slot PCB Wiring 2376 Figure 10-36 PIOUS SMDR/TTY Options and Wiring (with PPTC Adapter) Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-39 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams RSIU/RSIS/RMDS Modular Jack 6-wire Modular Cord - telephone type (modular jack locking tabs on the same side of each cord). Toshiba PPTC PC COM Port RSIU (plug-in motherboard) Port 1 RSIS (piggy-back)1 serial interface subassemly Port 2 RSIS (piggy-back)1 serial interface subassemly Port 3 RMDS or RSIS (piggy-back)1 (2400 bps modem or serial interface)3 Port 4 MIS2 SMDI2 SMDR2 TTY2 Notes 1. The RSIU can be configured with up to three RSIS, or two RSIS and one RMDS (in any position). Use Program 76 to set RSIU/RSIS/RMDS port types. 2. All RSIU/RSIS/RMDS ports are system programmable to allow up to four of any of the functions: SMDR, MIS, CCV, SMDI, TTY, and remote modem. 3. When the RMDS is used as a modem, the modular jack is not used. If the RMDS is used as an RS-232 interface port, the modular jack is used. ACD/MIS PC Stratagy Voice Mail System Station Message Detail Report DKi Admin/DKi Backup PC CAUTION! Do not plug CO line or RSTU tip/ring into RMDS or RSIU modular jack RSIU DKi Admin or DKi Backup PC Remote Modem CO Line Telephone Network CO Line RS-232 Cable RMDS Flash or ROM and RAM Time Switch CO Line Circuit Strata DK 4274 CO line connects to RMDS port (#19) via: DID, Auto Attendant, DISA, Ring transfer, or ringing assignments. Figure 10-37 DK424 and DK424i RSIU/RSIS/RMDS Wiring Diagrams 10-40 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS PPTC-9 2 3 6 4 1 5 (female) Connect to PC 9-pin COMX Port 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG DB9 Pinout (front view) 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 20 Connect to PC 25-pin COMX Port 3 2 6 20 8 7 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 PPTC25-MDM 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 Connect to External Modem 2 3 20 6 8 7 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 Connect to: • ASCII Terminal • Printer • Call Accounting Device 3 2 6 20 8 7 DB25 Pinout (front and side view) RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD DK Modular Jack Pinout (front view) RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS PPTC (male) DK Universal Slot PCB Wiring DB25 Pinout (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD Modular Jack Pinout (front view) DB25 Pinout (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 (male) DK Modular Jack Pinout (front view) PPTC-25F (female) SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD DK Modular Jack Pinout (side view) Jumper Pin 4-5 2378 1. The above modular adapters can be used to connect PCs, terminals, and SMDR devices to WSIU, TSIU, RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, PIOU, and PIOUS RS-232 ports. 2. PPTC will not connect directly into a 25-pin PC COM port because they are male gender. 3. All PPTC, PPTC9, PPTC25F connections require a 6-wire, telephone type modular cord (with modular jack locking tabs on the same side of each cord.) 4. See Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for connection the MLX-41 Caller ID interface box to the WSIU, RS-232 port using PPTC-CLID14. Figure 10-38 DK RS-232 Modular Adapter Pin Configuration Strata DK I&M 5/00 10-41 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams 10-42 Strata DK I&M 5/00 11 Station Apparatus This chapter provides instructions on how to connect telephones to the Strata DK systems and how to configure and upgrade them for optional features. Procedures for installing direct station selection consoles and door phones also appear in this chapter. Types of Telephones The Strata DK systems can support digital, electronic and standard telephones. Digital Telephones Installation instructions for digital telephones in this chapter and elsewhere in this manual apply only to the Toshiba 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones. The 2000-series digital telephones consist of four models: DKT2010-S DKT2020-S The DKT2010-S is a 10-Button Digital Speakerphone The DKT2020-S is a 20-button Digital Speakerphone. 1867 1877 DKT2020-SD The DKT2010-SD is a 10-Button Digital Speakerphone with Liquid Crystal Display. The DKT2020-SD is a 20-Button Digital Speakerphone with LCD. 3645 DKT2020-FDSP Station Apparatus DKT2010-SD 1869 Same as DKT2020-SD with Full-duplex Speakerphone. There are two 1000-series digital telephone models, the DKT1020-S and DKT1020-SD. Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-1 Station Apparatus Types of Telephones Electronic Telephones The electronic telephone instructions in this manual apply to the Toshiba 6500-series electronic telephones. They consist of four models: the EKT6510-H, EKT6510-S, EKT6520-H, and EKT6520-SD. Note Other electronic telephones that are compatible with the Strata DK systems are the 2000-, 3000-, and 6000-series telephones. Important! When you install 2000-, 3000-, or 6000-series electronic telephones, you must calculate the system power factor using the tables provided in the appropriate Configuration chapter to ensure that the system power supply is not overloaded. Standard Telephones 500- and 2500-type standard telephones apply whenever standard telephones are mentioned in this manual. Strata AirLink Wireless Handset Strata AirLink™ wireless systems add wireless telephone service to Strata DK16 and DK16e, DK40, DK40i, DK280, DK424 and DK424i and many non-Toshiba telephone systems. There is one handset model (shown at right) that stores up to eight system and handset IDs that are configured by your System Administrator. The handset has a two-line LCD that shows alphanumeric information, including the idle message, date, call duration, icons and specific call activity. Idle Message Date Time/Call Duration Icon Display Area Volume/Scroll Buttons PWR CALL END For installation instructions of the systems and operation of the handset, see the Strata AirLink Installation Guide and the Strata AirLink Handset User Guide. Scroll/Lock Buttons 3398 11-2 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Telephone Installation Telephone Installation This section describes the wiring required to connect telephones to the system. Before installing any telephone wiring, read the following warning and caution notes: WARNING! ➤ Never install the telephone wiring during a lightning storm. ➤ Never install the telephone jacks in wet locations, unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. ➤ Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. ➤ Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. ➤ If telephone, DSS console, door phone control box, or door phone wiring exits the building, external secondary protection is required. See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring. CAUTION! When installing the station cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. Important! For station apparatus secondary protection information, refer to the following: DK14, see Figure 1-14 on Page 1-22; DK40i, see Figure 3-24 on Page 3-41; DK424, see Figure 5-45 on Page 5-67; or for DK424i, see Figure 10-1 on Page 103. The DKT2000 V.4 series telephones have DIP switches that enable use for the international market. The DIP switches are located underneath the flexible button key strip on the DKT2000 V.4 series telephones (see Figure 11-1). On the DKT2001, the DIP switch is located on the base. S 1 2 3 DIP Switches 4 Line 9 Line 8 Line 7 Do Not Disturb Line 17 Line 6 Line 16 Line 5 Line 15 Line 4 Line 14 Line 3 Line 13 Line 2 Line 12 Line 1 Line 11 Speed Dial Station Apparatus ON Intercom Line 10 3926 Figure 11-1 DKT 2000-series V.4 DIP Switches Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-3 Station Apparatus Telephone Installation Table 11-1 shows the correct country settings for the DKT2010-S, DKT2020-S, DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-SD, DKT2001 V.4 telephones. Note Table 11-1 The default DIP switch settings are preset for the USA and Canada. Therefore, you do not need to adjust any of these from the default factory settings for North America. DKT International DIP Switch Settings Dip Switch Country USA Canada (Default Setting) DIP Switch Position 1 2 3 4 ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON Mexico ON ON ON OFF 1 2 3 4 ON Taiwan OFF ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON Hong Kong Thailand1 ON Singapore Malaysia Indonesia Sri Lanka India China OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON OFF 1 2 3 4 3925 1. The DKT2000 V.4 is not compatible for Hong Kong and Thailand. Use the V.4A or later versions in these two countries. Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU) To receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls over the digital telephone speaker, a digital telephone must be upgraded with a DVSU; the telephone making the call does not require a DVSU. In a DK system with release 3 and above software, a DVSU is not required to receive OCA in the telephone handset or headset. An additional wire pair is not required for digital telephones that receive Speaker OCA calls. The DVSU is compatible with both 2000-series and 1000-series digital telephones. Notes ● ● ● 11-4 Digital telephones cannot be equipped with a DVSU and integrated data interface unit (PDIUDI, RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2) or DADMs at the same time. Program 03, Code 62 or 64 must be set for the PDKU and Code 28 for the RDSU for telephones that are to receive Speaker OCA and Program 31 LED 03 must be turned ON for telephone ports. DVSU is not necessary to receive handset OCA. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Telephone Installation System Connection Digital Telephones The following provides information on how to connect digital telephones to the DK system. Note Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page 11-3. Digital telephones connect to the digital telephone ports via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. If using 24 AWG cable, single-pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for digital telephones to operate effectively at up to 1000 feet from the system. Digital telephones that are equipped with Integrated Data Interface Units or ADMs should have two-pair (or external power) to function effectively at this distance. This also applies to digital telephones supported by systems that must operate with battery reserve power (see Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation, Table 5-2 on Page 5-5). To accommodate the digital telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ11) at the station location. The standard single-pair, modular digital telephone cord that is sent with the telephone is 7 ft. (the maximum allowed is 25 ft.). Note Digital telephone cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length), or high resistance or faulty cable splices. Electronic Telephones The following provides information on how to connect electronic telephones to the Strata DK system. Note Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page 11-3. Electronic telephones are connected to electronic telephone circuits in the DK40i Expansion Unit on the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) and the Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. Two-pair wiring, as a minimum, is required for telephone connection. However, three-pair wiring is recommended for some upgrades, such as OCA. If using 24 AWG cable, the overall length of the station cable run from the DK40i Base KSU to the telephone must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 meters). Standard Telephones Station Apparatus To accommodate the electronic telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ11) at the station location. The standard two-pair modular electronic telephone cord length is 7 feet (the maximum allowed length is 25 feet). See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more details. The following provides information on how to connect standard telephones to the DK system. Note Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page 11-3. Standard telephones connect to standard telephone circuits of the Standard Telephone Interface PCBs: RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PESU, KSTU2 (DK40i only), and QSTU2 (DK14 only). Standard telephones connect to RSTU, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU via the MDF with Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-5 Station Apparatus Telephone Installation standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. (See single-pair wiring Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more details.) The standard telephone cable’s overall loop resistance, connected on- or off-premises, is 300 ohms maximum, (for PSTU, PESU, KSTU2, or QSTU2), 600 ohms for RSTU and RDSU/RSTS with -24VDC (no R48S), and 1200 ohms for RSTU and RDSU/RSTS with -48VDC (R48S installed on RSTU, RSTU2, or RDSU PCB), including the telephone resistance. This also applies to all devices connected to standard telephone circuits. A standard telephone connected off-premises via the telephone network should interface with OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C lines (or equivalent) and connect to an RJ21X, FIC jack or equivalent, (see wiring diagrams in Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring and Table 5-3, “DK424 Network Requirements” on Page 5-6). Telephone Wall Mounting This section explains how to mount digital and electronic telephones to a wall or other vertical surface. See the manufacturer’s documentation for instructions on mounting standard phones. Notes ● ● Digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs, RPCI-DIs or PDIU-DI2s cannot be wall mounted. Electronic and older digital telephones equipped with an HHEU1 can be wall mounted. 2000series digital telephones with headsets can only be wall mounted with an HHEU2. ➤ To mount digital and electronic telephones Refer to Figures 11-2~11-3 and the following steps. Handset Hanger Plastic Tab 1. Loosen the captive screws, and remove the telephone base. 2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. 3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on the front of the phone. The hanger fits in the notch on the handset cradle. 4. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it to the telephone with its four captive screws. 11-6 1478 Figure 11-2 Removing the Telephone Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Telephone Installation 5. Connect the phone to the wall modular connector with a cord approximately four inches long (available at most telephone supply companies). 6. Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base. 7. Mount the phone on the wall mounting modular connector plate. Handset Hanger 1479 1480 Figure 11-4 Handset Figure 11-3 Wall Mounting Base Rotation Station Apparatus Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-7 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades Telephone Upgrades Digital and electronic telephones can be upgraded for a number of features; there are no upgrades for standard telephones. Each of these upgrades shares a circuit with the telephone that it is connected to and is not considered a station. See Table 11-2 for more information. Table 11-2 Telephone Subassembly Upgrades Subassembly Host Telephone Function Capacity DVSU1 2000- and 1000-series Digital Telephones Provides interface for digital telephone to receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA). Not required for Handset/Headset OCA. HHEU 2000- and 1000-series Digital Telephones. 6500- and 6005series Electronic Telephones. Provides interface for headset and loud ringing bell to telephone. Can be installed with DVSU, RPCI-DI, or DADM. RPCI-DI1 2000-series Digital Telephones Provides TAPI PC application and data calling interfaces. DADM1 2000-series Digital Telephones Provides telephone with 20 (or 40 with two DADMs) additional feature buttons for DSS, System or Station speed dial, or CO line appearances. 1 per telephone 1 or 2 per telephone 1. Only one of the following subassemblies allowed per telephone: DVSU, RPCI-DI or DADM. Digital Telephone Upgrades This section describes how to upgrade and configure 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones for features and options. TAPI and Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrades (RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DI) Both the 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones can be upgraded with an integrated data interface unit to transmit and receive simultaneous voice and data calls. There are three versions of the integrated unit: ♦ RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI2 for the 2000-series telephones ♦ PDIU-DI for the 1000-series telephones. Asynchronous devices, such as PCs and terminals, can be connected to the standard RS-232 connector of the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2. Station users are able to transmit and receive RS-232 data over the single-wire pair of the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 equipped telephone. TAPI/Data Communications Modes The RPCI-DI can operate in two modes: the TAPI or the data communications mode. The mode is changed by sending the appropriate control signal to the RPCI-DI from the PC to which the RPCIDI is connected. TAPI Mode In the TAPI mode, the PC connected to the RPCI-DI can place telephone calls. The PC can also receive Caller ID, ANI, and DNIS information received by the RPCI-DI telephone. When in the TAPI mode, the RPCI-DI is designed to be compatible with Microsoft TAPI application programs. For more information, see Chapter 15 – Computer Telephony Integration. If an RPCI-DI only needs to support TAPI (and not data—see following Notes) it can be connected to any digital telephone circuit. 11-8 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades Data Communications Mode In the data communications mode, data calls can be from a telephone with the 'DWD&DOO button and disconnected with the 'DWD5HOHDVH button. Digital telephones can have a 0RGHP button for reserving a modem or monitoring modem availability and status. These feature buttons are assigned to telephones with Program 39. Data and voice calls can be dialed from a terminal or PC using standard “AT” commands. Notes ● ● ● 1000-series digital telephones with an RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 cannot be wall-mounted or equipped with an Add-On-Module (ADM) or DVSU for Speaker OCA. A 2000-series digital telephone with a PDIU-DI2 or RPCI-DI can support an HHEU at the same time, but cannot support a DVSU or ADM and can be wall-mounted. Only PDKU1 circuits 1~7 can support RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2s; all PDKU2 and Base Unit digital circuits can support PDIU-DI2 and RPCI-DIs. RPCI-DIs and PDIU-DI2s that support data communications mode, must be connected to digital telephone circuits that support 2B channels. The digital circuits that support RPCI-DI data communication are: DK14 – all digital telephone circuits. DK40i – all digital telephone circuits except those installed in slot 17 and 18 of the expansion unit. DK424 – see Tables 4-4 and 4-5 of the Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration. DK424i – see Chapter 6 – DK424i RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI2 Installation See Figures 11-2, 11-5 and 11-6 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four screws on the digital telephone base and remove the base. 2. Insert the two integrated unit wire plugs into the connectors on the PCB in the telephone (observing the red wire for correct positioning). 3. Attach the integrated unit to the bottom of the phone. Install the PDIU-DI for 1000-series; install PDIU-DI2 or RPCI-DI for 2000-series phones. Secure with the four captive screws. Note 4. Remove the directory tray from the original telephone base and install it on the integrated unit phone base. Squeeze the tray on its sides so it bows slightly to remove and re-install. 5. See Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation, Table 5-3 on Page 5-6 for loop limits. Install a two-pair house cable (or external power) and a two-pair modular cord (supplied with PDIU-DI), if required for distance. Station Apparatus RPCI-DI V2s require some modification when installed in DKT versions 1~3; RPCI-DI V2s in DKT version 4 or higher do not require any modification. RPCI, PDIU-DI1/PDIU-DI2 Programming Program 39: Assigns the 'DWD&DOO, 'DWD5HOHDVH, and 0RGHP buttons. Programs 20 and 22: RPCI and data interface unit assignments. Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-9 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades RS-232 (Female) DB-25 Connector DIU & VSU DIU & ADM Perception Strap (only cut if installed on Perception) To P1 of Bottom PCB Digital Telephone Top Assembly To P2 of Bottom PCB RPCI-DI V.2s have stand offs that require cutting when installed into a DKT V.1~V.3. Use a wire cutter to trim the top pieces of the stand offs at the center of the telephone base before mounting. Red Wire RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 2000 Digital Telephone Base 3751 Before After Do not cut the RPCI-DI stand offs when installing on a DKT V.4 or higher. Figure 11-5 Only RPCI-DI V.2s have these stand offs RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 Installation into 2000-series Digital Telephone F) P (S D B U 0K S -2 0- TO T1 K K D D TO RS-232 (Female) DB-25 Connector A HHEU IB H S DVSU PDIU D RE PDIU/ DVSU D RE Digital Telephone Top Assembly Perception Strap (only cut if installed on Perception) To P1 of Bottom PCB Red Wire To P2 of Bottom PCB Red Wire Important! Do not connect DIU cables to HHEU connector. PDIU-DI PCB Directory Tray 82 14 Notes • A 1000-series digital telephone cannot support an HHEU and a PDIU-DI at the same time. • 1000-series telephones do not support RCPI-DIs. Figure 11-6 11-10 PDIU-DI 1000 Digital Telephone Base PDIU-DI Installation into 1000-series Digital Telephone Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone The following provides information on how to connect the DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephones (SLTs) to the DK system. Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page 11-3. The digital SLTs connect to the digital telephone ports via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. If using 24 AWG cable, single-pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for DKT2001 model standard telephones to operate effectively at up to 1000 feet from the system. To accommodate the digital telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ11) at the station location. The standard single-pair, modular DKT2001 model standard telephone cord that is sent with the telephone is 7 ft. (the maximum allowed is 25 ft.). 3532 Digital telephone cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length), or high resistance or faulty cable splices. ➤ To wall mount DKT2001 digital SLTs 1. Loosen the screws, and remove the telephone base. Handset Hanger 2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. 3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on the front of the phone. The hanger fits in the notch on the handset cradle. 4. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it to the telephone with its four screws. 6. Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base. 7. Mount the phone on the wall mounting modular connector plate. Strata DK I&M 5/00 3633 Figure 11-7 Removing the Telephone Base Station Apparatus 5. Connect the phone to the wall modular connector with a cord approximately four inches long (available at most telephone supply companies). 11-11 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone Installation 1. Set the DIP switches to match Figure 11-8. The DIP switches are preset from the factory for the USA and Canada. Refer to Table 11-1 on Page 11-4 for other country settings. 2. If required to achieve maximum distance (greater than 1000 ft.), install a two-pair house cable (or external power). ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 Programming Program 03: Specify Code 61 to indicate a station line PDKU2. Program 27: Adjusts initial off-hook volume level for digital telephone handsets. Program 38: Specify Code 21. Program 39: Specify button 01 as a [PDN]. 3482 Important! Note Do not program CO lines or secondary line appearances Figure 11-8 DKT2001 DIP Switch Settings onto button 01 or in any other position. Since the system assigns CO lines 01~17 by default, be sure to remove any CO line appearances by programming them as Station Speed Dial buttons (code ). If the 6SHHG'LDO6HOHFW button is removed, the key becomes the 6SHHG'LDO 6HOHFW button. While on an outside call, the user must press then to activate the and DTMF tones for the duration of the call. Program 92-5: Initializes initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring volume levels of digital telephones. Also, refer to the Numerical Programming Listing in the Strata DK Programming Manual for other station-related programs. 11-12 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone DVSU Upgrade Installation Red Wire See Figures 11-2 and 11-9~11-12 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. Red Wire 2. Loosen the four captive screws on the metal plate to the standoffs inside the base. Remove and discard the plate. 3. Position the DVSU PCB on the standoffs), and secure with the four provided screws. 4. If installing the DVSU into a 2000series digital telephone and then connect the DVSU wire plugs to the DVSU connectors on the PCB inside the telephone. 1483 Figure 11-9 DVSU Installation for Digital ...or if installing the DVSU into a Telephones 1000-series digital telephone and connect the DVSU wire plugs to the DVSU connectors on the PCBs inside the telephone. 5. Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws. W101 W102 RED P1 DVSU DIU&DVSU DIU&ADM RED P6 RED P2 P3 HHEU EX.POW W204 RED HHEU EX.SP RED W204 W204 W101 W102 EX.POW P1 RED BEEP W203 HHEU W201 W202 EX.SP 1484 Figure 11-10 Strata DK I&M DKT2010-S Strap and Connector Locations 5/00 Station Apparatus W203 Carbon P2 Carbon W201 W202 BEEP RED P6 W409 DVSU DIU&DVSU DIU&ADM HS-BOV EX.POW 1485 Figure 11-11 DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, and DKT2020-SD Strap and Connector Locations 11-13 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone Ex: Power DKT1020H DKT1020SD HHEU W303 W302 Carbon W301 Carbon W101/W102-1020H Beep W301-1020H W304-1020SD W202 HHEU W201 W203 Carbon Ex: Power 0 T1 D 0K -2 1O T K D K D W101/W102-1020SD -S B U (S P F) S TO DVSU A N H IB H 1020SD Room Noise Switch HHEU Red Wire DVSU DVSU Ex. SP Strap W204-1020H W305-1020SD Red HHEU Wire 1486 Figure 11-12 Red Wire DVSU 1000-series Digital Telephone Strap and Connector Locations Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU) The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset upgrade (HHEU) enables an external speaker (HESB) for the Loud Ringing Bell feature and/or a headset to be connected to both series of digital telephones. Notes ● ● ● ● ● 11-14 There are two types of HHEUs: the HHEU1 (which has four versions, V.1~V.4) and the HHEU2. Both 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones require either an HHEU2 or a V.3 or V.4 HHEU1 for HESB operation; earlier HHEU1 versions are only sufficient for headset operation only. Only digital telephones equipped with an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The HHEU2 is identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that the HHEU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall mounting. A Toshiba HESC-65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in a digital telephone to the HESB. 1000-series digital telephones cannot be equipped with the HHEU (any type or version) and the integrated data interface unit (PDIU-DI) at the same time, but 2000-series digital telephones can support an HHEU and a RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 at the same time. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone HHEU Upgrade Installation See Figures 11-2 and 11-10~11-14 and follow these steps: Component Side of HHEU SW601 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base. OCA (HHEU1 V.4 or HHEU2) 2. Use a screwdriver or other suitable tool to remove the plastic tab on the back of the base. (The HHEU modular connector for the headset is accessed through this opening.) 3. If installing a V.3 HHEU1, set the SW601 switch on the HHEU to headset for the headset or loud bell application. P601 HHEU V.4 HHEU1 and HHEU2 do not have this switch, because they are automatically set for the headset/loud bell application. 1487 Figure 11-13 4. Connect the HESC-65A cable to P601 of the HHEU (both HHEU1A versions and the HHEU2 have P601) if the Loud Ringing Bell option is required. Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures. HHEU Installation for Digital Telephones Feed Through for HESC-65(A) Cable To HESB Block 1488 5. For the V.3 HHEU1: If only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut both sides of the R607 resistor, then remove the resistor to eliminate electrical contact. HESC-65 Cable or HESC-65A Cable HHEU P601 Station Apparatus Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. Note SW601 ...or For the V.4 HHEU1 and the HHEU2: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut the speaker OCA strap. Note Strata DK I&M Figure 11-14 HESC-65A Cabling Do not cut the speaker OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. 5/00 11-15 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone 6. Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided screws. Note See Figures 11-10~11-12 for Steps 7~8. 7. For 2000-series digital telephones. Connect the wire plug of the HHEU PCB to the HHEU connector on the PCB in the phone. ...or for 1000-series digital telephones. Connect the wire plug of the HHEU to the HHEU connector on the PCB of the phone. 8. For 2000-series digital telephones: If an HESB will be connected to the HHEU (for Loud Ringing Bell), locate the EX.SP strap on the PCB in the telephone and cut the strap. ...or for 1000-series digital telephones: If an HESB will be connected to the HHEU, locate and cut the EX.SP strap on the upper PCB in the phone. 9. For 2000-series digital telephones: If a headset will be connected to the HHEU, locate and cut the HHEU strap on the PCB in the phone. ...or for 1000-series digital telephones: a headset will be connected to the HHEU, locate and cut the HHEU strap on the upper PCB in the phone Note If the HHEU PCB is removed from the phone, the HHEU strap must be replaced for proper telephone operation. 10. Reinstall the telephone base; secure with the four captive screws. ➤ To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud Ringing Bell 1. Call the telephone connected to the HESB. 2. Adjust the volume control on the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the telephone. Carbon Headset/Handset Straps If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the telephone, two jumper straps inside the telephone must be cut. ➤ To cut the straps Note You do not need to cut these straps if the headset is connected to the HHEU. See Figures 11-2 and 11-10~11-12 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base. 2. For 2000-series digital telephones, and cut the W201 and W202 carbon straps. ...or For 1000-series digital telephones, cut the carbon straps (W301 and W302 on the DKT1020SD; W201 and W203 on the DKT1020-H). 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. 11-16 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone Beep Strap A “beep” sounds whenever a dial pad or feature button is pressed on a digital telephone. ➤ To eliminate the beep sound See Figures 11-2 and 11-10~11-12 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws from the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Cut the beep strap. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only) High ambient noise levels may cause the speaker on some digital telephone speakerphone models to cut off frequently. ➤ To make the 1000-series digital telephone models less sensitive to loud surrounding noise 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the 1000-series digital telephone speakerphone base (Figure 11-2), and remove the base. 2. For the 1000-series speakerphone model (DKT1020-SD), see Figure 11-12, and locate the room noise switch. Push the switch carefully to the H (high) position (for low sensitivity) when there is high background noise in the area surrounding the telephone. 3. Reinstall the telephone base. ➤ To make the 2000-series digital telephone models less sensitive to loud surrounding noise ➤ Hold down 0LF button, then press the 9RO ▲ button. The less-sensitive level will be set after the third flash of the Mic LED. ➤ To reset the sensitivity back to the normal level ➤ Hold down the 0LF button, then press the 9RO ▼ button. The normal level will be set after the third flash of the Mic LED. Note Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option Using a 2000-series digital telephone, the busy override and camp-on ring tones can be sent over the telephone handset or headset, in addition to the speaker. Using a 1000-series digital telephone, the tones sound only over the speaker. Station Apparatus On 2000-series digital telephone speakerphone models that are set for low sensitivity, the Mic LED flashes at the in-use rate when the speakerphone is used. When set to normal sensitivity, the Mic LED is on steady when using the speakerphone. ➤ To send busy override/camp-on ring tones over the handset of the DKT2010-H model 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base (Figure 11-2), and remove the base. 2. Install a strap in the HS-BOV W409 location (see Figure 11-10). 3. Reinstall the telephone base. Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-17 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone ➤ To send busy override/camp-on ring tones over the handset/headset of the DKT2010-SD/ 2020-S/2020-SD ➤ Hold down the 5HGLDO button and press the 9RO▲ button. ➤ To block the tone over the handset/headset of the DKT2010-SD/2020-S/2020-SD ➤ Hold down the 5HGLDO button and press the 9RO▼ button. Note For this to function properly with headsets, make sure the speaker OCA strap or R607 is cut on the HHEU PCB and the HHEU strap is cut on the telephone. (See “Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU)” on Page 11-14) External Power Straps Digital telephones equipped with options such as integrated data interface units and ADMs require two-pair wiring or external power to operate efficiently at the maximum-allowed distance from the KSU. Two-pair wiring or external power is also necessary for maximum cable run lengths for digital telephones that are connected to systems that must operate with reserve power. (Table 5-2 on Page 5-5.) Each digital telephone has two external power straps which must be cut for external power when the cabling of the telephone is connected to an external AC/DC power supply. ➤ To cut the straps See Figures 11-2 and 11-10~11-12 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Depending on the telephone, locate the W101 and W102 external power straps and cut them. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Note Refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for external AC/DC power supply ordering information and installation instructions. DKT2000 ADM Installation See “Digital Add-on Module Installation” on Page 11-35. 11-18 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Electronic Telephone Upgrades Electronic Telephone Upgrades This section describes how to upgrade and configure electronic telephones for features and options. Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI) Electronic telephones must be equipped with either the HVSU2 subassembly or the combined HVSU and HVSI subassemblies to receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. These telephones also require three-pair wiring to receive speaker OCA, instead of the standard two-pair. Telephones making speaker OCA calls do not require an upgrade or extra wire pair. Notes ● See Notes in Figure 11-6 on Page 11-10. ● Handset OCA is not available on electronic telephones. HVSU2 Upgrade Installation See Figures 11-2 and 11-15 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Position the HVSU2 on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided screws. 3. Connect the HVSU2 wire plug to the P2 connector on the PCB in the telephone. To HVSU Connector (P2) On Main PCB Inside Telephone R-UP (6510-H, 6510-S, 6520-S) HVSU2 Room Noise To HHEU Connector P1 RED P1 HI P2 Beep Strap Carbon RED R-UP (6520-SD) Red Wire To HVSU Connector, P2 HHEU Strap W203 1489 Figure 11-15 HVSU Installation for Electronic Telephones Strata DK I&M 5/00 1490 Station Apparatus Carbon Straps W201 W202 11-19 Station Apparatus Electronic Telephone Upgrades HVSU/HVSI Upgrade Installation See Figures 11-2 and 11-15~11-16 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. To P2 HVSU Connector on Main PCB Inside Telephone P5 HSVI HVSU 2. Align the P5 connector on the HVSI subassembly with the receptacle on the HVSU subassembly. Apply firm, even pressure to the PCBs to ensure that the connectors mate properly (they should click). Note Exercise care when assembling the HVSU to the HVSI to prevent damage to the connector pins; also, verify that the HVSU is aligned with the silk-screened image on the HVSI. 1491 3. Position the HVSU/HVSI subassembly on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two screws provided. Figure 11-16 HVSI/HVSU Installation for Electronic Telephones 4. Connect the HVSU/HVSI subassembly wire plug to the P2 connector on the electronic telephone PCB. 5. Reinstall the electronic telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. 11-20 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Electronic Telephone Upgrades Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU) The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset upgrade (HHEU) enables an external speaker (HESB) and/or a headset to be connected to the electronic telephone. The HESB serves as a loud ringing bell when connected to a telephone. Notes ● ● ● ● There are two types of HHEU: the HHEU1 (which has four versions, V.1~V.4) and the HHEU2. Only electronic telephones equipped with an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The HHEU2 is identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that the HHEU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall mounting. A Toshiba HESC-65 or HESC-65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in an electronic telephone to the HESB. Refer to Chapter 12– Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures. All HHEU versions and types, except for V.1 HHEU1, are compatible with the Speaker Offhook Call Announce upgrades (HVSU2 and HVSU/HVSI). HHEU Upgrade Installation Component Side of HHEU See Figures 11-2, 11-14, 11-15 and 11-17 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool, remove the plastic tab on the back of the base. The HHEU modular connector for the headset will be accessed through this opening. 4. Connect either the HESC-65 or HESC65A cable to P601 of the HHEU if the Loud Ringing Bell option is required. Refer to Chapter 12– Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures. SW601 (HHEU1A V.1 ~V.3) To P1, HHEU Connector of Telephone PCB OCA (HHEU1 V.4 or HHEU2) P601 HHEU 1492 Figure 11-17 HHEU Installation for Electronic Telephones Station Apparatus 3. If using a V.3 or earlier HHEU1, set the SW601 switch to the HEADSET position for HESB and/or headset connection. This switch is not on either the V.4 HHEU1 or the HHEU2, because the operation is automatic with these subassemblies. R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) 5. For the V.3 or earlier HHEU1: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut both sides of the R607 resistor on the HHEU and remove the resistor to eliminate electrical contact. Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. Note ...or Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-21 Station Apparatus Electronic Telephone Upgrades For the V.4 HHEU1 or the HHEU2: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut the speaker OCA strap. Note Do not cut the speaker OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the loud ringing bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. 6. Position the HHEU subassembly on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two screws provided. 7. Connect the HHEU subassembly wire plug to the P1 connector on the electronic telephone PCB. 8. Cut the HHEU strap on the telephone PCB. Note The HHEU strap must be replaced if the HHEU PCB is removed from the telephone. 9. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Adjust (HESB) Loud Ringing Bell Volume 1. Call the telephone connected to the HESB. 2. Adjust the volume control on both the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the telephone. Carbon Headset/Handset Straps If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the 6500-series electronic telephone, two straps inside the telephone must be cut. ➤ To cut the straps Note It is not necessary to cut these straps if the headset is connected to the HHEU. See Figures 11-2 and 11-15 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Locate the carbon straps, W201 and W202 and cut them. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Beep Strap A “beep” sounds whenever a dial pad button or feature button is pressed on an electronic telephone. ➤ To eliminate the beep See Figures 11-2 and 11-15 and follow these steps: 1. Remove the four captive screws on the telephone base to the telephone and remove the base. 2. Locate and cut the beep strap on the telephone PCB. 3. Reinstall the electronic telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws. 11-22 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speakerphones only) High ambient noise levels may cause the speaker on the electronic telephone speakerphone models (the EKT6510-S, EKT6520-S, and EKT6520-SD) to cut off frequently. ➤ To make these telephones less sensitive to noise and to prevent the cut-off See Figures 11-2 and 11-15 and follow these steps: 1. Remove the four captive screws on the base to the telephone, and remove the base. 2. Locate the room noise switch on the PCB inside the telephone, and push it carefully to the HI (high) position. 3. Reinstall the telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws. Handset Receiver Volume-up Strap (Version 2 6500-series Telephones Only) For Version 2 (V.2) 6500-series electronic telephones only, the handset receiver volume can be increased six decibels (dB) by cutting a strap inside the telephone. ➤ To cut the strap See Figures 11-2 and 11-15 and follow these steps: 1. Remove the four captive screws on the telephone base to the telephone, and remove the base. 2. Locate the R-UP strap on the PCB inside the telephone and cut it. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure in place using the four captive screws. Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection The Strata DK40i can support up to three DSS consoles DK424 systems configured with RCTUA can support up to three DSS consoles, ♦ DK424 RCTUB and DK424i B1CAU support up to four DSS consoles ♦ DK424 RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F and DK424i B2CAU/BU, B32CAU/BU, B52CAU/BU up to eight consoles. There are two types of consoles: the Digital DSS (DDSS) and the Electronic (HDSS) console. The DDSS console can be connected to designated digital telephone circuits, and the HDSS console can only be connected to designated PEKU circuits. This section provides instructions on how to install both types of consoles. Station Apparatus ♦ DDSS Console Connections The DDSS console, which can operate with a digital telephone (preferably an LCD model), can connect only to circuit 8 of a PDKU digital telephone circuit. Strata DK I&M 5/00 1872 11-23 Station Apparatus Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection Standard twisted single-pair or two-pair jacketed telephone cable (maximum 1000 feet, 303 meters) is used for the connection. To accommodate the DDSS console connection, the instrument end of the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ11). Refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details. Notes ● ● DDSS console cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length) or high resistance or faulty cable splices. See the appropriate Installation chapter for secondary protection information and loop limits. CAUTION! When installing the DDSS cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. DDSS Console Configuration An RDSU will not support a DDSS. DDSS Programming Program 03: Code 64 identifies the slots that support DDSS consoles. Program 28: Assigns DDSS console(s) to telephones. Program 29: Assigns button functions for DDSS consoles. HDSS Console HDSS Console Connections The HDSS console must be connected to the data pairs of circuits 7 and 8 on a PEKU with standard two-pair twisted, jacketed telephone cable. To accommodate the connection, the instrument end of the HDSS console cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ11). Refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details. If using 24 AWG cable, the overall length of the cable run from the Expansion Unit (KSU) to the HDSS console must not exceed 500 feet (152 meters). The HDSS console can operate with either an electronic or digital telephone (preferably an LCD model). CAUTION! 11-24 When installing the HDSS console cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. Avoid running HDSS console wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Door Phone (MDFB) HDSS Console Configuration The following considerations should be made when installing an HDSS console: ♦ A PEKU PCB is required. ♦ Two PEKU ports are required for the HDSS console (always circuits 7 and 8). ♦ The PESU does not support the HDSS console. HDSS Programming Program 03: Codes 23 and 24 identify the slot that supports a PEKU that interfaces with the HDSS console. Program 28: Assigns HDSS console to a telephone. Program 29: Assigns individual button functions for the HDSS console. Door Phone (MDFB) This section provides installation instructions for the Door Phone (MDFB). Door Phones can be installed can also with Door Phone/Lock Control Units (see following section). ♦ DK14 can have up to 6 door phones ♦ DK40i can have up to nine door phones ♦ DK424 and DK424i can have up to 12 door phones 1873 Lock Control Unit and Door Phone DDCBs or HDCBs can only connect to slot 11/port 004, slot 12/ port 012, slot 13/port 020 and slot 14/port 028. DDCBs can only connect to circuit 5 (a PDKU or RDSU PCB and HDCBs can connect only to circuit 5 of a PEKU or PESU PCB). DDCBs and HDCBs cannot connect to the RSTU2, PSTU, or KCDU. Strata DK I&M 5/00 1874 Station Apparatus This section provides installation instructions for the Digital (DDCB) or Electronic (HDCB) Door Phone/Lock Control Units. Each DDCB or HDCB can support as many as three MDFBs or two MDFBs and one door lock. 11-25 Station Apparatus Lock Control Unit and Door Phone DDCB/HDCB and MDFB Cabling For DDCB, HDCB, and MDFB wiring/interconnecting details and door lock control installation procedures, refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring. If using 24 AWG cable, the length of the cable run from the Strata DK to the MDFB (via the DDCB or HDCB) must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 meters). ● ● DDCB or HDCB cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length) or high resistance or faulty cable splices. See Chapters 1, 3, 5 or 7 for Strata DK14, DK40i, DK424 or DK424i secondary protection information and loop limits. DDCB/HDCB Wall Mounting External Power Straps (DDCB Only) The DDCB and HDCB is designed to be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. ➤ To mount the units 1493 1. Locate the two mounting holes on the right-hand side on the DDCB or HDCB (see Figure 11-18). KSU Jack 2. Remove the side cover from the DDCB or HDCB to expose the two left-hand mounting holes. MDFB Jack A~C 3. Position the DDCB or HDCB adjacent to the Base KSU with regard to wiring needs. KS DO PH OR ON E 4. Secure the DDCB or HDCB to the mounting surface with four one-inch panhead wood screws. A B Mounting Screws (4) C Note Figure 11-18 11-26 U See Table 3-2 regarding external power requirements. Door Phone (DDCB or HDCB) Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Lock Control Unit and Door Phone MDFB Wall Mounting Base 1. Remove the screw from the bottom of the cover. Detach the cover from the base and metal frame (see Figure 11-19). Metal Frame 2. Position the metal frame and base to the mounting surface and secure with two one-inch panhead wood screws. 3.25 inches 3. Attach cover to the metal frame and base and secure with the screw which was removed in Step 1. MDFB Volume Control Adjustments 1. Remove the screw from the bottom of the MDFB cover. 2. Detach the cover from the base and metal frame. Two Wall Mounting Holes Door Phone 1494 Figure 11-19 Door Phone (MDFB) 3. The volume level is changed by a screw adjustment on the back of the MDFB. Turn the screw with a flatheaded screwdriver while ringing the MDFB or while on a call with it. The volume level will change as the screw is turned. Door Phone/Lock Programming Program 39: Assigns door phone and door lock buttons to digital telephones. Program 77-1: Assigns DDCBs or HDCB to ports, door phone ringing over external page during the NIGHT mode, and door lock activation time. Program 77-2: Busy out unused MDFB positions, identifies which DDCBs support the door lock option, and sets the door phone to ring one or five times. Each DDCB/HDCB door lock assignment will reduce the system door phone capacity by one (see Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for HDCB, DDCB, and PIOU/PIOUS door lock installation information). Program 79: Assigns door phone-to-station ringing assignments. Program *79: Assigns which [DN] flashes on telephones assigned in Program 79. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Note 11-27 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephones Cordless Digital Telephones Toshiba offers two cordless digital telephone models, the DKT2104-CT and the DKT2004-CT. These cordless digital telephones bring mobility and productivity to office telephones. Greater call access cuts down on leaving messages and playing “telephone tag.” The compact designs of both the DKT2104-CT and the DKT2004-CT offer easy portability and mobility within the office complex. Both the DKT2104-CT and DKT2004-CT feature digital 900 MHz technology and represent state-of-the-art design and engineering. The DKT2104-CT and DKT2004-CT telephones operate from the same digital station port on the PDKU2 as the DKT2000-series digital telephone which may or may not be attached. They cannot receive Group Pages or All Call Pages. They can be attached to a Toshiba DKT2000-series corded digital telephone or used as a stand-alone. 1876 DKT2004-CT The DKT2004-CT either attaches to a Toshiba DKT2000-series corded digital telephone or is used as a stand-alone. It provides many sophisticated Strata features: ♦ 900 MHz Digital Spread Spectrum technology ♦ LCD provides information such as User Name, DNIS and Caller ID ♦ Four programmable buttons for feature, multiple line or feature access ♦ Headset jack (headset optional) ♦ Handset volume adjustment ♦ Conference/Transfer (&QI7UQ) button ♦ Message Waiting LED ♦ +ROG button ♦ 20 Speed Dial number memory (in addition to 40 station speed dials) Precautions Before you read anything else, please observe the following: WARNING! Toshiba does not represent this unit to be waterproof. To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or damage to the unit, do not expose this unit to rain or moisture. DKT2004-CT Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery Warning 11-28 ♦ This equipment contains a Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery. ♦ Cadmium is a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer. ♦ The Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery contained in this equipment may explode if disposed of in a fire. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephones ♦ Do not short circuit the battery. ♦ Do not charge the Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery used in this equipment in any charger other than the one designed to charge this battery as specified in this Guide. Using another charger may damage the battery, or cause the battery to explode. Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Batteries Must Be Recycled or Disposed of Properly ♦ Residents of Minnesota should contact 1-800-225-PRBA for information concerning reclamation and disposal of Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium batteries. ♦ Residents outside of Minnesota should contact their local authorities for information concerning reclamation and disposal of Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium batteries.: WARNING! To reduce risk of fire, use only Model EXP9580 or EXP9586 batteries. CAUTION! To power your Toshiba DKT2004-CT Cordless base unit, use only UL Listed AC Adapter Model AD-9500 Class 2 Power Supply. Ratings are: Input: 120VAC 14W Output: 0VDC 500mA Important! Charge your battery for 10 hours before using your new Cordless Digital Telephone. DKT2104-CT The DKT2104-CT works with Strata DK telephone systems (except Strata DK24/56/96, Release 3) and provides you with reliability, long life, and outstanding performance. Some of its features are: 900 MHz Digital Narrow Band technology ♦ 30 Simultaneous channels ♦ LCD that wraps using 2 lines, total of 32 characters ♦ Four displayed operation modes, including Message Waiting (MW) ♦ +ROG, 06* (LCD icon), &QI7UQ, and 0XWH buttons ♦ Headset jack (headset optional) ♦ Five handset ring modes, including a vibration mode ♦ Simultaneous charging of handset and spare batteries ♦ Wall-mount or desktop unit with wall-mount plate, and belt clip included. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus ♦ 11-29 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephones Cordless Telephone Installation (DKT2004-CT and DKT2104-CT) Important! Your telephone system must be programmed for Auto Preference for your TALK button to work. If there is a shared digital telephone, you receive internal system dial tone automatically after picking up the handset of your deskset. For example, in a DK system, Program 32 must have a setting other than “00.” It is best to set Auto Line Preference to access Intercom dial tone. ➤ To install the cordless telephone 1. Select a location for your cordless digital telephone. Avoid excessive heat or humidity. For wall mounting, refer to the following section. 2. Place the cordless digital telephone’s base unit on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120VAC outlet and within reach of the digital telephone line connection to your Strata DK system. 3. Keep the base unit and handset away from sources of electrical noise (motors, fluorescent lighting, etc.). Important! Place the cordless telephone to the right of the DKT. If placed on the left of the DKT, the cordless antenna will pick up a tone due to its close proximity to the DKT speaker and electronic parts. ➤ To mount on a wall 1. Select a wall location near a 120VAC outlet and within reach of the Strata DK digital line connection. 2. Place the wall plate (shown at right) against the wall, and with a pencil, mark the position of the screws.With a punch tool, punch “starter” holes in the wall. 3. Align the wall plate and screws on the wall where the “starter” holes are and tighten down the screws. 4449 4. Ensure that the wall-mount plate is placed on the wall so that the “feet” are at the bottom when you are looking at the inside of the plate. 5. Snap the Base Unit onto the plate. 4507 11-30 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephones Telephone Cord Connection There are two telephone line jacks on the back of the base unit of your cordless digital telephone: “Line In” and “Line Out.” You can connect the cordless digital telephone to both the telephone line and a Strata DK digital telephone. ➤ To connect cords for use as a stand-alone telephone ➤ Connect the modular jack labeled “Line In” to the telephone wall jack. ...or ➤ To connect cords for use with a desk telephone 1. Unplug the telephone line cord from your desk telephone. 2. Connect this cord to “Line In” of your cordless telephone. 3. Using the two foot modular cord that came with your cordless telephone, connect the jack labeled “Line Out” to the desk telephone. Connect and Apply Power to Base Unit The AC adapter furnished with this telephone may be equipped with a polarized line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug fits into the power outlet only one way. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug still does not fit, contact your facilities coordinator about replacing the obsolete plug. Do not alter the shape of the blades on the polarized plug. ➤ To connect the cordless telephone using the AC adapter 1. Plug the AC adapter cord into the AC adapter input jack on the base unit (see Figure 11-20). Use only the AC adapter supplied with your cordless digital telephone. 1145 CAUTION! AC Adapter Modular Cords Line Out to DKT See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring Station Apparatus 5232 Line in to Digital Telephone Circuit (DK14 KSU; DK40i Base KSU or KCDU, or DK40i, DK424, DK424i PDKU2 or RDSU) Figure 11-20 Cordless Telephone AC Adapter Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-31 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephones Cordless Telephone Connectors 2. Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120VAC wall outlet. 3. Route the power cord where it is not a trip hazard, and where it will not become chafed and create a fire or electrical hazard. 4. Wrap the power cord around the notch on the bottom of the base unit (see Figure 11-21). 5. Check to see that the power LED is on, indicating the telephone has power. 6. Before using your cordless digital telephone, be sure to raise the antenna to the vertical position. 1175 Figure 11-21 Line Out Cord Attach/Remove Belt Clip to Handset (optional) ➤ To attach the belt clip to the handset 1. Snap the tabs of the belt clip into the notches on the sides of the handset. 2. Use the belt clip to attach the handset to your belt or pocket for convenient portability. ➤ To remove the belt clip 1. Pry one tab at a time from the notch on the side of the handset. 2. Carefully lift the belt clip off. The belt clip is designed to fit snugly onto the handset. Handset Battery Pack Installation 1. Place a charged battery pack onto the handset so that it slides easily along the ridges. If your battery is not charged, see “Removing and Charging Your Battery Pack” on Page 11-32. 2. Slide the battery pack up onto the handset until it clicks into place. You are now ready to configure your cordless digital telephone. Removing and Charging Your Battery Pack Before using your new cordless digital telephone, the battery must be charged continuously for 6 to 8 hours. ➤ To remove the handset’s battery pack 1. Press in on the battery pack release latch. 2. Slide the battery pack off the handset. Note 11-32 You may have to pull hard to slide the battery pack off, when the handset is new. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephones ➤ To charge the DKT2001-CT handset’s battery pack 1. Place the handset on the base unit. 2. Make sure the CHARGE LED lights. If it does not light, check to see that the AC adapter is plugged in and that the handset is making good contact with the base unit. ➤ To charge extra battery packs 1. Position the battery pack so the inner side is facing toward the top of the base unit. 2. Slide the battery pack into the charging compartment until it clicks into place. 3. Make sure the BATTERY CHARGE LED lights. If it does not light, make sure the AC adapter is plugged in and that the battery pack is seated into the charger. Note Charge the standard 400 mAh battery pack without interruption for 6-8 hours. Charge the optional 730 mAh extended battery pack without interruption for 8-10 hours. ➤ To charge the DKT2104-CT handset’s battery pack Important! Before using your handset, the battery must be continuously charged for 10 hours. 1. Place the handset in the Charger Unit (shown at right). 2. Ensure that charge 1 LED lights. If it does not, make sure that the AC adapter is plugged in and that the handset is making good contact with the Charger Unit. NAL RY TERMI FIRE BATTE FROM THE AWAY RY SHORT NOT RY PACK THE BATTE ● DO BATTE RGE THE TO RECHA ● KEEP USE MBER EVERY AFTER PACK RGERECHA ACID RY. D LEADLE BATTE SEALE PILLAB OR NONS LED ABLE RLY. BE RECYC MUST OF PROPE SED DISPO LTD. RY CO., GE BATTE STORA JAPAN IN JAPAN MADE Pb ● REME : CAUTION BAT GEABLE RECHARBT-9000 EL Ah MOD 500m DK 4V, 3. Slide the spare battery in the rear slot of the Charger Unit (shown at right) until it clicks into place. TERY 4. Make sure that the top (marked with plus and minus signs) faces down toward the bottom of the Charger Unit. 5. Ensure that charge 2 LED lights. If it does not, make sure that the AC adapter is plugged in and that the handset is making good contact with the Charger Unit. Charging Extra Battery Packs The base unit of your cordless digital telephone is equipped with a battery charger for charging an extra battery pack. This compartment has a latch that keeps the battery pack in place during charging. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus 4479 11-33 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephones Tips on Extending Battery Pack Life All rechargeable nickel cadmium batteries can develop a “memory” (reduced charge capacity) caused by repeated charge and discharge cycles. Batteries that have developed this effect do not operate to their fullest capacity. ➤ To avoid memory effect ➤ Operate the unit until the battery pack is completely discharged before recharging. For example, use the handset off the base all day. Only replace the handset on the base at night after a full day of use. Do not “top off” the charge after using the battery for a short time. ➤ To erase memory effect ➤ Operate the unit until the battery pack is completely discharged, then recharge it fully. Repeat this process at least three times. LCD Low Battery Indicator When the battery pack in the handset is low and needs to be charged you see this message on the display and the handset beeps. Table 11-3 shows symptoms. Table 11-3 Low Battery Symptoms On a Call... In Standby Mode... Only the 7$/. key operates. None of the keys operate. Handset beeps once every three seconds Handset beeps once. Complete your call as quickly as possible Cannot make call. Replace battery pack. Replace battery pack before making a call. ➤ To restore your battery capacity ➤ Return the handset to the base unit for charging or replace the handset battery pack with another charged one. 11-34 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus Digital Add-on Module Installation Digital Add-on Module Installation Install one or two DADM 2020s to a 2000-series digital telephone (only). ♦ DK14 supports up to 8 DADMs ♦ DK40i supports up to 12 DADMs The number of DADMs supported by the DK424 depends on the common control PCB: ♦ RCTUA supports 12 DADMs ♦ RCTUB and B1CAU supports 40 DADMs ♦ RCTUC/D B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU supports 120 DADMs ♦ RCTUE/F and B5CAU/BU support 200 DADMs The DADM provides DSS buttons, speed dial buttons and CO line buttons. Notes ♦ See the appropriate system Installation Chapter for loop length and secondary protection requirements. ♦ DADMs cannot be installed on telephones that have RPCI-DI on OCA/DVSU installed. ➤ To install DADMs 1870 See Figure 11-22 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the 2000series digital telephone base and remove the base. 2. Remove the base handset hanger. 3. Loosen two captive screws on DADM and remove bases. 4. Put the DADM supplied cable through the telephone and DADM bases. 6. Install base of DADM and telephone– tuck DADM cable into DADM and telephone base, as necessary, for proper length. 7. Secure DADM to telephone base with DADM connecting plate (using four screws). 8. If required to achieve maximum distance, install 2-pair house cable (or external power) and 2pair modular cord, supplied with DADM. (See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.) Station Apparatus 5. Connect DADM cable connectors to P1 of DADM and P1 of DKT2000 telephone. 9. If a second DADM should be installed, connect P1 of the second DADM to P2 of the first DADM with the DADM connecting cable. Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-35 Station Apparatus Digital Add-on Module Installation (Smaller Connector) 4-Screws P1 P 2 (No Connection) 4-Screws 1 1 10 Second DADM 12 DADM Connection Plate (provided with DADM) DADM Base DADM Cable (Supplied with DADM) Remove Handset Hanger Black Wire to Pin 1 First DADM P1 P2 1 10 Telephone Base 1 Black Wire to Pin 1 12 1 (Larger Connector) DIU & ADM P1 of Bottom PCB 2000-Series Digital Telephone DADM2020 DADM2020 2000-Series DKT View of Bottom 1495 Figure 11-22 Digital Add-On-Module ADM Programming ADMs are programmed in Program *29. Important! To activate the ADM, Program *29 must be entered for each telephone port equipped with an DADM. See the Strata DK programming record sheets in the Strata DK Programming Manual for button defaults. 11-36 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console PC Attendant Console The PC attendant console (DK-PCATT) requires a customer-supplied, IBM-compatible PC. A VGA or SVGA monitor and a COM port dedicated to the PC attendant console is required. Toshiba recommends the following for the PC attendant console: Pentium processor/100 MHz, 16 MB RAM, 1.44 MB floppy drive, 200 MB hard drive, and a mouse. A tower that sits on the floor is provides better monitor visibility (as opposed to a desktop model). Microsoft® Windows® 95 software must be resident on the PC. Windows 3.1 will work, but Windows 95 is recommended. Important! After the PC attendant console is installed in Windows 95, you can find your old program groups by clicking the Start button (formally Program Manager) and then selecting Programs. Your groups appear as folders. To manage files in Windows 95, click the Start button, select Programs, and then click Windows Explorer (formally File Manager). Your directories appear as folders. See Table 11-4 below for Attendant Console Capacities. Table 11-4 Attendant Console Capacities Processor PCB Number of Attendant Consoles Supported RCTUB2, RCTUBA/BB, or B1CU 2 RCTUC1/D2, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE2/F3, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU, or B5CAU/BU 4 RCTUA1, RCTUA3, RCTUB1, or RCTUC/D1 0 Hardware Installation The RATU PCB can support up to four Attendant Consoles in any combination. (See “RATU Installation” on Page 9-26.) Notes ● The maximum distance from the Strata DK to either attendant console is 1000 ft. (303 m). ● Attendant console cable runs must not have the following: ● Cable splits (single or double) ● Cable bridges (of any length) ● High resistance or faulty cable splices See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for attendant console wiring. See Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation or Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation for loop length and secondary protection requirements. CAUTION! Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus ● ● When installing the PC or conventional attendant console cable, do not run the cables parallel to AC power if they are within three feet of an AC line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. 11-37 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ➤ To install the PC attendant console See Figure 11-23 and follow these steps: 1. Connect the RATI to the PC COM port a with a standard RS-232 cable. 2. Use one-pair wiring to connect the MDF to an RJ11 jack at the attendant console location. If you need to use a long cable, use two-pair for more power. 3. Plug in the handset cradle to the RJ45-jack. 4. Plug in the headset (if needed) to the handset base. 5. After programming the Strata DK system, install the PC attendant console software and complete the Telephony Setup per the instructions on “PC Attendant Console Software Installation” on Page 11-40. POW DTR DSR RATI (Front View) Carbon Jumper RATI PCB DB9-FEMALE (To PC COM Port Cable) RJ11-JACK (To RATU Modular Cord) Headset Jumper RJ45-JACK (To RATHC Modular Cord) REC OUT (To Tape Recorder "RECORD" Input) AUX IN (Not Used) 14 97 Bottom Panel Figure 11-23 RATI Assembly/Disassembly Notes ● Do not cut HEADSET jumper unless you are connecting two headsets. ● Cut CARBON jumpers if a carbon handset is connected to the RATHC handset cradle. ● 11-38 “REC OUT” can be used to monitor or record the attendant console talkpath. Both the attendant and connected party will be monitored or recorded. The record level output from the attendant handset or headset is approximately 3 dB below the connected party record level. Use a 1/8” mini audio jack. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ● ● “AUX IN” can be used to send audio to the attendant and connected party. The audio level to the attendant is approximately 10 dB below the audio level sent to the connected party. Audio sent to the outside party is limited to–15 dBv (CO Tip/Ring). Use a 1/8” mini audio jack. See Figures 10-5 and 10-18 in Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RATI cable wiring information. PC Attendant Console Programming Program 03: Code 51 assigns the RATU PCB attendant console cabinet slot number. Important! The RATU PCB takes up four station ports in software; each attendant console will be assigned one of the ports in consecutive order. Toshiba recommends installing the RATU PCB in the next highest slot number following the last station PCB installed– do not skip slots. The first port number will be the next consecutive port number following the last station port installed. Program 15: If the attendant console is used to set-up trunk-to-trunk (two CO-line or tandem) connections with loop start lines, set Program 15-5 appropriately; if the CO sends the AR-Hold signal, set 15-0 and 15-3 to Detect. If the CO does not send the AR signal, set 15-0 and 15-3 to Ignore. Loop start trunk-to-trunk calls remain on attendant hold loops only if AR-Ignore is set. Program 58 ♦ 58-1: Sets the attendant console overflow time for each console. ♦ 58-2: Sets the console display for EL or CRT (EGA) and enables or disables console call waiting tone for each console. (Not used for the PC attendant console). ♦ 58-4: Sets the console Answer key priority for each console. ♦ 58-5: Sets the console overflow destination for each console. Program 59: Assigns attendant console Flexible Buttons (Keys) for each console. Attendant Console Load Share Programming Program 81~89: Assigns CO lines (loop, ground, and DID) to share the incoming call load between consoles. (Tie lines load share on Dial “0” calls only, without the use of Programs 81~89.) All incoming CO lines (including DID lines) to be distributed between two or more Attendant Consoles should be assigned to ring each console in Programs 81~89. Note Delay ring assignments do not apply to DID lines. Programs 71 and 72: Can be used to provide an alternative assignment of DID calls using Program *09. Program 71 assigns the dialed number to ring at different locations during each Night Mode (Day, Day2, Night). DNIS tags can be added for personalized identification of calls. Program 72 provides external forwarding of calls listed in Program 71. Station Apparatus Program *09: Assigns the user company’s main listed [DN] (last four digits) to the attendant console if DID lines should ring the console. If the DID lines are assigned to ring multiple attendant console ports in Programs 81~89, DID calls will be distributed between the consoles. Only one console (any one) should be assigned with the main listed [DN] in Program *09. Program *17: Assigns each CO line to an attendant console as the DID line intercept position as required. (Intercept calls do not load share.) Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-39 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Attendant Console Load Share Programming Example The user’s company DID line [DN] is 583-3700; this number and other loop start lines should ring in a load sharing manner to each of the Company’s two Attendant Consoles in the Day, Day 2, and Night modes. Attendant consoles one and two are connected to RATU ports 024 and 025 respectively and should load share 583-3700 calls and other CO line calls. Program the DK as shown below: ♦ In Programs 81, 84, and 87, assign all CO and DID lines to ring ports 024 and 025. ♦ In Program *81, *84 and *87, assign all CO lines to flash the [PDN] of port 024. ♦ In Program *09 or 71, assign digits 3700 to port 024, and assign any other selected DID extension number(s) to port 025–note that when the DID extension number assigned to either console is dialed, calls will load share between consoles. PC Attendant Console Software Installation Step 1: Install the Software The PC attendant console requires the installation of software on an IBM-compatible PC which has been connected to the RATI. See “To install the PC attendant console” on Page 11-38. ➤ To install the software 1. Turn on the PC and open the Windows Program. 2. Insert Diskette #1 in drive A (or B). 3. Run A:\setup (or B:\setup) from Windows. The installation process will proceed and request you to remove Diskette #1 and insert Diskette #2 as the program is decompressed and installed. A new program group will be added to your Windows Program Manager for the PC Attendant. This will include three icons for running the PC Attendant, PCATT BACKUP, and TELEPHONY SETUP (see screen below). Step 2: Add the Driver Before the PC attendant console can be used, the driver for the interface to the RATI must be installed and Telephony Setup must be established. The following steps may be skipped if this driver was previously installed. 1. Click the Telephony Setup Icon or respond to the “Go to Telephony Setup box” at the end of the installation process. 1021 11-40 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console 2. From the Telephony dialog box, click the Driver Setup... button. 1022 3. In the Telephony Drivers dialog box, if “ATT Telephone Telephony SP” is shown in the driver list, go to Telephony Setup below. Otherwise, click the Add button to display the Add Dialog screen. 1023 4. From the Add Drivers dialog box, if “ATT Telephone Telephony SP” is in the list, then select it (it should be highlighted) and press Add. 1403 Step 3: Set Up the Telephony Driver 1. From the Telephony Drivers dialog box, click the Setup button. 2. From the DK PC Attendant Configuration dialog box, set the COM port used for the RATI interface (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4). Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus 5. If “ATT Telephone Telephony SP” is not listed, press Add and type c:\windows\system\att.tsp in the edit box. Click OK to return, select it in the list and press Add. 11-41 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console 3. Choose the processor type for the connected DK424 system (RCTUB or RCTUC/D). 4. Select the DK software version of the system (R2, R3 or higher). 5. Enter emergency numbers as programmed in Program 44-91~93 of the DK424. 6. Click the Default Configuration button. This will set all the parameters to match the default values of the DK424. Important! It is extremely important to match the parameters set in the DK424 with those in the Telephony Setup or the PC attendant console will not know how to operate properly. Before Step 7, go through each of the following telephony setup programs. ALL changes in these following screens must match the corresponding values in the programming of the DK424. 1024 7. The Default Configuration button will close the DK424 PC Attendant Configuration screen. To make changes, select Setup again, then continue. Default Key Assignments From the DK PC Attendant Configuration screen, the Configure Keys button takes you to the DK PC Attendant Key Configuration screen.The default key assignments are defined for R2 and R3. These key assignments must match Program 59 of the DK. The Default Config button on this screen sets the default keys only, whereas the Default Config button on the previous screen sets the system database defaults. ➤ To assign PC Attendant keys 1. From the PC Attendant Configuration dialog box, select the key that you want to change. The Key Type drop-down box shows a list of key names that can be selected for that button. The three-digit program codes are shown in front of the button for convenient programming. If the programming telephone is next to the PC attendant console, you can look at the codes on the PC Attendant screen while you program. 1026 2. Click OK after making your selections. 11-42 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Access Codes Access Codes are used by the DK424 for dialing features. The access codes (dialing plan) must match to allow the PC Attendant to dial the correct code to activate certain features. This is normally left at default, but if Program 05 is modified, corresponding changes are needed here. If no changes were made to Program 05, skip these steps. ➤ To change access codes to match Program 05 1. From the DK424 PC Attendant Configuration screen, click the Access Code button. 2. In the Access Code dialog box, click OK after making your selections. 1025 Class of Service The Class of Service settings should reflect the call states and features which are anticipated to be used the most often. 1. From the DK424 PC Attendant Configuration screen, click the Class of Service button. 2. In the Class of Service dialog box, click OK. 1028 DNIS Trunks To allow the DNIS feature to work properly, the PC attendant console needs to know whether trunk ports are being used for DNIS number translation or for CO line circuits. This assignment must follow Program 17 LED 05 in the DK424. (LED ON requires the line to be marked as DNIS.) Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus These contain two items from Program 10 for setting the operation for Tone First or Voice First when calling a [DN] on the system and for setting the system to support two or three Night Transfer modes. The Class of Service for the port assigned to the PC attendant console must match Program 30 of the DK424. 11-43 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ➤ To set DNIS trunk identification 1. From the DK PC Attendant Configuration screen, click the DNIS button. 2. From the Class/ANI DNIS Trunk Assignment dialog box, click OK when done. 1029 ➤ To exit Telephony Drivers and Telephony Setup 1. From the DK PC Attendant Configuration screen, click Close to exit the Telephony Drivers box. 2. Click Close again to exit the Telephony Setup box. PC Attendant Setup After Telephony Setup has been completed, then a series of items needs to be configured within the main program. System Settings in the main program can be easily changed since they do not require a corresponding change in the DK424 in order to function. Most of these items are found under the Main Menu heading of Setup. ➤ To access System Settings 1. From the Main Menu, select Setup. 2. Click OK or enter a password. Initially, you can click OK, without entering a password. Store a password if you need to ensure that these settings cannot be changed without authorization. Once a password is entered, you must enter that password to proceed. 1030 System Settings Once the password screen is entered, the System Settings menu is presented. The two menu items, System Code Settings and Change Station User Name, allow the Attendant to change System Administration settings in the DK424. Within System Settings, the Attendant can customize the labels for only three menu items: Door Phone, Door Unlock, and Paging. The following sections cover the main settings needed to make the console work. 11-44 1031 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Console Settings The first selection is Console Settings. This screen defines the PC attendant console main operating features, including: ♦ Auto Hold and Auto Dialing ♦ Account code length expected by the DK424 ♦ Pilot number for Voice Mail ♦ Prefix digits needed to access a mailbox for message taking ♦ Voice Mail ID codes for message answering ♦ Call Forwarding to Voice Mail 1032 More details about these settings can be found in the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide. Line Settings Each line and line group within the system can be renamed to allow for easy identification. For example, a private line for John Smith can be marked “John’s Pvt Line”. These identifiers are unique to the PC attendant console. In the Lines dialog box, you can change the names that appear in the Active Call window. The Active Call window names are different from the names that appear in the PC attendant console selection windows. The Attendant can also define a default line or line group to make dialing more efficient. The default line or line group can be used with the Directory to identify a Tie line group for easy transfer of calls. (See “Setting up the Directory” on Page 11-48 later in this section). ➤ To change CO line and names Station Apparatus 1. From the menu bar, select Setup, Settings... and OK to access the System Settings dialog box. Then select Default Line Settings. 2. From the Lines dialog box, highlight the Line or Line Group to be changed. 3. Select the corresponding edit box and enter a new name. 1033 4. Repeat for all lines or line groups that change names. User Buttons The user buttons of the PC attendant console can be customized with features used most often by the Attendant. User buttons can be set to immediately invoke a feature or to open a dialog box associated with the feature. Each button Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-45 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console can be programmed with Speed Dial or Feature buttons. (See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide for instructions on clearing buttons.) ➤ To change user buttons 1. From the System Settings dialog box, select User Buttons. 2. From the User Buttons dialog, select the button to be changed. 3. Select either Autodial or Feature to change the button. 4. Enter a feature code for the list by selecting from the pull down list or selecting the Digits box and entering a number. 1034 5. Select Label to change, if necessary. 6. Select the next button to change and repeat the process. 7. Select the OK button when all changes have been made. Answer Prompts Answer Prompts can be entered so that when new calls are presented and answered by the Attendant, the prompts will appear in the information window. Any currently recorded prompts are listed in the Answer Prompts box (shown below) and two selections on the left allow linking the prompts to a DNIS tag or CO line. Note DNIS applies to R3 and up only. The DK424 identifies calls to the Attendant position by using the default CO line indication. It can also attach a tag that was recorded in Program 71 for each DNIS number translated by the system. When lines are marked as DNIS in the Telephony Setup (see “PC Attendant Console Software Installation” on Page 11-40), the PC attendant console uses the DNIS tag to select the prompt instead of the line number. The button marked DNIS Text... is used to record the DNIS Tags which should match those listed in Program 71-5. Toshiba recommends entering DNIS tags when they are programmed into the DK system. This enables the Attendant or System Administrator to create prompts as needed. Even if some DNIS lines are not scheduled to ring at the console, the calls to be forwarded to the Attendant and answers prompts may be used later. The Answer Prompts can have approximately 110 characters. The edit window, shown below, is the same size as the window on the main screen in order to view the message as it will display. 11-46 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ➤ To write an Answer Prompt 1. From the System Settings dialog box, select Answer Prompt. 1035 2. From the Answer Prompt dialog, select the Prompts...button. 3. Select the New button. 4. Type in a new prompt message in the Prompt box. 5. Select the New button again to enter another prompt or OK to save those entered. 1036 Station Apparatus Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-47 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ➤ To write a DNIS Answer Prompt 1. From the System Settings dialog box, select Answer Prompt. 2. Select the DNIS Text... button. 3. From the DNIS Text dialog box, select the Add button. 4. Type in the Name Tag as entered in Strata DK System system programming. 5. Select the Add button to enter another prompt or the OK button to save those entered. 1037 ➤ To link a CO line or DNIS tag with an Answer Prompt 1. Click on a line or DNIS tag. 2. Highlight the Prompt. 3. Press OK. ➤ To remove an Answer Prompt from a CO or DNIS line tags ➤ Click to remove the highlight. See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide for instructions on other Answer Prompt options. Setting up the Directory The directory is a central part of the PC attendant console. Information in the directory is used for the following: ♦ Auto Dial ♦ Auto Transfer ♦ Transfers to Voice Mail ♦ Recording an individual’s status ♦ Recording messages for people without phones or for transferring to Voice Mail ♦ Recording individual’s work departments so that when a caller asks for someone in “Sales,” a list of department members will appear 1038 This is also a place to store information about different individuals and how they may be reached, for example, pagers, home office, car phones, fax, etc. It can also be used to indicate location, work schedule and supervisors of people if needed. Multiple entries of the same information is allowed. For example, two people may share the same [DN]. A call to John Smith will ring station 204 and if Sandy Johnson has the same [DN], her telephone will also ring. The same person may be entered twice. For example, John Brady may be entered with [DN] 204 and with a [PhDN] 504. 11-48 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console When there are multiple entries, Auto Dial (includes Auto Transfer) is disabled. In the first example, where two people shared the same [DN], the system would pause if the [DN] is entered. At this point, the Attendant can enter a name and as long as there are no name conflicts, the console will now Auto Transfer. When the system pauses, other calls can still be handled by Auto Dial if there are no conflicts. It is important to enter names in the same format, otherwise, the directory search function will not work and the individual will have to be selected manually. In other words, avoid entering first names for some people and first and last names for others. For example, if I created an entry for Pat L and another for Pat Long, the first entry would never be selected because the console will look for a match to Pat Long. If an “o” is entered after the “L”, the console will select Pat Long. Avoid using abbreviations in the initial entry. Use the “Dept” field for grouping people who need to be reached by function. Directory entries with this field left blank will not show in the “Dept Select” feature. Assigning a consistent list allows for all people within a group to show on the list together, offering the Attendant a method to choose the person that can best serve the caller. See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide for instructions on adding entries into the Directory. Establishing the Speed Dial List The Speed Dialing list must be established before the list will show in the Dialing window. This can be done in one of two ways. Method 1 With the first method, you transfer a Speed Dial list that was previously entered into the DK system to the PC attendant console. Once you have completed the following procedure, the PC attendant console will store the numbers to match those stored in the system.Then, when the Attendant uses this Speed Dial list, the PC attendant console dials the code for speed dial and the DK system uses the number it has in memory. ➤ To transfer the DK Speed Dial list to the PC attendant console 1. If the Speed Dial list has been entered into the DK system, then select each speed dial entry. 2. Press the Modify button. Note Station Apparatus 3. (optional) Enter a name for the number. This name is stored in the PC attendant console only and is not downloaded into the DK system Speed Dial Memo. Method 2 1039 With Method 2, you enter a list of Speed Dial names and numbers from the console. The entered list will automatically re-sort and display alphabetically by name. A second sort is performed by dialed number which also searches for names that are the same. Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-49 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Do not enter extra spaces after either the first or last names and do not put the full name in only one box. The system searches the names by putting together the First and Last name by adding a space between the first and last. The system also adds a comma and space after the last and before the first. The Attendant can type names using either first or last name which will be automatically dialed if there is a matching name, but the name must match exactly, including any spaces and commas. [DNs] are treated as a separate match, thus calls proceed with either a [DN] or name match. ➤ To enter Speed Dial numbers 1. Enter each number and name from the console. 2. Click the Save button. Using LCD Messaging LCD Messaging uses the system messages and the personal messages (if enabled). ➤ To display the messages currently programmed in the DK system 1. Select each message number and press the Retrieve Msg button. 2. Press the Modify or Save button. 3. Press Close. See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide for more instructions on the messaging features. 1040 Backup/Restore Configuration After all the data parameters are entered, the system should be backed up to a floppy diskette for restoring the operation later if needed. This backup diskette can be used to set up additional PC Attendant Consoles to operate with the same directory and settings as the first. This saves time when creating additional consoles and ensures that the buttons and operation of one console matches the next. 11-50 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ➤ To backup or restore PC attendant console setup data 1. Double-click on the PCATT BACKUP icon. 1021 2. From the PC Attendant Backup and Restore dialog box, select Backup or Restore. 3. Enter the appropriate directories. 4. Select the Start Backup or Close buttons. Windows Control Panel Several items within Windows have an effect on the operation of the PC Attendant console. These controls are within the Main Program Group under the topic of Control Panel. 1041 Choose Color Dialog Box Windows allows the screen to use a variety of colors. PC Attendant console uses the color settings to determine the highlight, title bar and text color of many parts of the program. Choose a color scheme that provides the type of contrast best suited to the user. Action The screen will show each window currently open, including the Program Manager. 2. From the Main Program Group, choose Control Panel. 3. From the Control Panel, choose Colors. 4. Select a color setting from the list. Station Apparatus 1. Switch to Program Manager (Alt+Tab). Description A dialog box showing the current color settings and example colors is shown. Using the mouse or Arrow keys, the color settings can be viewed and changed. 5. Press the OK button when done. Strata DK I&M 5/00 11-51 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Choose Desktop Dialog Box The Desktop defines whether or not the Alt+Tab key combination can be used to switch between open applications on the desktop. The Desktop screen controls: cursor blink rate, whether a screen saver is used, and the timer to invoke the screen saver. Toshiba recommends using a screen saver since this protects the video monitor. When calls come into the PC Attendant when the screen saver is displayed, ringing is heard, but the screen saver remains on until the user takes an action. “Activate on Incoming” does not affect the screen saver. Action 1. Switch to Program Manager (Alt+Tab). Description The screen will show each window currently open, including the Program Manager. 2. From the Main Program Group, choose Control Panel. 3. From the Control Panel, choose Desktop. 4. Look at Applications and make certain that “Fast Alt+Tab” operation is enabled. And choose a screen saver pattern and delay time for the pattern to employed. A number of settings are possible within the desktop control. Only the “Fast Alt+Tab” operation and screen saver patterns are used with the PC Attendant. 5. Press the OK button. Choose Keyboard Dialog Box Two controls can be used on the keyboard, the first is the delay needed to hold a key down before the character will repeat and the second is the speed of repetition once the key repeats. Action 1. Switch to Program Manager (Alt+Tab). Description The screen will show each window currently open, including the Program Manager. 2. From the Main Program Group, choose Control Panel. 3. From the Control Panel, choose Keyboard. 11-52 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Action 4. Choose the Delay before Repeat and Repeat Rate speed desired. Description The slide controls offer two speed settings. This affects the rate of change the Vol Up/Vol Dn keys respond to when a key is held down to adjust the volume. The slower the repetition, the easier it is to distinguish level change. This rate also affects scroll rate for the Arrow keys used in the directory and other lists. Toshiba recommends starting at mid-points of each setting before making adjustments. 5. Press the OK button when done. Choose Mouse Dialog Box Under the title Mouse, two settings affect the speed of the mouse and the speed of the double click needed to make a selection. If you are currently using a mouse, these settings should be appropriate and need not be changed. If the mouse is new to you, Toshiba recommends each setting to be a slower speed for easier operation. Once you gain experience with the mouse, you can use faster settings. Action 1. Switch to Program Manager (Alt+Tab). Description The screen will show each window currently open, including the Program Manager. 2. From the Main Program Group, choose Control Panel. 3. From the Control Panel, choose Mouse. 4. Choose the Tracking and Double Click speed desired. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Station Apparatus 5. Press the OK button when done. Two speed settings are possible using a slide control. Slower operation is for beginning users while faster tracking and double click speeds are for experienced users. The control buttons can also be changed to allow for lefthanded users of the mouse. 11-53 Station Apparatus Conventional Attendant Console Conventional Attendant Console A Strata DK system configured with RCTUB2 or RCTUBA/BB can support two Attendant Consoles, and systems with RCTUC1/D2 or RCTUC3/D3 can support four Attendant Consoles. The RCTUA1, RCTUA3, RCTUB1, or RCTUC/D1 do not support Attendant Consoles. PC and conventional Attendant Consoles require RCTUB2 or RCTUC/D2 R 2 processors or RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3 R3 processors. The conventional attendant console can be configured with a Toshiba-supplied base (ATT BASE1) and an Electroluminescent (EL) or EGA Color CRT. Installation Refer to “Hardware Installation” on Page 11-37 and the following steps. ➤ To install the conventional attendant console 1. Plug in the EL or CRT display to the base with a nine-pin cable, which is supplied with the display. 2. Plug in the EL or CRT display to a commercial three-prong AC 117V outlet. 3. Use two-pair wiring to connect the MDF to an RJ11 jack at the attendant console location. 4. Plug in the handset to the base RJ45-jack (see Figure 11-23). 5. Plug in the headset (if needed) to the base. Conventional Attendant Console Programming Follow the same programming instructions provided for the PC attendant console. See “PC Attendant Console Programming” on Page 11-39. Software Installation and Windows instructions do not apply to the conventional console. 11-54 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation 12 This chapter provides connection procedures for optional peripheral equipment to Strata DK Systems. Information in this chapter applies to all systems, unless stated otherwise in text. Instructions include hardware requirements, PCB configuration, interconnection/wiring requirements, and programming considerations. Peripheral equipment is connected to system PCBs. See Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs installation and configuration information and the appropriate installation section. Power Failure Options In the event of a power failure, Strata DK uses these options: Reserve Power For information on the Reserve Power Option, see the appropriate installation chapter. DK14/DK40i Single-line Power Failure Emergency Transfer DK14 and DK40i have a built-in single-line Power Failure Emergency Transfer (requires loop start lines). See Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation and Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for detailed information. DK40i/DK424 Power Failure Transfer Unit An optional Power Failure Transfer Unit (DPFT) can be installed that automatically connects up to eight selected CO lines directly to designated standard telephones in the event of a power failure. The DPFT enables normal operation of the selected CO lines and standard telephones when the system is in service. When power is restored, each telephone is independently reconnected to system standard telephone circuit ports after it is finished with its direct CO line call. The DPFT is normally installed on the MDF. Figure 12-1 provides a circuit diagram of the DPFT. Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M 5/00 12-1 Peripheral Installation Power Failure Options To RSTU/PSTU-T1 RDSU/RSTS J2-27 J2-26 To RSTU/PSTU-R1 RDSU/RSTS J2-2 J2-1 To TEL-T1 To TEL-R1 Telephone Current Detector To RCOU/PCOU-T1 To RCOU/PCOU-R1 J1-27 J1-26 J1-2 J1-1 To CO-T1 To CO-R1 J1-50 DG (Input) Relay RSTU or PSTU Control -24V (Input) J1-25 1498 Notes • • Figure 12-1 Representation of first of eight circuits. Conditions shown with AC power (-24VDC) off. DPFT Circuit Diagram Power Failure Emergency Transfer (DPFT) Installation 1. Mount the DPFT on or near the MDF. Note See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring, DPFT/MDF interconnecting tables. 2. Using 25-pair cables with amphenol-type connectors (female for DPFT connector J1, male for DPFT connector J2), connect the DPFT to two 66-type quick-connect blocks. 3. Connect the CO lines selected for emergency use to the DPFT J1-block “CO-TIP” and “CORING” terminals. 4. Connect the RCOU, RCOS (or PCOU) circuits related to the emergency CO lines to the DPFT J1-block “RCOU-TIP” and “RCOU-RING” terminals. 5. Connect the standard telephone stations selected for emergency use to the DPFT J2-block “TEL-TIP” and “TEL-RING” terminals. 12-2 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options 6. Connect the RSTU, RDSU/RSTS or PSTU standard telephone circuits related to the emergency standard telephones to DPFT J2-block “PSTU/ RSTU-TIP” and “PSTU/RSTURING” terminals. 7. Connect the DPFT to the RDSU/RSTU/PSTU DG and -24V terminals (See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RSTU/PSTU and RCOU/PCOU wiring/interconnecting details). The -24V (Pin 25) and DG (Pin 50) ground terminals are available on the KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU only, not on the PESU. ➤ To test the operation of the DPFT 1. Turn the system power switch Off. 2. Verify that CO dial tone is available at each standard telephone connected to the DPFT. 3. Call back to each telephone using an outside line. Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options Strata DK systems provide an MOH option for CO, E&M Tie and DID lines, as well as telephones connected to the system. A variety of BGM options are also provided. (See Figure 12-2.) MOH Option The DK14 and DK40i KSU or DK424 and DK424i processor PCBs supports an external, customer-provided music source – such as a tuner, compact disc player, digital music source, cassette downloader digital source or tape player – for MOH. The DK14 KSU, DK40i Base KSU, PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU each has a relay contact on it that can be configured to automatically turn the source on when a CO line or station is placed on hold. MOH source and MOH relay contact specifications are as follows: BGM or MOH Source Specifications ♦ Input Impedance: 600 ohms or 8 ohms ♦ Input Voltage (recommended levels) Minimum: 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm) Maximum: 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm) Relay Contact Specifications ♦ Voltage: 24VDC maximum ♦ Current: 1 amp maximum Important! 5/00 Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP), or other similar organization, if copyrighted music is transmitted through the Music-on-Hold feature of this telecommunications system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license. 12-3 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options ➤ To install the MOH option 1. Connect the external music source to the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424 RCTU, RCA jack (see Figure 12-1). 2. Rotate the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424, DK424i processor PCB’s volume control (VR1) to adjust MOH volume: clockwise increases volume; counterclockwise decreases volume. Listen to the CO line on-hold when setting MOH to the proper volume. 3. If MOH relay control is required, access Program 77-1. Set LED 05 to On to configure the MOH/Night Transfer Control relay for the MOH function. This feature requires the installation of a DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU, or PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB. 4. If using the MOH control feature with a PIOU or PEPU, set PIOU or PEPU jumper plug P11 to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ♦ MAKE (M) – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is activated. ♦ BREAK (B) – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is activated. ...or If using the MOH control feature with a PIOUS, solder PIOUS jumper W2 to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ♦ MAKE (M) – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is in the hold condition. ♦ BREAK (B) – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is in the hold condition. 5. MOH (CO line or intercom hold) is applied from the RCTU through the KSU’s backplane to DID lines, Tie lines, CO lines, electronic, digital, and standard telephones on hold. 6. MOH is also applied through the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424, DK424i processor PCB’s Page/BGM control to provide BGM to electronic/digital telephone speakers and external page. 12-4 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options See MDF Tip & Ring Wiring Diagrams (Chapter 8) Twisted Pair 24 AWG. DK14/DK40i KSU or RCTU VR1 MOH/BGM Volume Control Music MOH RCA Jack On/Off Control (24 Volt Max) CO Line and Station PCBs Music-OnHold Max. Music-OnHold Source1 DID Lines TIE Lines Backplane Stations Page or Background Music Page/BGM Control Digital and Electronic Telephone Speakers Station PCBs DK14/DK40i Base KSU 600Ω Note BGM or MOH Source Specifications: • Input Impedance: 600W OR 8W • Input Voltage: Recommended Levels, Min. = 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm) Max. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm) CO Lines (Loop) CO Lines (GND) 600Ω RCA Jack Digital and Electronic Telephone BGM Dial Code #481-ON #480-OFF OR Tel Set Music (BGM) MOH over BGM Port 000 Only: #491-ON, #490-OFF NHT/NHR, if Using PIOUS PIOU/PEPU/PIOUS SP0 600Ω SW4 SP1 Backplane ( ) PIN No.s of PIOU/PEPU Amphenol Connector MOH/NT Relay Contact Jumper Plug (Make or Break) Optional External Page/ BGM Outputs (38) HESB or Amplifier (13) & Speaker 3 Watt amp. (50) Speaker (25) Volume VR1 (See Note) SW4: Optional Page Output External BGM Dial Switch 600Ω OR Code from (9) 3-Watt 8Ω. Electronic & Digital Telephones MOH or B Port 000 Only: Night Transfer #491-ON (34) Control #490-OFF Relay M (MOH over BGM) P11 Select MOH Prog. 77-1, 05 Note 3-watt amp and SW4 are available with PIOU and PEPU only; PIOUS provides 600 ohm output only. W2, IF Using PIOUS (See Figure 10-8) Relay Contact Specification: 24 VDC Max. 1 amp, Max. Music-on-Hold and Background Music (same source) Functional Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Figure 12-2 4253 12-5 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options BGM Options The BGM options allow music to play over optional external speakers (external page system) and/ or digital and electronic telephone speakers. BGM can be configured in three ways: Configuration A – One Music Source This configuration enables BGM and MOH to share the same music source (see Figure 12-3). With this configuration, the MOH/BGM music source is connected to the RCA jack on the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424 or DK424i processor PCB. The music source is sent to CO lines/ stations on hold, to electronic/digital telephone speakers, and to the external page system via the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU optional PCBs. Station Port 000 must dial to send MOH over BGM and to disable the option. DK14/DK40i KSU or RCTU MOH MOH/BGM Source (SHARED) 600Ω, 0-1 Volt RMS CO Lines and Stations On-Hold BGM Page Electronic/Digital Telephone Speaker MOH RCA Jack VR1 (Volume) (BGM: #481 ON/#480 OFF) DK424 Only PIOU PIOUS PEPU To External Page System DK14/DK40i KSU (BGM when Page is idle, 8Ω or 600Ω Output) 600Ω RCA Jack Figure 12-3 Note To External Page System 4254 MOH/BGM Music Source Configuration A Telephone users can turn on BGM at their station by pressing the 7HO6HW0XVLF (%*0) button; or by pressing [PDN] + ( turns BGM Off). Configuration B – Alternate Background Music Source This configuration enables the MOH source to be connected to the MOH RCA jack of the DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU or RCTU, (as in Configuration A) and a separate BGM source to be connected to a PEKU (circuit 3), PESU (circuit 8) ...or KSTU2, QSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU (circuit 2) PCB (see Figures 12-4 and 12-5). With this configuration, the MOH source is sent only to CO lines/stations on hold, while the BGM source is sent directly to electronic/digital telephone speakers and to the external page system via the PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU or DK14 and DK40i BGM 600 ohm RCA jack. 12-6 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options RCA Jack QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU (CKT 2) Tip (28) BGM Music Source 600Ω Output or 8Ω Output High Level Output Input Ring (3) 4246 BGM SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS: • Input Impedance: 600 OR 8 ohms • Input Voltage: Recommended Levels Min. = 0.14 VRMS (–15 dBm) Max. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm) Phone Line Line Isolation Transformer (Dealer supplied) See Program 19 for Slot Assignment Figure 12-4 DK14/DK40i/DK424 Alternate BGM Source to Standard Telephone Port Connection DK14/DK40i KSU or RCTU MOH MOH Source QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RDSU, PSTU 25-Pair Connector VT = P28, W-GN VR = P3, GN-W Slot XX*, Circuit 2 ** PESU 25-Pair Connector VT = P40, BK-S VR = P15, S-BK Slot XX*, Circuit 8 Alternate BGM Source: Digital/Electronic Telephones and External Speakers DK14/DK40i 600Ω RCA Jack BGM/PAGE DK424 To External Page System PIOU PIOUS PEPU BGM VT VR CO Lines and Stations On-Hold QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RDSU, PSTU, PESU or PEKU in Slot XX* 4299 * Program 19 Assigns Slot XX Figure 12-5 DK40i/DK424/DK424i Alternate BGM Source Configuration B Strata DK I&M 5/00 (BGM: #491 ON/#490 OFF) (BGM when Page is Idle, 8Ω or 600Ω Output) Electronic/Digital Telephone Speaker (BGM: #481 ON/#480 Off) Backplane Wiring Installation Wiring Peripheral Installation ** PEKU 25-Pair Connector VT = P30, W-S VR = P5, S-W Slot XX*, Circuit 3 MOH RCA Jack VR1 (Volume) 12-7 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options Configuration C – Three Music Sources This configuration enables the MOH source to be connected to the RCA jack of the DK40i KSU or DK424 or DK424i processor PCB (as in Configuration A). The digital or electronic telephone BGM source is connected to a PEKU, PESU, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU or PSTU PCB (as in Configuration B), and a separate BGM source is sent to the external page speakers via the PIOU PCB (see Figure 12-6). This option is not available on DK14. When a separate BGM source is connected to the PIOU, two customer-supplied amplifiers are required to drive the external speakers.One amplifier drives the speakers for BGM when page is idle and the other amplifier drives the speakers during page. The PIOU switches BGM or page to the external speakers via zone relays. (The PIOUS and PEPU do not provide zone relays; therefore Configuration C is not possible with these PCBs.) DK14/DK40i KSU or RCTU RCA Jack CO Lines and Stations On-Hold MOH MOH SOURCE KSU BGM 600 RCA Jack RSTU/RDSU/PSTU1 VR1 (Volume) 25 Pair Connector VT = 28, W-GN VR = 3, GN-W SLOT XX2, Circuit 2 BGM/Page (DK424 backplane) PESU 25-Pair Connector1 VT = P40, BK-S VR = P15, S-BK Slot XX2, Circuit 8 Cut W7 on PESU Program 10, LED 10/On Electronic/ Digital Telephone Alternate BGM Source VT VR PEKU 25-Pair Connector VT = P30, W-S VR = P5, S-W Slot XX2, Circuit 3 Cut W5 on PEKU Program 10, LED 09/On Electronic/Digital Telephone Speaker * KSTU2, RSTU1, RDSU1, PSTU1, PESU1, or PEKU in Slot XX2 (BGM: #481 On/#480 Off) Page Amplifier 600Ω External Speaker BGM Source Page Page or BGM P23 BGM BGM PIOU Only To External Page Speaker Zone Relays Activate with Page Amplifier (BGM When Page is Idle) Notes Backplane Wiring Installation Wiring 1. An isolation transformer may be required if connecting BGM source to a standard telephone port. 2. Program 19 assigns BGM Slot number. 4300 Figure 12-6 12-8 DK40i/DK424/DK424i Alternate Music Source Configuration C Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options ➤ To install the MOH/BGM as BGM 1. Ensure that the MOH option is installed in accordance with To install the MOH option on Page 4 on Page 12-4 (see Figure 12-2). 2. The output of the RCTU page/BGM control is applied through the backplane to the output select switch (SW4) on the PIOU or PEPU. Set the SW4 switch to either SPO or SPI, as required: ♦ SPO – Directs external page and non-amplified BGM to the HESB or external amplifier (pins 13 and 38). ♦ SPI – Directs external page and BGM through the on-board 3-watt amplifier to the external speaker output (pins 25 and 50). The PIOUS provides non-amplified BGM/page output only (SPT and SPR). See Figure 12-8. Note 3. When using an HESB or external amplifier for paging/BGM, adjust volume using the HESB or amplifier volume control. 4. When using the internal amplifier for paging/BGM, adjust the volume using the volume control (VR1) on the PIOU/PEPU PCB. Alternate BGM Source Installation A BGM source can be connected to a station PCB (QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU, RDSU, PEKU, or PESU) to send music to all electronic/digital telephone speakers and to the external page system via a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU. The BGM source is separate from the MOH source connected to the DK424 or DK424i processor PCB. An isolation transformer is needed to connect a music source to one of the above standard telephone circuits (see Figure 12-4). ➤ To connect the BGM source to the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU, RDSU, PEKU or PESU See Figures 12-4~12-6 and follow these steps: 1. Access Program 10-2. If the BGM source is connected to circuit 3 on a PEKU, set LED 09 to On. If the source is connected to circuit 8 on a PESU, set LED 10 to On. If connecting BGM to QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU or PSTU, LED 09 and 10 should be Off. 2. Using Program 19, identify (assign) the BGM slot. 3. If connecting the BGM source to a PEKU or PESU: Connect the PEKU tip and ring of circuit 03 to the 600 ohms or 8 ohms output of the BGM source or connect the BGM output to circuit 8 of a PESU. ...or If connecting the BGM source to a QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU: Connect circuit 2 of the RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU to a customer-supplied isolation transformer and BGM source. The isolation transformer protects the BGM source from potentially damaging QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU voltage. Some music sources which are designed for telephone system applications may have this protection built-in and do not require the transformer. (Consult the documentation provided with the music source.) 4. If the BGM source is connected to either a W5 on the PEKU or W7 on the PESU PCB, cut the strap. There is no strap to cut on the QSTU2/KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Note 12-9 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control 5. Using the BGM source’s volume control, adjust the BGM volume to the desired level while listening to BGM via a telephone speaker and/or the external page speakers. When BGM is sent to external speakers via a PIOU or PIOUS or PEPU PCB, use the external amplifier volume control to balance the BGM and page volume levels. External BGM Installation The external BGM options are closely associated with the external paging options. See “External Page Options” on Page 12-26 for external paging amplifier installation. Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Two relays are provided on the PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU PCBs to control the operation of peripheral equipment: ♦ External Page/Door Lock Relay ♦ Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold Relay Note Only the PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the relay control function. Each relay can be configured to provide one of two possible control functions and as normally open (MAKE) or closed (BREAK). Electrical specifications for the relay contacts are as follows: Voltage: 24VDC maximum Current: 1 amp maximum CAUTION! Note To prevent relay damage, do not connect relays directly to 120VAC power source. See the Strata DK Programming Manual, as necessary, when instructed to program the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU in the following paragraphs. External Page/Door Lock Relay Options (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) The PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB may be programmed for either the external page function or the door lock control function. (See Figures 12-7 and 12-8.) When configured in Program 77-1 for the external page function, the relay controls an external music source connected to the PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU to provide BGM over external speakers. When a paging announcement is made over the external speakers, the external page relay mutes the BGM. When configured in Program 77-1 for the door lock control function, the relay controls an external door lock. When a door lock button at a digital or electronic telephone is pressed, the door lock control relay unlocks the door for three or six seconds, as specified in Program 77-1 (LED 20). 12-10 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Configure PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU for External Page Mute Option 1. Set Program 77-1 LED 07 to Off to configure the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB for the external page function. 2. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the jumper plug P10 on the PIOU or PEPU jumper plug to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when external page is activated. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 7 and 32) when external page is activated. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the jumper W1 on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when external page is activated. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (DET and DER) when external page is activated. 3. See Figures 12-7 and 12-8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the external paging function. PIOU/PEPU PCB PIOU 25 PR. Connectors PIN NO. Color MDF 66M Block PIN NO.s 32 7 . . R-O O-R 13 14 SP.T0 600Ω (Duplex) SP.R0 38 . Bk-Gn 25 13 . Gn-Bk 26 8Ω SP.T1 3 Watt SP.R1 50 25 . . V-S S-V 49 50 Select Relay Function with Program 77-1 Door Lock or External Page Control Break DE.T P10 DE. R Make SW4 SP0 SP1 Page or BGM from RCTU or DK KSU VR1 Break P11 Door Lock Control Page Amplifier Control NH.T NH.R 34 9 . . R-Br Br-R Speaker Tape Player 8 ohm Speaker 17 18 Make Note MDF Connections All wires should be jacketed 24 AWG twisted pairs Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections where applicable; do not connect both options simultaneously. Figure 12-7 PIOU/PEPU Relay Control Functional Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/00 Night Bell To Music On-Hold Input on RCTU PCB or DK KSU 1507 Peripheral Installation Select Relay Function with Program 77-1: Night Relay or MOH Control 12-11 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control KSU Backplane TBI MDF SP.T Page and BGM 600 SP.R Break DE.R Break DE Door Lock Control NH MOH Source Unit NH.T W2 Make K2 Mute Control DE.T W1 Make K1 Page Amplifier NH.R Night Bell Normal Open ALM.T Alarm Sensor W3 ALM ALM.R Facility Alarm Unit 1508 Normal Close PIOUS Notes • All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs. • Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections where applicable; do not connect both options simultaneously. Relay Options: • K1 (DE): Door Lock or amp Mute Control; Program 77-1, LED 07 • K2 (NH): Night Relay or Music-on-Hold Control; Program 77-1, LED 05 • K1 & K2: 24VDC, 1 amp Maximum Figure 12-8 12-12 PIOUS Relay Control Functional Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Lock Control Function Only one door lock control is available using an optional PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) and only the optional PCB with the lowest Program 03 Code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the door lock function. Note 1. Set Program 77-1 LED 07 to On to configure the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB for the door lock control function (see Figure 12-9). 2. Set Program 77-1 LED 20 to Off for a three-second door lock activation time, or set LED 20 to On for a six-second door lock activation time. 3. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P10 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s door lock button is pressed. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s door lock button is pressed. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the W1 jumper plug on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s door lock button is pressed. BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s 'RRU /RFN button is pressed. 4. See Figure 12-9 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the door lock control function. PIOU/PEPU Note assigned to digital and electronic telephones in Program 39 with Code 71. DET B M 25-Pair Amphenol PIN 34, R-BR 17 P10 To Door Lock PIN 9, BR-R DER 18 See Program 77-1, LED 07, 20 for Relay Options Door Lock 0 Button K1 MDF PIOUS Break MDF Make K1/P10 (24VDC, 1.0 amp Max.) DE To Door Lock DER Terminal on Front Edge of PCB 1509 Figure 12-9 Door Lock Control Option (PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU) Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation DET W1 12-13 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Door Lock Control with DDCB and HDCB In addition to the option interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU), each DDCB and HDCB can provide one door lock control. ♦ DK14 provides two door lock controls on DDCB only. ♦ DK40i provides three door lock controls. The DK424 support DDCBs and HDCBs. ♦ DK424 RCTUA provides four door lock controls. RCTUB, BA/BB, C/D, E/F and all BCU PCBs provide five DDCB/HDCB door lock controls. DK40i and DK424 DDCBs connect only to digital circuits (always circuit 5 on a PDKU or RDSU) associated with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028. DK14 DDCBs connect to ports 002 or 003 only. HDCBs connect only to electronic circuits (always circuit 5 on a PEKU or PESU) associated with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 (see Table 12-1). Table 12-1 DDCB and HDCB/DRLK Assignments Guide DK14/DK40i KSU or RDSU/PDKU/PEKU/PESU DDCB/HDCB Number Port Number DK40i/DK424/DK424i Door Lock 1 1 004 DK14 Door Lock 1 1 002 DK14 Door Lock 2 2 003 DK40i/DK424/DK424i Door Lock 2 2 012 DK40i/DK424/DK424i Door Lock 3 3 020 Unlock Door 3 (DRLK 3), Code 74 DK424/DK424i Door Lock 4 4 028 Unlock Door 4 (DRLK 4), Code 75 Important! Program 39 Button Assignments Unlock Door 1 (DRLK 1), Code 72 Unlock Door 2 (DRLK 2), Code 73 Each DDCB/HDCB door lock control reduces the maximum door phone capacity by one. Configure Each DDCB/HDCB for the Door Lock Control Function 1. DK40i, DK424 and DK424i: connect PDKU circuit 5 (T/R and PT/PR) to the DDCB HKSU modular jack (see Figures 12-9 and 12-10). DK14: connect applicable digital telephone circuit (logical port 02 or 03) to the DDCB KSU modular jack. See Figure 12-7 and Figure 10-2. 2. Connect the door lock wire pair to the DDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4). 3. Set SW1 to the DOOR position. 4. Set SW2 to the LOCK position. 5. SW3 inside the DDCB can be set to open or close the door lock relay whenever a door lock button is pressed: if SW3 is in the “1-2” position, the relay closes when the button is pressed; if in the “2-3” position, the door lock relay opens when the button is pressed. Note SW3 comes from the factory in the “1-2” position. 6. In Program 77-1, set the door lock activation for three or six seconds and enable the PDKU or RDSU ports for DDCB connection. 7. In Program 77-2, enable the DDCB B-jack for door lock operation. 12-14 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control 8. In Program 39, assign door lock buttons to stations per the customer’s record sheet. 9. Check each telephone door lock button from each station: the DDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4) will momentarily open or close (three or six seconds) when the button is pressed. HDCB Installation (DK40i and DK424 only) 1. Cut jumper W9 of the particular PEKU or PESU that will connect to the HDCB. (See Figure 12-10 and Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.) 2. Connect circuit 5 VT/VR and DT/DR pairs to the HDCB HKSU modular jack. 3. Connect the door lock wire pair to the HDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4). 4. Set SW1 to the DOOR position. 5. Set SW2 to the LOCK position. 6. W3 inside the HDCB can be set to open or close the door lock relay whenever a door lock button is pressed: if W3 is in the “solid-line” position, the relay will provide a closure when the button is pressed; if in the “dotted-line” position, the door lock relay will open when the door lock button is pressed. 7. In Program 77-1, set the door lock activation for three or six seconds, and enable the PEKU and PESU ports for HDCB connection. 8. In Program 77-2, enable the HDCB B-jack for door lock operation. 9. In Program 39, assign door lock buttons to the desired stations per the customer’s record sheet. 10. Check each door lock button from each station: The HDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4) will momentarily close (three or six seconds) when the appropriate door lock button is pressed. Note The HDCB W2 strap is not used with Strata DK424 systems. The strap provides an alarm function with other Strata systems. Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M 5/00 12-15 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Relay Control Contact 1 DDCB or HDCB A 2 3 4 5 DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU, (See Chapter 8— Wiring Diagrams) PDKU, RDSU, DK14 (Ports 002, 003) PEKU, DK40i/DK424 (Ports 004, 012, 020) or DK424 (Port 028) PESU B 3 RJ11 3 4 2 Relay Contact 5 to Customer Supplied RJ11 Device 3 3 4 C RJ11 3 Door Lock Control Contact2 to HDCB KSU Jack to PIN 3 / 4 DT (35) / DR (10) to PIN 5 / 6 VT (34) / VR (9) 1 4 2 3 1 MDFB Door Phone A MDFB Door Phone B or Door Lock Control MDFB Door Phone C 4 4 HDCB WIRING CHART PEKU or PESU 1 2 2 DDCB Wiring Chart PDKU or RDSU to DDCB KSU Jack DT (34) / DR (9) to PIN 3 / 4 PT (35) / PR (10) to PIN 5 / 6 4301 See Chapter 8—Wiring for PEKU, PESU, PDKU or RDSU pin-out information. See DK14 and DK40i Installation chapters for appropriate pin-out information. Notes 1. Relay control contact will close when the door phone is in the ringing, talk, or monitor state. 2. See External Page/Door Lock Relay Options on Page 10-14 and DDCB and HDCB/DRLK Assignments Guide on Page 10-19. 3. Relay contact specifications are -24VDC at 1.0 amp. max. Do not connect relay contacts to 120 AC commercial power. Figure 12-10 Multiple Door Lock Control Options (DDCB/HDCB) Night Transfer/Night Relay Options with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU Night Transfer/Night Relay option may be programmed for either the Night Relay or the MOH relay function. (See Figures 12-7 and 12-8.) Note Only the PIOU/PIOUS, or PEPU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42 or 43) will provide the Night Transfer (NT) or MOH relay control function. When configured for the NT function with Program 77-1, the relay activates if the system is in the Night mode. The relay can be programmed to activate continuously when the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button (only) is set for the Night mode (for indirect answering machine control), or to pulsate at one-second On/three-seconds Off (for a night bell) when incoming CO lines ring (Night Transfer 1~4 = tenant 1~4 CO lines) per Program *15 and 77-3. When configured for the MOH function with Program 77-1, the relay activates any time a CO line is on hold. In this configuration, the relay is normally used to control the MOH source. 12-16 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Configure PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU for Night Transfer 1. In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to Off to configure the Night/Hold Relay for the Night Transfer function (see Figures 12-7 and 12-8). 2. In Program 77-1, set LED 06 to provide continuous or pulsating relay activation: ♦ Off – Programs the relay for continuous activation when the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button (only) is set in the Night mode. ♦ On – Programs the relay for pulsating activation when the 1LJKW7UDQVIHUa button for tenant 1~4 is set to the Night mode and a CO line rings. CO lines must be enabled in Program 78 for the Night Transfer pulsating relay function. Note 3. Set in Programs 87, 88, and 89 the CO lines that will activate the relay (when the system is in the Night mode). 4. Assign, in Program 39, the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU buttons to telephones that should be able to set the Strata DK system into the Night mode. 5. Assign in Programs 29-1~29-4 a 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button on all direct station selection consoles that are to transfer the Strata DK system into the Night mode. 6. If tenant operation is required, set in Program *15 the CO lines for tenant 1 through tenant 4 operation. DK40i and the DK424 RCTUA and RCTUB provides two tenant assignments, RCTUC/D provides four. 7. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay is activated. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay is activated. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the jumper W2 on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when the night relay is activated. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when night relay is activated. 8. See Figures 12-7 and 12-8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the night relay function. Note Door phones programmed to ring over external page in the Night mode do not activate the Night Transfer feature, per Program 77-1. 1. In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to On to configure the Night/MOH relay for the MOH relay function (see Figures 12-8 and 12-9). Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Configure PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU for MOH Relay Control 12-17 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control 2. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO line is on hold. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO line is on hold. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the W2 jumper on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is on hold. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is on hold. 3. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the MOH Relay function. DK14 KSU and DK40i KSU Relay The DK40i KSU Relay can be programmed for one of three options: ♦ BGM mute ♦ Night transfer ♦ MOH source control These options are set in Program 77-1 (LED 05 and 06). Only one option is allowed per installation. However, in the DK40i, these options can be supplemented with PIOU/PIOUS relay options. Electrical specifications for the DK40i base relay contacts are: Voltage: 24VDC maximum Current: 12-18 ♦ 1 amp maximum ♦ Normally open – closed when activated Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options Strata DK systems provide three options utilizing an HESB: ♦ Loud Ringing Bell ♦ Amplified Speaker ♦ Talkback Amplified Speaker System hardware requirements vary depending on the HESB option selected. See the following installation procedures for the hardware requirements for each option. Loud Ringing Bell Option The loud ringing bell option enables the voice first or ringing signal tone to be amplified without the use of other manufacturers’ equipment. The voice first and signal tone can be amplified on all electronic and digital telephones equipped with HHEU PCBs and HESB. (See Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus.) The HESB automatically turns Off once the ringing call or voice first has been manually answered from the electronic or digital telephone. This turn-off feature prevents audio feedback problems. Installing the HESB Loud Ringing Bell in Digital Telephones 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 2 and 10 on the HESB TB1 terminal block (Figure 12-11). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 4 and 5 on the HESB TB2 terminal block. 3. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65A cable in the telephone per Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus before proceeding with Step 4. Note HESB connections made in Steps 4~6 can be accomplished using the HESB VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65A using a modular block. 5. Connect terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the green (-) wire of the HESC-65A using a modular block. 6. Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the yellow (L2) wire of the HESC-65A cable using a modular block. 7. Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead to terminal 2. 8. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC ± 10VAC, 60Hz power source. Important! If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M 5/00 12-19 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options HESB (Rear View) Volume Control (+) (-) Internal Wiring: TBI 1 2 3 4 Jumper Wires: TB1 2-10 TB2 4-5 (L2) Voice 6 1 3 4 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 654321 Not Used Not Used 115 VAC ± 10 VAC maximum HACU-120 115VAC to 12 VDC 24 AWG Jacketed Twisted Pair from Digital Telephone to HESB TB2 1 2 3 4 5 12V 0V Power Supply MDF 66 Block Jumpers Voice Door Phone 12V 0V Station Cabling Tip Ring PT PR 25-Pair Cable Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG DK14 & DK40i KSU or PDKU (CKT 1~8) or RDSU (CKT 5-8) R GN R (+) GN (-) BK Y BK Y W BL W BL 654321 654321 123456 123456 Modular (L2) HESC-65A Cable Station OCA Strap (-) Green (L2) Yellow (+) Red + R607 Do Not Cut P601 HHEU (V.3 or .4) 1000 or 2000 Series Digital Telephone Install HHEU Circuit (V.3 or .4) or HHEU2 card into base of DKT per HHEU installation information in Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus 4302 Important! See Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for instructions to cut EXSP and HHEU jumpers on the electronic telephone main PCB. Figure 12-11 HESB/Digital Telephone with Loud Ringing Bell Wiring 12-20 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options Installing the HESB Loud Ringing Bell in Electronic Telephones (DK40i and DK424 Only) 1. On the HESB TB1 terminal block: connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7, and connect another jumper between terminals 5 and 8 (see Figure 12-12). 2. On the HESB TB2 terminal block, connect a jumper between terminals 4 and 5. 3. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65A (or HESC-65A) cable in the telephone per Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus before proceeding with Step 4. Note HESB connections made in Steps 4~7 can be made with the HESB VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65 cable using a modular block. 5. Connect terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the green (-) wire of the HESC-65 cable using a modular block. 6. Connect terminal 3 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 3 of the electronic telephone’s modular block (VOICE TIP). 7. Connect terminal 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 4 of the electronic telephone’s modular block (VOICE RING). 8. Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead to terminal 2. 9. Plug power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC±10VAC, 60Hz power source. Important! ● ● Make sure the AC power is within the specified limits shown in Step 9. If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. Cut the EX-SP and HHEU straps on telephones and do not cut the OCA strap or R607 on the HHEU (see Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for details). Testing the Loud Ringing Bell Option 1. Test the AC input voltage. See Step 9, above. 2. Make a CO or station call to the station configured for the loud ringing bell. Ringing will be heard over the HESB. 3. Use a small, slotted screwdriver to turn the volume control on the back of the HESB to the desired level and adjust the ring volume control on the telephone. 4. If ringing is heard at the station, but not over the HESB, check the following while the station is ringing: Using a suitable voltmeter, measure voltage across terminals 1 (+) and 2 (-) of the HESB TB1 terminal block. Voltage indication should be 4.5~5VDC. Note Ringing stops once the call is manually answered. There should be NO voltage potential across terminals 1 and 2. ♦ If voltage is not as specified during ringing, check that the telephone wiring connections to the HESB have been made properly (wires to terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block may have been reversed). Important! Strata DK I&M 5/00 See Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for instructions to cut EXSP and HHEU jumpers on the electronic telephone main PCB. Peripheral Installation ♦ 12-21 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options HESB (Rear View) Volume Control (+) (Red) (-) (Green) VOICE Tip VOICE Ring Internal Wiring: Jumper Wires: TB1 5-8 6-7 TB2 4-5 TBI 1 2 3 4 Voice 6 1 3 4 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Jumpers 654321 654321 Not Used HACU-120 115VAC 115VAC to ± 10VAC 12VDC maximum Power Supply MDF 66 Block 24 AWG Jacketed Twisted Pair from Electronic Telephone to HESB Voice Door Phone 12V 0V Modular Connectors May Be Used TB2 1 2 3 4 5 12V 0V Station Cabling Voice Tip Voice Ring Voice Tip Voice Ring Data T1 Data R1 25-Pair Cable PEKU (CKT 1~8) or PESU (CKT 5~8) Jacketed Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG OCA Tip R GN R (+) GN (-) BK Y BK Y W BL W BL OCA Ring 654321 654321 123456 123456 1513 Modular Cord Station Electronic Telephone 6500-Series Green Red HESC-65 or HESC-65A Cable 3 (-) 2 1 (+) P601 HHEU Figure 12-12 OCA Strap Do Not Cut R607 Install HHEU Circuit (V.3 or .4) or HHEU2 card into base of DKT per HHEU installation information in Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus HESB/Electronic Telephone with Loud Ringing Bell Wiring Amplified Speaker Option The amplified speaker option enables the HESB to be configured as a paging speaker. The HESB is connected to the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU 600-ohm page output to provide an amplified external speaker. ➤ To install the HESB amplified speaker option 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block (see Figure 12-13). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 3. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 12-22 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options 5. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 6. If using a PIOU or PEPU, connect the PIOU or PEPU 600-ohm page output (pins 13 and 38) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. ...or Connect the PIOUS, DK14 or DK40i KSU 600-ohm page output (SPT and SPR) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 7. Connect the power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2. 8. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC±10VAC, 60Hz power source. 9. Set the PIOU or PEPU SW4 switch to the SPO position. If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. Important! ➤ To test the amplified speaker option 1. Make an external page. The page should be heard over the HESB. 2. Adjust the HESB volume control to the desired level. DK14 & DK40i KSU BGM RCA Jack PIOUS MDF TB1 MDF SPT 600Ω Page Output SPR SPT (38, BK-GN) PIOU or PEPU SPR (13, GN-BK) 600Ω Page Output Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG Block Pin NO.s 1 25 Note Only one interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) may provide amplified speaker output. 26 50 25-Pair Cable MDF 66 Block Volume Control Jumper Wires: TB1 1-2 5-8 6-7 Modular Connector May Be Used TB2 3-4 5-6 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 654321 Not Used Internal Wiring: TBI 3 4 Voice Voice 3 4 TB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Note • 12V 0V VDC Jumpers HESB (Rear View) Power Supply 115 VAC (± 10 VAC) to 12 VDC Figure 12-13 HESB/Amplified Speaker Wiring Strata DK I&M 5/00 4303 Peripheral Installation The 600 ohm page output sends three types of signals during system operation: • Voice page • Background music • Night ringing Door Phone 12V 0V 12-23 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options Talkback Amplified Speaker Option The talkback amplified speaker option enables a talkback speaker to be provided in areas where a telephone is not needed. In this configuration, the HESB is connected to the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU 600 ohm (duplex) output and is used as the amplifier and speaker. A door phone unit (MDFB) is connected to the HESB, and serves as a microphone to provide talkback operation. (The MDFB push-button is inoperative, and the unit serves only as a microphone for talkback and not as the normal door phone.) Note The PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU 600 ohm is a two-way (duplex) page output compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers – door phone not required for talkback. ➤ To install the HESB talkback amplified speaker 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block (see Figure 12-14). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 3. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. Note HESB connections made in Steps 4~7 may be accomplished using the HESB VOICE and door phone modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect terminal 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin L1 of the MDFB. 5. Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin L2 of the MDFB 6. Connect terminal 9 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 1 of the MDFB. 7. Connect terminal 10 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 2 of the MDFB. 8. If using a PIOU or PEPU, connect the PIOU or PEPU 600-ohm page output (pins 13 and 38) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. ...or If using a PIOUS, connect the PIOUS 600-ohm page output (SPT and SPR) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 9. Set the PIOU or PEPU SW4 switch to the SPO position. 10. Connect the HACU-120’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2. 11. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 117VAC 60Hz power source. Important! If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. ➤ To test the talkback amplified speaker 1. Make an external page. Page will be heard over the HESB. 2. Verify that someone speaking into the door phone can be heard at the paging station. (With this application, pressing the door phone button is not required to talk back through the door phone.) 12-24 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options MDFB (Rear View) DK14 & DK40i KSU BGM RCA Jack MDF Door Phone Talkback Microphone 1 PIOUS TB1 L1 L2 MDF Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG SPT 600Ω Page Output SPR Duplex MDF Block Pin Numbers PIOU or PEPU 600Ω Page Output 2 SPT (38, BK-GN) 1 25 SPR (13, GN-BK) 26 25 Pair Cable Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG <Duplex> MDF 66 Block Volume Control L1 L2 1 2 Jumper Wires: TB1 1-2 TB2 3-4 5-6 TB1 Modular Connector May Be Used Internal Wiring: 654321 Voice 4 3 Door Phone 4 3 2 5 TBI 4 3 TBI 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Voice 654321 Door Phone 12V 0V TB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 12V 0V Notes HACU-120 • The 600 ohm duplex page output is compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers. – MDFB not required. 5/00 4304 Power Converter 115VAC ± 10VAC to 12VDC Figure 12-14 HESB/Talkback Amplified Speaker Wiring Strata DK I&M HESB (Rear View) Peripheral Installation • Only one interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) may provide talkback amplified speaker. Jumpers 12-25 Peripheral Installation External Page Options HESB Wall Mounting Some applications may require that the HESB is mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. ➤ To wall mount the HESB 1. Find a suitable location on the mounting surface for the HESB (see Figure 12-15). 2. Screw a 1.25-inch panhead wood screw into the mounting surface. One Wall Mounting Hole 3. Hang the HESB from the screw. 1516 Figure 12-15 HESB Wall Mounting External Page Options Strata DK systems equipped with a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB offer a variety of external paging options, each of which includes a BGM option. The PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) is required to support these options: ♦ Paging with BGM (same amplifier) – available with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU ♦ Zone Paging with BGM (separate amplifiers) – available with PIOU ♦ Zone Paging with BGM (multiple amplifiers) – available with PIOU External Page Option Installation All paging connections are made via the PIOU or PEPU Amphenol connectors or the PIOUS TB1 terminal to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). Paging (Single-zone) with BGM (Same Amplifier) Paging and BGM are amplified by a common customer-supplied paging amplifier. When the external page access code is dialed, the external page control relay is activated, which applies a short (or opens the contacts) to the amplifier mute control to mute the music. ➤ To install External Page (single zone) with BGM (same amplifier) 1. Connect input 1 from the paging amplifier to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU or PEPU; or connect to SPT and SPR of the PIOUS (see Figure 12-17). 2. Connect the paging amplifier mute terminal to pins 7 and 32 of the PIOU or PEPU; or connect to DET and DER of the PIOUS. 3. Connect the music source to input 2 of the paging amplifier. 4. Connect the speaker to the paging amplifier output. 5. Verify that the PIOU or PEPU P10 jumper plug is in the MAKE position or that the PIOUS W1 jumper wire is in the MAKE position. 12-26 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation External Page Options PIOU/PEPU 600Ω B P10 External Page/ Door Lock Relay (See Program 77-1) SPT (38) 25 SPR (13) 26 DET (32) 13 External Paging Amp Output Night Ring and Page from KSU Backplane MDF Input 1 66 Block Pin Numbers Mute 2 M DER (7) 14 Input 2 PIOU/PEPU Pin Numbers 25-Pair Cable BGM Music Source KSU Backplane PIOUS 600Ω Break W1 K1 Make TB1 SPR 600 Input 1 SPT External Paging Amp Output Night Ring and Page from KSU Backplane MDF P10 DET DER DE Mute 2 Input 2 External Page/ Door Lock Relay (See Program 77-1) Note BGM Music Source The PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU PCB with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide External Page options. 1517 Figure 12-16 DK Page and BGM Using the Same Amplifier (PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU) Refer to Table 12-2 with Figures 12-17 and 12-18. Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M 5/00 12-27 Peripheral Installation External Page Options Table 12-2 Paging Zones and Access Codes Zones Access Codes DK40i, DK424 (RCTUA, RCTUBA/ BB, RCTUC/D) and DK424i (B1CU, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU) Access Codes DK424 or DK424i (RCTUE/F or B5CAU/BU equipment with a PIOU) All Call Page and External #39 #39 All Call Page #30 #30 1 #35 #351 2 #36 #352 3 #37 #353 4 #38 #354 5 Not Available #355 6 Not Available #356 7 Not Available #357 8 Not Available #358 RCTUE/F and B5CAU/BU More than 1 PIOU Zone Paging with BGM (Separate Amplifiers) Provides multiple-zone paging capability. The output of the paging amplifier is routed back to the PIOU, where it is switched to one of four sets of speakers by PIOU Relays K1 through K4. The relay selected is determined by the access code dialed by the station user. Default access codes are: Table 12-3 Relay Access Codes PIOU Relay Access Codes DKT LCD Display K1/zone 1 = or K1/zone 5 = External Paging A or E K2/zone 2 = or K2/zone 6 = External Paging B or F K3/zone 3 = or K3/zone 7 = External Paging C or G K4/zone 4 = or K4/zone 8 = External Paging D or H See Program 90 in the Strata DK Programming Manual. EXT + ALL CALL PAGE or RCTUE/F Note Multi-zone page output rating is 30W/maximum at 300 ohms. Zones 5~8 (LCD display E~F) for a second PIOU installed when using an RCTUE3/F3 processor only (see Figure 12-6). An all zone page code () is also available as an option (see Program 10-2). When the All Page code is dialed, all four or eight relays are activated to permit simultaneous paging to all speaker zones and all digital and electronic telephone speakers. ➤ To install the page and background music features on the same amplifier 1. Connect the input from the paging amplifier to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU (see Figure 12-17). 2. Connect the BGM music source to the music amplifier input. 3. Connect the paging amplifier output to the “M” contact’s PIOU relays K1~K4 and the “C” terminal of zone 1 through zone 4 or zone 5 through zone 8 speakers. 4. Connect the BGM music amplifier output to terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and to “C” of zone 1 through zone 4 or zone 5 through zone 8 speakers. 12-28 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation External Page Options 66 Block Pin Numbers Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG MDF PIOU B K1 PGOUT 1 (15) 30 A PGIN 1 (40) 29 C Zone 1 / Zone 51 M B K2 PGOUT 2 (17) 34 A PGIN 2 (42) 33 C PGOUT 3 (19) 38 37 A PGIN 3 (44) PGOUT 4 (21) PGIN 4 (46) 42 41 A Zone 2 / Zone 6 M B K3 Zone 3 / Zone 7 C M B K4 M Zone 4 / Zone 8 C Paging Amp SPR (13) 26 PG Common (23) 46 600Ω Output 25 Input SPT (38) Speaker Common Line C Music Amp BGM Music Source (To External Speaker Only) Output PIOU Pin Numbers ( ) 25-Pair Cable Input Night Ringing and/or Page from KSU Backplane Optional Connection 1518 1. Zones 5~8 are available only to DK424 systems equipped with a RCTUE/F common control unit and more than one PIOU. Set zones 1~4 (first PIOU) with Program 03 Code 41, and zones 5~8 (second PIOU) with Program 03 Code 42 or 43 (if 42 is not used). Notes ● See Programs 78-1, *15 and 77-3 for Night Ringing CO line and Tenant (1-4) assignment options. ● Dial [PDN] or [PhDN] + to pick-up night ringing CO lines. ● The PIOU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the External Page and Night Ring options. Figure 12-17 PIOU Zone, Page/BGM/Night Ring (Separate Amplifiers) Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M 5/00 12-29 Peripheral Installation External Page Options Zone Paging with BGM (Multiple Amplifiers) DK40i and DK424 Only Provides multiple-zone paging capability (same as “External Page Option Installation” on Page 12-26) but separate amplifiers are used for each zone. ➤ To install zone and night ringing with multiple amplifiers 1. Connect the inputs from the paging amplifiers to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU (see Figure 12-18). 2. Connect the music source to the music amplifier input. 3. Connect the paging amplifier outputs to “M” of the PIOU Relays K1~K4 and to “C” of zone 1 through zone 4 speakers. 4. Connect the music amplifier output to terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and to the “C” terminal of zone 1 through zone 4 speakers. 5. Connect zone 1 through zone 4 speakers “A” terminal to the “B” contact of the PIOU relays K1~K4, respectively. 12-30 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation External Page Options MDF PIOU B K1 PGOUT 1 (15) 30 PGIN 1 (40) 29 66 Block Pin Numbers Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG Zone 1 / Zone 5 C M PGOUT 2 (17) 34 PGIN 2 (42) 33 Amp 1 Output Input B K2 A Zone 2 / Zone 6 C M PGOUT 3 (19) 38 PGIN 3 (44) 37 Amp 2 Output Input B K3 A Zone 3 / Zone 7 C M K4 PGOUT 4 (21) 42 PGIN 4 (46) 41 Amp 3 Output Input B A Zone 4 / Zone 8 C M 600Ω SPT (38) 25 SPR (13) 26 PG Common (23) 46 PIOU Pin Numbers ( ) 25-Pair Cables Amp 4 Output Input Night Ringing or Page from KSU Backplane A BGM Music Source & Amplifier C Output C Zones 5~8 are available only to DK424 systems equipped with a RCTUE/F common control unit and more than one PIOU. Set zones 1~4 (first PIOU) with Program 03 Code 41, and zones 5~8 (second PIOU) with Program 03 Code 42 or 43 (if 42 is not used). 1519 Notes ● See Table 12-2 on Page 12-28 for paging access codes. ● See Programs 78-1, *15 and 77-3 for Night Ringing CO line and Tenant (1-4) assignment options. ● Dial [PDN] or [PhDN] + to pick-up night ringing CO lines. The PIOU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the External Page and Night Ring options. Figure 12-18 PIOU Zone Paging and Night Ringing with Multiple Amplifiers Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation ● 12-31 Peripheral Installation Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference Night Ringing over Selected Page Zones In systems shared by 1~4 tenants, each tenant’s CO lines can be assigned to night ring separate PIOU external page zones. This feature can also be used in one-tenant systems. With shared systems, for example, Tenant 1’s night ringing CO lines could be programmed to ring PIOU external page zones 1 and 2, while Tenant 2’s lines could be programmed to ring zones 3 and 4. In non-shared systems, night ringing CO lines can be assigned to ring all of the zones or just selected zones. Note For DK424 only: any RCTU provides four tenants. Programming CO Lines to Ring Selected PIOU Page Zones Program 78-1: Assigns CO lines, Tenant 1 through Tenant 4, that will night ring over PIOU external page zones. Program *15: Assigns CO lines to Tenant 1 through Tenant 4. Lines are initialized as Tenant 1. Note For DK424 only: RCTUA and RCTUB provides two tenants, RCTUC/D and RCTU E/F provide four. Program 77-3: Assigns Tenant 1 through Tenant 4 CO lines to night ring specific PIOU external page zones. Program 39: Assigns appropriate 1LJKW7UDQVIHU and 7HQDQW3LFNXS (for Tenant or NonTenant systems) buttons to electronic and digital telephones. Note Any station can pick up CO lines that night ring over external page zones by pressing the [PDN] and dialing . PIOU Zone Paging Installation See “External Page Option Installation” on Page 12-26, paragraph 4 and Figure 12-17 for installation instructions. Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference Customer-supplied two-way amplifiers can be installed to amplify two-CO line tandem (DISA, External Call Forward) and/or conference calls. Amplified Conference is not available for the DK14. DK40i Information Up to two amplifiers per Strata DK40i System can automatically connect to any two CO line conference. DK424 Information As many as four amplifiers (4-RCTUB, C/D, and /F and all BCUs; 3-RCTUA) can be installed to support up to four of these calls simultaneously. If three amplifiers are installed, three simultaneous calls can be supported. If all amplifiers are in use, then subsequent two-CO line tandem calls and/or conference calls will be unamplified. Each amplifier is connected to two designated PEKU station ports and will automatically be switched into a two-CO line connection established between any CO lines in the system. 12-32 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference Amplified Talk Path Figure 12-19 provides a functional diagram of a two-CO line amplified conference connection. (A tellabs 7206 amplifier is used here.) The talk path for the connection is as follows: outside party 1 – public telephone network – CO PCB, CKTX – RCTU or BCU – PEKU, port A – into AMP, Line in, – AMP, Line out – PEKU, port B – RCTU or BCU – CO PCB, CKTY – public telephone network – outside party 2. This path is two-way so when outside party 2 talks, the talk level is amplified in the reverse direction. Note Only the outside party 1 talk path is amplified to/from a system telephone when it is connected into a two-CO line conference. Amplifier Requirements ♦ Customer-supplied amplifier (two maximum for DK40i and four maximum for DK424 and DK424i). ♦ Must be FCC-registered, Part 68, and must provide automatic gain control. ♦ Each amplifier requires two PEKU station ports. ♦ See the amplifier manufacturer’s installation documentation for amplifier grounding instructions. ➤ To connect a two-way amplifier to the Strata DK system 1. At the MDF, connect the voice pair (VT, VR, port A) of circuit 2 on the designated PEKU PCB to one input of the customer-supplied two-way amplifier. In the example in Figure 12-19, this is CKTA (CO Side A) of the amplifier. (See the Amplified Two-CO Line Conference wiring diagram in Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.) 2. At the MDF, connect the voice pair (VT, VR, port B) of circuit 3 on the designated PEKU PCB to the other input of the amplifier. In Figure 12-19, this is CKTB (subscriber side B) of the amplifier. 3. Plug the amplifier’s power cord into the 117VAC (standard) wall outlet. 4. Set the gain and other amplifier options per the manufacturer’s installation documentation. Amplifier Programming ♦ Program 10-1: LEDs 19 and 20 must be On. ♦ Program 10-2: LED 18 must be On. ♦ Program 10-3: Enables the appropriate PEKU PCB ports for amplifier connection. Only enable the ports that will be connected with the amplifier(s). ♦ Program 15-5: Enables appropriate CO lines for Two-CO line tandem connection. Note Strata DK I&M Program 78-2: Enables appropriate CO lines if amplified DISA is required. 5/00 Peripheral Installation ♦ LED 19 in Program 10-1 should be On if it is certain that an amplifier will always be available for two-CO line conference connections (four maximum, simultaneously). If this LED is On and a two-CO line connection is established without an external amplifier, the Strata DK424 station may be unbalanced and may receive a hum noise. LED 19 provides additional station amplification when external amplifiers are switched into two-CO line connections. 12-33 Peripheral Installation Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference Tellabs 7206 Amplifier (See Notes) Strata DK40i/DK424 CO PCB Outside Party 1 Outside Party 2 24AWG 25-Pair Cable PEKU PCM Conference Switch T CO Line R RCTU CKT, X MDF VT(2), P28/W-GN T TA VR(2), P3/GN-W R RA Port A DT(2) (CKT 2) Public Telephone Network Not Used DR(2) T CO Line R CKT, Y 24AWG Twisted Pair VT(3), P30/W-S T TB VR(3), P30/S-W R RB Port B DT(3) (CKT 3) Not Used DR(3) PEKU, PDKU, RDSU, RSTU, PESU, or PSTU Any CO line will be switched into the conference; see programming notes for tandem and/or DISA CO lines System telephone that sets up 2-CO line conference call Programming Notes 117VAC 60Hz • Program 10-3, circuit assignments: Program 10-3 PEKU Port Conf. Enable Button/LED PEKU Slot Position LED 01, ON 12 LED 02, ON 13 LED 03, ON 14 LED 04, ON 15 Tellabs Power Adapter Tellabs Case PEKU Port Number PEKU Circuit A = 009 B = 010 A = 017 B = 018 A = 025 B = 026 A = 033 B = 034 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 • Program 10-1, LEDs 19 and 20 ON. • Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO lines for tandem connection. • Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO lines if amplified DISA is required. • Program 10-2, LEDs 18 and 19 ON. Duplex AC Plug Notes (Amplifier) • • • • All amplifier equipment is customer or dealer-supplied. Available in single and multiple configurations. For information regarding the Tellabs 7206 two-way amplifier: http://www.tellabs.com 1(800) 445-6501 Install in accordance with tellabs technical manual Through Signalling Configuration. 4245 Figure 12-19 External Amplified Two-CO Line Call Functional Wiring Diagram 12-34 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options An SMDR printer or call accounting device may be connected to the system to provide a hardcopy record of station activity. The Strata DK system can record incoming, outgoing, and transferred calls, as well as Account Code entries and names and telephone numbers of answered DNIS, ANI, Caller ID, E911 and ISDN calls. Call record data is printed out at the completion of each eligible call. SMDR format is ASCII-formatted, 8-bits, no parity, 1-stop bit. To support the SMDR printer/call accounting device option, a Strata DK system must be equipped with a PIOU, PIOUS,...or ♦ For DK424 and DK424i only, a RSIU/RSIS, PIOU, and PIOUS ♦ For DK40i only, TSIU ♦ For DK14 only, WSIU Connection of the printer or call accounting device to the PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424 or DK424i), TSIU (DK40i), or WSIU (DK14) PCB is accomplished with a 3-pair modular cord (seven feet maximum) and a PPTC connector adapter (Figure 12-21, “PIOU/PIOUS SMDR Cable Connections”). Note PIOU, PIOUS will be 300 or 1200 bps (see Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs); RSIU/RSIS (DK424 or DK424i), TSIU (DK40i) and WSIU (DK14) can be 1200~9600 bps (see Program 76). The PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424), or TSIU (DK40i) contain a call record buffer which stores call record data (up to 50 calls) when the printed or call accounting device is turned Off, or when no device is connected to the SMDR port. No further call records are stored after the buffer is filled. When the printer or call accounting device is made operational, “ERROR BUFFER OVERFLOW” prints out to indicate the buffer was full, and that some call information may have been lost. Note If PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424 or DK424i) or TSIU (DK40i) are assigned as SMDR simultaneously in programming, RSIU/RSIS or TSIU will operate as SMDR – not PIOU, PIOUS. A display of the customer database (Figure 12-22 on Page 12-41) can also be printed using the SMDR RS-232 port by running Program 97. To program SMDR, use Program 60. The SMDR port is active only on the PIOU or PIOUS with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43), or the RSIU or RSIS Port programmed with code x2 in Program 76-1. SMDR sends out special names for the following types of calls: ♦ MSS – Prints on DISA and External Call Forward calls to stations. MSS prints only on DISA calls that are answered after the threshold time (set in Program 60-2). If the call is answered before the threshold time, the call will register as a normal incoming call and the MSS/transfer portion of the call will not print out. The call threshold time – the length of time that a call must be in progress before it is registered by SMDR – can be set for either 1.0 or 10 seconds in Program 60-2. ♦ MODM – Prints on calls to the RMDS or IMDU remote maintenance modem (Station #19). ♦ DISA – Prints on DISA and External Call Forward calls in which CO lines are accessed for trunk-to-trunk outside calling. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Note 12-35 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options Figure 12-20, “SMDR Output” shows a sample SMDR printout and describes the contents of each column. The following examples show call record samples and describe the sequence of events that generated the call records. If a subaddress for a call is received or sent on an ISDN call, it is included in the SMDR. Subaddresses may/may not be received/sent on all ISDN calls. 1 10 20 40 08:14 00:00;22 001 MODM 08:15 00:00;18 00;00 003 200D 08:16 00:00;28 00;08 003 DISA 08:16 00:00;15 * 001 DISA 08:17 00:00;25 003 MSS 08:18 00:00;12 003 205 08:19 00:00;22 003 202 08:19 00:00;16 205 50 60 205 80 90 100 110 120 DISA Call to IMDU Outgoing DISA Access by Incoming DISA 01 Incoming DISA and Access CO 03 Outgoing 205 Answers DISA Call 12 Seconds After DK Dial Tone 00;06 First Digit (varies) Last Digit (always this column) 500 08:20 00:00;34 1234567890123456789 003 C 200 200 08:22 00:00;22 7145933700 08:23 00:00;40 7145833700 F G First Digit Last Digit 1234567894563210 1993021977 K L 093772981 2890 205 4567897 123456987 sw 004 D 200 002 70 MM/DD/ YY, Every Fifty Call Records and at Midnight 11/06/97 001 30 A B C D E H I J M A = Non-ISDN call established, then network disconnects. A = ISDN call established, then DK disconnects. + = ISDN Field Number 1 call established, then network disconnects. S = Start of E911 call. E = End of E911 call.4 B CO Line Number (001~144). C C = Caller ID Call; D = ANI or DNIS Call. Field Number 5 D [PDN] of the Station (1~4 digits)2 making/answering a call. Field Number (7~10)3 E Primary, Secondary, or Phantom Directory Number which made/answered the call (1~4 digits). Blank if call is made Field Number (12-15)3 from a CO line button. F Time of Day (HH:MM:SS).1 1 Field Number (2~4)3 Field Number (17-21)3 Field Number (23-30)3 G Call Duration (HH:MM:SS). H CO Line Incoming Ring Duration Before Answer (MM:SS). Field Number (32-36)3 I Station to which the CO line was transferred (1~4 digits). Field Number (38-41)3 Telephone Number Field Number (43-63)3 ANI/DN,6 Format: 7145833730 3846 5 Incoming (1~20 digits) ANI (10 digits), DNIS (2~5 digits), Caller ID Number or ID Code ● J ● ● Outgoing Number (1~20 digits) E911 Station ID (Prg *12) Field Number (43~52) K DNIS NAME5 (0~16 characters); Caller ID Name5 (0~16 characters), or Account Code6 (4~15 digits); LCD User Field Number (65~80)3 Name on E911 Calls L Outgoing Subaddress on ISDN call. Field Number (82~101) M Incoming Subaddress on ISDN call. Field Number (103~122) 1. Call Duration (incoming, outgoing, or transfer) must be 1 or 10 secs. (set by Program 60-2) to generate a call record printout. 2. “MSS”: designates a DISA or CF–External CO call to an unanswered station or answered after 1 or 10 secs. (threshold) per Program 60-2. The call registers as a normal incoming call if answered before the threshold time. DISA calls always register 5~6 seconds ring before answer duration time. 3. Field column information is provided for SMDR output formatting purposes. 4. A “*” in the first column indicates a disconnected call by the CO Calling Party Control (CPC) or Automatic Release signal. Loop start CO lines must have Programs 15-0 and 15-3 enabled before the CPC is dropped. 5. Answered calls ANI, DNIS, and Caller ID data transmits using the SMDR port. Abandoned calls data is not transmitted, but can be stored in station memory. See Program *51 and *52. 6. See Program 60-1. 7. Strata DK sends a Carriage Return (CR) and Line Feed (LF) ASCII symbol after each line of data. General Notes The call record data is ASCII-formatted, 8 bits; no parity, 1-stop bit. Special dial printout: Tone = “T”, Long pause = “L”, Flash = “F”, Pause = “P” “DISA”: designates a DISA or CF–External call through the system via CO-to-CO connection. “MODM”: designates a call to the IMDU, Remote Maintenance Modem. Figure 12-20 SMDR Output 12-36 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options SMDR Printout Examples Note SMDR printout “time of day” and month/day/year (MM/DD/YY) is the same as the system clock time/date set by the station connected to Port 000. SMDR MM/DD/YY prints out each time 50 call records are generated and at midnight each day. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO Lines Note DISA station calls print out as MSS or DISA. Example 1 – Ring, No Answer DISA Call Call Sequence A ♦ Outside caller rings CO line 003. (CO line 003 is programmed as a DISA line.) ♦ Line 003 returns internal dial tone to caller after one or two ring cycles (5~6 seconds). ♦ Caller does nothing. DH 200 rings but is not answered. ♦ After 32 seconds, call is disconnected. ♦ Printout A prints after disconnect at 4:59. Printout A (Release 1 and 2): 003 MSS 04:59 00:00;32 00;06 Printout A (Release 3 and above): 003 MSS 04:59 00:00;25 00;05 Example 2 – DISA Internal Station Call Call Sequence B ♦ Outside caller rings CO line 003. (CO line 003 is programmed as a DISA line.) ♦ Line 003 returns intercom dial tone to caller after two ring cycles (5~6 seconds). ♦ Caller dials 203. ♦ After 48 seconds from start of call, station 203 answers. ♦ Printout B prints after station 203 answers the call at 4:32. Note MSS will not print if the call is answered before the threshold time set in Program 60-2. Printout B (Release 1 and 2): 003 MSS 04:32 00:00;48 00;05 203 Printout B (Release 3 and above): 003 MSS 04:32 00:00;48 00;05 203 Example 3 – DISA Outgoing CO Line Call Note DISA CO line calls print out as DISA. Call Sequence C Outside caller rings CO line 001. (Line 001 is programmed as DISA.) ♦ Line 001 returns intercom dial tone after two ring cycles (5~6 seconds). ♦ Caller dials #7003 to access CO line 003 (outgoing). ♦ Caller dials the DISA security code and receives CO dial tone. ♦ Caller dials the telephone number and converses when the call is answered. 5/00 Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M ♦ 12-37 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options ♦ Caller hangs up. ♦ The call releases, and Printout C prints after the call disconnects at 12:22. Notes ● ● If the CO provides the Calling Party Control or Auto Release (AR) signal (see Program 15-0 and 15-3), the call disconnects when either party hangs up. A “*” will follow the CO line number in Release 1 and 2 and precede the CO line number in Release 3 on the printout if the call is disconnected by the CPC or AR signal. If the CPC or AR signal is not sent, the CO lines will remain seized until the DISA disconnect timer releases the call (see Program 12). Printout C Auto Release signal: (Release 1 and 2) 003 MSS 12:20 00:00;02 00:06 (outgoing) 003* DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (outgoing) 001 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (incoming) Auto Release signal (Release 3 and above) 003 MSS 12:20 00:00;03 00:05 DISA (outgoing) *003 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (outgoing) 001 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (incoming) Disconnect Timer (Release 1 and 2) 001 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (incoming) 003 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (outgoing) Disconnect Timer (Release 3 and above) 001 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (incoming) 003 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (outgoing) Note The “MSS” entry prints out only if the call was connected after the SMDR threshold, 1.0 or 10 seconds. The threshold is set in Program 60-2. SMDR Programming Program 03 ♦ The SMDR output is provided by the PIOU or PIOUS with the lowest code assigned (41, 42, or 43). ♦ If using RSIU or RSIS PCB (DK424) in slot 11 for SMDR, set Program 03 code 49 for slot 11. Notes ● ● 12-38 WSIU (DK14) and TSIU (DK40i) do not require a Program 03 slot assignment. RSIU/RSIS (DK424) Program 76-1 code x2 overrides PIOU/PIOUS SMDR assignments and code 49 for RSIU/RSIS. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options Program 60 ♦ Item 1: Selects Caller ID, ANI and DNIS or Account Code to be sent out the SMDR Port. ♦ Item 2: Selects the minimum duration (1.0 or 10 seconds) of calls that will be registered by SMDR. Any call that lasts less than the set time will not be recorded. ♦ Item 3: Selects the records of outgoing calls or outgoing and incoming calls to be printed. ♦ Item 4: Selects the digit length of Account Codes (4 to 15 digits). ♦ Item 5: Allows only long distance call records to be printed. ♦ Item 6: DISA security code. ♦ Item 7: Credit card calling digit length. Program 76 ♦ If WSIU (DK14), TSIU (DK40i), or RSIU/RSIS (DK424) is used to interface to the SMDR device use Program 76 to make the appropriate WSIU, TSIU, RSIU/RSIS SMDR programming assignments. SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Installation 1. Connect the interface cable and the PPTC or PPTC9 adapter from the WSIU (DK14), TSIU (DK40i), PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424 or DK424i), or SMDR port to the SMDR printer or call accounting device DB25 or DB9 connector. (See Figure 12-21 and PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSIS TTY and SMDR Wiring in Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more details.) 2. Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW1 switch to the appropriate bps rate WSIU (DK14), TSIU (DK40i) – 1200~9600 bps), (PIOU/PIOUS – 300 or 1200 bps, RSIU/RSIS (DK424 or DK424i) as determined by the baud rate of the printer or call accounting device (Program 76 set WSIU/ TSIU, RSIU/RSIS bps rate). 3. Set the printer or call accounting device to no parity/8-bits/one stop bit. 4. Use Program 60 to set the system for the required SMDR printer/call accounting device options (See the following section and the Strata DK Programming Manual). Note Only the PIOU/PIOUS with the lowest code in Program 03 (41, 42, or 43) or RSIU/RSIS with Program 76-1 code X2 will provide the SMDR output. Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M 5/00 12-39 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options Basic Connection DK14, DK40i or DK424 WSIU or TSIU or RSIU or RSIS or PIOU or PIOUS DB25 or DB9 Plug 3-pair Modular Modular Cord (7 ft. max) Jack Printer SMDR Modular Jack or Call Accounting Device Data Format: • ASCII • 8-bits • No parity • 1-stop bit 50 ft. max 24 AWG Wire Twisted Pair Toshiba Modularized PPTC1A-5M (25 pin), PPTC-25F, or PPTC9 (9-pin) RS232, Modular Adapter Basic Wiring PIOU, SMDR Jack Modular Pin No. PPTC1A-5M Adapter Modular Pin No. DB25 Pin No. RS-232 Lead Name 1 to 6 to 3 RD 2 to 5 to 2 TD 3 to 4 to 6 DSR 4 to 3 to 20 DTR 5 to 2 to 8 CD 6 to 1 to 7 SG 4 Jumper to 5 RTS to CTS 4305 Figure 12-21 PIOU/PIOUS SMDR Cable Connections 12-40 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation System Database Printout Using SMDR Port System Database Printout Using SMDR Port If a printer is connected to the SMDR port, customer program information stored in the DK14, DK40i or DK424 RCTU or DK424i BCU RAM may be printed out for reference (see Figure 12-22). Program 97 Enables system program data to be printed via the SMDR port. See Program 97 record sheet. ♦ Notes An SMDR printer must be connected to the SMDR port to use the printout option selected by Program 97. ● Call record data is lost when program data is printed out with Program 97. ● Program Number Port Number ## System Programming ## 1: SELECT (LED ON) 40 3 1111111 1111111 1111111 3 32 1 111111 1 111111 1 111111 2 1 1 1 40 3 81 001-249 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000 0000000 3 32 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 2 0 0 0 81 000 ## END OF PRINT 5 24 1 111 1 111 1 111 111 144 5 24 0 000 0 000 0 000 000 144 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 3 7 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 136 7 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 136 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 9 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 128 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 128 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 CO Line Numbers Lines 41 ~ 80 Lines 81 ~ 120 CO Line Numbers ## 1523 Figure 12-22 PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSIS SMDR Port Data Dump Example Voice Mail Options Strata DK systems can support a Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, VP or customer-supplied voice mail system. Voice mail integration is provided by Strata in-band tones and/or on DK424 (only) the Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) output of the PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU, or RSIS SMDI port. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Voice mail systems connect to standard telephone circuits (QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/ RSTS, PSTU or PESU). The number of circuits required by each device depends on the customer’s voice mail requirements, such as the number of voice mail users. To support voice mail, DK14 KSU must have QCRU3 installed, DK40i KSU must have K4RCU3 or K5RCU installed and a DK424 RCTU must have an RRCS installed. 12-41 Peripheral Installation Voice Mail Options The PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU must be set with Program 03, code 43 or for RSIU/RSIS Program 03, code 49 and Program 76-1 with code x4 to provide SMDI output. See the SMDI section for more details about SMDI installation and operation. Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems Strata DK systems are designed to support the full range of features offered by the Toshiba Stratagy and/or VP systems. It provides various call routing, message handling, and information management features, including: ♦ Auto Attendant ♦ Call Forward to Voice Mailbox ♦ Message Waiting Indication ♦ Voice Mail Control from Digital and Electronic Telephones ♦ System Monitoring ♦ Feature Integration A block diagram of voice mail-to-QSTU2, KSTU2, -RSTU2, -RDSU/RSTS, or -PESU connection is shown in Figure 12-23, “Voice Mail Block Diagram”. Note The RRCS must be installed on the RCTU; BRCS on the BCU; and K4RCU3 on the DK14 KSU or DK40i Base KSU to allow VM DTMF dialing. For installation procedures, see: ♦ Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for QSTU2 ♦ Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for KSTU2 ♦ Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs for RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, and PESU RCTU RRCS 4, 8, or 12 MDF DK14/DK40i Base KSU QRCU3 or K4RCU3 Voice Mail Machine QSTU2 (DK14), KSTU2 (DK40i) RSTU2/RSTU/PSTU (CKT 1~8) or PESU (CKT 1 & 2) or RDSU/RSTS (CKT 1~4) 25-Pin Cable (8 circuits per PSTU/RSTU, 2 or 4 circuits per RDSU/RSTS 2 circuits per PESU, 4 circuits per KSTU2) Standard Telephone Circuit Tip & Ring (1 Pair PerVM Port) 4306 Figure 12-23 Voice Mail Block Diagram 12-42 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Voice Mail Options Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or Toshiba VP Programming Some features of Strata DK system programming were designed for Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK or VP systems, and do not necessarily apply to customer-supplied voice mail messaging systems. These programming features are: Answer (A) Tone The Strata DK stations send an answer tone to Stratagy or VP when the station answers a VP or Stratagy call. Disconnect (D) Tone The Strata DK stations send a disconnect tone to Stratagy or VP when the station hangs up while connected to Stratagy or VP. [(D Tone is also sent to release the Stratagy or VP/Auto Attendant port when an outside loop start CO line caller hangs-up and the CO provides a Calling Party Control (CPC) or Auto Release (AR) disconnect signal per Program 15-0 and 15-3. Ground start CO lines will send “D” tone to VM ports anytime an outside caller hangs up.] Notes ● ● ● D Tone will not operate in all areas, because some COs fail to provide the CPC or AR signal on loop start lines. Both A and D Tones provide more efficient Stratagy or VP port use. Always enable these options. Both options are enabled by accessing Program 31, and setting LED 15 On. The CPC or AR signal of some COs is not reliable and may occur during a CO line voice connection, causing the call to disconnect. If this occurs, disable CPC /AR Hold and CPC/AR Voice Mail calls on all CO loop start lines with Programs 15-0 and 15-3. Recall (B) Tone Stations send a recall (B) tone to Stratagy or VP whenever Stratagy or VP answers a transfer (camp-on) recall from stations that did not answer a Stratagy or VP blind transfer. (The B tone notifies Stratagy or VP that the call is a recall and not a new call, allowing Stratagy or VP to respond with the appropriate greeting.) For this feature to operate, QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU voice mail ports must have LEDs 19 and 20 turned On in Program 31. See “General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming” on Page 12-43 below for more information. Customer-supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems Strata DK systems are designed to support a wide range of customer-supplied voice mail messaging systems. Depending on the voice mail system used, some of the features available with Toshiba Stratagy or VP (See “Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems” on Page 12-42) may be available with the customer-supplied system. Voice mail (VM) QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU port programming is accomplished using Programs 31 and 10-2. (See Strata DK Programming Manual for more details.) VM programming features are as follows: Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming 12-43 Peripheral Installation Voice Mail Options VM Groups This feature groups VM QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU ports together so that message waiting set/cancel signals appear to originate from the lowest port in the VM group. All VM ports connected to a particular VM machine should be set in the same VM group (Program 31, LEDs 05~08). The same ports set in the Program 31 VM group should also be set in the designated VM Distributed Hunt Group in Program *40. Message Waiting (MW) Set/Cancel If the VM machine has the ability to dial a code and the appropriate station numbers to set or cancel the message waiting LEDs on digital and electronic telephones, you can use Program 10-2, LED 04 to instruct the VM machine to set or cancel a MW LED. See the Strata DK Programming Manual for more information. Note Only dial codes and are set in the VM device configuration; the VM device dials the station number automatically to set/cancel the MW LED. No Conference VM Prevents undesired three-party connections during VM call transfers. All VM ports should be set for No Conference (Program 31, LED 09). Privacy Override Deny Prevents stations from overriding (breaking in) in-progress VM calls (Program 31, LED 18). End-to-End Signaling Enables VM port DTMF operation. All VM ports should be set for end-to-end signaling (Program 31, LED 17). Note The RRCS -4, -8, or -12 must be installed on the DK40i or DK424 RCTU to enable Endto-End Signaling. Receive Auto Call Forward ID Codes Provides auto digits from call forwarded stations to direct callers to station mailboxes. All VM ports should be set to receive auto ID code (Program 31, LED 16). Voice Mail Program Checklist Prior to Programming Set Toshiba VP Maintenance Menu system parameters to “D” = Strata DK (any model). See Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP documentation for other parameter settings. Programming Strata DK for Voice Mail 12-44 ♦ Program 92: Initialization clears voice mail auto dial codes. ♦ Program 03: Verifies that a RRCS is installed on the RCTU, K4RCU3 or K5RC4 is installed on the DK40i KSU, or the QRCU3 is installed in the DK14 to enable the VM device to send DTMF tones. Also sets PIOU, PIOUS (code 43) or RSIU/RSIS (code 49) to enable the SMDI port (see Program 76 if installing RSIU or RSIS SMDI port). ♦ Program 04: Assigns station Intercom or Directory numbers [DN] to VM ports (initialized numbers recommended). ♦ Program 05: First digit of special codes and (initialized numbers recommended). ♦ Program *09: Sets DID extensions to ring VM Auto Attendant Ports if Program 71 is not used. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Voice Mail Options ♦ Program 10-1: If the system is first set for voice, program the VM device to dial the suffix “1” after station numbers. ♦ Program 10-2: If LED 04 On for set/cancel operation and LED 06 On for the VM to detect 80 millisecond tones. Also set DTMF Tone return or No DTMF return options (LED 11 and 20). ♦ Program 10-3: Sets SMDI options. ♦ Program 13: If the VM device is the message center, set the lowest standard telephone port in the Program 31 VM group as the message center. ♦ Program 31: Turn LEDs 04, and 15~20 On, and LED 05, 06, 07 or 08 On for the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU ports that are connected to the Toshiba VP and Stratagy VM ports. Turn LED 09 On for VM Auto Attendant “Supervised Transfer” operation; turn LED 09 Off for VM Auto Attendant “blind transfer” operation and/or VM two CO-line tandem connection with release 3.2. Do not set these options for telephone station ports. Note A, D, and B Tones should be enabled only for VM devices that respond to these tones. Program *32: Sets lowest standard telephone port if the Program 31 VM group as message center for stations using VM. ♦ Program 33: Sets the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, and PESU ports that are connected to the VM ports to a hunting sequence, starting with the lowest port hunting to the next highest port, etc. The last hunt should be to an attendant station. Only use Program 33 if you ar not using Program *40 to set up a VMDA group. ♦ Program *34: Turns Off LED 01 to disable camp-on BOV tone to a VM port. ♦ Program 35: LEDs 01 and 02 must be On for stations to receive the message waiting indication (flashing LED) from a VM device. This program also turns On LED 03 for standard telephone ports that must support standard telephone message waiting lamps. It is advisable to turn Busy Station Transfer (LED 20) On for all VM/Auto Attendant ports, and to turn Busy Station Ringing (LED 19) On for all stations that must never be detected as busy when called by the VM/Auto Attendant port. Also turn LED 03 Off to disable standard telephone MW signal to VM ports. ♦ Program 36: Sets Fixed Call Forward to VM [DN] per customer requirements. ♦ Program 37: Sets the transfer recall timer for the VM ports to 11~999 seconds minimum to allow Call Forward-No Answer to work on VM transferred calls. Station users can individually set CF-NA ring time from 8~60 seconds. ♦ Program 39: Sets the VM-related buttons on the digital and electronic telephones that will be used to communicate with the VM device. ♦ Program *40: Sets VM standard ports into a Distributed Hunt Group (same ports set as Program 31 VM group). ♦ Program 71 (1-3): Sets Tie/DID/DNIS extensions to ring VM Auto Attendant Ports if Program *09 is not used. ♦ Program 71-4: Sets the DNIS VM ID code (for Inband Integration only, not SMDI). ♦ Program 76: Sets RSIU RSIS or TSIU SMDI port. ♦ Programs 81~89: Verifies that the ringing assignments to the VM devices are set per customer requirements. ♦ Programs 16, 40, 41, 45~48 and 50~56: Verifies that outgoing CO line access is allowed on VM ports to allow the VM beeper notification feature to operate. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation ♦ 12-45 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Voice Mail System Installation 1. Ensure that the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU PCB is installed in the system per Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs. 2. Connect the VM system to the selected KSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, RSTU2, PSTU or PESU standard telephone port. (See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation or Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation.) 3. Program the Strata DK system for the required VM features. (See “Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems” on Page 12-42, paragraph 3 and “General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming” on Page 12-43.) 4. For DK424, ensure that an RRCS -4, -8 or -12 is installed on the RCTU, and verify that the RCTU code in Program 03 is for RRCS operation. ...or For DK40i, K4RU3 is installed on the KSU. For DK14, QRCU is installed. 5. Perform additional VM system programming as applicable (See customer-supplied installation/programming manuals). Note Some VM devices may ring trip when called; in this case, set the square-wave ring voltage jumper to L (low position) on the PSTU2, KSTU2, PESU or PSTU2 PCB connected to the VM device. This is not necessary on RSTU2 and RDSU/RSTS PCBs because they have a sine-wave ring generator. PC/Data Communications Interface Units The Strata DK supports two types of Data Interface Units (DIUs) that enable digital telephone users to simultaneously transmit and receive data on the same digital station port and wire pair while communicating on a voice call. One unit, called the integrated DIU (RCPI-DI, PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2), becomes part of the digital telephone, replacing the telephone’s base; the other unit, is a small self-contained unit called the stand-alone DIU (PDIU-DS). Each RPCI or PDIU is powered by the digital port to which it is connected (see Figure 10-4 on Page 10-6 for wiring requirements). The RPCI-DI can operate in two modes: Telephony Application Program Interface Mode (TAPI) or Data Communication mode. The RCPI operating mode is controlled by the PC connected to the RPCI-DI. This section only covers the RCPI-DI data communications mode. See the PC/DIU User Guide for information on changing the RPCI-DI mode. Notes ● ● “Digital Ports” include the PDKU and RDSU digital station ports. 2000-series digital telephones require RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 and 1000-series telephones require PDIU-DI and are not compatible with RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2. Both RPCIs and DIUs can be connected to standard Electronic Industries Association (EIA) RS232 asynchronous serial data devices. EIA devices are divided into two categories: data communication equipment (DCE) and data terminal equipment (DTE). Common DCE devices are modems and some printers; common DTE devices are personal computers, ASCII terminals, and some printers. 12-46 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units The RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI operate like a DCE and connect directly to DTE devices using standard RS-232 cables. Depending on how its internal jumper plugs are configured, the PDIU-DS can either operate like a DTE and connect to DCE devices; or operate like a DCE device and connect to DTE devices. In most applications, DTE and DCE devices exchange data between each other via the standard RS-232 cable connection. When in the data communications modes, RPCIs and DIUs can function with DCE and DTE devices at data speeds of up to 19.2 kbps. However, keyboard dialing using AT commands (from a PC or terminal connected to a RPCI or DIU) is limited to 9600 bps. RPCI or DIU data transmission speed is set by the first AT command that the RPCI or DIU receives once it is in the command state; if manual dialing or receiving calls in the auto answer (default) mode, the transmission speed is transparent and can be up to 19.2 kbps. Important! To use the RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS with AT commands, communications software or a PC program that performs terminal emulation must be used. AT commands cannot be issued from the computer’s operating system prompt. RPCI-DI Dual Mode RPCI-DI can operate in the data communication or Telephone Application Program Interface (TAPI) mode. ♦ When in the Data Command mode, send the HEX (fØ), enter ALT (Hold) + 240 to the RPCI to switch it to the Data Communications mode. (Unplugging the telephone cord and then reconnecting it also resets the RPCI to the Data Communications mode.) ♦ When in the TAPI mode, send (ATCØ) to the RPCI to switch it to the Data Command mode. In the TAPI mode, a constant stream of data is sent from the RPCI to the PC COM port. ♦ RPCI-DI mode switching should be performed automatically by the application programs running on the PC connected to the RPCI-DI. (See Chapter 15 – Computer Telephony Integration for instructions on configuring your PC for TAPI software.) Common DIU Connections The block diagram in Figure 12-24 illustrates common RPCI and DIU data communications connections. In this example, RPCI-DIs or PDIU-DIs are connected to PCs (PC1 and PC2), and PDIU-DSs are connected to a serial printer and modems. PC users can transfer files internally, print files on the same printer, and access the modem pool to send/receive data to/from an external personal computer or dial up data service. Installation instructions for these devices are provided, starting from “RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIUDS SW1 DIP Switch Information” on Page 12-59 through “PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly” on Page 12-64. Call paths and scenarios for five types of data test calls are provided in “RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Data Communication Installation Tests” on Page 12-65, paragraph 2 through paragraph 6. Step-by-step data calling procedures are provided in the PC/Data Interface User Guide. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation To access these devices, a data call connection must be established between the RPCIs and DIUs. This is accomplished by dialing the destination DIU from a digital telephone dial pad or from a PC keyboard using standard AT dial commands. RPCI-DIs and PDIU-DIs share the same intercom or [PDN]/ports with the digital telephone to which they are connected, while PDIU-DSs have their own. The intercom and data call LEDs on the digital telephone initiates a voice or data call, respectively. When dialing from a keyboard with AT commands, ATD is typed for voice calls, and ATDD for data calls. 12-47 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Portable PC 1 Strata DK40i/DK424 KSU 2 DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (200) RS-2321 MDF Digital (Port 000) Portable PC 2 DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (201) 1 RS-232 MDF2 Dial-up Computer Service Digital (Port 001) Serial Printer MDF2 1 TOSHIBA Telephone Line X DIGITAL (Port 003) 1 RS-232 DIU POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT PDIU-DS (203) RS-232 Line Z 2 MDF MODEM (208) MDF RSTU2 PSTU RDSU RSTS (Port 008) Modem Public Telephone Network CO LINE 1 DIGITAL (Port 004) 1 RS-232 DIU POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT PDIU-DS (204) Modem Pool MDF2 Modem 1 (219) Telephone Line Y Standard Telephone RS-2321 RSTU2 PSTU RDSU RSTS (Port 009) Modem DIGITAL (Port 005) 1 RS-232 DIU POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT PDIU-DS (205) Portable 2 PC 4307 1. RS-232 cable and connector information is provided in Figures 12-26 to 12-32. 2. See Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation and Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for PC, data interface and modem MDF station wiring. Figure 12-24 DK Data Communications Installation Example Block Diagram 12-48 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units EIA Interface Leads (Signals) Both DIUs operate with 10 standard EIA RS-232 interface leads (signals) on which signaling data is transmitted and received. RPCIs and DIUs connect to serial data devices with standard RS-232 cables, available from telephone supply stores (see Figures 12-24~12-29 and 12-30). The RPCIDI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS requires 10 signals for some applications, but can function with eight using modular cords and connectors with RJ45/DB25 adapters for other applications. If uncertain which signals are necessary for an application, all 10 should be connected. See Figure 12-32, “RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIU-DS SW1 DIP Switch Information” for more information. Important! ♦ The RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI is always a DCE device; the PDIU-DS may be a DTE or DCE, depending on how its internal jumpers (1~9) are configured. ♦ In the descriptions below, when a signal is On, its potential is about seven volts positive relative to signal ground (pin 7); when a signal is Off, it is about 7 volts negative relative to the signal ground (pin 7). Frame Ground (FG, Pin 1) The FG signal (EIA circuit AA) is a protective or safety ground which is bonded to the PDIU-DI/ PDIU-DS PCB. If required by local codes, the FG should be connected to external ground. Signal Ground (SG, Pin 7) The SG signal (EIA circuit AB) establishes the common ground reference for all other PDIU and data device signals and must be wired for all applications. Transmit Data (TD, Pin 2) DTE devices transmit and DCE devices receive data on the TD lead (EIA circuit BA). Before the DTE device can transmit the TD signal, the RTS, CTS, DSR, and DTR signals (all discussed below) must be On. The TD signal is Off in the idle state. Receive Data (RD, Pin 3) The DCE device transmits data to the DTE device on the RD lead (EIA circuit BB); the DTE receives data on the RD. Request to Send (RTS, Pin 4) Some DTE devices send an RTS signal (EIA circuit CA) to the DCE device when they are ready to transmit data on the TD lead. If the DTE device does not generate the RTS signal, the DIU DIP switch SW1-4 should be set On to inform the RPCI or DIU. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy type flow control, in these cases DIP switch SW1-4 should be Off. Clear to Send (CTS, Pin 5) Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation The DCE device sends the CTS signal (EIA circuit CB) which indicates that it is prepared to transmit data to the line side. The DCE device sends this signal only when it receives the RTS signal from the DTE device. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy type flow control; in these cases, DIP switch SW1-4 should be Off. 12-49 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Data Set Ready (DSR, Pin 6) When connected to the communication channel and prepared to exchange control characters to initiate data transmission, the DCE device sends the DSR signal (EIA circuit CC) to the DTE device. If the PDIU DIP switch SW1-2 is set On, DSR will be On continuously; if the switch is set Off, DSR follows DTR (if DSR is On, DTR is On, etc.) SW1-2 should be Off in most cases. Data Carrier Detect (DCD, Pin 8) The DCE device sends the DCD signal (DCD, Pin 8) when receiving the carrier signal on the line side. Before transmitting or receiving data, most DTE devices require that the DCD be On. If the carrier signal is removed by the remote end or lost due to a fault condition on the line, the DCE notifies the DTE device by an Off condition with the DCD signal. The PDIU DIP switch SW1-2 is set On to set the DCD On continuously. If set Off, the DCD signal will only be On when connection between two DIUs is established and Off when a connection is not established. SW1-2 is set Off when the DTE/DCE uses the DTR/DSR signals for Ready/Busy flow control. Data Terminal Ready (DTR, Pin 20) The DTE device sends the DTR signal (EIA circuit CD) to the DCE device, prompting the DCE device to open the communication line. The line is closed and the call disconnected when the DTE device quits sending the DTR signal. DTR may be sent any time to indicate that the DTE is ready to transmit or receive data. DIP switch SW1-2 should be set Off in most cases. Ring Indicator (RI, Pin 22) The RI signal (EIA circuit CE) is sent by the DCE device to the DTE device. Whenever the DCE device receives a ringing signal on the line side, it turns the RI signal On. If RPCI or DIU DIP switch SW1-3 is set On, the RI signal will be continuously On if ringing; if the switch is set Off, the RI signal will be one second On/three seconds Off when the RPCI or DIU detects ringing signal. 12-50 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (Functions like a DCE) Personal Computer or Toshiba Portable (DTE) Pin Designations COM Port Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pin Designations 7 8 PDIU-DI Pin # 9 DCD RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI Name Name Rear view of asynchronous (serial) communication interface connector (DB9) of PC or Toshiba Portable. DB9 Female Connector DB9 Male Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI DB25, RS-232 female connector 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Female Connector DB25 Male Connector 22 20 22 20 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB9 Pin # Name DB25 Pin # 1 DCD 8 2 RD 3 3 TD 2 4 DTR 20 5 SG 7 6 DSR 6 7 RTS 4 8 CTS 5 9 RI 22 PC modem style (serial) DB25 to DB9, RS-232 cable. Pin to pin connections are confiqured as a straight cable, not as a null modem cable (50 ft max, 24AWG; customersupplied). Notes Some RS-232 EIA leads may be called by other names by some manufacturers. The computer receives data on Pin 2 (RD) and sends data on Pin 3 (TD). Figure 12-25 RPCI-DI to 25-Pin to 9-Pin COM Port Strata DK I&M 5/00 1527 Peripheral Installation • • 12-51 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units PDIU-DI Pin # Name 1 2 Personal Computer or ASCII Terminal (Functions like a DTE) RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (Functions like a DCE) DB25 Pin Designations DB25 Pin Designations 3 4 5 6 7 20 8 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR Rear view of personal computer or ASCII terminal DB25, RS-232 connector PDIU-DI Pin # 22 RI 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 20 22 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR Name Rear view of RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI DB25, RS-232 female connector DB25 Male Connector 6 RI DB25 Female Connector 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 22 20 20 22 22 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Female Connector DB25 Male Connector DB25 Pin # Name DB25 Pin # 8 DCD 8 3 RD 3 2 TD 2 20 DTR 20 7 SG 7 6 DSR 6 4 RTS 4 Note The PC/ASCII terminal 5 CTS 5 receives data on Pin 3 (RD) and transmits data on Pin 2 (TD). 22 RI 22 1 FG 1 RS-232 Cable PC modem style (serial) DB25 to DB25 (M/F) RS-232 cable (50 ft max, 24 AWG, customer -supplied). 1528 Figure 12-26 RPCI-DI/PDIU/PDIU-DS to 25-Pin to 25-Pin COM Port 12-52 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units PDIU-DS (Configured in the "Connect to DTE" Mode: P1 ~ P9 = A-B SO PDIU Functions like a DCE) Toshiba Serial Printer (Functions like a DTE) DB25 Pin Designations Printer Pin # Name 1 2 3 4 5 FG TD RD RTS N/C 6 22 20 8 DSR SG DCD DTR Rear view of printer or ASCII terminal DB25, RS-232 connector. 8 7 6 7 DB25 Pin Designations PDIU-DS Pin # 22 RI 1 2 3 4 5 Name Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25, RS-232 female connector DB25 Female Connector 6 7 8 20 22 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR 4 3 2 1 RI DB25 Female Connector 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 22 20 20 22 20 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Male Connector DB25 Male Connector DB25 Pin # Name DB25 Pin # 8 DCD 8 3 RD 3 2 TD 2 20 DTR 20 7 SG 7 6 DSR 6 4 RTS 4 N/C CTS 5 N/C RI 22 1 FG 1 RS-232 Cable Notes • • The printer receives data on Pin 3 (RD) and transmits data on Pin 2 (TD). The PDIU-DS should be in the connect-to-DTE mode (P1 ~ P9 are strapped A-B), so that it transmits data on Pin 3 (RD) and receives data on Pin 2 (TD). (50 ft max, 24 AWG; customer supplied). Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Figure 12-27 PDIU-DS to Toshiba Printer, RS-232 Connector/Cable Connections 1529 12-53 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units PDIU-DS (Configured in the "Connect to Modem" Mode, P1 ~ P9 = B-C, So it functions like a DTE) Hayes-Compatible Smart Modem (Functions like a DCE) Modem Pin # Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 8 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR Rear view of modem DB25 connector 22 PDIU-DS Pin# RI Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 22 RI Rear view of PDIU-DS DB25, connector DB25 Female Connector DB25 Female Connector 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 20 22 20 22 20 22 20 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Male Connector DB25 Male Connector DB25 Pin # Name DB25 Pin # 8 DCD 8 3 RD 3 TD 2 2 RS-232 Cable (Open) 20 The following commands should be sent to the modem: ATS0=1: Auto Answer ATE0: Disable character echo in command state ATQ0: Modem returns result codes AT&C1: Track presence of data carrier AT&D2: Hang up and assume command state with DTR on to off transition 20 8 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR 7 DTR 20 SG 7 (Open) 6 DSR 6 (50 ft. max., 24 AWG, customer-supplied) 4 RTS 4 For PDIU-DS port: 5 CTS 5 22 RI 22 1 FG 1 Program 20: LEDs 01, 04, 17 ON. All other LEDs OFF. LED 02 should be set ON after the AT commands 1530 Notes ● ● ● Modem receives data on pin 2 (TD) and transmits data on pin 3 (RD). The PDIU-DS must be in the Connect to Modem mode (P1~P9 strapped B-C) so that it transmits data on pin 2 (TD) and receives data on pin 3 (RD). For the above cable modifications, modem AT commands, and Program 20 settings are required for proper call release when modems disconnect. With this configuration, the PDIU-DS “READY” light will not light until modems at both ends establish communication (DCD is detected). Figure 12-28 PDIU-DS to Hayes-Type Smart Modem, RS-232 Connector/Cable Connections 12-54 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Connection Example 1 Digital Telephone PDIU-DI Base or RPCI-DI Base Personal Computer (PC) or Toshiba Portable 1 Type 1 Modular Adapter 1 Type B Modular Cord (Crossed) (50 ft max, 24AWG) 1 Type 2 Modular Adapter IMPORTANT! Will not function with applications that require the RI signal to PC. Connection Example 2 Personal Computer (PC) Digital Telephone PDIU-DI Base or RPCI-DI Base 1 Type 3 Modular Adapter 1 Type A Modular Cord (Straight) (50 ft max, 24AWG) 1 Type 2 Modular Adapter IMPORTANT! Will not function with applications that require the RI signal to PC. Connection Example 3 Stand-Alone DIU PDIU-DS Toshiba P321SL or Similar Standard Type Serial Printer 1 Type 2 Modular Adapter 1 Type A Modular Cord (50 ft max, 24AWG) Type 2 Modular Adapter 4333 1. See Figure 10-31 for detailed pin-out information of modular cords and adapters. Notes ● ● ● Never use modular cords and adapters when connecting a RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS to a modem. Connection examples 1 and 2 work when using the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI to make calls with personal computer applications (auto-dialers, printer sharing, outgoing modem calls, etc). If the PC RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI must receive calls, the RI lead is normally required; therefore, a standard RS-232 cable must be used (see Figure 12-24 on Page 12-48 and Figure 12-27 on Page 12-53). In Connection Example 3, PDIU-DS must be in the connect to DTE mode (P1 ~ P9, strapped A-B). All modular cords and adapters are customer-supplied. Figure 12-29 RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Modular Cable/RJ45 Adapter Connections Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation ● 12-55 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Type 1 RJ45 TO DB9 (Female) Adapter 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 N/C RJ45 DSR RTS RD DCD TD GND CTS RI 6 7 2 1 3 5 8 9 Lead Name DB9 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 TYPE 2 RJ45 TO DB25 (Male) Adapter 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 N/C RJ45 Lead Name DB25 CTS SG DTR TD DCD RD RTS DSR RI 5 7 20 2 8 3 4 6 22 2 1 N/C RJ45 Lead Name DB25 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 TYPE 3 RJ45 TO DB25 (Female) Adapter 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 CTS SG DTR TD DCD RD RTS DSR RI 5 7 20 2 8 3 4 6 22 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 20 RJ45 Straight Through Front 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TYPE A RJ45 Flat Modular Cord (Straight) 1 Front 1 RJ45 Cross Pinning Front TYPE B RJ45 Flat Modular Cord (Crossed) 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 Front 8 Modular Cords (50 ft max, 24AWG; customer-supplied) 1 1532 Figure 12-30 RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Modular Cords and RJ45/RS-232 Adapter Pin Connections 12-56 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units PDIU-DS (Front View) PDIU-DS (Rear View) Modular jack for connecting 1- or 2-pair to digital circuit DIU READY CONNECT 1234 DNTA ON POWER Connect LED Ready LED Power LED SW1: See Notes for Switch Options A-B B-C See Notes DTE MODEM RTS RD TD FG CTS DSR SG DCD Perception 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P5 P1 P2 P7 P4 P3 P6 P8 P9 ABC 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 RI DTR P1 ~ P9 located on PCB inside of PDIU-DS Unit (see Notes). RS-232, DB25 (Female) Connector Signal Direction and Function of P1 ~ P9 PDIU-DS Connected to DTE Signal Abbreviation Signal Name/ Function PDIU-DS Pin NO. Signal Direction Function: A-B (DTE Mode) PDIU-DS Connected to DCE Function: B-C (Modem Mode) Signal Direction FG Frame Ground 1 SG Signal Ground 7 TD Transmit DATA 2 DTE DIU P1 Modem DIU P1 RD Receive DATA 3 DTE DIU P2 Modem DIU P2 RTS Request to Send 4 DTE DIU P6 Modem DIU P6 CTS Clear to Send 5 DTE DIU P7/P5 Modem DIU P7/P5 DSR Data Set Ready 6 DTE DIU P4 Modem DIU P4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 20 DTE DIU P3 Modem DIU P3 DCD Data Carrier Detect 8 DTE DIU P8 Modem DIU P8 RI Ring Indicator 22 DTE DIU P9 Modem DIU P9 1533 Notes Mode select (P1~P9) “A-B” if PDIU-DS is connected to a terminal-type device (DTE). ● Mode select (P1~P9) “B-C” if PDIU-DS is connected to a modem-type device (DCE). ● Do not cut the Perception strap when installing a PDIU-DS in Strata DK Systems. ● ● See Figure 12-32 for SW1~4 DIP switch options and Figure 12-33, “DK PDIU-DS Disassembly/Assembly Diagram” to disassemble/assemble PDIU-DS. Some RS-232 leads go by different names depending on the equipment manufacturer. Figure 12-31 PDIU-DS Jumper Plug Options/RS-232 Connector Information Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation ● 12-57 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units DIP Switch Options The RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DS each have a four-control DIP switch which can be configured for signaling options. The switch is located on the bottom of the PDIU-DI, and on the back panel of the PDIU-DS (see Figure 12-32). SW1-1 Normally, this switch is set On to disconnect devices from RPCIs or DIUs automatically. The connection is maintained if data is exchanged between the device and the RPCI or DIU within eight to nine minute intervals. If SW1-1 is Off on the called and calling DIU, data calls will remain connected until released manually. SW1-2 This switch is placed in the On position when the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured like a DCE) must hold DCD and DSR On continuously. If SW1-2 is Off, DSR follows DTR and DCD will be On only when the DIU is connected on a data call to another DIU. SW1-2 should be Off on a RPCI DIU when it is connected to a personal computer that uses a communications software program to establish data calls with AT commands; and whenever PDIU-DS is connected to a modem. SW1-3 The RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured as a DCE) sends the Ring Indicate (RI) signal to the computer to tell the computer (DTE) that the RPCI or PDIU is receiving an incoming call. SW1-3 should be On for the DIU to send RI steady, and Off to send at one second On/three seconds Off intervals. SW1-4 This switch is placed in the On position if the computer does not output the RTS signal or when connected to a modem that tracks the DCD signal (modem set with AT&C1). Sometimes, the DTE device may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy flow control, in these cases SW1-4 should be Off. In this case the DCD signal of the calling DTE is used as the RTS lead of the called DTE and the DCD signal of the called DTE is used as the RTS signal of the other DTE. In this case a signal which stops the DTE from transmitting data (usually the CTS lead) should be cross-connected to the RPCI’s or DIU’s DCD signal. Consult the DTE device or application software documentation to determine which type of flow control is required. If the DIU-DS is connected to a modem that tracks carrier detect (AT&C1) SW1-4 should be On. 12-58 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units OFF DIP Switch 1234 RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (Bottom View) Access from Bottom — Outside of PDIU-DI DIP Switch SW1 Back View (Access from Back — Outside of PDIU-DS) 1234 DNTA Directory Tray: Remove from original Telephone Base and Install on PDIU-DI Base DB25 Connector (Female) For DTE or DCE RS-232 Cable Connection ON PDIU-DS (Rear View) Modular Connector for Digital Port Connection PDIU-DI Digital Telephone Base PDIU-DI and -DS SW1 DIP Switch (1 ~ 4) Functions General Notes • • • • See Subsection “EIA Interface Leads (Signals)” and “DIP Switch Options” for more details regarding SW1 option settings. When a PDIU-DS is connected to a modem that tracks the DCD signal (AT&C1) SW1(4) must be ON. If using Toshiba Personal Computers and Toshiba Printers using X-ON/XOFF flow control, set SW1(4) ON on PDIU-DIs and -DSs. SW1(2) should be off when PDIU-DS is connected to a modem. Switch Function Initial Position Forced hang up when DIU does not detect space signal on TD or RD for about 8 to 9 minutes On: enable (auto-disconnect)1 Off: disable OFF SW1 (2) DCD, DSR control On: continuous on Off: DSR depends on DTR (DCD is on during communication state) OFF SW1 (3) RI control On: RI is on continuously during ringing state Off: RI is 1 sec ON/3 sec OFF during ringing state OFF SW1 (4) RTS control ON: DTE doesn't have RTS signal Off: DTE has RTS signal (ready/busy flow control: RTS/CTS:DCD) OFF 1534 1. RPCI or DIU port must have LED 02 On in Program 20 to enable auto disconnect. Figure 12-32 RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIU-DS SW1 DIP Switch Information Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation SW1 (1) 12-59 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI to PC Installation The RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI always functions as a DCE device; it transmits data on the Receive Data lead (RD) and receives data on the Transmit Data lead (TD). Most personal computers function as a DTE device; PCs transmit data on the TD lead and receive data on the RD lead. Note The RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI can connect to a DCE computer or any other DCE-type device using a specially configured RS-232 cable or adapter; but this application is rarely required. ➤ To install the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI to a DTE device, PC, or ASCII terminal 1. Install the digital telephone that is to be equipped with RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI per the instructions in Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus and the drawing in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring. 2. Install the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI under the digital telephone per the instructions in Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus. Note The RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI always operates as a DCE device; therefore, unlike the PDIUDS, it has no internal jumpers. 3. Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI’s DB-25 female connector and the PC’s appropriate asynchronous serial communications port connector (COM port). Important! Check the PC manufacturer’s serial communication port interface documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements; requirements vary with each manufacturer. The number of EIA RS-232 signals required (8, 9, or 10 wires) depends on the application. When EIA signal requirements are not known, connect the 10 EIA signals listed in “EIA Interface Leads (Signals)” on Page 12-49. Figures 12-32 and 12-30 provide diagrams for connecting RS-232 cables between PDIU-DIs and PCs/ Toshiba portables. 4. Set the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI DIP switch (SW1-1~4) for the desired application. See Figure 12-32, “RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIU-DS SW1 DIP Switch Information”. RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI Programming Configure the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI for DTE-type connection in Program 20 and the data button assignments of the digital telephone connected to the PDIU-DI in Program 39. ♦ 12-60 Program 20 ♦ The port number entered for the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI in Program 20 is the port number of the digital telephone to which the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI is connected. ♦ LED 01: Should always be On for RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI ports. ♦ LED 02: Should be On for RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI ports, unless the PC user will never uses RPCI or DIU AT commands (other than ATDD, ATDT, and ATD) and never requires the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI to send result codes to display on the PC display screen. Frequently, it is difficult to determine the full extent of these requirements; so Toshiba recommends turning LED 02 On. See the PC/Data Interface User Guide for DIU AT commands and result codes. ♦ LEDs 03 and 04: Should be Off for RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI ports. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units ♦ ♦ LED 05: Should be On if the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex that uses access codes to make external calls or to insert a pause following RPCI DIU access of an outside line. ♦ LED 10: Enables Caller ID and ANI information to be sent from RCPI-DI to the connected PC. ♦ LED 11: Enables DNIS information to be sent from the RCPI-DI to the connected PC. ♦ LEDs 17~20: Used to establish data security groups. RPCI and PDIU stations are only allowed to make calls to RPCI and PDIUs in the same assigned data group. Program 39: The following data call buttons can be assigned digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs: 'DWD&DOO, and 0RGHP. Assign 6' buttons to data devices as required. Do not assign '66 buttons to data devices; '66 buttons are used for voice calls only. PDIU-DS to Printer Installation Strata DK enables serial printers (laser, dot matrix, or other types) to be connected to stand-alone data interface units (PDIU-DSs). Digital telephones equipped with RPCI or PDIU-DIs can share access to these printers. Serial printers operate as DCE or DTE devices, depending on the vendor; the PDIU-DS can be connected to either type, since it can be configured as a DTE or DCE device. (The PDIU-DS comes from the factory configured as a DCE device.) ➤ To connect the PDIU-DS to a serial printer Notes ● ● Only serial printers (not parallel) that conform to EIA RS-232 signaling requirements can be connected to PDIU-DSs. In rare applications, it may be desired to connect printers to PDIU-DIs. See the printer’s installation instructions. 1. Consult the serial printer’s documentation and determine if the printer operates as a DCE or DTE device. Also, see Figures 12-31 and 12-33. If the printer is a DCE device: Disassemble the PDIU-DS and configure it to operate like a DTE device by placing the jumper plugs (P1~P9) in the “B-C” (MODEM) position. Reassemble the PDIU-DS, and mark “B-C” on the bottom label for future reference. If the printer is a DTE device: You may not need to disassemble the PDIU-DS, since it comes factory-direct configured as a DCE device. However, if uncertain, disassemble the PDIU-DS and verify that jumper plugs (P1~P9) are in the “A-B” (DTE) position. Reassemble the PDIUDS and mark “A-B” on the bottom label for future reference. 2. Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate digital telephone circuit per wiring diagrams in Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring and Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus. 3. Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the printer and the PDIU-DS (see Figures 12-27 and 12-29 for an example printer cable connection). 5. Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SW1-1~4) for the application. See Figure 12-32 for DIP switch locations. Note Strata DK I&M If using Toshiba computers and printers with X-On/X-Off flow control, set SW1-(4) “On” on the DIU connected to the computer and DIU connected to the printer. 5/00 Peripheral Installation 4. If Steps 2 and 3 are done properly, the Power and Ready LEDs on the PDIU-DS light when the printer is turned on and ready. 12-61 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Important! Check the printer’s serial documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements. The requirements vary with each manufacturer. PDIU-DS Programming ♦ ♦ Program 20: Configures the PDIU-DS to connect to a serial printer (see Strata DK Programming Manual for instructions and record sheets). ♦ LED 01: Should always be On for PDIU-DS ports. ♦ LED 02: Should be Off for PDIU-DS ports connected to printers. ♦ LED 03: Should be Off for PDIU-DS ports that connect to DTE- or DCE-type printers. ♦ LED 04: Should always be On for PDIU-DS ports. ♦ LED 05: Should be Off for PDIU-DS ports connected to printers. ♦ LEDs 17~20: Data security groups can be used to enable or disable digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs access to PDIU-DS ports connected to a printer. DIU stations can only make data calls to DIUs in the same data security group. Program 22: Configures PDIU-DSs to hunt if more than one PDIU-DS connected to the same printer/server. PDIU-DS to Modem Installation Strata DK enables asynchronous-type (not synchronous) modems to be connected to PDIU-DSs. This enables RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI equipped digital telephones that are connected to personal computers, terminals, and other devices to share access to a modem or modem pool. Important! Modems must be “smart modems” that respond to AT commands and return result codes. Modems are customer-supplied. A modem(s) can be accessed internally for outgoing data calls or externally for incoming data calls. Modems operate as DCE devices; so PDIU-DSs that are connected to them must be configured to operate like a DTE device. In the example shown in Figure 12-24 on Page 12-48, the line side of the two modems are connected to RDSU/RSTS, RSTU2, PSTU, or PESU ports to establish a modem pool; however, the line side of modems can be connected directly to a dedicated CO line. If modems are connected directly to telephone network CO lines, automatic transfer of CO line voice calls to system modems (data call) do not function as described in the PC/Data Interface User Guide. For efficient operation and the best use of CO lines and modems, Toshiba recommends configuring modems to RSTU2, PSTU or RDSU/RSTS standard station ports in a modem pool. The RS-232 side of the modem connects to the PDIU-DS with standard RS-232 cables; the PDIU-DS line side (RJ11 connector) always connects to its own individual digital port. ➤ To configure the PDIU-DS as a DTE device 1. Disassemble the PDIU-DS and place jumper plugs P1~P9 in the “B-C” position (MODEM). 2. Reassemble the PDIU-DS and mark “B-C” on the bottom identification label for future reference. (See Figures 12-31 and 12-32.) ➤ To install modems to PDIU-DSs 1. Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate digital port circuit per the wiring diagrams in Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring. 12-62 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units 2. Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the modem and the PDIU-DS. Figure 12-29, “RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Modular Cable/RJ45 Adapter Connections” shows an example PDIU-DS to “smart modem” RS-232 connection. Important! All 10 PDIU-DS EIA leads (signals) should be connected to the modem. Consult the modem’s documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements; the requirements may vary with each manufacturer. 3. Connect the line side of the modem to a RDSU/RSTS, RSTUS2, or PESU standard telephone circuit or a dedicated CO line (consult the modem’s documentation to install it to a CO line). Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring provides station port wiring information. 4. Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SW1-1~4) for the desired application. (See Figures 12-31 and 12-32.) Note If the modem tracks carrier detect (DCD, AT&C1), SW1(4) should be On, and SW1(2) should be Off when PDIU-DS is connected to a modem. 5. Configure the PDIU-DS to connect to an asynchronous modem using Programs 20, 21, 22, 31 and 33. PDIU-DS Programming Note ♦ See the Strata DK Programming Manual for instructions and record sheets. Program 20 ♦ LED 01: Should always be On for PDIU-DS ports ♦ LED 02: Should be On for PDIU-DS ports connected to modems, enabling the use of AT commands and result codes when incoming calls are made from outside the system to modems connected to PDIU-DSs. ♦ LED 03: Should be set On for PDIU-DS ports connected to modems. ♦ LED 04: Should always be On for PDIU-DS ports. ♦ LED 05: Should be Off if the system is installed behind a PBX/Centrex that uses access codes to place outgoing trunk calls. ♦ LED 06: Should be Off for DIUs connected to modems. The modem cable must be modified per Figure 12-29 or Figure 12-37, or the PDIU-DS internal jumper plugs must be set per the instructions in the DKi Admin/DKi Backup User Guide. ♦ LEDs 17~20: Data security groups can be used to allow or deny digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs access to the PDIU-DS ports connected to a modem. DIU stations can only make data calls to DIUs in the same data security group. Program 21: For each PDIU-DS/modem pair, assign the digital, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, and PESU ports that will be connected to the PDIU-DS and modem, respectively. ♦ Program 22/33: If more than one modem/PDIU-DS pair is configured as a system modem pool, the PDIU-DSs should be set to hunt each other in Program 22. The modem RSTU, PSTU, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU ports should be set to hunt each other in Program 33. ♦ Program 31: LED 18 should be turned On for all RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU station ports that are connected to modems. This provides data security by preventing executive or privacy override of modem calls. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation ♦ 12-63 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Modem Setup Recommendations 1. Always make sure the escape sequence of the telephone PDIU-DI is default (+++). 2. Send AT command ATS2=43 to PDIU-DI. 3. Use a modified modem cable for the connection (see Figures 12-29 and 12-37) or reset the PDIU-DS internal jumper plugs per the instructions in the DK Admin User Guide. 4. Send the following AT commands to the modem pool modem: ATS0=1, ATE0, ATQ0, AT&C1, and AT&D2. PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly To set the jumper plugs (P1~P9) on the PCB inside the PDIU-DS for DCE or DTE operation, the PDIU-DS must be disassembled. ➤ To disassemble the PDIU-DS 1. Remove the four non-captive screws on the bottom of the unit (Figure 12-33); these screws are needed in Step 3 of the assembling procedure. 2. Remove the bottom panel. 3. Remove the PCB inside the PDIU-DS by lifting the back panel from its side grooves. Side Grooves 4. Turn the PCB over and set the jumper plugs (P1~P9): W3 Ex. Power Perception W1 W2 ♦ If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DTE, set the plugs to the “A-B” position. ♦ If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DCE device, set the plugs to the “B-C” position. Note DTE/Modem Jumper Plugs P1~P9 SW1 PDIU-DS PCB Bottom Panel Do not cut PDIU-DS PERCEPTION jumper wire for Strata DK installations. ➤ To assemble the PDIU-DS 1. Position the back panel to the PCB (Figure 12-33). 2. Slide the back panel down into its side grooves. 1535 Figure 12-33 DK PDIU-DS Disassembly/Assembly Diagram 3. Attach the bottom panel, and secure with the four non-captive screws. Notes 12-64 ● Do not cut the Perception jumper wire for Strata DK installation. ● Jumper wire is for Perception applications only. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Data Communication Installation Tests The following material provides tests for five RCPI/DIU data call applications: ♦ PC-to-PC ♦ PC-to-Printer ♦ Internal PC-to-External PC ♦ External PC-to-Internal PC ♦ PC Auto Dial Voice Call These test routines only check the data communications mode of the RPCI-DI; they do not check the RPCI-DI API mode. The telephone and port numbers used in these figures are provided as an example. When performing the test, use the appropriate port and telephone numbers for the system. Each of these tests can be conducted with manual dialing from a digital telephone’s dial pad or AT dialing from a personal computer’s keyboard; however, only the preferred method of dialing for application is presented. PC-to-PC Test with AT Commands Note See Figure 12-34, “DK PC to PC Test Call Using AT Commands” for additional information. 1. Set RPCI or DIU programming. ♦ Program 20: Ports 000 and 01. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off. ♦ Program 39: Ports 000 and 01. 'DWD&DOO (456) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (454) buttons should be provided. ♦ Default settings for PDIU-DI S-Registers. 2. Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with communications software and that the parameters of each PC and its communication software are set to the same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.). Note If using an RPCI-DI, you may need to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to On and type 240 while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX F0). If in the data communication mode, ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the TAPI mode. 3. From PC 1’s keyboard, type ATDD201 and press Enter (AT commands must be capital letters). The data call LEDs light on DKT 200 and 201. ♦ PC 1 displays: CONNECT XXXX. ♦ PC 2 displays: RING. PDIU-DIs or RPCI-DIs are now in the communication mode. Note Strata DK I&M Typing from the PC 1 keyboard appears on the PC 2 monitor and vice versa. 5/00 Peripheral Installation ♦ 12-65 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units ➤ To terminate the call ➤ Press the DKT’s 'DWD5HOHDVH button. ...or 1. Type XXX from either PC keyboard. The PC screen displays, OK. XXX = PDIU-DI escape sequence (see “PDIU-DS to Modem Installation” on Page 12-62). 2. Type ATH from the PC keyboard used in Step 3. PC 1 and PC 2 screens display, NO CARRIER. The data call LEDs on each DKT are Off. Portable PC 1 Strata DK RS-232 MDF DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (200 ) Digital (Port 000) Portable PC 2 RS-232 MDF DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (201 ) Digital (Port 001) 1536 Figure 12-34 DK PC to PC Test Call Using AT Commands PC-to-Printer Test using Manual Dialing Note See Figure 12-35 for additional information. 1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming. ♦ Program 20: Port 001. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off. ♦ Program 20: Port 003. LEDs 01, 04, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off. ♦ Program 39: Port 001. 'DWD&DOO (456) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (454) buttons should be provided. ♦ Default settings for PDIU-DI, S-Registers. 2. Make sure the PC is configured to print data from its serial port (the PC COM port connected to DKT/PDIU-DI or DKT/RPCI-DI port 001). This is normally accomplished using the DOS MODE commands. 12-66 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Note If using an RPCI-DI, it may be necessary to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to On and type 240 while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX f0). If in the data communication mode, ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the TAPI mode. 3. Using the manufacturer’s documentation, make sure the communication parameters (data speed, parity, data bits, stop bits, etc.) of the PC COM port match the printer’s serial interface parameters. ➤ To connect the PC to the printer ➤ Press 'DWD&DOO + on the DKT. CONNECT on the PDIU-DS lights. The connection between the PC and the printer is completed, as shown in Figure 12-35. (PDIU-DS 203 is in the communication mode). Note If busy tone is sent to the DKT, the connection is not complete; press 'DWD5HOHDVH and Step 3 again. Operate the PC to print data as required. Portable PC Strata DK RS-232 MDF DKT/PDIU-DI (201) TOSHIB Serial Printer A RS-232 Digital (Port 001) MDF Digital (Port 003) DIU POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT PDIU-DS (203) 1537 Figure 12-35 DK PC to Printer Test Call Using Manual Dialing ➤ To terminate the call ➤ Press the DKT’s 'DWD5HOHDVH button. Note See Figure 12-36 for additional information. 1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming. Strata DK I&M ♦ Program 20: Port 000. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off. ♦ Program 20: Port 004. LEDs 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off. 5/00 Peripheral Installation Internal PC-to-External PC Test using AT Commands 12-67 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units ♦ Program 21: Digital port 004 assigned with KSTU port 008. ♦ Program 39: Port 000. 'DWD&DOO (456), 'DWD5HOHDVH(454), and 0RGHP (455) buttons should be provided. ♦ Default settings for PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS S-Registers. 2. Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a communications software package and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.). Note With an RPCI-DI, you may need to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the data communication mode before proceeding with Step 3. 3. To place the RPCI into the data communication mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock On, and hold the Alt key down while typing 240 (this is HEX F0). If the RPCI is in data communication mode, ATC0 switches back to TAPI mode. 4. From PC 1’s keyboard, type ATDD204 and press Enter (AT commands must be capital letters). ♦ The data call LED on DKT 204 is On. ♦ The CONNECT LED on PDIU-DS 204 is On. ♦ The screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communications software. 5. The PC 1 and PDIU-DS 204 are connected (PDIU-DS 204 is in the communication mode). PC 1 is now linked directly to the RS-232 side of the internal modem and can issue AT commands to the internal modem, which is now in the command mode. Note If Digital/PDIU-DS port 004 is the only DIU port connected to the modem (Program 20, LED 03 On), the Modem LEDs on all DKTs is On. 6. From PC 1’s keyboard, type ATDT#70016744700 and press Enter. ♦ The internal modem (208) goes off-hook, dials #7001 to seize the CO line, and then dials the external modem’s telephone number (674-4700). ♦ The external modem rings and auto answers; the modems handshake and establish communications. ♦ If the modems send result codes, the screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software. 7. The PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, as shown by the thick lines above, to exchange data (file transfers, type messages, etc.). ➤ To terminate the call 1. Press the telephone 'DWD5HOHDVHbutton. 2. Type +++ from PC2 keyboard. The PC screen displays, OK. 3. Type ATH from the PC keyboard used in Step 2. 12-68 ♦ PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display, NO CARRIER. ♦ The data call LED on DKT 200 will turn Off. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units 583-3700 Strata DK MDF Internal Modem (208) QSTU2, RSTU2, RSTU, RDSU or PSTU (Port 008) MDF Public Telephone Network CO Line 1 Telephone 555-5555 Digital (Port 004) RS-232 (Modified) DIU POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT RS-232 PDIU-DS (204) External Modem (Auto Answer) Portable PC 1 DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (200) RS-232 Portable PC 2 Digital (Port 000) MDF 1538 Figure 12-36 Internal PC to External PC Test Call Using AT Commands External PC-to-Internal PC Test See Figure 12-37 for additional information. 1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming. Program 20: Port 000. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off. ♦ Program 20: Port 004. LEDs 01, 02, 04, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off. ♦ Program 39: Port 000. 'DWD&DOO (456) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (454) buttons should be provided. ♦ Internal modem: set the following AT commands: Auto answer (ATS0=1), disable character echo in the command state (ATE0), modem returns result codes (ATQ0), presence of data carrier (AT&C1), hang up and assume command state with DTR on-tooff transition (AT&D2). ♦ Settings for PDIU-DS: rear panel switches 1, 2 and 4 On; internal jumpers P1-P9 set to BC position. 2. Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a communications software package and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.) Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation ♦ 12-69 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Note If using an RPCI-DI, it may be necessary to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to On and type 240 while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX F0). If in the data communication mode, ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the TAPI mode. 3. From PC 2’s keyboard, type ATDT5833700 and press Enter. ♦ The external modem originates the call to internal modem. ♦ The internal modem rings and auto answers; the modems handshake and establish communications. The ready light on the PDIU-DS turns On. ♦ If the modems send result codes, the PC’s screens display, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communications software. 4. The PC 2 is connected to PDIU-DS (204), as shown by the thick lines above (PDIU-DS 204 is in the command mode). PC 2 can now issue AT commands to PDIU-DS 204. 5. From PC 2’s keyboard, type ATDD200 and press Enter (AT commands must be capital letters); this prompts PDIU-DS (204) to dial and connect to PDIU-DI (200). ♦ The CONNECT LED on the PDIU-DS (204) is On; the Data Call LED on DKT 200 is also On. ♦ The screens on PC 1 and PC 2 display, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software. 6. The PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, as shown by the thick lines, to exchange data (file transfers, typed messages, etc.). ➤ To terminate the call ➤ Press the DKT’s 'DWD5HOHDVH button. ...or 1. Type +++ from either PC keyboard. The PC screen displays, OK. 2. Type ATH from the PC keyboard used in Step 5 above. 12-70 ♦ PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display, NO CARRIER. ♦ The DATA and MODEM LEDs on DKT 200 will turn Off. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units RS232 Cable Modification (See Figure 10-29) PDIU-DS 2 3 4 Jumper Wire 5 6 7 MDF 8 20 Internal Modem (208) DIU (RS-232 Cable See Figure 10-28) POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT TD RD RTS CTS DSR Open SG DCD Open DTR Modem 2 Jumper Wire 3 4 5 6 7 583-3700 8 20 Public Telephone Network Strata DK Digital (Port 004) PDIU-DS (204) Telephone Line 555-5555 RS-232 External Modem SW 2, 4 on P1-P9 (B-C) Portable PC 1 MDF DKT/PDIU-DI (200) RS-232 Portable PC 2 Digital (Port 000) 1539 Notes ● ● When a PDIU-DS is connected with modified RS-232 cable, the READY LED will not light until the External and Internal modem establish carrier detect. See “PDIU-DS to Modem Installation” on Page 12-62, paragraph three and Figure 12-29 for more details. Figure 12-37 External PC to Internal PC Test Call Using Direct CO Line Connection PC Auto Dial Voice Call Test There are many off-the-shelf, Windows compatible, desktop organizer software packages that provide an auto dialer function. One of these is the terminal resident Starfish Sidekick®. It is used in this section for test explanation purposes only. If you choose another auto dialer software package, the detailed response may be different than that shown here. Note See Figure 12-38 for additional information. 1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming. ♦ Strata DK I&M Program 20: Port 001. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off. 5/00 Peripheral Installation ➤ To test a PC auto dial voice call 12-71 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units ♦ Program 39: Port 001. 'DWD&DOO (556) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (554) buttons are optional. If the PDIU-DI is only used for the PC auto dial application, the 'DWD&DOO and 'DWD 5HOHDVH buttons are unnecessary. 2. Make sure that the auto dial application software is installed on the PC root directory and that the communication parameters of the PC and application software are set to the same values. Note If using an RPCI-DI, it may be necessary to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to On and type 240 while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX F0). If in the data communication mode ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the API mode. 3. Make sure that a dialing directory consisting of names and telephone numbers you wish to auto dial is installed within the application software (include the appropriate Strata CO line access code prefixing each telephone number). ➤ To auto dial using Sidekick from the PC keyboard 1. Press the Alt and Ctrl keys simultaneously. The PC screen displays the Sidekick menu window. 2. Press F5 twice (Sidekick prompts “search for INITIALS:” to display on the PC’s screen). 3. Type the initials or name of the person or organization you wish to auto dial. 4. Press Enter. Sidekick finds and highlights the desired name/number. 5. Press Enter again. ♦ DKT/PDIU-DI 201 seizes the CO line and auto dials the selected telephone number. ♦ The LEDs of the DKT’s Data Call and CO line 001 buttons are On (if assigned in Program 39). ♦ Dial tone, DTMF tones, and ringback or busy tones are audible from the DKT’s speaker. 6. Take the DKT’s handset off-hook at any time after the phone number is dialed. Press the Spacebar to release the 'DWD&DOO button, or remain on-hook and use the DKT’s speakerphone. Note Speakerphone model only: pressing the Spacebar when using the speakerphone feature disconnects the call. ➤ To terminate the call anytime 1. If off-hook, press the Spacebar and place the DKT handset on-hook. 2. If talking via the speakerphone, press the Spacebar. 12-72 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation DK Alarm Sensor Standard Telephone Portable PC 2 Dialed Line Strata DK DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (201) RS-232 Digital (Port 001) Public Telephone Network CO LINE 1 MDF MDF 1540 Figure 12-38 DK PC Auto Dial Voice Call Test DK Alarm Sensor The PIOU or PIOUS PCB provides a circuit that can be set to detect a relay open or closed condition from a facility alarm system. When the sensor is activated, all electronic and digital telephones sound an alarm signal. The electronic/digital telephone alarm signal can be reset by any electronic or digital telephone with an $ODUP5HVHW button (see Program 39). Alarm Sensor Options Note See Figure 12-39 for additional information. Jumper plug P12 on the PIOU is used to set the alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition from the facility alarm system. ➤ To detect an open or closed condition by the jumper plug P12 1. To detect a closed condition, set P12 to the N.O. position. 2. To detect an open condition, set P12 to the N.C. position. Jumper W3 on the PIOUS is used to set the alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition from the facility alarm system. ➤ To detect an open or closed condition by soldering the W3 jumper wire 1. To detect a closed condition, solder W3 to the normal open position. Alarm Sensor Wiring See Figure 12-39, and connect the facility alarm system relay contacts to the PIOU/PIOUS PCB. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation 2. To detect an open condition, solder W3 to the normal closed position. 12-73 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant PIOU Pin Numbers ( ) 25-Pair Cable PIOU PCB N.C. Alarm Sensor P12 66 Block Pin Numbers MDF ALMT (36) 21 ALMR (11) 22 N.O. Facility Alarm System 25-Pair Cable PIOUS PCB Normal Open TB1 Twisted Pair MDF ALMT Alarm Sensor W3 ALMR ALM Facility Alarm System Normal Close 1541 Figure 12-39 DK Alarm Sensor Block Diagram (PIOU/PIOUS) Auto Attendant Auto Attendant operates like an automatic station attendant or switchboard operator that quickly and efficiently distributes calls to stations selected by callers. Incoming calls are greeted by an external announcement device that offers callers a menu of station locations associated with a number, such as 3 for Sales, 4 for Customer Service, etc. Callers pick the destination just by dialing the single number associated with it. The call is then transferred to the station. Callers can also dial the intercom number directly. This feature is available from three separate sources. ♦ Strata DK built-in Auto Attendant ♦ Voice Mail device Auto Attendant ♦ External Auto Attendant Note Auto Attendant is licensed by Dytel, Inc. under United States Patent No. 4,975,941. Strata DK Built-In Auto Attendant (AA) A built-in Auto Attendant feature is programmed into the Strata DK system software. To enable the built-in AA to function, RRCS or BRCS (-4, -8 or -12) DTMF tone receiver PCB (see Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RRCS and RKYS installation instructions). The customer must provide digital announcement device(s), on which the greeting and menu that the callers hear are recorded. The digital announcement devices must connect to Strata DK standard telephone circuits. There is a series of programs (explained later) in the Strata DK Programming Manual Record Sheets, which are for the built-in AA feature exclusively, not the other two AA feature applications. Callers must use a DTMF (tone) telephone to select AA dialing options. 12-74 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant The built-in AA feature offers flexibility in answering calls. Calls follow the basic sequences described below and illustrated in Figure 12-40, “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences”. Sequence A The call is answered directly after being transferred from the Auto Attendant. The caller calls in on CO lines assigned for built-in Auto Attendant, receives a greeting along with a menu of dialing options, and then dials an option of the intercom number. The call is then transferred to a station, which answers the call. Sequence B The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed to an optional secondary announcement, where it will receive a new announcement and the same or additional dialing options. Some customers may not configure their AA system with a secondary announcement; if so, their unanswered calls would follow sequence C or D. Sequence C The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed to an alternate station(s) assigned in system programming, ringing assignments. Sequence D The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed back to the primary announcement. This is probably the least desirable of the four sequences, since the caller hears a repeat of the announcement he just received seconds earlier. Note In all of the above sequences, the call can first ring telephones selected in system programming for 12 or 24 seconds, and then be routed to the Auto Attendant if not answered by any of the ringing stations. This is called Auto Attendant delayed ring. Caller Dials Auto Attendant CO Line Auto Attendant Delayed Ring ? Yes Ring Stations Per Program 81~89 No No Primary Announcement Greets Caller, Offers Dialing Options Station Answers Before Delay Timeout ? Yes Caller Dials Option Caller Is Transferred To Dialed Option Sequence: A Call Is Not Answered And Is Routed To Secondary Announcement Call Is Not Answered And Is Routed To Alternate Stations B Figure 12-40 Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences Strata DK I&M 5/00 C Call Is Not Answered And Is Routed Back To The Primary Announcement D 1693 Peripheral Installation Call Is Answered Talk 12-75 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant Built-in Auto Attendant Programming See Figures 12-40 and 12-41 for a comprehensive overview of built-in Auto Attendant (AA). ♦ Program 78 (61, 62, and 63): CO lines are assigned for built-in AA with this program. There is no limit to the number of lines that can be assigned for AA, and each line can be set for any or all of the ringing modes (DAY, DAY2, and NIGHT). See Programs 81~89 record sheet notes in the Strata DK Programming Manual. ♦ Programs 81~89: Assign stations to ring if AA callers do not dial or AA calls are not answered. Also, if not answered by a station set to ring during Immediate Ringing (or delay 2 ring), incoming calls can be set to ring built-in AA announcement ports on a Delayed Ringing basis. ♦ Program 03: An RRCS (-4, -8 or -12) must be installed on the DK40i or DK424 RCTU or a BRCS on the DK424i BCU for the system to interpret DTMF tones generated by the CO. Use this program to tell the system that the common control unit is equipped with an RRCS. Important! ♦ Program 25-1: If there are no RRCS or BRCS circuits or announcement devices available for an incoming CO line built-in AA call, the call will transfer to alternative station(s) (Programs 81~89) after a time duration assigned with this program. ♦ Program 23: As many as four digital announcement devices for primary announcements, each requiring one standard telephone station port (Figure 12-41), can be assigned. Callers receive primary announcements (60 secs. maximum announcement time) – which consist of the greeting along with the delivery of menu prompts – when they first call (they may also be rerouted back to the announcement after reaching a busy or ring no answer station). ♦ Program 24: Transferred calls that are unanswered at stations can be routed to a secondary announcement device (60 secs. maximum announcement time), which typically first informs the caller that the option they dialed was unavailable and then presents them with either the same options offered by the primary announcement device or some additional ones (Figure 12-41). ♦ Program 09: Tells the system where to transfer built-in AA calls after the caller has dialed in response to the delivered menu options. ♦ Program 60-6: Enter a DISA security code to prevent users from making unauthorized external calls via the AA DISA access (Dial *) feature. ♦ Program 26: There will be times when transferred AA calls are not answered after camping-on to a busy station. This program tells the system when to end the camp-on and to route the call to another destination (it could be a secondary announcement device or alternative stations per program 10-3, LED 18). If a station has Call Forward set, the call forwards to the proper destination instead of routing per AA Program 10-3, LED 18. ♦ Program 10-3: ♦ 12-76 RKYS must also be installed on RCTU, RKYS does not need a Program 03 (or any other) program assignment. LED 18: Some customers may choose to configure their AA without a secondary announcement device. In these arrangements, transferred calls that are unanswered can be routed for normal ringing to some alternative stations set in Programs 81, 84, and 87, or back to the primary announcement device. LED 18 should be On if the calls should be routed to stations assigned in Programs 81, 84, and 87. It should be Off for the primary or secondary announcement device option. If LED 18 is selected, see LEDs 16 and 17 for disconnect timing options. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant ♦ LED 15: If LED15 is On (and Music-on-Hold (MOH) is installed) the DK sends MOH to callers when the AA routes a call to ring or camp-on a station. If LED 15 is Off the DK send ring-back-tone to the caller. ♦ LEDs 16 and 17: Set LEDs 16 and 17 to tell the system when to disconnect, as a safeguard, built-in AA calls that have not been answered by stations. This feature assures that the loop start CO line that the call was made on is free for other calls if the caller hangs up before the call is answered. The initialized disconnect setting is 40 seconds. The other timing options available are 150 secs. and 350 secs. Set LEDs 16 and 17 for the desired time as follows: 40 seconds: LED 16 = Off. LED 17 = Off. 150 seconds: LED 16 = Off. LED 17 = On. 350 seconds: LED 16 = On. LED 17 = Off. Ground start lines disconnect automatically with this timer. ♦ Program 15: Selects Automatic Release (AR) on Voice Mail, AA or voice calls. This will provide automatic release (if the calling party disconnects) without waiting for the safeguard timer in Program 10-3. Built-in Auto Attendant Installation The built-in Auto Attendant feature only requires the installation of a feature key and customersupplied announcement devices to deliver announcements to callers. The feature does not require the installation of any other devices. ➤ To install the customer-supplied digital announcement devices Note In Figure 12-41 and elsewhere in this manual, announcement devices are referred to as A1 and A2. A1 designates a primary announcement device, and A2 a secondary announcement device. The prime marks following the designation distinguishes the multiple announcers from each other. 1. Ensure that the PCB that will connect with the device is installed per: Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for the QRCU3 ...or Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs for the KSTU2, RSTU2, PESU, or RDSU/RSTS 2. Connect the devices to the selected circuit per wiring diagrams: ♦ Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for the QRCU3 ♦ Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for the KSTU2, RSTU2, PESU, or RDSU/RSTS ♦ Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring. 3. Ensure that the feature key is correctly installed per: Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for the QKYS ♦ Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for KKYS installation on K4RCU3 ♦ Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs, see RRCS and RKYS on the RCTU or BRCS on the BCU 4. Program the system per the instructions in “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences” on Page 12-75. 5. Record the message and dialing prompts on the announcement device per the device manufacturer's instructions. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation ♦ 12-77 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant MDF Strata DK QSTU2, KSTU2 (DK40i), RSTU, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU To Standard Telephone Circuit A1 Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2 Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A1' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A1'' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2'' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A1''' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2''' Digital Announcer 4308 See Programs 23 and 24 for Digital Announcement Assignements Primary Auto Attendant (AA) Announcements (A1, A1', A1'', A1''') Secondary AA Announcements (A2, A2', A2'', A2''') Figure 12-41 Announcement Device Block Diagram DK424 Built-in Auto Attendant ACD Applications The DK built-in Auto Attendant can function with Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) groups in two ways (see Flowchart 12-1 and text below): ♦ The DK built-in Auto Attendant can function to answer calls and send them to selected ACD groups when the caller dials the digit assigned to an ACD group. ♦ A call that is waiting in an ACD queue can overflow to the built-in Auto Attendant to enable the caller to choose another destination. Note Both options can be used simultaneously or independently. See Chapter 11 – ACD Installation for ACD/Auto Attendant programming options. Incoming Call Auto Attendant Built-in Station ACD Group X ACD Group Y ACD Queue ACD Queue Agent Agent Overflow 1543 Flowchart 12-1 12-78 Auto Attendant/ACD Application Flowchart Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant Digital Announcer Auto Disconnect The DK built-in AA automatically disconnects digital announcers immediately after the caller(s) dials a digit and are routed to a selected destination. Thus, the announcement device does not have to play to the end before it is released. This feature requires a digital announcer that can recognize a 100 milliseconds open circuit on the (RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS) loop and hang-up when it detects the open on the loop. Built-in Auto Attendant Block Diagram A detailed block diagram which includes call flow patterns and associated programs is provided in Flowchart 12-2. ACD CO Lines (Program 14-0) Incoming CO Call to Auto Attendant Program 78 (61,62,63) Is Auto Attendant Delay Ring Mode? Program 81 ~ 89 To Agent ACD Group Queue Auto Attendant Ring Control Using 1 Night Transfer (NT) Button per Program 78, 81 ~ 89 Answer Yes Ring Stations For 12 or 24 Sec. Per Program 81 ~ 89 Talk Overflow Option to AA Programs 14-4, -5, and -6 No No Answer 0 A1 + RRCS or BRCS Available? No (Caller Receives Ringback Tone Before A1 Answers) (Reserve A1 + RRCS or BRCS) 1 Timeout Answer Ring Telephones per Program (81-89) Talk No Answer Program 25: Wait Timer (12-24 Sec) 1 Second Ringing Queue Wait A1 / RRCS Becomes Available Ring A1 A1' Caller Hangs Up Disconnect CO Line 16-Second A1 Answers Within Time-Out 16 Seconds (Faulty A1) A1 Answers and Plays Announcement Announcement Ends and Disconnects 4 Second Delay Go to 5 Caller Does Not Dial A1'' A1''' Program 23 Primary Annoucement Devices (A1, A1', A1'', A1''') Assignments KSTU2 / PSTU / RSTU / RDSU / PESU (60 secs. maximum; RRCS, BRCS remains for 4 secs. after announcement disconnects. 2 Caller Dials and system checks Program 09 on next page Go to A on next page 1544 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Built-in Auto Attendant Flowchart Peripheral Installation Flowchart 12-2 12-79 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant A Caller Receives Music-On-Hold or Ring Back Tone per Program 10-3, LED 15 When Auto Attendant Routes Call Auto Attendant Routes Call (Program 09): Dial * Camp-On Beep 10 IPS Fast LED Flash LCD Camp-On Display Dial Busy or Ringing DN DISA Mode Internal Dial Tone Camp-On Timer (Program 26) (011-999S) Dial: Wrong or Vacant Number; or Dial a DND or Ringing Station ACD Group Dial Idle DN Ring DN for 16 Seconds (see Note) Busy Station Becomes Idle Talk Time-Out Overflow To AA Option Go to 0 Figure 10-44 Check Program 10-3 Program 10-3 LED 18 (On) A1 + RRCS Available? 15 Sec No Note A2 In System? No 4 No 16 Seconds No Answer 3 Programs 14-4, -5, and -6 Answer Yes If the station has CF/NA set, the station will ring for the CF/NA time duration and then it will forward to the forwarded destination. The CF/NA destination station will ring 16 secs. and then route to if not answered. A call will not forward a second time. Yes No 5 A2 + RRCS or BRCS Available? (15 Second Time Out) (16 Second Wait for A2/RRCS, BRCS Available) Yes Yes Go to 1 Answer Yes 1 Second Queue Wait Ring Station per Program (81, 84, 87) for 40/120/240 Sec. per Program 10-3 LEDs 16 and 17 Ring A2 Talk No Answer or Automatic Release A2 Answers Within 16 Seconds Disconnect CO Line A2'' A2' Time-out 16 Seconds (Faulty A2) A2 Answers and Plays Announcement Go to Flowchart 10-2 2 A2''' Program 24 Secondary Annoucement Devices (A2, A2', A2'', A2''') Assignments KSTU2 / PSTU / RSTU / RDSU / PESU 4 Go to (60 Seconds Maximum; RRCS, BRCS Remains 4 Seconds After Announcement Disconnects) 1545 Figure 10-44 Built-in Auto Attendant Flowchart (continued) Non-built-in Auto Attendant Alternatives to using the Strata DK built-in AA feature, are voice mail systems, such as Toshiba Stratagy or VP, with an AA feature and non-voice mail AA as a stand-alone device. Non-built-in Auto Attendant Programming The Auto Attendant programs described in “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences” on Page 12-75 do not apply to the Non-integrated AA feature sources, but Strata DK Programs 03, 04, 10-1, 13, 16, 31, 33, 36, 37, 39, and 81~89 should be considered for proper operation. Non-built-in Auto Attendant Installation Non-integrated AA sources, such as voice mail devices and stand-alone units, connect to standard telephone circuits (ports). See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more information. 12-80 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation Up to three PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs can be installed in a system to simultaneously provide: maintenance terminal (or modem) interface, Management Information System (MIS) for ACD interface, and RS-232 voice mail interface (Toshiba proprietary or SMDI). Each of these interfaces are provided by the modular jacks on a separate PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU (Figure 12-36). Interface assignments are made in Program 03 (Code 41, 42, and 43). PIOU and PIOUS Paging, SMDR, relay control, alarm sensor, and door lock functions will be active only on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB which is assigned the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). RSSU only provides the TTY interface for SMDI, local maintenance, or ACD MIS but not for SMDR, built-in maintenance modem or system OA. If TSIU or RSIU/RSIS is installed, functions enabled in Program 76 will operate as programmed and the same functions programmed in Program 03 (Code 41, 42, and 43) will not operate. For more details regarding RSIU/RSIS/RMDS and TSIU installation, see RSIU installation in Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs and Figure 10-36 on Page 10-39. Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M 5/00 12-81 Peripheral Installation Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation RS-232 (DB-25 OR DB-9) Serial Port 3-Pair Modular Cord PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU1 TTY Jack Maintenance Terminal, Personal Computer, Modem, or PDIU-DS SMDR2 Jack Maintenance Interface PPTC-25F or PPTC9 Adapter Program 03 Code 413 RS-232 (DB-25 or DB-9) Serial Port 3-Pair Modular Cord COM Port PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU1 TTY Jack SMDR2 Jack ACD/MIS Personal Computer MIS for ACD Interface PPTC-25F or PPTC9 Adapter Program 03 Code 423 RS-232 (DB-25 or DB-9)4 Serial Port 3-Pair Modular Cord PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU1 TTY Jack RS-232 (SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary) for VM Interface SMDR2 Jack Voice Mail Device PPTC-25F or PPTC9 Adapter Program 03 Code 433 1546 1. Install PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs in the last (highest numbered) slot in any cabinet(s). 2. SMDR, Page Outputs, Relay controls, Alarm Sensor, and other miscellaneous options on PIOU or PIOUS will be active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). RSSU does not provide these features. 3. If set, TSIU, RSIU/RSIS Program 76 will override Program 03 code 41, 42, and 43. 4. VP100 and Stratagy use straight cables, VP200/300 require “null modem” connection. PPTC (25-pin) requires a “male-tofemale” gender changer. Figure 12-42 Multiple PIOU/PIOUS (Remote Maintenance, MIS for ACD, RS-232 Voice Mail Integration) 12-82 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Peripheral Installation Enhanced 911 Service (E911) Enhanced 911 Service (E911) The Toshiba Strata DK forwards 911 and 9+911 calls to designated ports to interface with external third party adjunct translation equipment designed to handle them. The Strata DK provides up to two QSTU2, KSTU2 or RSTU2 ports (standard telephone ports) to receive these calls and send them to the third party E911 adjunct equipment along with the specific directory number of the emergency calling station. The Strata DK sends the telephone DN to the telephone company’s 911 tandem switch that forwards the call to the proper Public Safety Answering Position (PSAP) where it is matched up with a central Automatic Location Information (ALl) database to provide enhanced information to the PSAP dispatcher. Interface between the third party adjunct equipment and the E911 tandem CO must be via special Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks. (Ordering of these specialized trunks is done through a special ordering desk with your local phone company.) Important! ● ● DID numbers: In many cases, a DID service is the only way to provide a unique number (CESID) for each station that is recognizable by the telephone company. In order for this feature to be effective, 911 and 9+911 calls must be dialed from a DKT [DN] or single-line telephone. 911 calls originating from a [PhDN] CO Line or Pooled Line button bypass the adjunct equipment and go directly to the CO exactly as dialed. E911 System Installation 1. Ensure that the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS or PESU PCB is installed in the system per Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs or each DK14 and DK40i installation section. 2. Connect the E911 system to the selected QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU standard telephone port. (See Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation, Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation, Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details.) 3. Program the Strata DK system for the required E911 features. (See “E911 Programming” on Page 12-83.) 4. Install E911 external system per the manuals supplied by the vendor selected and used for the interface. E911 Programming Program *10: Selections 11 and 12 assign the RSTU port to be used for E911 Service. Selections 91 and 92 assign an inter-digit timer for valid dialing and a delay timer before the station number is sent to external E911 equipment. ➤ Remove the [DN] assignment for ports assigned to E911 so that someone calling a station number will not accidentally call 911. Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M 5/00 12-83 Peripheral Installation Enhanced 911 Service (E911) 12-84 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation 13 ACD Installation This chapter includes information on the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Management Information System (MIS) for: ♦ Strata DK424 and DK424i systems (applies to all common control units) and DK40i ♦ ACD and MIS is not available to the Strata DK14 Included in this chapter are installation instructions, ACD programming procedures and record sheets. Note Only qualified service technicians and system programmers should install ACD/MIS. ACD automatically routes incoming calls so they are equally distributed to a group of ACD Agents. Figure 13-1 shows an example of how a typical ACD call is handled. The Strata DK System provides many ACD functions and custom keys on for Toshiba DKT2000series telephones. For instance, the ACD Supervisor can monitor calls and assist Agents through use of an LCD telephone, programmed especially for the Supervisor which shows ACD Agent and Group information. Telephone instructions are provided in the Strata DK ACD Supervisor Guide and Agent User Guide. Incoming Call Auto Attendant (Built-in or External) ACD Group X ACD Group Y ACD Queue (No Overflow Assignment) ACD Queue Station Agent PhDN ACD PhDN • • • • • • Distributed Hunt Group Station PDN, PhDN or CO Line Attendant Console Another ACD Group Auto Attendant Announcement 1971 Figure 13-1 ACD Call Handling Example Strata DK I&M 5/00 13-1 ACD Installation Installation Installation ACD for the Strata DK systems is provided through a feature key upgrade called RKYS for the DK424 and DK424i or the KKYS for the DK40i. The RKYS or KKYS is a subassembly that attaches to the common control unit to provide the system with optional features. See the “KKYS Installation” on Page 3-24 or “RKYS Feature Key Upgrades” on Page 5-48 or Page 7-42 forinstallation instructions. Multiple Serial Port Installation Remote Maintenance, MIS for ACD, and SMDI With DK Release 3 or higher, the RSIU/RSIS/RMDS PCBs can be installed alone or in addition to PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU to provide: ♦ Maintenance Terminal (or modem) interface ♦ Management Information System (MIS) for ACD interface ♦ SMDI ♦ SMDR Related Programs Program 03 (Codes 41, 42, and 43): Assigns PIOU and PIOU interface options. SMDR, page outputs, SMDR, relay controls, alarm sensor, and door lock functions on PIOU or PIOUS will be active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). ♦ Code 41: Enables Remote Maintenance. ♦ Code 42: Enables MIS/SMIS PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU Slot. The TTY port must have Code 42 set for its slot in Program 03 to support ACD/MIS. ♦ Code 43: Enables RS-232 Voice Mail Interface/SMDI. ♦ If the RSIU is to be used for ACD/MIS, the RSIU must be installed in the Strata DK Base Cabinet, slot 11 and programmed with Code 49 in Program 03. ♦ The RSSU only supports TTY, SMIS, or SMDI. The RSSU does not provide SMDR, page, alarm sensor or relay control. ♦ Program 76-1x3: Assigns the RSIU or RSIS port to provide MIS for ACD. Notes ● Program 76 assignments override Code 42 if programmed for PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU in Program 03. For more information on installation of the PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU and the RSIU/RSIS/RMDS, see Chapter 9 - Universal Slot PCBs and Chapter 12 - Peripheral Installation. Wiring Announcements/music patterns are played and sent to callers at programmed time intervals while calls are waiting in an ACD queue. Announcement and music devices are connected to Strata DK station ports and are assigned to ACD Groups in Program 14-3. 13-2 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation Installation 25-pin PC serial COM port uses PPTC25-f 9-pin PC serial COM port (DB-9)1 6-pin modular jack Toshiba PPTC9 adaptor Personal Computer for: ACD Insight DK SMIS CCV Strata DK ACD Installation The ACD/MIS interface is provided by the TTY modular jack on a separate serial port (RSSU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSIS), see Figure 13-2. MIS RS-232 port 3-pair modular cord (straight-wired, not cross-wired). 50 ft. max. for Insight DK PC parallel printer port SRB00566 9353L9335 Sentinel key (off-white color, comes with SMIS software version V1.0 or higher) RS-232 jack: RSIU 2 RSIS2 TTY jack: PIOU PIOUS or RSSU3 4277 1. Install PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs in the last (highest numbered) slots in any cabinet(s). 2. Install RSIU in Slot 11 of Base Cabinet only. 3. If the PC COM port is a DB-25, a Toshiba PPTC25-F adapter is required in place of the Toshiba DB-9 adapter. Figure 13-2 ACD Application Wiring Diagram Digital announcement devices can be connected to DK standard telephone ports only; music sources such as digital Music-on-Hold (MOH) devices, radio tuners, CD players, etc., can be connected to standard telephone ports, electronic (not digital) telephone ports, or to the processor PCB MOH jack. Refer to Chapter 10 - Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring diagrams on connecting announcement/music devices: ♦ Digital announcers and/or music sources to standard telephone PCB ports: RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, PSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PESU. Digital announcement devices and music sources can be assigned to any standard telephone port; they are not restricted to designated Background Music (BGM) source ports (see Program 14-3 for assignments). Announcement devices are designed to connect directly to standard telephone ports. Do not use an isolation transformer to connect digital announcers. Important! Most music sources (600 or 8 OHM) are not designed to be connected to telephone line circuits like the Strata DK standard telephone circuits. When connecting these devices to standard telephone circuits, an isolation transformer may be required between the music source and the standard telephone circuit. Figure 12-4 shows how to connect an isolation transformer. ♦ Music sources to electronic telephone PCB ports: PEKU, PESU. Music sources can be assigned to any PEKU or PESU port; they are not restricted to designated BGM ports (see Program 14-3 for assignments). ♦ Music source to DK MOH input: The MOH source connected to the RCTU or B_C_U MOH jack can be sent to ACD Groups selectively via Program 14-3. Strata DK I&M 5/00 13-3 ACD Installation ACD Installation Guidelines ➤ To connect a music source to the processor PCB MOH jack ➤ See Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation, “Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options” on Page 12-3. ACD Installation Guidelines The following steps show how to install the Strata DK ACD feature. Note ACD is not provided with RCTUA3. Step 1: Initialize the System If installing a new processor PCB or if changing ROMs on the processor PCB (RCTU or B_C_U), the processor PCB must be fully initialized by running Programs 91-9 and 03 per the programming procedures in the Strata DK Programming Manual. If the system has been previously initialized and installed, it is not necessary to re-initialize the processor PCB when installing the ACD feature unless the processor PCB ROMs or flash memory are changed to install ACD. If changing ROMs, DKi Admin or DKi Backup software is recommended for downloading/uploading previously programmed customer data. Step 2: Install the Feature Key ➤ To install the RKYS onto the Processor PCB ➤ Read the section titled “KKYS Installation” on Page 3-24 and “RKYS Feature Key Upgrades” on Page 5-48 and Page 7-42 and refer to Figure 5-30 for installation instructions. Important! It is not necessary to run any special programs (i.e., Program 03) when RKYS is installed. RKYS can be installed before or after system initialization, and, before or after the customer database is entered. The feature(s) provided by the RKYS are enabled immediately when RKYS is installed. However, configuration programs for Auto Attendant and ACD must be entered for the feature to operate. Step 3: Install Related PCBs 1. Install PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs in the highest numbered slots in any cabinets. 2. Install the RSIU PCB in slot 11 of the Base Cabinet only. Step 4: Connect COM Port Wires ➤ Connect Strata DK to the SMIS PC per Figure 13-2. SMDR, Page Outputs, Relay Controls, Alarm Sensor, and other miscellaneous options on the PIOU or PIOUS PCBs will be active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). The RSSU PCB only supports TTY, SMIS, or SMDI. Step 5: Install ACD/SMIS Interface If installing a SMIS personal computer, a RSSU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU or RSIS must be installed (see Figure 13-2 for MIS RS-232 port installation). 13-4 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation ACD Installation Guidelines Step 6: Set the MIS Channel Agent calls are defined as ACD incoming, PBX incoming/outgoing, and external/internal calls to and from the Agent’s [PhDN]. ACD Installation If there are more than 1,000 Agent calls in a heavy-traffic hour, the MIS channel must be set higher than 1200 bps. The next higher speed, 2400 bps, can handle up to 1,300 calls per hour. Strata DK allows 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps for the MIS channel. SMIS registers ACD and PBX calls: ♦ An ACD call is a call that is sent (directly or transferred) to the ACD group. ♦ A PBX call is a call that is sent to the Agent’s$&'&DOO button [PhDN] or a call originated from an Agent’s $&'&DOO button [PhDN]. Based on a total system speed of 10,800 bps (9600 + 1200) for auxiliary serial channels and a requirement of one channel each for SMDI, TTY, SMDR, and MIS, the installation should use the lowest MIS channel speed for the expected amount of traffic. CAUTION! If the channel speed is not set high enough, the MIS buffer may overflow, causing loss of data to MIS. Step 7: Connect Announcement Devices Connect the digital announcement devices that are used for each ACD Group (queue) to the appropriate station ports. Digital announcers can be connected to any RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/ RSTS, PSTU, or PESU standard telephone ports. See Chapter 10 - Universal Slot PCB Wiring for MDF wiring to appropriate standard telephone ports. ♦ Use Program 14-3, Code 1, 2, and 3 to assign digital announcers to standard telephone ports. Use Program 14-3, Code 5 and Program 14-5XX to configure the queue announcement pattern for each ACD Group. Step 8: Connect Music Sources Connect the music source for each ACD Group (queue) to the appropriate station port or to the processor PCB MOH jack. Music sources can be connected to RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PEKU, or PESU station ports or to the processor PCB MOH jack. See Figures 12-3, 12-4, 12-5 and “Alternate BGM Source Installation” on Page 12-9. See Chapter 10 - Universal Slot PCB Wiring for details. Important! If connecting a music source to RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PEKU, or PESU standard telephone ports, an isolation transformer may be required as shown in Figure 12-4 to protect the music source from excessive current/voltage. Each ACD Group can have a separate music source or Groups can share music sources in any combination. Music source port assignments are made in Program 14-3, Code 4. Music source timers are set in Program 11-5 (1, 2, and 3). Strata DK I&M 5/00 13-5 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations Step 9: Install ACD to Strata DK Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) Integration If ACD calls route to an ACD Group via the Strata DK built-in AA, install and program the AA per “Strata DK Built-In Auto Attendant (AA)” on Page 12-74. Auto Attendant “single digits” are assigned to ACD Groups in Program 09. Step 10: Assign ACD to Toshiba Stratagy or VP AA Integration If a Toshiba Stratagy or VP AA must answer calls and transfer CO lines to ACD Groups, assign the CO lines to ring the Strata DK standard telephone ports connected to the Stratagy or VP AA in Programs 81~89. Also program the appropriate Strata DK station ports to interface with the Stratagy or VP ports in Program 31. Program the Stratagy or VP AA to hookflash and dial ;; to transfer calls to ACD Groups (where XX = the ACD Group Number: 01~16). ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations ACD Programming All types of DK lines can be routed to ACD Groups (ground/loop start, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI). Lines can be assigned in programming to route directly to ACD Groups when they ring or dial into the Strata DK system. All line types can be programmed to transfer into an ACD Group from any telephone, attendant console, or built-in or external AA. Use the ACD programming guidelines and flowcharts provided in Chapter 6 of the Strata DK Programming Manual to configure the remaining ACD items per the customer’s requirements. The following paragraphs describe differences in the operation and programming of ground/loop start lines versus DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines used with an ACD system. Direct Incoming Assignments to ACD Groups Ground/Loop Start Incoming Line Calls Program 14-0: Used to make the line assignments to send calls directly to specific ACD Groups. If a ground or loop start line is assigned to an ACD Group in Program 14-0, it routes per that ACD Group’s call routing assignments. ACD calls ring on Agent $&'&DOO [PhDN] buttons. Do not assign CO /LQH or 3RROHG/LQH *US buttons to Agent telephones. ACD CO /LQH or 3RROHG/LQH*US buttons can be assigned to overflow destination telephones. Note Program 14-0 has priority over all other ringing assignments except Program 78 (61, 62, and 63). If a line is assigned to ring an ACD Group in Program 14-0 at the same time the line is assigned to ring the DK built-in AA in Program 78, the line routes to the AA. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Incoming Line Calls Program *09 or Program 71-1, 2, or 3: assigns DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI incoming digits to ACD Groups and DID digits to ring designated station ports. ANI only lines must route to the same ACD Group (see Program 71-1, 2, or 3 address 349 or 499). 13-6 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations If the incoming digits (XXXX) dialed from a Tie or DID line match the digits assigned to an ACD Group, the call routes per that ACD Group’s call routing assignments. ACD calls ring on Agent $&'&DOO [PhDN] buttons. Do not assign DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI /LQH buttons to Agent telephones. However, ACD DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI /LQH buttons can be assigned to overflow destination telephones. ACD Installation Program 04 or Program 71-1: assigns Tie line digits to ring at designated station ports (see Program 17, LED 05). Transfer From Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) to ACD Group Ground/Loop Start Line Calls Calls can be assigned to ring into the DK built-in AA in Program 78. Each ACD Group can be assigned a unique one or two-digit AA dialing prompt in Program 09. Incoming calls on these lines are answered by the AA. The caller then enters the one or two-digit number and is connected to a specific ACD Group. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI ACD Line Calls Calls cannot be assigned to ring the DK built-in AA, so they cannot be transferred from the DK AA to an ACD Group. Transfer From External AA to an ACD Group The external AA (Stratagy or VP) can be programmed to transfer calls to specific ACD Groups by assigning one-digit dialing prompts to each Group. To transfer a call into an ACD Group from an external AA, the user must hookflash and dial ;; (;; = ACD Group number 01~16). Ground/Loop Start Line Calls Calls can be assigned to ring external AA ports in Program 81~89. The external AA can be programmed to transfer calls to particular ACD Groups by assigning one-digit dialing prompts to each Group. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Line Calls Calls can be assigned to ring directly into an external AA by assigning incoming digits to the AA ports in Programs *09 or 71 for DID/DNIS/ANI lines and Programs 04 or 71 for Tie lines (see Program 17, LED 05). Internal station to station [DN] calls cannot be transferred to ACD Groups. Overflow From an ACD Group Queue ACD Calls ACD calls can be routed to overflow to a [PDN], [SDN], [PhDN], to normal CO line ringing assignments, to another ACD Group, or to a Distributed Hunt [DH] Group (see Strata DK Programming Manual, Flowcharts 6-3~6-10). If the overflow [PhDN] or [PDN] is idle when overflow time occurs, an ACD call rings the overflow destination [DN]. If it is busy, the ACD call does not overflow but remains in the ACD queue until the overflow destination, an Agent telephone in the ACD Group, or a DH Group member telephone becomes idle. The first device (Agent telephone or overflow destination) to become idle receives the call. In this case, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines operate the same as ground, and loop start lines. Strata DK I&M 5/00 13-7 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations Ground/Loop Start Lines Lines can overflow from an ACD queue to the DK CO line Normal Ringing assignments set in Programs 81, 84, 87 and *81, *84, and *87; to the DK built-in AA or to an attendant console. When the overflow time or point occurs, calls immediately exit the ACD Group queue and ring all stations assigned to ring in Programs 81, 84, or 87 and *81, *84, and *87 (no delay ringing assignment operates during overflow). Idle stations and [DNs] ring normally while busy stations and [DNs] have a muted ring. Auto Attendant If the overflow destination is the DK built-in AA, calls overflow immediately when overflow time occurs and are routed per the AA program assignments. If the AA is busy, the call still exits the ACD queue and queues onto the AA announcement port. Attendant Console If the overflow destination is the attendant console, calls immediately exit the queue and alert the console whether the console is idle or busy. This applies to overflow queue time out (Programs 111 and 14-4) and overflow point (see Programs 14-3, 14-5, and Flowcharts 6-8~6-10). DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Lines Lines cannot overflow to the DK CO line Normal Ringing assignments set in Programs 81, 84, 87 and *81, *84, and *87, or to the DK built-in AA. If the overflow destination is assigned as either the DK CO line normal ringing or built-in AA, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the substitute destination [DN] assigned in Program *14-2. This applies to overflow queue time out and overflow point destinations assigned in Programs 14-4/111, and 14-5, respectively. If the overflow destination [DN] is busy when overflow time occurs, the ACD call does not overflow but remains in the ACD queue until the overflow destination [DN] or an Agent telephone in the ACD Group becomes idle. The first device (Agent telephone or overflow destination) to become idle receives the call. ACD Group Status After Shift Mode When an ACD Group is placed in the After Shift mode, calls are not sent to the ACD Group’s queue or Agents, but are routed to the After Shift destination set in Program 14-6. The After Shift operation for each possible case is described below (also see Strata DK Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-5): 13-8 ♦ If the After Shift destination is idle, all line types ring the idle destination. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI and ground/loop start lines operate the same. ♦ If the After Shift destination of an ACD Group is another ACD Group, and all Agents in the destination Group are busy on calls or in the After Call Work Time mode, the call is placed at the end of the destination ACD Group’s queue. If there are no Agents logged in for the After Shift Group, the call is sent to that Group’s After Shift destination. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI and ground/loop start lines operate the same. ♦ If the After Shift destination is a [DN], the [DN] rings. If the station is busy, DID/Tie/DNIS/ ANI lines camp on to the [DN] while ground/loop start lines busy override ring the port. ♦ If the After Shift destination is the DK Normal Ringing assignment, ground/loop start lines ring stations assigned to the ACD lines in Programs 81~89 (including delayed ringing Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations ♦ If the After Shift destination is the DK AA, ground/loop start lines are answered by the AA and routed after the caller dials a digit prompted by the AA. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines do not route to the AA, but ring or camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2. ♦ If the After Shift destination is the attendant console, calls ring or queue onto the console whether it is busy or idle. This applies to DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI and ground/loop start lines. ACD Installation assignments). DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines do not ring stations in the Normal Ring assignments but ring or camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2. All Agents Unavailable Mode If all the Agents in an ACD Group become unavailable simultaneously, calls that would normally ring into the ACD Group or enter the Group’s queue are routed to either the Group’s After Shift destination, set in Program 14-6 or to the Group’s Overflow Point destination, set in Program 14-5 (see Strata DK Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-6). The option of where to send calls when all Agents are unavailable is set system-wide for all ACD Groups in Program 10-4, LED 04. All line types (ground/loop start and DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI) follow this operation. If the “All Agents Unavailable Operation” is set to route calls to the After Shift destination set in Program 14-6, (Program 10-4, LED 04 “Off”), calls to a Group whose Agents are all unavailable are treated as if the ACD Group were in the After Shift mode. If the “All Agents Unavailable Operation” is set to route calls to the Overflow Point destination set in Program 14-5 (Program 10-4, LED 04 “On”), calls to a Group whose Agents are all unavailable are treated as if they overflowed from the Group’s queue even if the overflow destination is busy. If the “All Agents Unavailable” overflow destination is another ACD Group, calls route to an idle Agent, or are placed at the end of the overflow ACD Group’s queue. Agent Ring No Answer Call Treatment If an ACD call rings an Agent telephone for the time specified in Program 11-2 and the call is not answered, the call is routed to ring another idle Agent in the same ACD Group for that same time duration (see Strata DK Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-7). This continues until all idle Agents in that Group have been rung. If the call is not answered by an Agent, the call then routes to the destination assigned in Program 14-5. Two consecutive Ring No Answer (RNA) calls to the same Agent automatically places that Agent’s telephone in the Unavailable mode. The RNA operation for possible cases is described below: ♦ If the RNA destination is an idle [DN], it rings when RNA occurs. If the RNA [DN] is busy when RNA occurs, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI calls camp on to the [DN] and ground/loop start lines route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including delay ring assignments). ♦ If the RNA destination is an ACD Group, the call rings an idle Agent in that Group when RNA occurs. If all Agents in the RNA destination ACD Group are busy when RNA occurs, DID/ Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the destination assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including delay ringing assignments). ♦ If the RNA destination is the DK Normal Ringing assignment, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including delay ring assignments). If the RNA destination is busy when RNA occurs, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines mute ring the busy [DN]. Strata DK I&M 5/00 13-9 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations ♦ If the RNA destination is the DK built-in AA, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines route per the AA program assignments. If the AA is busy when RNA occurs, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines queue onto the AA announcement port. ♦ If the RNA destination is the DK attendant console, RNA calls ring or queue on the console whether it is busy or idle. This applies to ground, loop, Tie, DID, DNIS, and ANI lines. ACD SMDR Printout Examples Auto Attendant, DNIS, ANI, DID, and Tie line ACD calls can be identified on SMDR printouts. Several SMDR printout examples noting ACD information are provided. (See Figures 13-3 through 13-10). However, Toshiba recommends using SMIS to track ACD call data rather than SMDR. SMIS is designed to track ACD/PBX agent calls. Loop and ground start line ACD calls can only be identified by line and station numbers. The ACD tag is not applied. For detailed ACD call record reporting, Toshiba recommends using SMIS. The Work Unit (or Stroke) count data, which is entered from the Agent telephone while on an ACD call, is printed in the account code field of the SMDR output data (last 15 columns). Note 13-10 If multiple Work Unit entries are entered on the same ACD call, SMDR only sends data for the last entry. MIS or SMIS receives all entries made. Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations ACD Installation Identifies ACD call (not Group number) Call answered by Agent Time Ring before Queue + Queue Time DID Seizure + Digits Received Time 009 ACD 009 204 500 14:30 00:02;03 00;04 14:31 00:00;26 204 Agent Telephone Primary Directory Number [PDN] Agent Talk Time Duration Call Disconnect Time Agent ACD Call [PhDN] Agent Telephone [PDN] DID Line Number 2023 Figure 13-3 DID Call to ACD Queue Example ACD Call goes to Queue then rings Agent – Agent Answers 003 ACD 003 204 500 14:00 00:02;38 00;05 14:01 00:01;23 Time Agent answers call Queue + Ring Agent Time Ring Time, before First Announcement Answers Duration 204 (Program 11-4 = 4 seconds) Agent Primary Directory Number [PDN] Agent Talk Time Duration Time call is disconnected Agent ACD call [PhDN] Agent Telephone [PDN] CO Line Number 00:05 02:38 01:23 Total time call is connected to system is 4 minutes, 6 seconds 03:66 2024 Figure 13-4 Ground/Loop Start Incoming Call Example DID ACD Call to ready Agent at Station 204 009 ACD 009 204 Figure 13-5 Strata DK I&M 500 10:53 00:00;16 00;06 10:53 00:00;40 204 Time Telephone (204) answers Line 9 Queue and/or Ring Telephone Time Duration of Incoming Seizure + digits dialed Primary Directory Number [PDN] of Called Telephone Talk Time Duration Time call is disconnected Agent ACD call [PhDN] Talking Telephone [PDN] DID Line Number DID ACD Call to Available Agent Example 5/00 1999 13-11 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations 007 MSS 007 203 500 10:36 00:00;26 00;03 10:37 00:01;12 203 Identifies DISA or Built-in AA call Time call was transferred Call connected to DISA or AA Time Duration Ring before DISA or AA Answer Time Duration Caller dials 203, DISA or AA transfers to 203 Call connected to 203 Time Duration Time 203 hung-up and call disconnected [DN] that answered call [DN] connected to Line 007 Line Number Note: DISA callers cannot dial into an ACD Group. Auto Attendant Transfers Call to ACD Group 007 MSS Figure 13-6 500 10:38 00:00;26 ACD 2080 Incoming Built-in AA or DISA Call (non-ACD call) Example 203 Transfer Time 203 Talk Time Duration 203 Ring before Answer Time Duration Indicates Call Transfer to ACD Group A→ 003 203 203 13:10 00:00;10 00;03 ACD 204 B→ 003 ACD 204 13:10 00:00;06 [PDN] of telephone that C→ 003 204 500 13:10 00:00;26 answers the ACD transferred call 204 Ring before Answer Time or Queue Time 204 Talk Time 204 Discconnect Time A→ [DN] 203 Transfer Line 003 to ACD Group 01 (Dialing + B→ [DN] 204 Answers Line 003 (Agent logged in and ready on 204) C→ [DN] 204 Hangs up Figure 13-7 003 204 ) 2081 Transfer CO Line to ACD Group Example 500 14:13 00:01;05 00;10 Ring Duration Time before Agent answers 6 – 09 2 Rings 10 –13 3 Rings 14 –17 4 Rings etc. Talk Time Duration Call Disconnect Time Agent ACD Call [PhDN] [PDN] of Agent Telephone ACD CO Line Number 2082 Figure 13-8 13-12 Direct Ground/Loop Start Line Call to ACD Agent (no Queue Time) Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations ACD Installation Direct ACD call with ANI/Caller ID Number, answered by ACD Queue Announcer 4414. Call stays in queue until Agent button, [PhDN] 500 on Station 4403 becomes available. Agent answers call on button [PhDN] 500, line 1 prints, services call and hangs up, line 2 prints. Indicates DNIS/ANI Line 018D 018 ACD 4403 4414 500 Agent [PDN] ACD GRP Announcer Port 01:32 01:32 00:00;13 00:00;17 00;14 Button [PhDN] on station 4403 Line Number 4403 *7145833700** ANI/Caller ID Number Prints On SMDR After Agent Answers Station 4403 [PDN] Direct ACD call with ANI, does not enter queue and is answered by Agent Station 4403 on [PhDN] 500. The information below prints on SMDR when the Agent hangs up. button Indicates DNIS/ANI Line 018D 4403 500 02:05 00:00;06 00;19 *7145833700** Button [PhDN] ANI/Caller ID Number Prints On SMDR After Agent Hangs Up Line Number Station 4403 [PDN] Direct ACD Call with ANI/DNIS, does not enter ACD queue and is answered by Agent station 4403 on button [PhDN] 500. The information below prints on SMDR when the Agent hangs up. Indicates DNIS/ANI Line 019D 4403 500 02:47 00:00;04 ACD Call Age 00;18 *7145833777*2222* DR JONES nt Button [PhDN] Line Number ANI No. DNIS No. DNIS Name Agent [PDN] Direct ANI/Caller ID Number call goes to queue and caller hangs up while in queue; the information below prints on SMDR. Indicates DNIS/ANI LINE 018D ACD Line Number 4414 02:34 00:00;03 00;17 ACD Queue Announcer [PDN] *7145833333** ANI/Caller ID Number Prints When Caller Hangs Up Lost or Abandoned Calls ANI/Caller ID Number Storage Direct ACD call does not go to queue but rings Agent: Abandoned call is stored on Agent telephone. Direct ACD call does not go to queue but rings Agent. Agent does not answer and call goes to Ring No Answer (RNA) destination telephone: Abandoned call ANI/Caller ID Number is stored on RNA destination telephone. Direct ACD call rings to ACD Group. Caller hangs up before ACD announcer answers: Abandoned Call ANI/Caller ID Number is stored on telephone owner of ACD line which received the call (Program *52 assignment). Direct ACD call is answered by ACD queue announcer: Abandoned call ANI/Caller ID Number information is printed on SMDR as shown directly above. 0874 Figure 13-9 Strata DK I&M ACD ANI/DNIS Printout Example 5/00 13-13 ACD Installation Insight DK Delay Ring to Built-in Auto Attendant — Dial ACD Group “1” Digit Time caller dials “1” Auto Attendant Announce Time Duration Ring Duration Time before AA answer Indicate AA sent call to ACD Group 003 MSS 003 ACD 003 204 500 14:47 00:00;10 00;16 14:47 00:00;03 14:48 00:00;42 ACD 204 Work Unit Entry appears in Acct Code Field Agent or Overflow Destination Telephone Primary Directory Number [PDN] Agent ring before Answer Time Duration Agent Talk Time Duration Call Disconnect Time CO Line Number 1998 Figure 13-10 Delay Ring to Built-in AA Example Insight DK The Insight DK™ and Insight DK Plus are full-featured ACD MIS tools for call center supervisors, providing user-defined supervisor displays, user-defined historical reports, electronic wall board connections, and inView LAN-based status display messaging. Insight DK and DK Plus are Windows-based MIS software programs that work with PCs running Microsoft ® Windows® 2000, Windows 98, Windows 95 (Vers. 4.00.950A, B, or C), or Windows NT® with Service Pack 3. For more information, refer to the Strata DK Call Center Solutions General Description or other Insight DK documents listed in Related Documents/Media of the Introduction. Call Center Viewer (CCV) Call Center Viewer™ is a software application designed for ACD supervisors which enables them to view the calling states and activities of ACD Groups and Agents. With the Call Center Viewer, supervisors can customize the ACD displays, set Call Waiting alarms, and send messages to Wall Boards. The software works on a PC running Windows 2000, Windows 98, Windows 95, or Windows NT. This section discusses various combinations of connections between the Strata DK System and the Call Center Viewer PC(s). The Call Center Viewer application can be configured to work directly with the Strata DK, or with a SMIS PC, and/or with one Master PC plus additional PCs also running Call Center Viewer application programs. Application Overview Call Center Viewer organizes and displays events reported by the Strata DK MIS port. This application enables you to see the following: 13-14 ♦ Number of Calls in Queue ♦ Number of Agents Available ♦ Number of Agents Busy ♦ Number of Agents Logged-In ♦ Number of Agents Unavailable Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation Call Center Viewer (CCV) Individual Agent States and State Times ♦ Longest Call Waiting ♦ Strata DK Date/Time ♦ Wall Board Messages Strata DK Requirements ACD Installation ♦ The RKYS3 must be installed on the Strata DK processor PCB processor card in order for the Call Center Viewer to work. Host PC Requirements The host PC does not have to be dedicated to the application, since the Call Center Viewer application was designed for multi-tasking. When the Call Center Viewer application connects to the Strata DK system, it functions as a machine-to-machine interface, constantly updating call center data. The Call Center Viewer application should be installed on a PC with the following minimum requirements: ♦ IBM-compatible Pentium 100 MHz personal computer ♦ Windows 2000 (64MB RAM), Windows 98 and Windows NT (32MB RAM), and Windows 95 (16MB RAM) ♦ 10MB available hard drive space for the application ♦ 3.5” 1.44 MB floppy-disk drive ♦ One available serial communication ports (two if using Wall Boards) ♦ Parallel printer port (for activation key) ♦ VGA color monitor ♦ Keyboard and mouse ♦ Windows Graphics Accelerator Increasing the PC’s processor speed and adding RAM will improve the host PC’s performance, therefore boosting the performance of the Call Center Viewer application. To ensure data integrity, Toshiba strongly recommends that both the host PC and CCV application remain in continuous operation once the CCV application session begins. When the CCV application starts, the objects are displayed in Tree View, including ACD Groups, Agents, and Reader Boards. Note Strata DK I&M The term “Wall Board” refers specifically to the physical Wall Board. The Call Center Viewer software uses the term “Reader Board” in place of “Wall Board.” 5/00 13-15 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Following is an example of a typical Call Center Viewer display. Main Menu List View Tree View Status Bar 2097 Reference Information Refer to the Call Center Viewer User Guide for software installation and operation instructions. CCV Configuration Considerations The Call Center Viewer application can connect solely to the Strata DK280 or DK424 port, or in parallel with other CCV applications, or with a Software MIS (SMIS) computer. The number of CCV PCs and the hardware configuration determines the type of connectors needed. Depending on the configuration of the RS-232 port of the Strata DK System, a null modem adapter may be needed. Connectors This section describes the various connectors used with the CCV. Specific instructions for different types of configurations appear later in this section. on C " "Y er w ie V er M IS en t lC K al S TE R D C The CCVY connector enables two-way transmission between the Strata DK and a host PC, or SMIS equipment, and oneway transmission to other PCs. Use the CCVY to install multiple CCV PCs. (See Figure 13-11). ne ct or Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector (CCVY) An example of CCV connections is shown in Figure 13-18. M N TR 2 M N TR 1 M A The CCVY enables only SMIS to send ACK and NAK to the telephone system, and not from the Call Center Viewer host PC(s). The PC(s) only receive data on the RXD lead from the Strata DK system. 23 80 Figure 13-11 Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector (CCVY) 13-16 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation CCV Configuration PPTC Connector To CCVY 2511 Standard Modular Telephone Cord (7 ft. maximum) 25 or 9 Pin Connector ACD Installation A PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F is used to connect a six conductor standard telephone cord plug to connect the PC’s COM port (see Figure 13-12). PPTC Figure 13-12 PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F Connector There are three models of the PPTC appropriate for this application. See Figure 13-13 for pinout details for connecting the Call Center Viewer with equipment, such as Line Drivers and Data Broadcast Units. RSIU/RSIS/ RMDS/PIOU 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD RSIU/RSIS/ RMDS/PIOU 6 5 4 3 2 1 PPTC-9 9-pin Female 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 Conductor Line Cord 6 Conductor Line Cord SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD 5 1 4 6 3 2 PPTC 25-pin Male 1 2 3 4 5 6 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD RSIU/RSIS/ RMDS/PIOU 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 Conductor Line Cord SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD 7 8 20 6 2 3 PPTC-25F 25-pin Female 1 2 3 4 5 6 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD 7 8 20 6 2 3 2513 Figure 13-13 PPTC Pinout Diagram Line Driver An RS-232 short-haul modem or Line Driver is needed to boost transmission for PCs located more than 50 feet from the Strata DK System. A suitable Line Driver is made by Black Box® Corporation at (724) 746-5500, Model ME764A-MSP (male) or ME764A-FSP (female). See Figure 13-14. 2544 Figure 13-14 RS-232 Short-haul Line Driver Strata DK I&M 5/00 13-17 ;y;y ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions Line Drivers must be used in pairs. Figure 13-15 shows the connections between the two line drivers. + G RCV + XMT Pair 1 Twisted-pair Cable Pair 2 + RCV - XMT + G 2547 Figure 13-15 Twisted Pair Connections Instructions for connecting PCs more than 50 feet from the Strata DK are covered later in this section. Data Broadcast Unit The Data Broadcast Unit (Figure 13-16) enables you to connect more than three PCs to with the Call Center Viewer application. A data broadcast unit regenerates the RS-232 signal to accommodate multiple PCs. 2336 A suitable data broadcast unit to drive eight PCs can be obtained from Black Box Corporation at (724) 746-5500, model number TL158A. TXD CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 PWR Figure 13-16 RJ-25 Data Broadcast Unit This unit is powered by AC. If the Strata DK424 system is equipped with reserve power, then a small PC-type uninterrupted power supply can be used for full system operation in the event of a power failure. Instructions for connecting multiple PCs to the CCV appear later in this section. CCV Configuration Instructions Connecting the DK to a Stand-alone CCV PC ➤ Connect the Strata DK280 or DK424 MIS port (RSIU/RSIS, RSSU, PIOU, or PIOUS PCB) to the COM port of the host computer with an RS-232 cable. See Figure 13-17. Strata DK Wall Board CALLS WAITING: 18 LCW: 15:10 Host PC with Call Center Viewer (CCV) 4076 Figure 13-17 Connecting Strata DK Directly to a CCV PC with Optional Wall Board 13-18 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions Connecting the DK to a Stand-alone CCV PC, More than 50 Feet Away 2. Connect the other end of the Line Driver to the COM port of the host PC. Set the switch on this Line Driver to DCE Strata DK ACD Installation 1. Connect the Strata DK280 or DK424 MIS port (RSIU/RSIS, RSSU, PIOU, or PIOUS PCB) to the ME764-MSP Line Driver with an RS-232 cable (see Figure 13-18). Set the switch on the Line Driver to DTE. Host PC Line Driver must be less than 50' from DK ME764-FSP ME764-FSP Line Driver Modem Line Driver Modem SW: Set to DTE Position SW: Set to DCE Position Plugs into 25-pin COM Port of PC 2402 4-conductor, twisted pair phone cord 6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord PPTC male connector Figure 13-18 Connecting Strata DK to a CCV PC More Than 50 Feet Away Connecting CCV and SMIS Call Center Viewer monitors the data flowing between the Toshiba SMIS and the Strata DK. This enables the CCV application PC to display information and work in conjunction with a SMIS computer that is connected to the same Strata DK280 or DK424 MIS port. The CCV application and the SMIS application must reside on separate computers because SMIS requires a dedicated PC. The CCV provides the real-time status displays and connection of electronic Wall Boards. SMIS is used to provide historical ACD reports. The CCV can run concurrently with other Windows applications on other ACD Supervisors’ PCs. ➤ To connect the CCV to SMIS PC, less than 50 feet from the DK 1. Install the CCVY connector into the Strata DK MIS port (RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, or PIOU PCBs). See Figure 13-19. Depending on the configuration of the RS-232 port of the Strata DK System, a null modem adapter may be needed 2. Use a six-conductor modular telephone cord to connect the DK MIS port to the “DK MIS” port on the CCVY. 3. Plug a six-conductor modular cord into the “MASTER” port of the CCVY. Use a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F at the other end of the cord to connect to the SMIS or Main Call Center Viewer PC. Strata DK I&M 5/00 13-19 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions 4. To connect up to two more PCs, use a six-conductor modular telephone cord between the CCVY “MNTR1” or “MNTR2” port(s) with a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F to attach the PCs. Strata DK 6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector DK MIS MASTER MNTR1 MNTR2 2425 CALL CENTER VIEWER "Y" CONNECTOR PC with SMIS Second PC with CCV Figure 13-19 Connecting Strata DK to SMIS and CCV PCs Connecting Up to Three CCV PCs If you are connecting multiple PCs with the CCV application, use: One Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector (CCVY) One six-conductor telephone cord per PC, plus one cord for the DK to CCVY connection One PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F pin connector per PC ➤ To connect up to three CCV PCs to the Strata DK 1. Install the CCVY connector into the Strata DK MIS port (RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, or PIOU PCBs). See Figure 13-20. 2. Use a six-conductor twisted pair telephone cord to connect the DK MIS port to the “DK MIS” jack on the CCVY. 3. Plug a six-conductor modular cord into the “MASTER” port of the CCVY. Use a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F at the other end of the cord to connect to the Main Call Center Viewer PC. 13-20 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions Strata DK Wall Boards TECH SUPPORT CW:18 LCW: 15:10 ACD Installation 4. Connect the additional PCs the CCVY “MNTR1” or “MNTR2” port with a six-conductor line cord. Use a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F on the PC end of the cord. Master CCV PC MARKET SUPPORT CW:2 LCW: 1:56 2427 CCVY Connector CCV PC#2 CUSTOMER SUPPORT CW:5 LCW: 3:15 CCV PC#3 6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector Figure 13-20 Connecting Strata DK to Two or Three CCV PCs Connecting the CCV to More than Three CCV PC Use a Data Distribution Box when you are connecting more than three PCs using the CCV software. You will also need the connectors listed on the previous page. ➤ To connect Strata DK to multiple CCV PCs 1. Install the CCVY connector into the Strata DK MIS port (RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, or PIOU PCBs). See Figure 13-21. 2. Use a six-conductor twisted pair telephone cord to connect the DK MIS port to the “DK MIS” port on the CCVY. 3. Plug a six-conductor modular plug into the “MASTER” port of the CCVY. Use a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F at the other end of the cord to connect to the SMIS or Main Call Center Viewer PC. 4. Make sure that the Data Distribution Box is strapped for DTE operation for every output port (8). By using multiple data broadcast units, as many PCs as desired can be used, provided each one has the Call Center Viewer application and key installed. 5. Plug in a six-conductor line cord to either the CCVY “MNTR1” or “MNTR2” port. connect the other end to the Data Distribution box ...or if the PCs are located more than 50 feet from the DK, use Line Driver Modem(s) to boost the signal (see Figure 13-22). Use a a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F to attach the recommended ME764MSP Line Driver modem. Connect the other end of the Line Driver modem directly into the Data Distribution box. Strata DK I&M 5/00 13-21 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions 6. Connect the additional PCs to the Data Distribution box with RS-232 cables or line cords with PPTCs. Strata DK SMIS Master CCV PC Data Distribution Box CCVY 2428 CCV Slave PC1 or PCs can be connected with a PPTC and standard phone cord or an RS-232 cable CCV Slave PC2 6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord RS-232 cable PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector PPTC male connector Figure 13-21 Connecting Up to Three CCV PCs (Less than 50’ From the DK) Strata DK SMIS Master CCV PC 2428 ME764-MSP ME764-MSP Line Driver Modem Line Driver Modem CCVY Must be less than 50' from DK 2232 CCV Slave PC1 Data Distribution Box Second LD can be up to four miles from DK CCV Slave PC2 CCV Slave PC3 4-conductor, twisted pair phone cord 6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord RS-232 cable PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector CCV Slave PC4 PPTC-25F connector Figure 13-22 Connecting Multiple CCV PCs (More than 50’ from Strata DK) 13-22 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ACD Installation Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards ACD Installation Electronic Wall Boards can be connected to each supervisor’s PC to display call center status data over head from the Call Center Viewer application. This provides visibility of important call center event information to both supervisors and agents. The supervisor can also send custom, user defined, text information to the electronic Wall Board. This can be used for general information, motivational messages, etc. One copy of the Call Center Viewer application supports a Wall Board network which can cover all active ACD groups. The Call Center Viewer application works with Spectrum 200, 300 and 700 series electronic Wall Boards listed below. In the following table, “R” stands for a red display and “C” stands for a three-color display: green, amber, and red. Table 13-1 Wall Board Model and Part Numbers Model Toshiba Part Number 215R Master TOS1512RM1 215R Slave TOS1512RS1 215R Stand-alone TOS1512RA1 215C Master TOS1512CM1 215C Slave TOS1512CS1 215C Stand-alone TOS1512CA1 320C Master TOS1023CM1 320C Slave TOS1023CS1 320C Stand-alone TOS1023CA1 330C Master TOS1033CM1 330C Slave TOS1033CS1 330C Stand-alone TOS1033CA1 714C Master TOS3417CM1 714C Slave TOS3417CS1 714C Stand-alone TOS3417CA1 Message Area Size 27” wide x 2.1” high 54” wide x 3.1” high 81” wide x 3.1” high 45.6” wide x 4” high Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards are available directly from Spectrum Corporation (800-392-5050 or at Website: http://www.specorp.com). Spectrum provides technical support for their products. Toshiba does not plan to sell, stock, or provide technical support for Spectrum Wall Boards. Multiple Wall Boards Each Call Center Viewer PC can drive multiple electronic Wall Boards that function independently from other supervisor’s Wall Boards. Wall Boards connect to each other using a twisted pair Spectrum network. Up to 255 slave Wall Boards can be attached to one master Wall Board. The total cable distance can be up to 10,000 feet. Each supervisor can send custom messages to that supervisor’s Wall Board. The Wall Boards are addressable so that multiple supervisors can use a group of Wall Boards connected to one PC to send messages and ACD data differently to each Wall Board. Strata DK I&M 5/00 13-23 ACD Installation Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards 13-24 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Fault Finding 14 Fault Finding This chapter describes the procedures to diagnose faults in the Strata DK14 and DK40i Key Service Unit (KSU) as well as the DK424 and DK424i systems. Faults are classified and then cleared by replacing the malfunctioning unit and by performing operational tests in the sequences by prescribed by the fault clearing flowcharts in “Fault Isolation Flowcharts” on Page 14-10. Fault Classification A Fault Classification Flowchart is provided to ensure that fault clearing is pursued in a logical sequence (Flowchart 14-1 on Page 14-10). The flowcharts assume that the fault was discovered and reported by a digital or electronic telephone user. All faults, therefore, are classified according to the way they would appear at the digital or electronic telephone. Fault Clearing Procedures Before attempting to clear any fault, ensure that it is in the system and not caused by associated external equipment, such as wiring, MOH source, etc. Important! Many system features are assigned, enabled or disabled using software entries as described in the Strata DK Programming Manual. It is very important to verify that the system programming is correct and functional before troubleshooting the hardware. Initialize the system (Programs 91-9 and 03) before testing new systems or when changing the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424 or DK424i processor PCBs. Strata DK I&M 5/00 14-1 Fault Finding Parts Return Faults in the Strata DK40i, DK424 and DK424i are cleared by replacing PCBs, telephones (digital or electronic) or the power supply, as instructed in the flowcharts. Five symbols are used in the flowcharts, which are identified in Figure 12-1. The flowcharts are sequentially arranged to permit rapid fault localization within the system. All fault clearing must begin with the Fault Classification Flowchart, which is arranged in the correct fault locating sequence. Marking points of a flowchart sequence. Important notes affecting the fault clearing procedure. Question to be answered YES or NO. Progression TO or FROM another flowchart location. Letters and numbers denote the exact entrance or exit points. Statement of a required action. 1887 Figure 14-1 CAUTION! Flowchart Symbols When handling PCBs, do not: Drop a PCB. Stack one PCB on top of another. Handle a PCB without discharging any static electricity from your person by touching the grounded cabinet. Touch the PCB contacts with your fingers. Important! If the fault is not cleared by substituting a PCB, reinstall the original PCB in the KSU/cabinet before trying another PCB. Parts Return 1. Pack the part in a suitable container (original box is highly recommended). Use anti-static containers for all PCBs and feature cartridges. Use plastic bags for digital or electronic telephones, KSU/cabinet, etc. CAUTION! To avoid damage, never write on the part itself. 2. Describe the nature of the defect on an information tag. Attach the tag to the front of the unit with string (not wire) so the tag can remain attached during the testing and repair. Note 14-2 Return tags are available from Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., TSD Division. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Fault Finding KSU/Processor PCB Fault Isolation KSU/Processor PCB Fault Isolation The DK14 and DK40i KSU circuits, and DK424 and DK424i processor PCB (RCTU or B_C_U) circuits may contain a “soft” fault due to an extremely high level of static electricity and/or improper or no System Initialization. If the KSU or RCTU is found defective during the fault finding procedures, attempt to clear a “soft” fault before returning the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or the DK424 or DK424i processor PCB for repair. ➤ To clear a “soft” fault 2. If the fault returns again, tag the defective KSU or processor PCB and return it for repair. Fault Isolation Procedure Fault Finding 1. Initialize the system, then re-program the system as necessary to test for the fault. 1. Test the power supply (see “Testing the System’s Power Supply” on Page 3-6). Test AC power and ground per system installation section. 2. Verify that the BATT jumper plug on the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU motherboard, or the DK424 or DK424i processor PCB, is in the On position. 3. If there are feature keys, verify that they are correctly installed: ♦ DK14: verify that the QKYS is correctly installed per Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation. ♦ DK40i: verify the KKYS option installation on the K4RCU3 per Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation. ♦ DK424 or DK424i: verify correct installation of the RRCS or RKYS options on the processor PCB per the Installation chapter. 4. For the DK14 and DK40i, skip to Step 6. For the DK424, make sure the system power is Off. Then install an processor PCB in the appropriate slot of the Base Cabinet: DK424: If RCTUD is installed, install RCTUC in the “R11” slot of the Base Cabinet. If RCTUBB is installed in the “RCTU” slot, install RCTUBA in the R11 slot of the Base Cabinet. DK424i: If B2CBU or B3CBU is installed, install its partner card, B2CAU or B3CAU in the “Bl01” slot of the Base Cabinet. 5. DK424: If installing RCTUBA and RCTUBB, RCTUC and RCTUD, or RCTUE and RCTUF connect them together with the two ribbon cables supplied per Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation. DK424i: If B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU or B5CAU/B5CBU is installed, connect them together with the two ribbon cables supplied per Chapter 7 – DK424i Installation. 6. Verify that all PCBs are installed in proper slots per the Configuration chapter for the system. 7. Turn system power On; backup the customer database using DKi Admin or DKi Backup. For the DK424, verify that the heartbeat LED flashes on RCTUA3, RCTUBB, RCTUB, RCTUD, RCTUE (RCTUA, RCTUBA, RCTUC and RCTUF do not have heartbeat LEDs). For DK424i, verify that the heartbeat LED flashes on B1CAU, B2CAU, B3CAU or B5CAU (B2CBU, B3CBU or B5CBU do not have heartbeat LEDs). 8. Run System Initialization Program 91-9 (two times) per Program 91-9. Strata DK I&M 5/00 14-3 Fault Finding DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test 9. Run Program 03, for all option PCBs installed per Program 03. 10. Run the processor RAM tests with Program 00 (Part 2). 11. Enter the customer database (manually or with DKi Admin or DKi Backup) and retest for faults. 12. After performing the above steps, tag the defective PCB(s), Power Supply, or KSU, and return for repair. DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test This test applies to the base and expansion cabinet RPSU280 and RPSU424 power supplies. Cabinet PCBs may or may not be installed when beginning this test. Some steps in the test require an AC/DC voltmeter that can measure up to 50VDC and 150VAC. Notes ● ● RPSU280 and RPSU424 power supplies are fit, form, and functionally the same. They can be interchanged and mixed in DK280, and DK424 systems. To test DK14 or DK40i power supplies, see their respective installation in Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation or Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation. ➤ To test the Power Supply 1. Verify that the correct RPSU280 and RPSU424 jumper plug is installed in the jumper plug socket. The plug with the wire must be installed on the Base Cabinet power supply and the plug without the wire must be installed on all expansion cabinet power supply. One of each plug is supplied in a plastic bag attached to each power supply. 2. Verify the power supply On/Off switch is in the On position. Note The Base Cabinet On/Off switch must be On to allow expansion cabinet power supplies to operate. Verify that the data ribbon cable is plugged into the base from all expansion cabinets. Check AC power and ground per AC Power and Grounding Requirements in Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation. 3. Ensure the AC power cord is plugged into the RPSU280 or RPSU424 AC IN connector and the commercial AC outlet (or power strip (RPSB) if used). The green power LED indicator will be on when AC power is connected to the power supply and the On/Off switch is On. Take appropriate action to restore AC power if necessary. Note The green power LED indicates that AC voltage is present at the AC IN connector only when the power supply On/Off switch On. This is helpful for battery backup systems—the POWER indicator will be Off and the +5V and –5V indicators will be On when the DK280 or DK424 is operating on reserve power (batteries). 4. Verify that the +5V and –5V green LED indicators are On. If one or both indicators are Off, remove cabinet PCBs one at a time and check if +5V or –5V indicators turn on (it may be necessary to turn power Off and On to restore ±5V). Replace defective PCBs causing a ±5V fault. Important! 14-4 If a CRCU PCB is installed on an RCTU PCB, ±5V will turn Off. Do not install CRCU on RCTU. Only RRCS DTMF PCBs can be installed on RCTU. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Fault Finding DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test 5. Lightly press the three –24 circuit breakers to ensure they have not accidentally opened during shipment. If a circuit breaker continues to “trip,” remove cabinet PCBs, one at a time, and try to reset the circuit breaker. Replace defective PCBs if causing –24V fault. If breakers continue to trip, go to Step 7. 6. Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power supply DC output voltages at the “DC OUT” connector on the power supply. Place the positive (black) meter lead on the FG screw. Insert the negative (red) meter lead tip into the DC out connector until it makes contact. Make sure that +5V, –5V, and –24V are within the range specified in Figure 14-2. Do this test with PCBs inserted; if a voltage(s) is not within specification, remove PCBs, one at a time and recheck the voltage. (Power may have to be turned Off and On to restore a voltage.) 7. Unplug the cabinet DC power connector from the power supply “DC OUT” jack. Attempt to reset -24V breakers per Step 5. If breaker cannot be reset replace power supply; if breakers reset go to Step 8. Fault Finding Replace any PCB which causes a voltage fault. If voltage tests out of specification with all PCBs removed from the cabinet, go to Step 7. 8. Check the power supply DC voltages measuring at the power supply “DC OUT” jack with the black meter lead on the BATT “+” terminal. If the DC voltages are within specification when the cabinet DC power connector is disconnected but not within specification when the cabinet is connected, the cabinet is probably defective. If the DC voltages are not within specification when the cabinet DC power connector is unplugged, the power supply probably is defective. Replace the defective cabinet or power supply per Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation. Important! +5VDC (white wire) cannot be checked with the DC out cable disconnected. 9. Using the DC voltmeter, check the RPSU280 battery charger as follows: Remove the battery cable from the power supply “BATT” connector. Place the positive (black) meter lead on the “+” BATT pin and the negative (red) meter lead on the “–” BATT pin. The allowed range is (–26.3VDC ~ –27.8VDC). The “BATT” connector output of the RPSU424 is 0VDC unless connected to good batteries. If BATT output is not within specification, replace the RPSU280. Strata DK I&M 5/00 14-5 Fault Finding DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test Power Indicator LEDs (Green) DC Out Cable/connector DC OUT R11 PCTU S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 1 Base Jumper Plug POWER -24V 2 +5V 3 -5V DKSUB DKSUE AC Power Cord + BATT ON OFF R11 RCTU S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 –24VDC Circuit Breakers DC VOLTAGE PINS Red Wire No Wire Blue Wire White Wire Green Wire +5VDC 0VDC –5VDC +5VDC 0VDC Green Wire Green Wire Yellow Wire Yellow Wire Yellow Wire 0VDC 0VDC –24VDC –24VDC –24VDC DC VOLTAGE SPECIFICATION –5VDC (–4.5 ~ –5.5), Expansion Cabinet only + 0 –24VDC (–26.3 ~ –27.8) – –26.3 ~ –27.8* FG Wire and Spade Lug 24VDC Circuit Breaker Assignments: AC IN ON/OFF Switch Third Wire Ground or Power Supply Daisy Chain Ground to Next Power Supply BASE CABINET 24V-1 S15, S16 24V-2 S13, S14 24V-3 S11, S12 BATT (VDC) –5VDC (+4.5 ~ +5.5) FG S16 EXP. CABINET 24-1 SX1, SX2 24-2 SX3, SX4, SX5 24-3 SX6, SX7, SX8 Base Jumper Plug Expansion Jumper Plug 4252 *RPSU424 “BATT” is 0 volt unless connected to good batteries. Figure 14-2 14-6 RPSU280 Power Supply Voltage Test Points / Circuit Breakers / Jumper Plugs Strata DK I&M 5/00 Fault Finding Station Cable Continuity Check Station Cable Continuity Check Voltmeter Test Use a voltmeter to check cable continuity between the DK40i KSU/DK424 cabinet, digital or electronic telephone, DSS console, and the attendant console (DK424). Make tests at the modular block. Refer to Tables 14-1 and 14-2. ➤ To perform the voltmeter test 2. Disconnect the digital or electronic telephone, DSS console, PDIU-DS, HDCB, or DDCB. 3. Using a DC voltmeter, measure between the wires of the two pairs to verify the readings shown in Table 14-1 for digital telephone ports. Refer to Table 14-2 for electronic telephone ports. The reading will be a plus or minus depending on meter lead placement. Fault Finding 1. Refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for appropriate MDF wiring diagrams in Chapters 1 and 3. 4. An improper reading indicates an open, crossed or shorted wire. See “Power Supply Removal and Replacement” on Page 1-8, Page 3-19, or Page 5-11. 5. For the MDF-to-telephone (digital or electronic) cable, use an ohmmeter to make a more precise check. Table 14-1 Station Cable Continuity Check for Digital Telephone Cables using Voltmeter From 1. 2. Strata DK I&M To Voltage Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color 1 T Green1 2 T Black 0 1 R Red 2 T Black 242 1 T Green 2 R Yellow 242 1 R Red 2 R Yellow 0 1 T Green 1 R Red 242 2 T Black 2 R Yellow 242 The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other. Nominal voltage—within limits of ±26.3 ~ ±27.8VDC while under AC power, polarity depending on voltmeter lead placements. 5/00 14-7 Fault Finding Station Cable Continuity Check Table 14-2 Station Cable Continuity Check for Electronic Telephone Cables using Voltmeter From 1. 2. To Voltage Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color 1 T Green1 2 T Black 242 1 R Red 2 T Black 242 1 T Green 2 R Yellow 242 1 R Red 2 R Yellow 242 1 T Green 1 R Red 0 2 T Black 2 R Yellow 0 3 T White 3 R Blue 0 3 T White 1 R Red 0 3 R Blue 1 R Red 0 3 T White 1 T Green 0 3 R Blue 1 T Green 0 3 T White 2 T Black 0 3 R Blue 2 T Black 0 3 T White 2 R Yellow 0 3 R Blue 2 R Yellow 0 The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other. Nominal voltage—within limits of ±26.3 ~ ±27.8VDC while under AC power, polarity depending on voltmeter lead placements. Ohmmeter Test Check the continuity of the cable run between the KSU/cabinet and digital or electronic telephone with an ohmmeter. ➤ To perform the ohmmeter test 1. Disconnect the DSS console, electronic or digital telephone. 2. At the MDF, remove the bridging clips. 3. At the MDF, place shorting jumper wires between the T and R of pair #1 (green-red), the T and R of pair #2 (black-yellow) and the T and R of OCA pair #3 (blue-white), for PEKU/ PESU only. (For MDF pin numbers, see Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.) 4. At the modular block, measure the resistance between all wire combinations. The proper readings are shown in Table 14-3 for digital telephones, DDSSs, DDCBs and Table 14-4 for electronic telephones and HDSSs. 5. An improper reading indicates an open, crossed or shorted wire. “Power Supply Removal and Replacement” on Page 1-8 (DK14), or Page 3-19 (DK40i), or Page 5-8 (DK424). 14-8 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Fault Finding Station Cable Continuity Check Cable Installation Test If cable voltmeter and ohmmeter tests are within limits, digital telephones, DDCBs, or DDSS consoles may not operate. ➤ To perform the cable installation test 1. Cable runs for the above digital devices must be free of cable splits (single or double). Test for and eliminate all cable splits. 2. Cable bridge taps – Digital telephones will not operate if cable runs contain any type (short or long) of cable bridge. Test for and eliminate all cable bridges. 4. For DK40i: See Table 3-9 on Page 3-38. Verify that your telephone is wired correctly (2-pair or External power) for the options it supports (ADM, RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, HHEU, DVSU, etc.). Table 14-3 Station Cable Continuity Check for Digital Telephone Cables using Ohmmeter From Table 14-4 To Voltage Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color 1 T Green1 2 T Black open 1 R Red 2 T Black open 1 T Green 2 R Yellow open 1 R Red 2 R Yellow open 1 T Green 1 R Red 40 ohms2 2 T Black 2 R Yellow 40 ohms2 Station Cable Continuity Check for Electronic Telephone Cables using Ohmmeter From 1. 2. Strata DK I&M Fault Finding 3. When installing the station cable, do not run parallel to and within 3 ft. of an AC power line. AC power lines should cross at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. To Voltage Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color 1 T Green1 2 T Black open 1 R Red 2 T Black open 1 T Green 2 R Yellow open 1 R Red 2 R Yellow open 1 T Green 1 R Red 40 ohms2 2 T Black 2 R Yellow 40 ohms2 3 T White 3 R Blue 40 ohms2 3 T White 1 R Red open 3 R Blue 1 R Red open 3 T White 1 T Green open 3 R Blue 1 T Green open 3 T White 2 T Black open 3 R Blue 2 T Black open 3 T White 2 R Yellow open The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other. This is the maximum allowable reading for all digital and electronic telephone cable runs except if connecting an HDSS console to circuits 7 and 8 of a PEKU, then the maximum cable restriction is 20 ohms, not 40 ohms. 5/00 14-9 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Fault Isolation Flowcharts The following troubleshooting flowcharts are available to aid in fault isolation. Toshiba recommends reading the previous text in this chapter before proceeding to Flowchart 14-1 on Page 14-10 to begin fault isolation. Flowchart 14-1 Fault Classification START Please read Chapters 2 and 3 before proceeding. Is the system completely non-operational? 1-1 Yes Go to Flowchart 14-2 No Is it a station no dial tone fault? Yes Go to Flowchart 14-3 No Is it a CO line no dial tone fault? Yes Go to Flowchart 14-4 Is it a remote maintenance fault? Yes Go to Flowchart 14-8 No Is the fault classified on this page? Yes Go to appropriate Flowchart 14-1~14-12 No Call your technical support group. 1879 No Is a DSS console nonoperational? Yes Go to Flowchart 14-5 Yes Go to Flowchart 14-6 Yes Go to Flowchart 14-7 No Is it a voice mail/auto attd fault? No Is it an SMDR fault? No 1-1 14-10 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 14-2 Catastrophic Faults START Go to Flowchart 14-1 No Is the system completely non-operational? Yes Fault Finding 2-1 Test the Power Supply as described in the Installation Chapter. Also perform Hardware Fault Isolation per this chapter. 2-2 Was the fault isolated by completing the system hardware check? No Yes 2-3 Tag the defective unit(s) and return for repair. END 2-5 Re-initialize the system (Programs 91-9 and 03) and re-check fault using default program data (do not enter customer database). 2-4 Reprogram customer database, one program at a time, and check to see if fault re-occurs. 2-6 Yes 2-7 Does the fault re-occur after entering customer database? No END Was the fault cleared after re-initializing the system? No Yes 2-8 Call your technical support group. 1880 Strata DK I&M 5/00 14-11 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 14-3 START Station Dial Tone Faults Check station wiring per the Station Cable Continuity Check in this chapter. 3-1 Repair if necessary. Is the fault cleared? Yes END No 3-2 Replaceable Station PCBs: DK14: QCDU, QSTU2 DK40i Base KSU: KSTU2 and all PCBs in the DK40i Expansion Unit DK424 or DK424i: PEKU, PESU, PSTU, RSTU, RDSU/RSTS, Is the faulty station on a replaceable station PCB? Yes Replace the PCB and retest 3-8 No No 3-3 Are the faulty station(s) only in the DK40i Expansion KSU or only one DK424 or DK424i cabinet? Yes 3-5 Is the fault cleared? Yes 3-4 Change the DK40i Expansion KSU and retest or check the cabinet power supply per the RPSU280 power supply test. Then replace the DK424 or DK424i cabinet Replace the defective unit and return it to the repair center END No 3-7 3-6 Replace the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU. Or, test the DK424 or DK424i common control PCB per the Fault Isolation section. Initialize the DK424/DK424i/DK40i system (Prog: 91-9 and 03). Is the fault cleared? Yes Go to 3-4 Retest. No Is the fault cleared? No Call your technical support group. 1881 Yes Go to 3-4 14-12 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 14-4 CO Line Dial Tone Faults START 1. Check CO line wiring per Chapter 10. 2. Test central office line using a standard telephone or butt set at the TELCO block. Repair as necessary. 4-1 Yes END No Change the PCB and retest. 4-3 4-2 Are all faulty CO lines on a replaceable PCB (not including KSU motherboard)? 4-4 Yes No No Is the fault cleared? 4-7 Replaceable CO Line PCBs: DK14 QCDU DK40i Base KSU: KCOU TCOU TDDU TBUU DK40i only: KCDU DK40i Expansion KSU/DK424/ DK424i: RCOU RCIU2 REMU RDDU PCOU DK424/ DK424i only REMU RCOS RGLU RBUU Yes Fault Finding Is the fault cleared? 4-5 Are the faulty CO lines only in the DK40i Expansion KSU or one DK424/DK424i Cabinet? Replace the defective unit and return it to the repair center. Yes END No 4-10 4-9 Change the expansion unit and retest. 4-6 Change the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU or test the DK424 or DK424i common control PCB per the Fault Isolation section and initialize the system (Prog. 91-9 and 03). Is the fault cleared? Yes Go to 4-5 Retest. No Is the fault cleared? No Call your technical support group. Yes Go to 4-5 Strata DK I&M 5/00 1882 14-13 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 14-5 DSS Console Faults START Note DSS console type? DDSS DSS is not available on DK14. 5-0 Is the correct PCB slot code entered in Program 03? HDSS On PEKU connected to HDSS, set SW1 to the DSS position. Enter correct PCB slot code using Program 03; then turn power OFF (for 5 seconds) and then ON. No 5-1 Yes 5-2 5-3 Refer to Chapter 10 and verify wiring: Go to 5-0 Is the fault cleared? • For DDSS, circuit 8 of the base unit or PDKU (KCDU does not support DDSS). • For HDSS, circuit 7 and 8 of PEKU (PESU does not support HDSS). No Go to 5-3 Yes END Correct as necessary. 5-4 Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Test DSS cable with cable continuity checks in this chapter. Correct as necessary. 5-5 Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Call your technical support group. 14-14 1883 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 14-6 Voice Mail/(External) Auto Attendant Faults 6-1 START Check that the QRCU3 (DK14), K5RCU (DK40i) or RRCS (DK424 or DK424i) is installed correctly and programmed with Code 92 in Prog. 03 (DK40i) or Code 92, 93, and 94 in Prog. 03 (DK424 or DK424i). This chart assumes the VM/AA device has no faults. Yes Is the fault cleared? Fault Finding Is VM/AA integration completely non-operational? Yes END No No 6-2 Check that VM/AA ports are connected to standard telephone station ports correctly. (Refer to QSTU2 (DK14), KSTU2 (DK40i only). DK40i/DK424 RSTU2, PSTU, PESU, and for the DK424 or DK424i, RDSU/RSTS wiring diagrams in Chapter 10.) Read “Voice Mail Options” in Chapter 10 and the programming instructions for: DK14/DK40i: 03 (Code 92, slot 00 for K4RCU3) DK424: 03 (Code 92~94 for RCTU PCB) DK14/DK40i/DK424/DK424i: 15-0 and 15-3 (Auto release), and 31 (LEDs: 04, 05, 09, 15~20). This explains system hardware and programming options related to VM and external auto attendant. Correct if necessary. 6-4 Correct Hardware/System Programming as necessary. Is the fault cleared? 6-3 Is the fault cleared? END No Yes No Check that the VM I.D. codes (656 and 657) are stored correctly in users’ digital or electronic telephones. Use operating procedures in the manual for instructions. END Using a standard DTMF telephone, check all standard telephone circuits (QSTU2, KSTU2,RSTU2, PSTU2, PESU). Replace defective PCB if necessary. 6-5 Is the fault cleared? Other VM/AA related programs: • 10-2, LED 11 – No DTMF tones • 13 – Message center • 33 – Station hunting • 35 – Busy station transfer/ringing • 36 – Fixed call forward • 37 – Ring transfer recall time Yes Yes END No 6-6 Call your technical support group. 1884 Strata DK I&M 5/00 14-15 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 14-7 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Faults START 7-4 Read the SMDR installation instructions in this chapter before proceeding with this chart. This chart assumes the SMDR device has no faults. No SMDR data or garbled data is detected at the QSMU, WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS/ RSIU/RSIS SMDR port. No Verify that the PIOU/PIOUS, WSIU (DK14), or TSIU (DK40i only) baud rate SW1 switch is in the correct position (300 bps or 1200 bps) to match the SMDR device baud rate. (Refer to TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS installation in Chapter 7.) If using RSIU/RSIS with DK424 or DK424i, verify Program 76-1 for port assignment. Verify baud rate in Program 76-2 Yes Change as required. 7-5 7-1 No other faults are classified. Call your technical support group for assistance. No SMDR data records are sent correctly but not when the customer requires. Yes 7-2 Set SMDR options in Program 60: Threshold time, long distance calls only, etc. Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Verify that the SMDR device communication parameters are set for: 8-data bits, no-parity, 1-stop bit, 300 or 1200 bps. RSIU/RSIS 1200, 2400, 4800 and 9600 Change as required. 7-6 7-3 Call your technical support group. No Is the fault cleared? Yes Is the fault cleared? Yes END No 7-7 7-8 END • DK40i/DK424/DK424i: The SMDR port is the bottom modular jack (TTY is on top) of WSIU (DK14) or TSIU (DK40i only) /PIOU/PIOUS. • DK424 or DK424i: SMDR can be any jack on RSIU or RSIS. See • Program 76. The modular cord connecting to the SMDR port must be 6-wires. Check that the SMDR device is wired correctly to the WSIU/RSIU/RSIS/TSIU/PIOU/ PIOUS SMDR port. (Refer to PIOU or PIOUS wiring instructions in Chapter 10.) Fix as required. Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Change the PIOU/RSIU/RSIS/TSIU PIOUS PCB. 7-9 Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Call your technical support group. 1885 14-16 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 14-8 Remote Maintenance Faults START If a digital or electronic telephone is in the Programming mode, it is not possible to enter the Remote Maintenance mode. This chart assumes that the remote terminal and modem have no fault and that Remote Maintenance does not operate. Fault Finding Check that the baud rate switch (SW2, push-button switch on PIOU/PIOUS) is set to match the remote terminal baud rate (300 bps LED ON, 1200 bps LED OFF) . DK40i: check that the WSIU, TSIU, IMDU, PIOU, or PIOUS is installed correctly. DK424 or DK424i: check that the RSIU, RMDS, IMDU, RSSU, PIOU or PIOUS is installed correctly. If using RSIU/RSIS/RMDS, check that Program 76 settings match DKi Admin/DKi Backup PC and modem or remote terminal/modem. Check that communication parameters of remote terminal are set to match the PIOU or PIOUS TTY port or IMDY (7-data bits, even parity, 1-stop bit). 8-1 External modem connected to the WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS TTY port 8-2 Is Remote Maintenance connection via external modem on TTY port or IMDU modem? IMDU modem installed on PIOU or PIOUS 8-4 Check that the communication parameters of the remote terminal are set to match the IMDU (7-data bits, even parity, 1-stop bit). Check that the PIOU/PIOUS SW3 switch is in the MODEM position. Check that the WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS SW3 switch is in the TTY position. For DK424 or DK424i, check Program 76-1 and verify the port is programmed as a 1 for TTY. • Enable the IMDU by turning LED 14 ON in Program 77-1. • If required, assign CO lines for DISA or to ring IMDU in system Program 78, Code 51~53. • When calling IMDU or RMDS via DISA or ring transfer, dial #19. If calling RMDS or IMDU via DID lines, call the sttion number assigned to Port 085 (RCTUB) or Port 245 (RCTUC/D) in Program *09 or 71, 72 and 73. Correct as necessary. 8-3 Is the fault cleared? Correct above if necessary or replace IMDU or PIOU(S). YES END 8-5 NO Check that the modem or terminal connected to the TTY port is wired correctly per the WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS, RSSU MDF wiring in Chapter 10. Correct above if necessary or replace WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, or RSIU/RSIS. • The TTY port is the top modular jack (SMDR is bottom) of the PIOU/PIOUS. • The modular cord connecting the TTY port to the terminal or external modem must be 6-wires. • TTY can be any jack on RSIU/RSIS—see Program 76. Is the fault cleared? Call your technical support group. 1886 Strata DK I&M 5/00 14-17 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts 14-18 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Computer Telephony Integration 15 This chapter gives you information about Computer Telephony Integration (CTI). Currently, it includes procedures for using a Personal Computer Interface Unit (RPCI-DI) for Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI) running under both Microsoft® Windows® 95, Windows 3.1 and Windows 3.11 for Workgroups. The Telephony Specification was jointly developed and copyrighted by Intel® and Microsoft. It consists of both TAPI, used by applications, and the Telephony Service Provider Interface (TSPI), implemented by other service providers. Toshiba provides the TAPI connection through a Strata DKT2000-series telephone with a modified Data Interface Unit. The Personal Computer Interface Unit (RPCI-DI) for TAPI integrates into the bottom base of a 2000-series telephone. Computer Telephony Integration About Strata DK and TAPI There are two separate modes of operation for the Toshiba TSPI depending on the type of Strata DK telephone system that the DKT/RPCI-DI is connected to. Toshiba’s TSPI is configured using the Telephony icon installed as part of TAPI in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel. Windows Telephony is a component of Windows Open Services Architecture. This architecture provides telephony services when connected to many different telephone switches. Therefore, an application needs to know only the definition of the API (Application Program Interface) and not its implementation. The Strata DK TAPI Service Provider (DK TSPI) comes with each RPCI-DI. This device, along with this software module, allows a Windows-based PC to interconnect with the phone system for receiving and making calls. Any TAPI-compliant PC software becomes compatible with Strata DK systems. The disk set also contains a “middleware” software known as StrataLink. This application enables other Windows-based software to also work with Strata DK systems. Requirements To use TAPI with the DKT Service Provider, you must have an IBM-compatible PC with 8 MB RAM, running: ♦ Windows 95, Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11. ♦ Microsoft TAPI installed. (Most TAPI applications automatically install TAPI as part of the normal installation process.) Strata DK I&M 5/00 15-1 Computer Telephony Integration StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows Step 1: Remove Previously Installed DKT TAPI Service Provider Applications Note Refer to the appropriate operating system instructions: Windows 2000 1. Click on the Start Button, Settings, then Control Panel. Double click on the Telephony Control Panel icon. 2. Double click on the Phone/Modem Options icon. 3. From the dialog box, select the Advanced Tab to select the devices. 4. A confirmation box asks if you want to remove the driver. Click Yes. Windows 98 or Windows NT 1. Click on the Start Button, Settings, then Control Panel. Double click on the Telephony Control Panel icon. 2. Double click on the Double click on the Telephony Control Panel icon. 3. Select Telephony Drivers to select the devices. 4. A confirmation box asks if you want to remove the driver. Click Yes. 068win Windows 95 1. Click on the Start Button, Settings, then Control Panel. 2. Double click on the Telephony Control Panel icon. Highlight the Toshiba DKT TSPI. Click Remove. 3. A confirmation box asks if you want to remove the driver. Click Yes. 15-2 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Computer Telephony Integration StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows Step 2: Install TSPI and/or StrataLink Packages 1. From the Windows’ Start button, select Run. 2. Enter A:\Setup.exe, then follow the Installation Wizard instructions. 2534 Computer Telephony Integration 3. When the Package Selection menu appears, select the appropriate option to install either software package or both software packages (recommended). 2527 4. When the Automatic Startup menu appears, make sure that “Add StrataLink to the Startup Group” is checked. 5. Follow the remaining Installation Wizard instructions to complete the installation. 2530 Strata DK I&M 5/00 15-3 Computer Telephony Integration StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows Step 2: Initialize StrataLink and the TAPI Service Provider ➤ To initialize StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider 1. Press the Windows Start button, select Programs, StrataLink, and StrataLink. 2. Click “Enable TAPI”. 2662 The light above this box will be red at first, then yellow as the TAPI Service Provider is initialized, and finally green when initialization is complete. 3. Press Driver Setup to configure the TAPI Service Provider. 4. Select the Com Port that will be used to make the connection to the desktop telephone. 5. You may type a name in the Phone Name box. This name appears in the application on the PC. 6. Select phone type: 10- or 20key. 7. Select the switch type from the drop-down menu. 8. Select the shared line appearance to enable incoming calls to act like a key system. Leave it unselected for a standard TAPI (PBX interface). 15-4 2695 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Computer Telephony Integration StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows 9. Click on Configure Keys to define the functions assigned to each of the telephone buttons. 10. Select a button. 11. Choose a function from the list. 12. Name the button to match the name on the telephone. Repeat for each button to be used (see table). Note Strata Link uses the label to create the customizing Trigger Rules. Unique button names allows rules that apply individually to that button. Buttons with the same name will have the same rule applied. For example, the two PDN buttons will follow any rule If {Call Ringing} on PDN then {Pop Goldmine}”. All other buttons will not respond to this rule. Computer Telephony Integration 2696 13. Click OK. Toshiba recommends the following assignments: Table 15-1 DK Button Definitions DK Button Strata DK I&M 5/00 Use PDN/Intercom Primary Line SDN Secondary Appearance PhDN Primary Line CO Line CO Line Speed Speed Dial All Others Feature Key 15-5 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Using StrataLink for CTI Connections This section provides important general information on StrataLink and how it operates. For specific instructions on using StrataLink with a given software application, see the Application Notes for that software. Many Windows-based Computer Telephony software products either do not have a TAPI compliant version of their product, or need the additional capabilities of a “middleware” software to use their software with the Strata DK. StrataLink is a “middleware” application that provides the multiple line and translation functions for non-TAPI software applications. StrataLink provides the flexibility to interface multiple applications and to be able to define the actions desired for each button on the connected phone. StrataLink works with Toshiba’s TAPI Service Provider (TSPI) v2.26 or higher. Both the TAPI Service Provider and the StrataLink application are included on the TAPI installation disks. Either TSPI, StrataLink, or both can be installed. The installation program selects the appropriate TAPI Service Provider for the PC’s operating system. StrataLink Operation StrataLink communicates with software applications using Microsoft Windows Open System Architecture capabilities for Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). The specific messages are defined as Actions in StrataLink. StrataLink contains a number of Actions for popular applications. The user can select from this list or define new Actions for an application. StrataLink also accepts DDE Execute commands. These commands enable dialing calls, answering calls, holding calls, blind transfer of calls, and hanging up. Many of these commands can be directed to specific telephone buttons or the TSPI can choose the button. When using this interface for dialing, StrataLink also provides for button preferences to be used for intercom, local, or long distance calls. It can include prefix digits prior to dialing the number and automatically insert a “1,” if required for long distance calling. Incoming calls are based upon events from the TAPI Service Provider. These events (Call Ringing, Call Connected, Call Hold, Call Cleared) are used in the Triggering Rules that define what Actions are needed and when. Filters can be used to qualify when an action should be taken. Figure 15-1 shows how StrataLink is used with Windows applications to provide telephone services with your desktop PC. Microsoft Windows PC DDE Link Strata DKT RS-232 Link RPCI to COM Port TAPI Service Provider TAPI DLL (Windows) StrataLink 2047 Figure 15-1 15-6 CT Software Application DDE Link Computer Telephony Connection Using Toshiba’s StrataLink Strata DK I&M 5/00 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections StrataLink has three basic functions. It: ♦ Accepts events from the telephone, applies filtering rules and conditions, and causes actions to take place in the application ♦ Provides for outbound calling and call control from the application ♦ Provides tools for testing the interface and debugging or monitoring the call events Incoming Call Events Using Windows TAPI, StrataLink accepts the Strata DK commands and provides a selection of Actions based upon call events (Triggers). Each Trigger can have one or more conditions applied to control how, when, or if the Action should be performed. Each Action has a set of parameters that can customize the application for the user. A list of Trigger events can be created for the desired Action. Provides Outbound Calling and Call Control The Computer Telephony Software creates events for controlling the telephone. The events are controlled using DDE exchanges originating from the application and received by StrataLink. In some programs, the application software must be configured for this operation. StrataLink provides several important testing and debugging functions. These tools enable the installer to verify whether the link is functional. The installer can also use the TAPI link to view the details of the information being passed. These tools reduce the guesswork in the troubleshooting and operation verification. Starting StrataLink Computer Telephony Integration Tests, Debugs, and Monitors The Main Screen for StrataLink is shown in Figure 15-2. This screen provides access to the main menu, driver setup, the ability to enable/disable the TAPI link, and a testing interface with the telephone. Most Setup items are located under Setup item from the Main Menu. 3544 Figure 15-2 Strata DK I&M 5/00 StrataLink Main Screen 15-7 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections ➤ To install and set up StrataLink 1. Load the software by inserting Disk 1 in the floppy disk drive, and from Windows, selecting Run…, typing A:\Setup.exe and pressing Enter. 2. Follow the instructions for installation. 3. Start StrataLink, enable TAPI and wait for the green light that indicates a communication link with the TAPI Service Provider was successful. 4. Press Driver Setup to configure the driver if not previously done as part of the installation. 5. The Driver Setup selects the COM port, system type, and key definitions for the connected phone. Be sure to assign meaningful labels for the keys on the phone as these are used for creating the Triggering Rules. 6. Test the link with the phone using the Test section. Select the button to place a call, enter a number to dial and press Dial. 7. Once the link has been established with the phone, go to Setup to establish the Preferences, add or edit any new Actions. Note Actions can be tested using the Add/Edit Action and Show Test Params button. 8. Create Trigger Rules using the events expected from the phone and the desired Action. 9. Make several test calls to verify all the pieces are working and the installation is complete. Preferences Most application programs when attempting to dial using a DDE command are not able to specify the line appearance for the call. A line appearance must be specified and can be different for the different types of calls: ♦ Intercom Calls – dialing numbers with less than five digits. ♦ Local Calls – calls that match the local area code specified or calls with only seven digits. ♦ Long Distance Calls – any call with 10 or more digits (also indicate if a “1” needs to be added when missing). When an Intercom or [PDN] button is used to initiate calls, a prefix code is required to select an outside line. Local and Long Distance calls have provisions for prefix digits to be dialed prior to the number received from the software application. Applications using DDE messages generally will dial the area code of the telephone number even if it is a local call. By assigning a Local Area Code, StrataLink detects these calls, strips off the Area Code of the telephone number, and dials using the “Local” appearance. For example, if your Local Area Code is “714” and the application attempts to dial “714-5151234,” the program converts the number to “515-1234” before dialing. It may be convenient to record a person’s extension number as part of the telephone number. When dialed the 10 digit number is sent along with the extension number. As long as the number is stored using any letter, such as “x,” all digits following are not dialed, e.g. “714-515-1234 x205” is dialed as “515-1234”. Some databases may not include a “1” as part of the dialed number. StrataLink can optionally insert this missing digit by using the option “Add 1+ if Missing”. For example, if the application attempts to dial a long distance call like “612-555-1234” (and your Local Area Code is “714”), this option converts the number to “1-612-555-1234” before dialing. 15-8 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Incoming calls with Caller ID need to have the telephone number in a specific format for the lookup function to work. Caller ID and ANI numbers are received from the telephone network as 10 digits. Many databases store the numbers in a more readable format using punctuation formats by inserting hyphens, parenthesis, and spaces. StrataLink provides a method for defining the format to present this number to the software application. Any character other than “x” is included as part of the number, where “x” will be replaced with the number received as part of Caller ID. For example, if the international number plan is needed for the number, then a code for &H of “1+(xxx) xxx-xxxx” is entered. When a number “6125551234” is received, it will be presented as “1+(612) 555-1234”. The Preferences dialog box is shown in Figure 15-3. Computer Telephony Integration 3542 Figure 15-3 Preferences Dialog Box DDE Commands StrataLink accepts a number of DDE commands for controlling calls. StrataLink, wherever necessary, offers more than one format for each command. The commands supported include Dial, Answer, Hangup, Transfer, and Hold/Unhold. Table 15-2 DDE Commands Dial a telephone number on the specified line appearance. If the line appearance is not specified, the lowest button appearance (Intercom, Local, or Long Distance) is used. Dial [Dial, “Phone Number”, <appearance>] ...or [DialNumber (“Button Name”, “Outside Phone Number”)] Answer a Ringing Call on the specified line appearance. If the line appearance is not specified, the lowest appearance is used. Answer [Answer, <appearance>] ...or [AnswerCall ( )] Hangup on a active call. Hangup [Hangup] ...or [DropCall ( )] Hold Strata DK I&M 5/00 To hold the active call. [Hold] 15-9 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Table 15-2 DDE Commands (continued) Retrieving a call from Hold. If the “appearance” isn’t specified, the lowest button number with a holding line is answered. Unhold [UnHold, <appearance>] Blind transfer a call to the designated number Transfer [Xfr, "Ext Number"] …or Transfer, "Ext Number"] Terminates the OA Client program. Quit [Quit] <appearance> This is a numerical value for the buttons on the attached phone. Buttons begin on the lower left and count upward beginning with zero. Telephone System Events Trigger Rules and Conditions The Trigger Rules are established by the installer or user so that specific Actions can be performed when an event occurs. The Triggering event can be any number of things (e.g., Call Ringing, Call Connected, Call Holding, or Call Cleared). See Figure 15-4. 2657 Figure 15-4 Trigger Rules The existing Trigger Rules can be displayed, edited, deleted or new rules can be added. Multiple rules can be created and active at the same time. Each rule uses the names assigned in the TAPI Service Provider to determine their application to a given event. Buttons with the same name use the same rule written for that name. For example, creating a Triggering Rule for “Call Ringing” on a [PDN] with multiple appearances can be written to apply only to the PDN name, such as “3351.” Specific [PDNs] can be labeled for “Call Ringing,” while other appearances may require a screen pop whenever a call is connected. These other appearances could have the rule “Call Connected” using <any> button. This prevents screen pops for calls which are directly ringing a particular telephone button, while providing screen pops when a call is answered on another button on the phone. 15-10 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Add/Change a Trigger Rule When adding or changing a rule, Filters and Conditions fields display on the Add/Change Trigger Rule screen (see Figure 15-5): 3535 Add/Change Trigger Rule Filters When the triggering event occurs, it may need to pass specific filters or conditions before the Action is performed. The Filters (see Figure 15-5) are: ♦ Caller ID – required/not required. If there is no Caller ID associated with a call, you may not want to have an Action performed. The most common example is “Screen Pop” where you may select “any Number” to not perform the action until a Caller ID number has been received. To trigger an event anytime a call rings, regardless of whether Caller ID is present, you need select “none Required.” ♦ Trigger Delay – a short delay, expressed in tenths of a second, that will occur prior to the action. The delay is needed to allow the Caller ID or other information to be received prior to performing the action. ♦ Appearance – the Trigger can be used on any line or a specific line. If the same Trigger applies to some lines but not to others, the rule must be entered for each line to which the rule applies. Buttons having the same name need only one rule, e.g., two buttons labeled 205 would have the same action whenever either ring when a Trigger Rule for Call Ringing is created for appearance 205. Computer Telephony Integration Figure 15-5 Conditions Conditions (i.e., Phone State, shown in Figure 15-5) include performing the action “if not talking” or “if trunk number is available.” You may not want to have an Action performed while you are talking on a call. Again, a common example is to screen pop only “If Not Talking”. This prevents an Action from occurring until you are finished with the call or placed it on hold. Strata DK I&M 5/00 15-11 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Actions and Parameters Actions are set up by the installer to perform a specific function (e.g., Screen Pop Goldmine, Pop Telemagic, or Beep My Pager). These Actions can then be used as part of a Trigger Rule and performed when a specific event occurs. The existing Actions can be displayed (Figure 15-6), edited, deleted or new Actions added. 3533 Figure 15-6 Add/Change Actions Important! Deleting or adding Actions without instructions from Toshiba or knowledge of your program’s DDE commands is not recommended. Toshiba supports editing actions that are based on Application Notes. Add/Edit Action When adding or editing an Action, the following fields are displayed (see Figure 15-7 and the following text): 3543 Figure 15-7 15-12 Add/Edit Actions Strata DK I&M 5/00 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Important! Changes to these items without specific instructions in the program’s Application Notes is not supported by Toshiba. Action Name – Every event Action has a “Name” that you should set to describe the result the action, such as “Beep My Pager.” This name is used in the Trigger Rules. Type – Select the Action to be performed from the pull-down menu. Each Action has one or more parameters that must be provided by the user/installer. These parameters often contain “tokens” that enable the inclusion of real-time information (e.g., Caller Phone Number, Date, Time, etc.). The choices are as follows: ♦ ♦ App Name – Used to set the DDE name of the application to receive the DDE event. ♦ App Topic – Used to set the DDE “Topic” for the application to receive the DDE event. ♦ DDE Execute String – This is the command executed by the application receiving this DDE event. Typically this command includes token(s) so that real-time information is included in the command string. Show/Hide Test Params Button – When you set up an Action, it is always a good idea to make sure the Action works correctly. The Show Test Params button exposes a set of parameters (e.g., Calling Phone Number and Calling Name) that can be changed for verifying the action defined. ➤ To execute the command, press the Do Test button. The results of the action are displayed on the lower part of the window. Clicking on the open part of the window clears the test results and the process repeated. Computer Telephony Integration ♦ DDE Execute – Sends a specific DDE command to the program you specify. This Action is very flexible and can be used to communicate with many different types of programs for a variety of purposes (e.g., Screen Pop). DDE Execute String parameters include: Some parameters contain token(s) that enable the inclusion of real-time information (like the Caller Phone Number, Date, Time, etc.). The Tokens are described in Table 15-3. Table 15-3 Tokens Token Note Strata DK I&M Function &P Caller Phone Number: Unformatted &H Caller Phone Number: Formatted 714-555-12341 &I Caller Phone Number: Formatted (714)555-12341 &N Caller Name &L Elapsed Time of Call (Seconds) &C TAPI Call ID &R Trunk (CO Line) Number &E Called Phone Number (DNIS) &F Called Name (DNIS Tag) &A Phone Button Number &B Phone Button Name &D Date: MM:DD:YY &T Time of Day: HH:MM The format is defined using the Preferences dialog box. 5/00 15-13 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections TeleMagic Link The TeleMagic program (from Telemagic, Inc.) communicates with StrataLink via a special link called TeleMagic. The TeleMagic Link appears automatically each time StrataLink is accessed and provides a means to set up and monitor communication between the two programs. Important! For this link to operate, the TeleMagic program must be loaded and operational. If you select Auto Activate Link (see Figure 15-8), StrataLink automatically attempts to establish the TeleMagic link periodically (every 30 seconds or so) until the connection is made. Once the link is established, the Link Active light changes from Red to Green, dialing and Screen-Pop can function. For Screen-Pop to work, the appropriate Trigger Rules must be set up. 3549 Figure 15-8 Telemagic Link Pop TeleMagic This instruction sends a “Pop” or “LookUp” command to TeleMagic with the configuration you specify. This is used to Screen-Pop the TeleMagic contact manager when a call rings in. Pop TeleMagic parameters are: ♦ Index Level – Tells TeleMagic the level on which to perform the search (e.g., 1, 2, 3, etc.). Leaving this parameter blank causes the search to occur on the level in present use. ♦ Index Name – Selects the TeleMagic index to be used for the search. For Screen Pop this is typically “TelePhone #”, but since the Indexes within TeleMagic are programmable, this could be set to any appropriate index. The TeleMagic Link must be operational before you can make this selection. ♦ Search String – This should be set to whatever string should be searched for using the above two parameters. For Screen Pop, this is typically the Calling Phone number which would be the token &P. Testing TSPI Link The TAPI dialog box provides a method for verifying the TAPI Driver is setup and operational. To check the driver, select an appearance (e.g., Intercom) and click on each of the Pickup, Dial, and Hangup keys individually. To complete the test, you should repeat this procedure for each line appearance. To access the setup screen for the Toshiba TAPI Service Provider, click on the Driver Setup button. The Configure Keys section of the screen should be programmed properly as they will be 15-14 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections interrogated and used as the Appearances by StrataLink. Whenever you make configuration changes to the TAPI Service Provider, it is recommended that you exit and restart StrataLink. The Display section on the screen is the display found on the phone. This information is not normally shown and can be activated by pressing Alt+O (See Figure 15-9). Figure 15-9 StrataLink Main Screen Show Events Show Events opens a Debug Events screen which shows real-time events as they occur (see Figure 15-10). The Display option enables you to choose which event you will monitor. 3541 ♦ Computer Telephony Integration 3544 Figure 15-10 Debug Events Screen Telephone System Events Show Calls displays the Active Call Queue window (see Figure 15-11), which can be kept open while other activities and functions are performed. 3540 ♦ Figure 15-11 Active Call Screen Strata DK I&M 5/00 15-15 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Application Bulletin Contents CTI Application Bulletin Contents The list below gives you the current application bulletins available for understanding, installation and operation of third-party software applications with your Toshiba telephone system. As you get future updates and new bulletins, simply replace older ones with the updates and/or add the additional bulletins. Updates and additions that may affect the list below will also include an update to this Contents page. ♦ AB50-0013 September 15, 1997 Update for Using Goldmine 95 with StrataLink (Replaces AB50-0008, April 1, 1997) ♦ AB50-0012 September 15,1997 ♦ AB50-0011 September 15, 1997 Using ACT! 3.0 with StrataLink ♦ AB50-0010 September 15, 1997 Using ACT! 2.0 with StrataLink ♦ AB50-0009 April 1, 1997 Using TeleMagic Enterprise V2.2 with StrataLink ♦ AB50-0008 April 1, 1997 Using Goldmine 95 with StrataLink (use AB50-0013) ♦ AB50-0007 April 1, 1997 Using DayTimer Organizer V2.0 with StrataLink ♦ AB50-0006 April 1, 1997 Using Commence V2.0 with StrataLink ♦ AB50-0005 April 1, 1997 Golden Gate Pager Client/Server user StrataLink ♦ AB50-0004 April 1, 1997 This bulletin is obsolete. Refer to the new section “Using StrataLink for CTI Connections” on Page 15-6. ♦ AB50-0003 April 1, 1997 TSPI Description V2.15 ♦ AB50-0002 January 10, 1997 Installing ACT! Trial Size Demo Software ♦ AB50-0001 January 10, 1997 Using ACT! Phone Link with Strata DK ♦ Understanding Computer Telephony in a Business Phone System, April 1, 1997 Strata DK I&M Computer Telephony Integration Note TSPI Description V2.26 All of the above application bulletins have been sent to you in previous mailings. Place them after this page. If you do not have these bulletins, they can be found on the Strata DK Library CD-ROM. 5/00 15-16 ISDN Interfaces 16 This chapter covers information on the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate Interfaces (BRI). PRI Overview ♦ PRI is available on DK40i, DK424 and DK424i with Release 4.3 software and above. For PRI services, the Strata DK uses an RPTU PCB to connect to a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) PRI line using a UL listed (or CSA certified in Canada) Channel Service Unit (CSU) in most locations in the U.S. Each RPTU provides 23B + D channels. The B-channels support CO speech and data connections on the PSTN side only. The RPTU PCB is shown in Figure 16-2 on Page 16-9. ♦ BRI S/T is available for DK40i and all DK424 or DK424i Release 4.1 and above processors including RCTUA4, but not for any other DK systems. For BRI S/T services, the DK424 or DK424i uses an RBSU PCB; the DK40i uses TBSU and RBSU. Both the RBSU and TBSU provide two BRI S/T circuits to connect to the PSTN BRI line using an external UL listed NT1; or, on the station-side, connect to: ♦ S-type ISDN telephones and Terminal Equipment (TE-1-S) ♦ S-type Terminal Adapters (TA-S) with non-ISDN devices ISDN Interfaces BRI S/T Overview Each TE-1-S and TA1-S device can support voice and/or RS-232 switched-circuit data as shown in Figure 16-1. The station-side BRI S/T circuits are point-to-multipoint. A subassembly (RBSS) can be attached to the RBSU for two additional BRIs for S-type station-side connections only. The RBSU PCB and the RBSS subassembly are shown in Figures 16-8 and 16-9 on Page 16-17. The combination of RBSU and RBSS uses only one slot to provide up to four BRI S/T circuits. Note Strata DK I&M In DK424 or DK424i, each installed RBSU or RBSS circuit provides a 2B + D connection and uses a system capacity of two station ports and two CO lines regardless of the circuit application, even if the circuit is not actually connected. In the DK40i, each TBSU, RBSU, or RBSS circuit uses two CO lines (no station ports) when configured for the CO side and two station ports (no CO lines) when configured for the station side. 5/00 16-1 ISDN Interfaces BRI U Overview BRI U Overview BRI U is available on all Release 4.3 processors for the DK40i, DK424 (including RCTUA4) and the DK424i. For BRI U services, the Strata DK40i, DK424, DK424i use the RBUU PCB. The DK40i can also use the TBUU PCB. The RBUU provides two BRI U circuits that connect directly to PSTN BRI lines; or, on the station side, connect to: ♦ U-type ISDN telephones and Terminal Equipment (TE-1-U) ♦ U-type Terminal Adapters (TA-U) with non-ISDN devices Each TE-1-U and TA-U device can support voice and/or RS-232 switched-circuit data depending on the device (see Figure 16-1). The station-side BRI U circuits are point-to-point. A subassembly (RBUS) can be attached to the RBUU for two additional BRIs for PSTN and/ or U-type station connections. The RBUU PCB and the RBUS subassemblies are shown in Figures 16-23 and Figure 16-24 on Page 16-31. The combination of RBUU and RBUS uses only one slot to provide up to four U-type BRI circuits. Notes ● ● 16-2 In DK424 or DK424i, each installed RBUU or RBUS circuit provides a 2B + D connection and uses a system capacity of two station ports and two CO lines regardless of the circuit application, even if the circuit is not actually connected. In the DK40i, each TBUU, RBUU, or RBUS circuit uses two CO lines (no station ports) when configured for the CO side and two station ports (no CO lines) when configured for the station side. Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces BRI U Overview Strata DK ISDN Reference Model A block diagram of the DK ISDN PCBs and reference points is provided in Figure 16-1. Demarcation Point DK40i, DK424, DK424i (NT2) R SLT U RSTU DKT PDKU EKT PEKU RJ48C 8-wire BRI Loop Termination NT1 RJ48C 8-wire BRI Loop Termination CSU (NT1) RJ48C 8-wire PRI Office Channel Unit RBUU/RBSU TBUU (NT-1) T S TE-1-S (Voice or Data) R SLT RBSU/RBSU TBUS (NT) (P-MP) TA-S PC RBSU TBUS (TE) RPTU (TE) Dealersupplied CSU and NT1 U TE-1-U R TA-U PC R, T, S, and U are ISDN standard reference points 4695 TE-1 = Terminal Equipment, Type 1 TA = Terminal Adapter P-P = Point-to-Point P-MP = Point-to Multipoint (passive bus) Customer Premises Equipment Figure 16-1 Office Channel Unit, or OCR, is the CO Channel Service Unit RBUU/RBUS TBUU (LT) (P-P) (Voice or Data) SLT Telcosupplied Jacks ISDN SWITCH Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) ISDN Reference Model System Capacity of ISDN Circuits Table 16-1 Maximum Number of RPTU PCBs, Lines Max. PCBs Max. B Channels (Lines) DK40i 1 12 RCTU 1 16 RCTUBA3/BB4 2 47 RCTUC3/D4 6 141 RCTUE3/F4 8 188 B1CAU 2 32 B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU 6 120 B5CAU/BU 8 188 Processor Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces The capacities of ISDN lines and stations for all DK systems are shown in Table 16-1. 16-3 ISDN Interfaces BRI U Overview DK424 ISDN BRI Capacities For DK424 BRI Configuration information, refer to the following: ♦ RCTUA – Table 4-13 on Page 4-10 ♦ RCTUBA/BB – Table 4-14 on Page 4-10 ♦ RCTUC/D –Table 4-15 on Page 4-11 ♦ RCTUE/F –Table 4-16 on Page 4-11 DK424i ISDN BRI Capacities For DK424i BRI Configuration information, refer to the following: 16-4 ♦ B1CU – Table 6-7 on Page 6-7 ♦ B2CAU/BU – Table 6-8 on Page 6-8 ♦ B3CAU/BU – Table 6-9 on Page 6-8 ♦ B5CAU/BU – Table 6-10 on Page 6-9 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit RPTU Interface Unit System: DK40i, DK424 or DK424i Release 4.3 Circuits per PCB: 24 channels Interfaces with: ISDN PRI Older Version(s): none The DK40i, DK424 or DK424i Release 4.3 systems supports the RPTU according to the common control units resident in the system. The RPTU requires installation of a customer-provided CSU in most locations of the U.S. Refer to “CSU Requirements” on Page 16-5 for CSU installation. Testing procedures (local and remote loop back) are in “RPTU Loop-back Test” on Page 16-38. The RPTU’s LEDs indicate a continuous status of its operation. They are shown in Figure 16-3. Table 16-7 on Page 16-10 lists the functions for each LED. Switches, jumpers, and interface connectors are described in Figure 16-1. RPTU Overview The RPTU is a DS-1 divided into 24 TDM channels using standard T1 electrical signal format. The RPTU’s D-channel is typically the 24th channel and can control the signaling of 23 of its own B-channels and 24 B-channels of another designated RPTU. Each RPTU can also use its own D-channel for control. The DK424 or DK424i, RCTUA provides 8 or 16 channels and DK40i provides 8 or 12 channels. The 24th channel is still available for D-channel control for both systems. Note The Embedded Operations Channel (EOC) which carries alarm notifications, statistics, and error indications is not available with DK Release 4.0 software. ISDN Interfaces The RPTU’s in-service bit rate is 1.544 mbps (± 4.6 ppm), but during a maintenance session, the rate may vary ± 32 ppm. The RPTU provides Binary 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS) and ESF with Framing Pattern Sequence (FPS) and Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) error checking in the framing bits. Extracting the Stratum-1 clock from the ISDN PRI, BRI, or T1 provider is the most common method used to synchronize the RPTU PCB and the DK time switch to the public telephone network. One RPTU, RBSU, RBUU, or RDTU T1 must extract the clock from the ISDN or T1 provider. The selected unit is designated as the “Primary” timing source in system Program *41-1. In remote cabinet applications, the Primary clock source PCB must be installed in the Base Cabinet (main location). For more information, refer to “Timing and Synchronization” on Page 16-39. A dealer-supplied CSU must be installed between the ISDN PRI network line and the RPTU PCB as shown in Figure 16-1. Some telephone companies supply the CSU and call it the Network Interface Unit (NIU). CSU Requirements In the U.S., the CSU must be UL listed and comply with Part 68 of the FCC rules. It must also comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. In Canada, the CSU must be CSA certified. Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-5 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit The CSU is transparent to data, clock, and framing. It acts as a repeater, not a controller, for timing. The CSU also acts as a signal regenerator and must be able to perform loop-back tests and maintenance to both the network and DK RPTU. The CSU is the same type as used for T1 circuits although it performs the function as NT1 for PRI ISDN in the ISDN reference model as shown in Figure 16-1. DK40i Slot Assignments The RPTU is allowed in the slots shown in Table 16-2. Table 16-2 DK40i Slot Assignments Note RPTU Allowed in Slot Leave Slot Vacant 15 (see Note) 17 18 Slots 16, 17, and 18 can be used for other PCBs. DK424 Slot Assignments Up to eight RPTU PCBs can be installed in a DK424 or DK424i system providing up to 188 PRI lines (B-channels). If RPTU (PRI) and RDTU (T1) PCBs are installed in the same DK424 or DK424i, the maximum combined PCBs cannot exceed the numbers provided in Table 16-1. The PCBs must be placed in designated slots in each of the DK424 or DK424i cabinets per Tables 16-2~16-4. The next highest slot adjacent to the RPTU slot must be vacant. Program 03 defines which cabinet slots contain RPTU PCBs. The maximum number of cards and lines is listed in Table 16-3. Table 16-3 DK280 or DK424 Base Cabinet with BA3/BB4, C3/D4 with MBJU or DK280 Base with RCTUE3/F4 Cabinet RPTU1/Vacant Slots2 No. Type 1 DK280 or DK424 (base) 131/142 151/162 DK280 211/222 231/242 251/262 DK424 211/222 231/242 251/262 DK280 311/322 DK424 311/322 DK280 411/422 DK424 411/422 DK280 511/522 DK424 511/522 DK280 611/622 DK424 611/622 2 3 4 5 6 1. Allowed RPTU slots. 2. Slots must be vacant if using more than 16 channels. 16-6 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit Table 16-4 DK424 Base Cabinet with RCTUE3/F4 with MBJU Removed Cabinet RPTU1/Vacant Slots2 No. Type 1 DK424 (base) 131/142 151/162 DK280 211/222 231/242 DK424 211/222 231/242 DK280 311/322 DK424 311/322 DK280 411/422 DK424 411/422 DK280 511/522 DK424 511/522 DK280 611/622 DK424 611/622 2 3 4 5 6 7 251/262 371/382 471/482 571/582 671/682 DK280 Does not have a seventh cabinet. DK424 None 1. Allowed RPTU slots. 2. Slots must be vacant if using more than 16 channels. DK424i Slot Assignments Table 16-5 RPTU PCB Cabinet Slot Configuration Slots Needed 1~16 1 17~23 2 24~39 3 40~46 4 47~62 5 63~69 6 1~16 1 17~23 2 24~39 3 40~46 4 47~62 5 63~69 6 RPTU PCBs Neededs1 RPTU cabinet slot placement1 Base Cabinet 1 2 3 S103-RPTU S104-vacant2 S105-RPTU ISDN Interfaces PRI Lines Needed S106-vacant2 S107-RPTU S108-vacant2 Second through fifth cabinets 1 2 3 S_01-RPTU S_02-vacant2 S_03-RPTU S_04-vacant2 S_05-RPTU S_06-vacant2 1. RPTU PCBs do not have to be installed in the order shown in this table. Example: If only one RPTU is needed, it can be installed in any RPTU slot shown in the table so long as the slot is supported by the installed processor. 2. The slot occupied by RPTU supports 1-16 channels; the slot adjacent to RPTU must be vacant if channels 17 through 23 are needed. Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-7 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Installation RPTU Installation Before installing a RPTU PCB into a DK system, a number of system programs should be run. This enables the RPTU to function immediately upon insertion. It is recommended that you run these programs in the order listed in the DK Programming Manual (refer to the ISDN section) before beginning installation. Refer to Worksheet 6 in the Strata DK I&M Manual – Chapter 6. Also, see Figure 16-2 and Table 16-6. ➤ To install an RPTU PCB 1. Set the jumper wire plugs JP1 and JP2 (LB) to the Off position. 2. Turn the DK system power Off. 3. Insert the RPTU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot (see “Slot Assignments” on “DK424 Slot Assignments” on Page 16-6) and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors. 4. After installing the RPTU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. Note 16-8 For cabling information and requirements, refer to “Cabling” on Page 16-11. Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Installation Table 16-6 RPTU Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors Switches/Jumpers/Connector Description SW1 (Line length adjustment switch) Matches the RPTU impedance to the impedance of the line (length between the CSU and the RPTU). Refer to Table 16-8 on Page 16-11. SW2 (Reset switch)1 Resets or initializes the RPTU firmware. Press this switch to correct an out-of-service condition, or just prior to connecting to the Network PRI. JP1 & JP2 (Loop-back jumpers) Makes loop-back tests of the cabling between the ISDN Network switch, CSU, and RPTU. J1 8-pin Modular Connector (RJ45) Connects the RPTU to the CSU/network PRI ISDN line. J2 6-pin Modular Connector (RJ11) Connects the RPTU to a terminal or PC to monitor D-channel data. 1. If this switch on the Primary Clock source RPTU is pressed (Program *42-1), the clock source will automatically revert to the Secondary Clock source PCB (Program *42-2). RESET SW2 J2 RS-232C CD1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF MCC J1 ISDN (PRI) JP1 JP2 RPTU1A ISDN Interfaces SW1 Backplane Connector RPTU1 LEDs RPTU1A (front) CD2 FSYC AIS RAB LOS RST BSU TS V .1 2543 JP1 & JP2 Figure 16-2 RPTU PCB Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-9 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Installation Reset Switch (resets the software) Not Used RS-232C Connector for Call-Data Monitor (RJ-12) FSYC AIS RAB LEDs LOS RST BSY TS RJ-45 8-pin (shielded) Modular Connector (to CSU) 2747 Figure 16-3 Table 16-7 RPTU LEDs and Connectors LED Functions LED FSYC Frame Synchronization On: Frame alignment is lost. Off: Frame alignment is working properly. AIS Alarm Indication Signal On: Receiving an alarm from the CO. Off: Circuit is working properly. RAB Remote Alarm On: Receiving a remote alarm from the CO. Off: Circuit is working properly. LOS Loss of Signal On: IC signal cannot be detected. Off: Circuit is working properly. RST Reset On: Off: CPU is resetting the software. Circuit is working properly. BSY Busy On: Off: One or more B-channels are busy. All B-channels are idle. TS 16-10 Functions Timing Signal On: Circuit is secondary timing source. Off: Circuit is not used for system timing. Flashing:Circuit is primary timing source. Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Installation Cabling To meet Part 15 of FCC Rules, ISDN PRI equipment must be connected using CAT5, Shielded Twisted-Pair (STP) cabling between the CSU and the RPTU. CAT5 STP protects against cross talk, Radio Frequency Interference (RFI), and/or Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI). STP protects ISDN signal data while being transmitted through the cable and keeps the cable itself from emitting EMI and RFI. To avoid ground loops, connect only the RPTU end of the shielded cable to ground. The DK grounds the CAT5 cable shield between the DK and CSU at the RPTU RJ45 jack. You do not have to connect the CSU ground drain. The CSU ground should not be connected to the cable shield. Important! Shield continuity must be maintained from the RPTU to the CSU, particularly if using extension connecting cables. Keep the cable as short as possible between the CSU and the PRI Demarcation jack, because there is no shield between the CSU and the Demarcation jack. Toshiba provides a cable kit (Part No. RPRI-CBL-KIT), that contains all that you need to connect the network ISDN jack to the network side of most CSUs and the equipment side of the CSU to the RPTU PCB. Depending on the manufacturer, the CSU may use DB15 or modular jacks. If the CSU is equipped with the modular jacks, the DB15/modular adapters are not used. If this is the case, make sure the CSU modular jacks are not shielded jacks. Refer to Figure 16-3 for more information. A detailed pinout diagram for the RJ45 jacks (USOC RJ48C or RJ48X) and the modular cords/ adaptors is shown in Figure 16-2 on Page 16-9. Cable Length Table 16-8 SW1 Settings SW1 Short (0 - 150 ft.) Medium (150 - 450 ft.) Long (450 - 655 ft.) 1 On Off Off 2 Off On Off 3 Off Off On 4 Off On Off 5 Off Off On 6 Off On Off 7 Off Off On 8 Not Used Not Used Not Used ISDN Interfaces The distance between the RPTU and CSU or RPTU and other Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) may vary (0~655 ft.). The RPTU must be equalized and its impedance must match the impedance of the connecting cable. Set SW1 on the RPTU for the proper cable length as shown in Table 16-8. Refer to Figure 16-2 for switch locations. Notes ♦ The modular pins are numbered left to right when looking into the jack cavity with the locking clip down. ♦ Shield continuity must be maintained between the RPTU and the CSU, particularly on extension cords. Since there is no shield continuity across the CSU and network jack, the cable should be kept as short as possible. Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-11 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Installation Cable Installation The RPTU PCB is shipped with a Toshiba RPRI cable kit for connection of the RPTU to a CSU. Install the kit as shown in Figure 16-3. CSU ISDN PRI Network Jack RPTU DB15 (female) RJ45 DB15 (male) D A E B C 2752 Item Description A1 Fifteen feet of CAT5 unshielded cable B One DB15 modular adapter (CSU to network jack) C One DB15 modular adapter (CSU to RPTU) D1 Thirty feet of CAT5 shielded cable E One Ferrite core 1. Cable A and D are straight-pinned data cables, not cross-pinned telephony cables. CSU Local Power Adapter 2753 Network Interface Jack RJ48-C or RJ48-X (8-pin Modular) 1-T1 2-R1 34-R 5-T 67-Nu 8-Nu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 11 9 1 Toshiba-supplied 8-wire modular cord, straight-through pinning (15 ft. CAT5, unshielded) Toshiba-supplied 8-pin modular cord to DB15 female adapter 3-T1 11-R1 39-R 1-T C S U CSU DB15 Male 3-T1 11-R1 39-R 1-T CSU DB15 Female Dealer-supplied CSU 3 11 9 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1-T1 2-R1 34-R 5-T 67-Nu 8-Nu RPTU 8-pin Modular Jack Toshiba-supplied Ferrite core Toshiba-supplied 8-wire modular cord, straight-through pinning (30 ft. CAT5, shielded) Toshiba-supplied 8-pin modular to DB15 male adapter Network Jack/RPTU Modular Jack Pin Function 1 Tip – Receives from the network (NT – TE) 2 Ring – Receives from the network (NT – TE) 3 Not Used 4 Ring – Transmits to the network (TE – NT) 5 Tip – Transmits to the network (TE – NT) 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 Not Used Figure 16-4 16-12 Detailed Pinouts for ISDN PRI Cabling Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units Ferrite Core Install the Ferrite core provided with the RPRI cable kit as shown in Figure 16-5. This core is needed to comply with FCC requirements. RPTU Side View ISDN PRI Jack CAT5 Shielded Cable Tie Wrap Ferrite Core FER-CORE-ISDN 2754 Note: The Ferrite core must be as close as possible to the RPTU. One Turn Ferrite Core Installation ISDN Interfaces Figure 16-5 RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units System: DK424 or DK424i and DK40i, Release 4.1 and above Circuits per PCB: 2 circuits (2B + D each circuit) Interfaces with: ISDN BRI S/T when connected to the Public Network or a BRI S-type, TE-1, or TA devices when connecting to ISDN station equipment Older Version(s): none The Strata DK424 or DK424i and DK40i Release 4.1 system supports the RBSU/RBSS interface unit according to the common control units resident in the system shown in Table 16-1. The DK40i only supports the TBSU. RBSU/RBSS switches, jumpers, and connectors are shown in Figures 16-8 and 16-9 on Page 16-17 and described in Table 16-9. TBSU switches, jumpers, and connectors are shown in Figure 16-33 on Page 16-43 and described in Table 16-11 on Page 16-21. Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-13 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units LEDs on the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS show a continuous status of BRI operation. Refer to Table 16-10 on Page 16-19 for a list of each LED’s status. Overview The TBSU, RBSU and RBSS PCBs provide the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) circuits for DK40i and DK424 or DK424i, Release 4.1. The TBSU can only be installed in the DK40i Base KSU. The RBSU is the main plug-in PCB that plugs into the DK424 or DK424i cabinet slots and the DK40i Expansion KSU slots. The RBSS is an optional PCB that plugs onto the RBSU. Each PCB provides two ISDN BRI circuits. Each BRI circuit provides 2 B-channels + 1D channel for voice/data/video applications. An REBU PCB is a piggy-back PCB that plugs onto the RBSU and provides basic functions for RBSU/RBSS circuits so it must always be installed on the RBSU. The REBU is not required on the TBSU. The TBSU and RBSU circuits are four-wire S/T type circuits and connect to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) BRI lines using an Network Terminator unit (NT1); or, on the station side, they can connect to ISDN Terminal Equipment (TE) or Terminal Adapters (TA) as shown in Figure 16-6. TE devices include any ISDN device (telephone, fax, computer) that connects directly to S/T ISDN BRI circuits. TA devices match the protocol of non-ISDN devices (telephone, fax, computer) to the protocol of S/T ISDN BRI circuits. The TBSU and RBSU circuits can be configured two ways: ♦ As BRI – TE circuits which connect to Telephone Network BRI lines using a NT1. ♦ As BRI – NT circuits which connect to ISDN TEs or TAs. These devices must be S-type station devices. Important! The DK424 or DK424i and DK40i BRI circuits allocate line numbers and station ports differently. In DK424 or DK424i, each BRI circuit consumes two line numbers and two station port when configured as line-side or station side. In DK40i, each BRI line circuit consumes two line numbers and no station ports; each BRI station circuit consumes two station ports and no line numbers. The RBSU connection options (BRI line or ISDN TE-1/TA devices) are selected in DK40i and DK424 or DK424i customer database programming and option switches located on the TBSU and RBSU. The TBSU and RBSU circuits that connect to the ISDN network side requires a dealer-supplied NTI interface box to convert the two-wire, U-interface BRI line from the telephone network to the four-wire, T-interface of the RBSU circuit. The NT1 must be UL listed (U.S.) or CSA certified (Canada). The network BRI line connection is a point-to-point connection, which means that the network BRI line can only be connected to one RBSU or TBSU circuit via the NT1 (T-reference point). RBSS circuits connect directly to S-type TE-1 or TA ISDN devices only. They do not support BRITE telephone network BRI line connections. The TBSU, RBSU, and/or RBSS circuits that connect to the DK station side, (BRI-NT, Sreference point) allows direct connection of multiple ISDN (TE-1 or TA) devices. The S point of the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS supports the Toshiba DK passive bus, also known as point-tomultipoint connection. The terminal-side (S-point) of the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit can have parallel connections of up to two TE-1s or TAs maximum. 16-14 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units When multiple TE-1 and TA devices are installed on a single TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit, the devices must share, or contend for, that circuit’s two B-channels. That is to say, a maximum of two simultaneous voice and/or data calls are allowed between both devices connected to the same BRI circuit. The contention rule for the two BRI B-channels is first come, first serve. BRI-NT (4-wire) 3336 .. 1 . 2 TE-1 or TA TE-1 or TA BRI-TE (4-wire) BRI (2-wire) RX RX DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT1 PSTN RX/TX TX TX S T U S, T, and U are ISDN reference points. TE = S-type Terminal Equipment TA = S-type Terminal Adaptor Figure 16-6 TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Interfaces between the S/T Reference Points Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information The TBSU can only be installed in the DK40i Base KSU. The RBSU/RBSS can be installed in any DK40i Expansion Unit slot and any DK424 or DK424i slot except the programming telephone PDKU or PEKU slot. On DK424 or DK424i, each RBSU and/or RBSS contains two circuits and each circuit reduces the system capacity by two station ports and two CO lines (one port/line per B-channel). Therefore, if the RBSU PCB is installed, the station port and CO line count will increment by four ports and four lines at the RBSU cabinet slot. On DK40i, TBSU and each RBSU and/or RBSS contains two circuits. Each circuit reduces the system capacity by two station ports or two CO lines. If the BRI circuit is configured as NT, the circuit assumes two station ports. If the BRI circuit is configured as TE, the circuit assumes two CO lines. ISDN Interfaces If the RBSU/RBSS is installed in a DK424 or DK424i slot, the station port and CO line count will increment by eight station ports and eight lines at the RBSU/RBSS cabinet slot. RBSU and RBSS PCBs can be installed in any combination so long as the number of RBSU PCBs is the same or greater than the number of RBSS PCBs. See Tables 6-7~6-10, beginning on Page 6-7 for the maximum BRI circuits allowed. PS-1 Backup Power Option The RBSU provides an optional backup power supply, R40S, that will supply backup power to TE devices in the event of an AC power loss. This power backup option only applies to RBSU or RBSS circuits that are configured in the NT mode. See Figure 16-10 to install the R40S. Note The R40S is not available for the TBSU. Also the DK system must have battery backup to allow the R40S power backup function to operate. The R40S power supply is an ISDN, PS-1 type power unit which means it supplies power to TE devices on the RBSU/RBSS transmit and receive wire pairs as shown in Figure 16-7. This power arrangement is also known as phantom power. Each of the four circuits on RBSU/RBSS can be connected to share the R40S using option switches on the PCBs (see Table 16-9). Before using the R40S as a backup power source, make Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-15 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units sure the TE devices do not require more power than the R40S can supply and the TE is compatible with the ISDN PS-1 power arrangement. Figure 14-6 shows the power limits of the R40S. RJ45 Pin Nos. on RBSU or RBSS NT circuit TE TE Device Power sink RBSU Pin 3 RX + Pin 3 Pin 6 RX - Pin 6 Pin 4 TX + Pin 4 Pin 5 TX - Pin 5 RJ45 Pin Nos. on TE device R40S PS-1 Power Source 4774 R40S Power Limits: Voltage: 33.3VDC to 38.85VDC maximum Current: 100mA maximum (25mA maximum per each RBSU/RBSS circuit) Figure 16-7 16-16 Power Limits of the Backup Power Supply Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Installation Step 1: Run Related Programs ➤ Run all ISDN programs related to TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits prior to installation of the PCBs. This enables the circuits to operate immediately upon insertion. ISDN BRI programs are explained in the Strata DK Programming Manual under the ISDN tab. For the DK40i, make sure to run Program *60 to identify all station (NT) and CO (TE) BRI circuits for each RBSU/RBSS and TBSU installed. Program *60 causes station port and CO line shifting on PCBs installed in slots that follow the BRI PCBs. Important! Step 2: Set Option Switches/Jumpers ➤ Set all option switches and jumpers on the TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS PCBs before plugging the RBSS onto the RBSU or inserting the RBSU into the system. RBSU/RBSS switch/jumper information and locations are shown in Figures 16-8, 16-9 and Table 16-9. TBSU switch/ jumper information is shown in Figure 16-12 and Table 16-11. RBSU1A RBSS SW7 BSY TS LOS FS P4 BSY TS LOS FS SW2 SW5 SW9 SW8 SW6 SW6 J2 J7 P7 P2 J4 RBSS1A-CM V.1 RBSU1 BSY TS LOS FS BSY TS LOS FS SW3 J6 SW2 P6 SW5 SW4 J3 J5 SW1 P3 SW3 SW4 J1 P5 ISDN Interfaces J2 TB3 SW1 F 2788 J3 P9 P8 PFT contacts TB1 TB2 RBSU1A-CM V. 1 2789 Figure 16-8 Strata DK I&M RBSU PCB 5/00 Figure 16-9 RBSS PCB 16-17 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units Table 16-9 PCB RBSU/RBSS Option Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors Circuit Option Switch Type All SW 1 1 RBSU RBSS Circuit Type TE NT Push-button N/A N/A SW 2 Jumper X X 1 SW 3 Slide On Off 1 SW 4, 5 Jumper N/A On 2 SW 6 Jumper X X Description Resets firmware on all circuits of RBSU/RBSS. Drops calls off the RBSU/RBSS. Causes the circuit to operate as TE or NT1. Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. Causes the circuit to operate as TE or NT1. 2 SW 7 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 2 SW 8, 9 Jumper N/A On Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 3 (NT only) SW 1 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 3 (NT only) SW 3, 4 Jumper N/A On Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 4 (NT only) SW 2 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 4 (NT only) SW 5, 6 Jumper N/A On Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 1. Also requires Program *60 to set TE or NT. Step 3: Install the REBS Note The REBS provides a basic part of the RBSU/RBSS circuit functionality; therefore, it must always be installed on the RBSU (see Figure 16-10). 1. Align the two connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the REBS. 2. Plug the REBS onto the RBSU. Step 4: Install the RBSS Note If one or two additional BRI-NT circuits are required, install the RBSS (see Figure 16-10). 1. Align the four connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the REBS. 2. Plug the RBSS onto the RBSU. Step 5: Install the R40S Note If ISDN PS-1 backup power for TE devices is required, install the R40S (optional PCB) (see Figure 16-10). 1. Align the two connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the R40S. 2. Plug the R40S onto the RBSU. 16-18 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units RBSU Optional RBSS1A REBS (always install) UP UP UP UP Two-circuit Subassembly 2761 UP Optional PS-1 Power Supply UP R40S1A-CM V.1 R40S Figure 16-10 Location of RBSU Plug-on PCBs Step 6: Install RBSU/RBSS PCBs into Cabinet Table 16-10 RBSU/RBSS LED Indications LED Indication BSY Circuit Busy On – Any B-channel is in use. Off – B-channels are idle. TS Timing Source Blinking On/Off – The RBSU is extracting the clock from the BRI line and is the Primary synchronization circuit for ISDN and T1. On – The RBSU is the secondary (backup) synchronization circuit for the ISDN and T1. Off – The RBSU is not used for ISDN or T1 synchronization. LOS Loss of Signal On – Clock timing cannot be detected from the line. Off – Normal condition. FS Frame Alignment Alarm On – Frame alignment cannot be established. Off – Frame alignment is established. Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces After setting the switches and jumpers and installing the plug-on PCBs as described in the preceding paragraphs, the RBSU/RBSS PCBs can be installed in the appropriate cabinet slots. Refer to RBSU/RBSS Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information on Figure 16-12. After the RBSU/ RBSS is installed in the DK424 or DK424i cabinet or DK40i Expansion Unit, the status LEDs and connecting jacks are positioned as shown in Figure 16-13. 16-19 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units Step 7: Install the TBSU or TBUU - + Carefully align the TBSU or TBUU connector pins with P11 and P12 on the DK40i motherboard and install the TBSU or TBUU into the DK40i Base Unit. Use the two supplied screws to secure the TBSU or TBUU to the motherboard. Figure 16-10 shows the TBSU or TBUU mounting on the DK40i and Figure 16-12 shows the TBSU switch layout. Table 16-11 shows the TBSU option switches. The TBUU does not have option switches; all options are controlled by programming. Install a TCOU, TBSU or TDDU here Install a TCOU, TBSU, TBUU or TDDU here 4728 Figure 16-11 Installation of TBSU or TBUU into DK40i 16-20 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units ON 100 SW201 OFF NT TE SW200 SW1 Reset ON J2 100 SW101 Cct2 OFF NT TE CPU CUT SHORT ROM SW100 Cct1 J1 SW2 W2 IC7 CD9 CD10 CD11 CD12 IC6 TBSU1A FS LOS TS BSY Cct1 J3 Monitor Loop Back 3795 PFT contacts TB1 TB2 Cct2 Figure 16-12 TBSU Switch Layout Note It is normal for sockets IC7 and IC8 to be empty. TBSU Circuit Option Switch Type All SW 1 Push-button 1 SW 100 Jumper 1 SW 101 Slide 2 SW 200 Jumper 2 SW 201 Slide Circuit Type TE Description NT N/A N/A Resets firmware on all TBSU circuits. Drops calls off the TBSU. X X Causes the circuit1 to operate as TE or NT. On On Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit.1 X X Causes the circuit2 to operate as TE or NT1. On On Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit.2 ISDN Interfaces Table 16-11 TBSU Option Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors 1. Also requires Program *60 to set TE or NT. 2. SW2 is for factory use only Circuit Switch Type W2 Jumper TBSU1A uses the internal CPU ROM (IC20) TBSU1A uses the external ROM (IC6 and 7) Future Use SW2 Jumper For factory loop back test. Normal operation Used for factory inspection only. Do not cut this jumper. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Short Cut (remove) Description 16-21 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units Modular Jack Pin Configurations BRI (S/T) Circuit Jack (TE or NT Mode) The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit jack is a shielded RJ45 (8-pin modular) with Transmit (Tx) and Receive (Rx) pin numbers as shown in Figure 16-13. The Tx and Rx pin numbers change when the BRI circuit is configured with TBSU and RBSU/RBSS option switches for TE or NT (Tables 16-9 and 16-11). If the R40S is installed on the RBSU, the PS-1 voltage is carried on the Tx/Rx wires with polarity. (See Table 16-12). The position of the TBSU BRI and RBSU/RBSS circuit jacks are shown in Figure 16-12 and 16-13 respectively. Table 16-12 RJ45 Pins in the 8-pin Modular Jack Pin No. TE Side NT Side PS1/R40S Polarity 1 N/C N/C N/C 2 N/C N/C N/C 3 Tx Rx + 4 Rx Tx + 5 Rx Tx - 6 Tx Rx - 7 N/C N/C N/C 8 N/C N/C N/C 87654321 3048 Front View of RJ-45 Jack Cavity Note: The RJ-45 pins are numbered as shown above. Monitor Jack The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS monitor jack is an RJ12 (6-pin modular). This jack provides an RS232 output that enables you to monitor the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit D-channel, layer-2 and layer-3 data. The monitor jack pin configuration and communication parameters are the same as RPTU and RBUU which are shown in Figure 16-33 on Page 16-43. Figures 16-36 and 16-37 on Pages 16-46 and 16-47, respectively, show examples of the TBSU or RBSU monitor jack output. Figures 16-35 and 16-13 show the location of the TBSU and RBSU monitor jacks respectively. TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Premise Wiring Guidelines Power Failure Terminal Screws TB1 and TB2 are the connecting points that interface a pair of dry contacts that can be used for power failure switching purposes (see Figure 16-13 for the locations). When the DK system (TBSU and RBSU) has power (from AC source or batteries) there is a short circuit across TB1 and TB2. In the event of no power to the DK424 or DK424i, there is an open circuit across TB1 and TB2. The specifications for TB1 and TB2 contacts are: ♦ Maximum switchable voltage: 30VDC ♦ Maximum switchable current: 80mA ♦ Short circuit resistance: Approximately 15 ohms Grounding Terminal Screws TB3 is a screw terminal that can be used to connect a ground wire to the RBSU PCB (see Figure 16-13 for the location). This ground enables the RBSU/RBSS to meet Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements. As of Release 4.1, RBSU complies with EMC requirements without grounding TB3 on the RBSU, so it is not necessary to connect a ground wire to TB3. 16-22 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units BRI Wire Type Recommendations CAT3 or CAT5 wire is recommended for ISDN BRI customer-premises wiring. While the ISDN BRI signal works for some distance over almost any wire that is suitable for analog voice service, better wire enables longer runs. CAT5 provides better 100-ohm impedance matching (at little extra cost) between the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS circuit and the station Terminal Equipment (TE-1). Normally the CAT3 or CAT5 wiring does not have to be shielded when used for ISDN BRI premises wiring. However, the RJ45 jacks on the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits are shielded and provide a ground shield in the event that shielded modular plugs and cable are used. Note If using shielded cable and plugs, cable runs should only be grounded at the DK TBSU and RBSU/RBSS, RJ45 jacks. To prevent ground loops, do not ground both ends of shielded cable runs. RBSU CKT2 BSY TS LOS FS CKT1 BSY TS LOS FS RBSS BSY TS LOS FS BSY TS LOS FS CKT4 CKT3 4th Circuit 2nd Circuit RJ-45 8-pin (shielded) Modular Connector 3rd Circuit TB3 (FG) 1st Circuit Reset Switch (resets RBSU Firmware) TB1 and TB2 (PFT) 2795 Figure 16-13 RBSU/RBSS Location of LEDs and Connector Locations ISDN Interfaces RS-232C Connector for Call-Data Monitor TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI Cable Jacks and Connectors In the U.S., the standard connector for ISDN equipment is the eight-pin RJ jack. Patch cables have eight-pole plugs at both ends. The same pinout applies to both ends of an ISDN cable, which is the practice of the data world. This means that a flat untwisted cable with an RJ modular plug at both ends will have the locking tab of the plug on one end, “up;” and on the other end, “down,” as shown in Figure 16-14. Note Strata DK I&M This is the opposite of telephony “silver satin” cables which have locking tabs on both ends facing the same direction. Telephony cables cause the pins at either end to crossover while data cables provide a straight through pin-to-pin connection between modular jacks. 5/00 16-23 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units A cord of up to 10 meters connects the ISDN BRI RJ45 wall jack to the desktop TE-1 or TA RJ45 jack. Bellcore recommends that all TE-1 and TA devices be attached with the same standard cord to ensure compatibility. Locking Tab 3039 Four-pair Wire RJ-45 Eight-pole Plug Figure 16-14 Modular ISDN Data Cable The standard pinouts for ISDN jacks is the TIA-568A or TIA-568B jack as listed in Table 16-13. The variants A and B to the TIA specification are electrically the same, only the wire colors are different. However, you should only use one type TIA jack in a customer installation because mixing the two may cause certain wire pairs to be swapped which would result in line faults. Table 16-13 TIA-568B (RJ45) Jack – ISDN Standard Interface Modular Connector Pinout (RBSU-NT mode) Pin Color Name Function 1 Green T2 Power 3 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS) 2 Green/White R2 Power 3 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS) 3 Orange/White R3 RX+ 4 Blue/White R1 TX+ 5 Blue T1 TX- 6 Orange T3 RX- 7 Brown T4 - Power 2 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS) 8 Brown/White R4 + Power 2 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS) Notes ● ● 16-24 Pins are numbered left to right when looking into the jack cavity with the locking tab down. TIA-568A swaps pair two with pair three, changing only the color of the wires on the pins. Electrical performance is the same. Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units DK BRI Circuit EMC Ferrite Core Requirement To ensure that the DK BRI circuit meets the EMC requirements, it is necessary to run all wire connecting ISDN BRI circuits (TE, LT mode and NT mode) through a Ferrite core. Use Toshiba part number, FER-CORE-ISDN, to order the ferrite core. It is not shipped automatically with the BRI circuit cards, it must be grounded separately. Figures 16-15 and 16-16 show how to dress the wiring through the Ferrite core. RBSU or RBUU RBSS or RBUS TBSU1A or TBUU ISDN PRI Jack FS LOS TS BSY FS LOS TS BSY CAT 3, 4, or 5 Cable CAT 3, 4, or 5 Cable 4697 Tie Wrap 4729 Tie Wrap Ferrite Core FER-CORE-ISDN Ferrite Core FER-CORE-ISDN One Turn Figure 16-15 BRI Circuit Ferrite Core Installation Note: Locate the Ferrite core as close as possible to the TBSU or TBUU. One Turn Figure 16-16 BRI Circuit Ferrite Core Installation Connecting TBSU and RBSU to Network Side (TE-Mode) ISDN Interfaces Note: Locate the Ferrite core as close as possible to the BRI modular jack. The TBSU and RBSU only, not the RBSS, circuits can be connected to the network side of a BRI line. The TBSU and RBSU circuits must be configured in the TE-mode (refer to option switches in Table 16-9 on Page 16-18 and Table 16-11 on Page 16-21 and Program *60). In the U.S., the BRI line from the ISDN service provider is a two-wire U-type BRI line. This line connects to the TBSU or RBSU TE circuit via a customer-provided NT1 as shown in Figure 16-17. The NT1 is necessary to convert the network BRI, two-wire, U interface to the TBSU or RBSU BRI, four-wire, T interface. The NT1 must be UL listed (U.S.) or CSA certified (Canada). The NT1 is powered by local AC power via an AC adapter supplied with the NT1. The connection between the NT1 and the TBSU or RBSU TE circuit is a point-to-point connection, so the NT1 can connect to only one TBSU or RBSU BRI TE circuit. A 100-ohm Terminating Resistor (TR) is required on each end of the point-to-point connection. The TR must be switched into the TBSU or RBSU TE circuit (refer to option switches in Table 16-11 on Page 16-21 and Table 16-9 on Page 16-18) and into the NT1 device. Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-25 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units Most NT1 devices have TR option switches; if the NT1 does not have TRs, two 100-ohm TRs must be wired into the NT1 modular jack - one 100-ohm resistor across each pair (Tx and Rx). Refer to the NT1 manufacturers documentation for the maximum loop length between the NT1 and the network jack. The maximum loop length between the NT1 and the TBSU or RBSU circuit is 1650 feet. RJ45 Pinout (NT1 - S/T jack) RJ45 Pinout (TBSU or RBSU - BRI jack) BRI (four-wire) TBSU or RBSU TE-Circuit Switch in 100-ohm TR using RBSU option switch. BRI (two-wire) 3 TX RX 3 6 TX RX 6 NT-1 Switch in 100-ohm TR. 4 RX/TX 4 RX TX 4 5 RX TX 5 5 RX/TX 3343 U T Note: T and U are ISDN standard reference points. Network BRI-line RJ-11 Jack Local AC Power Demarcation Point Figure 16-17 TBSU or RBSU to NT1 Point-to-point Connection Connecting TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Station Devices (NT-Mode) S-type TAs and TE-1s can be connected to the station side of TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS circuits. TA and TE devices must be powered by local AC power using AC adapter supplied with the TA or TE device. The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS circuits must be configured in the NT mode when connected to TA and TE devices (refer to option switches in Table 16-9 on Page 16-18 and Table 16-11 on Page 16-21 and Program *60). The TA enables you to connect non-ISDN voice and data devices to ISDN BRI circuits. The TA matches the protocol of existing interfaces (R-reference point) to the ISDN S/T protocol (see Figure on Page 16-3). TA devices include asynchronous circuit-switched adapters that convert RS-232 async data (like data from a PC COM port) to B-channel 64 kbps sync. TAs also enable you to connect standard telephones and non-ISDN fax machines to receive and make calls over ISDN circuits. TEs include any user device (telephone, fax, PC video conference board) that is designed to plug directly into the ISDN (S/T) interface without the use of a TA. There are two types of ISDN TA and TE-1 devices: the U-type and the S/T type. Most manufacturers of ISDN station devices make both types. In DK424 or DK424i R4.1 and DK40i, the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS station side, BRI-NT circuits only function with S/T type TA and TE1 devices. You cannot connect U-type TE-1 or TA devices to the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuits. Also, connecting an NT1 to the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuit to convert from S/T to U interface is not supported to enable the use of U-type TE-1 or TA device on the station side of the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS. U-type TE-1 and TA device interface is provided in the DK by the TBUU and RBUU/RBUS BRI circuit only. TBUU and RBUU/RBUS will be provided in the DK424 or DK424i and DK40i Release 4.3. 16-26 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuit supports the National ISDN 2 (NI2) S-Interface “passive bus.” It is called a passive bus, because it contains no logical functions. The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT interface supports a point-to-multipoint connection on two twisted pairs. Up to two TE-1 and/or TA devices can be connected to one TBSU or RBSU/RBSS, BRI-NT circuit. Using standardized wiring and modular connectors, as explained in previous paragraphs, maintains control of polarity. The pinout from the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS circuit to a S-type TE1 or TA device is shown in Figure 16-18 and Table 16-12. TBSU or RBSU NT Circuit Insert 100-ohm TR using RBSU and RBSS option switches. RJ45 Pinout RJ45 Pinout 3 3 6 6 4 4 5 5 S-type, TE-1 or TA with 100-ohm TR or just a 100-ohm terminating resistor across each pair on a RJ-45 jack. 3344 BRI (four-wire) 3 6 4 5 To local AC Power S-type, TE-1s or TAs without 100-ohm terminating resistors (maximum eight TE-1s or TAs per RBSU/RBSS circuit). To local AC Power As a parallel bus, the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT passive bus will accept TE-1 and TA devices scattered on the bus; however, the locations of the TE and TA devices on the S bus is limited by timing considerations. Specifically, the round trip propagation delay of a signal from the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS circuit to one device must be within four microseconds of the delay from the other device on the bus. That is to say, layer-1 frames from the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS must be received within a two microsecond window. This says nothing about how large the delay can be. In fact, it can be much larger, as long as the differences remain small. ISDN Interfaces Figure 16-18 TBSU and RBSU/RBSS NT Circuit Pinout on Passive Bus To control electrical characteristics, a 100-ohm terminating resistor (TR) is required at both ends of the passive bus. One resistor should be across the Tx pair and one across the Rx pair at either end of the passive bus. Branch-type passive bus configurations, shown in Figures 16-19~16-22, may only require a TR on the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT circuit side and not on the TE or TA device side of the bus. The TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS circuits provide an option switch that allows the 100-ohm TR to be switched into the circuit on the DK side of the bus (see Table 16-9 on Page 16-18 and Table 16-11 on Page 16-21). Most TE-1 and TA devices also provide option switches to connect 100-ohm terminating resistors as shown in Figure 16-17. If the TE or TA devices do not provide TRs, they may be permanently wired in place on a RJ45 jack at the far end of the bus. Only one terminating resistor on each pair should be on the far (TE) end of the passive bus - do not switch in TRs on more than one TE-1 or TA device on the passive bus. Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-27 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units Important! The correct placement of TRs on the Passive Bus is critical to ISDN BRI circuit operation (see the following TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus configurations section). TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus Configurations The placement of S-type TE and TA devices on the BRI S-passive bus is critical for good TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit performance. Figures 16-19~16-22 show four passive bus architectures that are known to work. In all installations, follow the guidelines of any of these passive-bus models using the wire, cables, and jacks described in the previous paragraphs. TA and PC Com Port x ' ma 360 TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TR RJ-45 360 3338 ' ma x ISDN Telephone Figure 16-19 Simplified Short-branched Passive Bus TE-1 PC Card * TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TR 850' RJ-45 3339 RJ-45 with TRs * No more than 130' difference between any 2 branches. * ISDN Telephone Figure 16-20 Branched Passive Bus 16-28 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units 82' ISDN Telephone TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TE-1 PC Card RJ-45 TR TR 1650' 3340 Figure 16-21 Extended Passive Bus 490' ISDN Telephone TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TE-1 PC Card RJ-45 TR 640' 3341 Figure 16-22 Short Passive Bus Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces TR 16-29 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit System: DK424i, DK424, and DK40i Release 4.3 Circuits per PCB: 2 circuits (2B + D each circuit) Interfaces with: ISDN BRI U when connected to the Public Network or a BRI U-type TE-1 or TA devices when connecting to ISDN station equipment Older Version(s): none The DK40i, DK424 and DK424i Release 4.3 system supports the RBUU/RBUS interface unit (Figures 16-23 and 16-24) according to the common control units resident in the system. (Table 14-8). The DK40i R2 supports TBUU in the Base Cabinet. LEDs on the RBUU/RBUS show a continuous status of operation. Refer to Table 16-14 for a list of each LED’s status. Figure 16-25 shows the location of the LEDs and connectors. RBUU and TBUU Installation Important! The DK40i, Release 1 does not support the RBUU or TBUU interface. Before installing an RBUU or TBUU PCB into a DK system, a number of system programs must be run. Be sure to run Program *60 to identify all station (NT) and CO (TE) BRI circuits. Program *60 causes port and line numbers to shift. We recommend running these programs in the order listed before installation. This allows the RBUU to function immediately upon insertion beginning with a self-check loop-back test and then normal operation. Before you can begin installation of the RBUU, you may have to install the subassemblies. The TBUU PCB is shown in Figure 16-26. ➤ To install the subassemblies (RBUS) ➤ Place the RBUS card (component side facing down) onto the RBUU connectors. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of the connectors. The RBUS card should have been installed at the factory. ➤ To install an RBUU PCB 1. Insert the RBUU (component side facing right) into the appropriate expansion unit slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors. 2. After installing the RBUU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. ➤ To install a TBUU PCB 1. Insert the TBUU (component side facing right) into the DK40i Base Unit and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors. 2. After installing the RBUU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. 16-30 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit RBUU1A Secondary Protectors P12 P13 Circuit 1 J101 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 1 J201 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 2 Circuit 2 BSY T S LOS F S LED Indicators Circuit 1 BSY T S LOS F S Circuit 2 DIN Connector J3 RS-232C Monitor Output P10 P10 RBUU1A 2799 Figure 16-23 RBUU PCB RBUS1A P12 ISDN Interfaces P13 Circuit 3 BSY T S LOS F S Circuit 4 LED Indicators BSY T S LOS F S J301 Circuit 3 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 3 J401 RBSU1A Circuit 4 P11 P10 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 4 Secondary Protectors F 2800 Figure 16-24 RBUS Subassembly Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-31 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit RBUU1A RBUS1A RJ45 Modular for Circuit 1 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 2 BSY T S PSI F S LED Indicators for Circuit 1 BSY T S PSI F S BSY T S PSI F S RJ45 Modular for Circuit 3 BSY T S PSI F S LED Indicators for Circuit 2 LED Indicators for Circuit 3 LED Indicators for Circuit 4 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 4 RS-232C Monitor Output 4776 Figure 16-25 Location of LEDs and Connectors (RBUU/RBUS) Table 16-14 RBUU/RBUS LED Indications LED BSY TS PSI1 FS Definition LED Off LED On LED Blinking Busy Port is in idle. Port is busy. Port is in test mode. Time Synchronization Not CLK extraction port. Secondary CLK extraction port. Extracting CLK port. Port Status Indicator Port is in LT mode. Port is in NT mode. AIB is received by this port. Frame Synchronization Frame alignment is established. Frame Alignment error. Port is trying to establish frame alignment. 1. PSI is labeled LOS on Beta PCBs 16-32 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit IC3 Secondary Protectors J2 Cct2 IC1 Cct1 J1 J3 Monitor 4730 CO10 CO11 CO12 CO13 TBUU1A BSY TS PSI FS CO14 CO15 CO16 CO17 Cct1 Cct2 Figure 16-26 TBUU Printed Circuit Board TBUU and RBUU/RBUS Wiring Guidelines DK BRI-U interface circuits can be configured to connect to an ISDN line circuit (NT mode, Line-side) or to ISDN U-type terminal equipment TE1 or terminal adapters TA (LT mode, station side). ♦ The configuration of DK BRI-U circuits is accomplished in Program *60 alone - no hardware jumpers are required on the PCBs. Make sure you run this program along with Program 03 attempting to use the BRI circuits. Program *60 may cause line or station ports to shift on circuits following the BRI PCBs. ♦ Install the Toshiba-supplied Ferrite core on each ISDN circuit card per Figures 16-15 and 16-16 on Page 25. The Ferrite core is not supplied with the ISDN circuit cards must be ordered separately. ♦ For more information regarding the DK BRI-U interface, see “PRI and BRI Overview” at the beginning of this chapter. Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces ♦ 16-33 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit Line-side cabling ♦ The ISDN BRI U-interface circuits are two-wire on the PSTN line-side. ♦ The wiring from the demarc to the DK BRI circuit should be made with CAT3~CAT5 twisted pair wire. ♦ The pinout of the DK BRI-U circuit jack is shown below. NT and LT Mode NC NC NC Tip Ring NC NC NC 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BRI Pai NC = No Connection 4732 RJ45 Jack ♦ DK BRI-U RJ45 Circuit Jack Printout ♦ The maximum distance between the PSTN BRI interface circuit and the DK ISDN BRI U lineside circuit (NT) is 18 kft. The Telco with the use of a repeater or fiber optic cable may extend this distance. ♦ The U interface pair should go directly from the demarc jack to the DK interface PCB with no bridge taps to different locations or should not have loading coils installed. ♦ BRI line-side cables should not be shielded. ♦ Each line-side BRI circuit requires a ferrite core as shown in Figures 16-15 and 16-16. ♦ In the USA, most BRI-U Demarc jacks are RJ11, but they may be RJ45 eight-wire jacks. In Canada the BRI-U Demarc jack is usually RJ45. ♦ Polarity of the U interface pair is not critical. ♦ The ISDN BRI-U wire pair is usually on the center pair of the Demarc jack, pins 3 and 4 on RJ11 and pins 4 and 5 on RJ45. Typical demarc jack wiring is shown below:) 6 5 4 3 2 1 BLACK RED GREEN YELLOW 4726 RJ11 Demarc Jack Figure 16-27 Six-pin Modular Plug (RJ11) 16-34 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit Table 16-15 Quad Cable with RJ11 Demarc Coding Conductor Pair 1 Pair 2 Color Pin Use Red 3 Line 1 Green 4 Line 1 Yellow 5 Line 2/Power Black 2 Line 2/Power WHITE-GREEN GREEN WHITE-ORANGE BLUE WHITE-BLUE ORANGE WHITE-BROWN BROWN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4727 RJ45 Demarc Jack Figure 16-28 Eight-pin Modular Plug (RJ45) Table 16-16 Four-Pair with RJ45 Demarc Jack Coding Conductor Pair 2 Pair3 Pair 4 T56A Pin T56B Pin Use White-Blue 5 5 Line 1 Blue 4 4 Line 1 White-Orange 3 1 Line 2 Orange 6 2 Line 2 White-Green 1 3 PS3 plus power Green 2 6 PS3 minus power White-Brown 7 7 PS2 plus power Brown 8 8 PS2 minus power ISDN Interfaces Pair 1 Color Table 16-17 Three-Pair with RJ11 Demarc Coding Conductor Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair3 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Color Pin Use White-Blue 4 Line 1 Blue 3 Line 1 White-Orange 2 Line 2 Orange 5 Line 2 White-Green 1 Line 3 Green 6 Line 3 16-35 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting Notes ● ● PS2 and PS3 are not used with the DK BRI-U interface PCBs. Check with the BRI circuit supplier to determine the pin out of the demarc jacks because some jacks may be wired with two or three BRI-U line circuits each jack. Station-Side cabling ♦ The ISDN BRI U-interface circuits are two-wire on the DK station-side. ♦ The maximum distance between the DK ISDN BRI-U, station-side circuit (LT) and the U-type Terminal Equipment or Terminal Adapter is 18kft. ♦ The house wiring from the DK BRI circuit to the wall jack should be made with CAT3~ CAT5 twisted pair wire. ♦ Each station-side BRI circuit requires a ferrite core as shown in Figures 16-15 and 16-16. ♦ The flat satin telephone cord that connects from the wall jacks to ISDN terminal equipment should be no longer than 33 feet. ♦ BRI station-side cables should not be shielded. ♦ Polarity of the U interface pair is not critical. ♦ The U interface pair should go directly from the DK interface PCB to the U-type TE1 or TA with no bridge taps or loading coils to different locations. ♦ The pin-out of the TBUU and RBUU/RBSU BRI jack is shown in Figure 16-26: Call Monitor Jack Cabling The pin-out for the BRI-U interface call monitor jack is provided in Figure 16-33 of this chapter. ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting BRI-U, LT Interface Terminal Loop Back Test The DK provides a built-in loop back test to check the U-type, lSDN terminal connected to the RBUU, RBUS, or TBUU circuit. The DK performs the 2B+D loop test using the eoc ISDN, layer 1 function. This tests the U-terminal and the wire connection from the DK to the BRI device; it does not check the DK PCM highway or RBUU/RBUS/TBUU functionality. 1. Set DK BRI programs to enable the BRI circuit to function. Make sure to setup the BRI circuit in the station-side, LT mode using Program *60. 2. Connect the U-terminal device to the DK BRI, RJ45 circuit jack. (see Figure 16-26). 3. Connect the DK TTY port (PIOU, RSIU, TSIU, etc.) to the COM port of a PC running a communications application such as ProComm or Hyper Terminal, etc. 16-36 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting 4. Setup the com-port parameters for 7-bits, even parity, 1-stop bit and the appropriate speed. DK System Test data from DK sent to Terminal. If 80% of sent data is returned test passes. RBUU (LT Mode) U-Terminal device (loop back) 1-pair BRI Circuit Line Cord RSIU or PIOU 3-pair Telephone Cord TTY Port TTY Port PC with Hyper Terminal Software 4733 Figure 16-29 DK TTY Port BRI Connection to PC 5. Press the Enter key on the PC keyboard The DK responds with CODE The DK responds with MODE 7. At the MODE prompt, type TEST and press Enter from the PC keyboard The DK responds with T ISDN Interfaces 6. At the CODE prompt, type the DK, 4-digit code (Program 00 code) from the PC keyboard Make all entries from the PC keyboard in Capital letters. Note 8. At the T prompt, type LBUU ss m and press Enter from the PC keyboard Where ss=BRI PCB slot number and m=BRI circuit number (1-4). Notes ● ● The U-terminal must be idle, and remain idle, during the loop back test. The DK sends 4 octets of data to the U-terminal during the loop back test: 0X00, 0XFF, 0XB2, and 0X4D. These octets are sent to the B1, B2, and D channels 50 times. If the DK receives 80% of the sent data back, it assumes the test to pass. (i.e., the U-terminal and wiring is good.) If The DK responds with: ## BUU LOOP BACK TEST ## SLOT=ss CIRCUIT=m B1:OK B2:OK D:OK Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-37 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting The above response indicates the test was passed and that the B1, B2 and D channels and the wire connections for the tested device are operating properly. b. If The DK responds with: TEST FAIL The test failure could be caused by: ♦ U-terminal is in busy state when the test was started. ♦ U-terminal is in TQ/ACB/ACD mode when the test was started ♦ The DK BRI PCB slot or circuit number was not entered correctly. ♦ U-terminal can not support loop back testingU-terminal, BRI PCB, or wiring is defective. c. If The DK responds with: TEST EXIT Test exit could be caused by: ♦ The DK processor did not get test results from the BRI circuit within 5 second from start of the test. ♦ U-terminal or BRI circuit was unplugged during the test. ♦ User made the exit request during testing RPTU Loop-back Test The RPTU has loop-back test jumpers that enable physical connections (cables/jacks/plugs) between the RPTU, CSU, and the network PRI line to be tested (see Figure 16-30). The tests check that the CSU receives and transmits the PRI signal properly in both directions. The test signals, generated by the Network PRI provider, pass through the CSU and loop around the RPTU. The RPTU sends the received test signal back through the CSU to the Network and the Network detector checks for a valid signal. Loop-back Test 1. Remove the PRI modular cord from the RPTU RJ45 jack and remove the RPTU from its card slot. 2. Place the JP1 and JP2 jumpers to the LB-On position. Install the RPTU with the DK power Off and the PRI modular disconnected from the RPTU RJ45 jack. 3. Turn the DK power On and connect the PRI modular cord to RPTU RJ45. 4. After the PRI line and RPTU are synchronized, have the CO generate the loop-back test sign (all “1s” or “0s”). CAUTION! Do not have the CO do a QRS loop-back test, because the test signal may cause the DK to drop all calls and/or stop operating. 5. If the loop-back test fails, perform tests to isolate the problem with an ISDN test set, such as the Sunbird, ISDN, or Trend DUET. In this case, the network PRI line is disconnected and the test set is connected to the CSU network input jack. For testing details, refer to the ISDN test set operating procedures. 16-38 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces Timing and Synchronization RPTU CSU CO ISDN PRI Test Signal ISDN PRI JP1 (RJ-45) (LB-ON) ISDN PRI 1.5MHz line Interface LSI Network Jack RJ-48C or RJ-48X JP2 (LB-ON) Demarcation Point 2756 Figure 16-30 Loop-back Test Timing and Synchronization The Digital Network is connected by timing clocks that synchronize the network and have various degrees of precision (stratum levels). There are four stratum levels – 1 is the highest and 4 is the lowest. They are associated with the following sources: Stratum – 1: Public Telephone Network clock ♦ Stratum – 2: #4 ESS Toll Switches ♦ Stratum – 3: #5 ESS Central Offices ♦ Stratum – 4: Digital PBXs In the DK424 or DK424i, one PRI, BRI, or T1 PCB can be programmed to extract the Stratum clock signal. It uses the signal as the DK system Primary clock reference. The clock provider should be a reliable source, such as a Telco or common carrier (AT&T). All other PRI, BRI, or T1 lines connected to the DK424 or DK424i will be synchronized to the same clock provider. If the PRI, BRI, or T1 are not synchronized to the same clock provider, the DK424 or DK424i could experience “slip” problems. ISDN Interfaces ♦ Timing reference assignments for PRI, BRI, and T1 are made with the Program *42 series. The timing or synchronization program determines how the DK424 or DK424i digital voice or data transmission path is synchronized with the far-end digital path. For proper PRI, BRI, and T1 operation, the equipment at each end of the line must be synchronized. The DK processor time switch is synchronized as the slave to the PRI, BRI, or T1 line (Line 1 in Figure 16-31). The DK424 or DK424i PRI, BRI, or T1 in any slot number can be assigned as the Primary reference (Program *42-1, DATA=1 for this PRI, BRI, or T1). If a malfunction occurs and Primary reference synchronization is lost, the DK424 or DK424i automatically switches modes and synchronizes to the Secondary reference, provided that there is another PRI, BRI, or T1 installed in the DK system. The Secondary reference PCB is assigned in Program *42-2. Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-39 ISDN Interfaces Timing and Synchronization DK40i, DK424 or DK424i Processor PCB * Primary/Secondary reference PCBs are assigned in Programs 42-1/ 42-2 and can be an RDTU, RPTU, RBSU, RBUU, TBUS or TBUU. Synchronization Circuit Clock SS1 Electronic Telephone PEKU Standard Telephone RSTU 4773 * Primary Reference PCB* PDKU DK424 Digital Transmission Voice Path Digital Telephone * Time Switch Synchronization Circuit Line 1 Prg *42-1-1 Digital Voice Path Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) PRI, BRI, or T1 Secondary Reference PCB* Synchronization Circuit SS2 Digital Voice Path Line 2 Prg *42-2-2 Synchronization Circuit Digital Voice Path Stratum-1 Clock Source Clock synchronized properly with Stratum-1 Clock Source Other RDTU, RPTU, or RBSU SS3 AT&T or other provider PRI, BRI, or T1 Line 3 Prg *41-1[blank] Prg *42-1[blank] Other PRI, BRI, or T1 provider Other Clock Source Clock not synchronized properly with Stratum-1 Clock Source Figure 16-31 Primary and Secondary References Figure 16-31 shows the Primary reference PCB. The clock signal from Line 1 passes through the PCB Software Switch (SS1) and the synchronization circuit of the RCTU PCB. The RCTU clock passes the clock source through the time switch and synchronizes the DK424 or DK424i digital transmission voice or data path. The Secondary reference is activated if the Primary reference fails. The DK424 or DK424i automatically switches over to the Secondary reference PCB by opening its synchronization circuit (SS1) and closing the synchronization circuit (SS2). When this occurs, the digital voice or data path of the DK424 or DK424i is synchronized to the Line 2 clock source. If the path is not synchronized to the Stratum – 1 clock source, calls connected through that path experience “slipping” or “jitter” in the digital voice or data path (channels). Figure 14-7 shows an unsynchronized signal from Line 3. The unsynchronized signal produces a clicking or popping sound that is heard by the people connected through this path or causes data errors on data transmissions. 16-40 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces Timing and Synchronization RPTU Performance Monitoring The performance of the RPTU can be monitored using the Data Dump Mode. This requires: ♦ RSIU, RSIS, PIOU, PIOUS or TSIU PCB TTY port. ♦ ASCII terminal or PC with communications software (such as ProComm). ♦ IMDU or RMDS modem or Hayes compatible modem for remote monitoring. The RPTU monitoring feature provides a download of PRI errors detected as shown in Figure 16-32. This data can be stored to a file and/or printed when using a PC with communications software. There are no time parameters for the error report, so the time between error-count increments must be monitored manually. The counter is reset after 15 registrations and begins again from zero. Basically the error count of any error category should not increase within 24-hour periods. ➤ To dump the data (PRI ERROR DISPLAY) from a terminal or PC (local or remote) 1. Establish communications between the DK TTY port and the terminal or PC using a communications software. 2. Enter the security code, and press Enter (or Return). 3. At the >MODE prompt, type DUMP (must be all caps), and press Enter (or Return). The >D prompt displays on your screen. 4. At the >D prompt, type PRIERR and press Enter (or Return). The display (see Figure 16-32) shows all RPTU PCBs (PRI NO=1~PRI NO=8), even if the associated RPTU (1~8) is not installed. The ERROR counter can only be reset by turning the DK Off and On. ➤ To exit the dump mode Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces ➤ At the >D prompt, type QUIT, press Enter (or Return); the >MODE prompt displays. 16-41 ISDN Interfaces Timing and Synchronization PRI ERROR DISPLAY PRIERR PRI NO = 1 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 2 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 3 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 4 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 5 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 6 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 7 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 8 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR = XX TIMES (1 TIME = 1024 ERRORS) = XX TIMES (1 TIME = 256 X 256 ERRORS) = XX TIMES (1 TIME = 256 ERRORS) = XX TIMES (1 TIME = 256 ERRORS) = = = = = = = = = XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX TIMES (XX = 00~15) TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XX XX XX XX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XX XX XX XX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XX XX XX XX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XX XX XX XX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XX XX XX XX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES Error Message Action Synchro Bit Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 1024 synchronization bit errors. Bipolar Violation Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 6.55 x 104 bipolar violations. Slip Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 256 slips. CRC Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 256 CRC-6 errors. The RPTU must be in the ESF mode. Figure 16-32 RPTU Performance Monitor Printout 16-42 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces PRI/BRI Call Monitoring PRI/BRI Call Monitoring The DK ISDN circuit cards provide an RS-232 monitor function that enables you to monitor the ISDN D-channel call progress layer two and three messages (setup, connect, and release). This data can be monitored live, saved to a file, and/or printed using a PC with communication software. The hardware connections and communication parameters for the ISDN monitor port are shown in Figure 16-33. Once this connection is setup and established, call monitoring data continues to be sent (on the fly) as PRI and BRI calls are originated or received. Two sample printouts from the RPTU monitor are provided. Figure 16-33 shows typical ISDN PRI start-up and synchronization sequences that occur at connection and power on. Figure 16-34 shows typical ISDN PRI outgoing call setup and release sequences. BRI monitor data is similar to PRI monitor data. The communication parameters for all call-monitor jacks are 9600 bps, 7, 1, even. DK PRI or BRI PCB Monitor Jack PC with communication software - such as ProComm™ Call-monitor jack PC DB9 or DB25 Com port Dealer-supplied 6-wire telephone modular cord (cross-pinned) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Call-monitor jack (RJ12) pin numbering ISDN Interfaces RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG Toshiba PPTC9 or PPTC25F 4696 Note The RPTU, RBSU, RBUU, TBSU and TBUU ISDN interface PCBs each have a callmonitor jack. The pin numbering and communication parameters are the same for each call-monitor jack. The call-monitor jack on each PCB provides data only for the circuits of the PCB on which it appears. Figure 16-33 Call-monitor Jack for the RPTU, RBSU, and RBUU Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-43 ISDN Interfaces PRI/BRI Call Monitoring /*-------------------------*/ Copyright(C) 1997 TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved RPTU Ver.1G [Reset] /*-------------------------*/ <U1>00;00 016 Act. (F1) /*-------------------------*/ Copyright(C) 1997 TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved RPTU Ver.1G [Reset] /*-------------------------*/ <U1>00;00 016 Act. (F1) <U1>00;09 634 LOS (F3) <U1>00;12 109 Act. (F1) /*-------------------------*/ Copyright(C) 1997 TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved RPTU Ver.1G [Reset] /*-------------------------*/ <U1>00;00 017 Act. (F1) <U1>00;06 619 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 <U1>00;06 630 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 <U1>00;07 236 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 <U1>00;07 245 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 <U1>00;11 754 LOS (F3) <U1>00;14 228 Act. (F1) <U1>00;14 415 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 <U1>00;14 427 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 <U1>00;14 753 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 <U1>00;14 765 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 <U1>00;24 275 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0002 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9 33 30 30 31 <U1>00;24 292 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 <U1>00;28 315 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0002 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9 33 30 30 31 <U1>00;28 333 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 <U1>00;43 812 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8002 MT = CONN(07) [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA P F P F [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA [FRAME]INFO P F P F [N(S)]000 [N(R)]000 83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO [N(R)]001 [N(S)]001 [N(R)]000 83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO ..........p..583 3001 ..........p..583 3001 [N(R)]002 [N(S)]000 [N(R)]002 2759 Figure 16-34 PRI Start-up and Synchronization Sequences 16-44 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces PRI/BRI Call Monitoring <U1>01;14 446 <U1>01;14 449 <U1>01;14 456 <U1>01;14 460 <U1>01;19 450 <U1>01;19 466 <U1>01;19 878 <U1>01;19 888 <U1>01;19 924 <U1>01;19 932 <U1>01;25 464 <U1>01;25 476 <U1>01;25 785 <U1>01;46 138 <U1>01;46 449 <U1>01;46 464 <U1>01;46 784 <U1>01;46 <U1>02;16 <U1>02;16 <U1>02;22 795 659 670 661 ISDN Interfaces <U1>01;25 799 <U1>01;46 127 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]004 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]002 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]002 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]004 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]004 [N(R)]002 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9 83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33 ..........p..583 33 30 30 31 3001 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]005 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]002 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = CALL PROC(02) 18 03 A9 83 97 ..... Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]003 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]003 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = ALERT(01) 18 03 A9 83 97 ..... Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]004 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]004 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = CONN(07) 18 03 A9 83 97 ..... Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]005 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]005 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = CONN ACK(0F) Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]006 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]005 [N(R)]006 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = DISC(45) 08 02 80 90 .... Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]006 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]006 [N(R)]006 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = REL(4D) 08 02 80 90 .... Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]007 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]006 [N(R)]007 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = REL COMP(5A) 08 02 80 90 .... Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]007 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]007 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]007 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]007 [N(R)]007 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0004 2760 Figure 16-35 PRI Outgoing Call Connect and Release Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-45 ISDN Interfaces PRI/BRI Call Monitoring BRI Call Monitor The call-monitor jack located on the TBSU and RBSU enables you to use a PC or ASCII terminal to monitor the BRI, D-channel call setup, layer-2 and layer-3 data (refer to Figure 16-33 on Page 16-43 for information about connecting the monitor jack). Figures 16-36 and 16-37 provide examples of BRI call setup message information that is available from the TBSU and RBSU callmonitor jack. Figure 16-36 Outgoing Call Setup Output of BRI Call Monitor 16-46 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces PRI/BRI Call Monitoring ISDN Interfaces Figure 16-37 Incoming Call Setup Output of BRI Call Monitor Strata DK I&M 5/00 16-47 ISDN Interfaces SMDR Output for ISDN SMDR Output for ISDN See Figure 12-20 on Page 12-36 for a sample SMDR printout and descriptions of each column. ISDN Disconnect Cause Code The ISDN Cause Code provides information on how an ISDN call is terminated when an ISDN line disconnects. The Cause Code displays only when this feature is enabled on the LCD of DKTs, EKTs and Attendant Consoles. ISDN Cause Code is turned On/Off for each telephone or console in Program 35, LED 08. LED 08 On enables Cause Code Display. Previously, “CO LINE HANG UP!” or “CALL TERMINATED” displayed when an ISDN line disconnected. This display no longer exists for ISDN calls with DK Release 4.3 software. These messages do display if a non-ISDN call is terminated. The new cause code display function replaces this existing message with more specific and useful information (call reference number, direction of disconnection, and the reason for call termination). Users can chose the option to display this information or not on each individual telephone or console. This option is turned On or Off in system programming 16-48 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Disconnect Cause Code Explanation of the LCD Information C A L L T E R M I N AT E D CR=0001...CO=10 4778 Figure 16-38 shows ISDN Call Termination Fields; information changes. Table 16-18 provides a definition of these fields. Cause code values are further defined in tables later in this chapter. Disconnect Cause Code: Provides the reason for call termination. Refer to the Disconnect Cause Code tables that follow in this section. Call Reference Disconnect Direction: "CO" means the Central Office disconnected the call. "DK" means the DK system disconnected the call. The last three digits or are the call reference number. This number is incremented and generated by the DK as each call is made or received. The first digit of the call reference number indicates if it was an outgoing call made by the DK or an incoming call received by the DK. This digit is usually a "0" or "8" and is interpreted as follows: If the DK disconnected the call: 0 = the DK made the call (outgoing) 8 = the DK received the call (incoming) ISDN Interfaces If the CO disconnected the call: 0 = the DK received the call (incoming) 8 = the DK made the call (outgoing) Figure 16-38 Call Termination LCD Display The above figure shows how the information on the display changes according to the status of the terminal when the line is disconnected. The content of each type of information is as shown in Table 16-18. ♦ Call Reference Number – The number of the disconnected call displays in a field that is up to four digits long. If the number is not four digits long, the numbers will start from the far left. In case the call is disconnected before it is picked up, “NA (which stand for Not Available)” displays on the left. The highest bit of the call reference number indicates whether the call has been transmitted or received. For example, if the DK disconnects the call and the call reference number is “0001,” the call has been transmitted by the DK, and if the call reference number is “8001,” it means that the call was received by the DK. ♦ Strata DK I&M Reason for call termination – The reason is provided by a series of ISDN disconnection messages exchanged when the line is disconnected. The cause value within the information element of cause included in these messages will be used. 5/00 16-49 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Disconnect Cause Code In case a valid cause value cannot be found when the line is disconnected, “NA (which stand for Not Available)” displays. (See Tables 16-18~16-23 for valid cause code descriptions.) Notes ● ● ● ● On/Off of cause display function is set by programming each terminal (Program 35, LED 08). This setting is only valid for ISDN lines (PRI, BRI (S/T) in TE mode, and BRI (U) in LT mode). Loop start and ground start trunk call termination data displays just like the ISDN line— the display format is the same as when cause display function is switched Off. (For Loop start trunks, use Program 15-0, 3.) In case of analog Tie and DID lines, the display information remains the same as before. Even if soft keys are switched On, information on call termination displays instead of the soft key's On status. However, the function of the soft key itself remains valid. For example, even when the soft key's On status is not displayed, ABR registration can be enabled by pressing [MODE] key on the terminal corresponding to the soft key's ABR position. The cause display remains until some kind of operation (such as going on-hook, making a call, receiving a call, etc.) changes the display. This is to prevent the display from being changed until the System Administrator reads the information on call termination when the line is disconnected in an unusual way. At this time, the busy tone that starts when the line is disconnected will also continue generating. Call Termination Examples 16-50 CALL TERMINATED CR=8004 DK=NA This is an example of the call being terminated because layer 2 stopped operating during the call. The call has be started by DK’s reception through a PRI line. CALL TERMINATED CR=NA DK=NA This example shows when the DK side fails to actuate layer 2 through PRI or BRI line when layer 2 stops operating. This is the only case then “NA” is used for the call reference number. CALL TERMINATED CR=0005 CO=11 This example shows a call being terminated due to signal loss that occurred during the call. The call has been started by the DK’s transmission through a PRI line. CALL TERMINATED CR=8001 DK=11 This example shows a line disconnected due to 11H , “User busy,” from the network side when the call from the DK side is made through the PRI line. If ABR registration is enabled and the soft key is switched On, the functions are valid even through they do not display on the soft key. CALL TERMINATED CR=0002 DK=51 This example shows the line being disconnected by 51H, “Invalid call reference value,” from the DK side after the system detects something abnormal during the call. This call started from the DK through the PRI line. CALL TERMINATED CR=0003 DK=NA This example shows the call being terminated because there was no response from the network side to the SETUP signal transmission from the DK side through the PRI line. Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Disconnect Cause Code Disconnect Cause Code Tables ISDN Cause Codes contain detailed information offered by ISDN’s layer 3 protocol when the line is disconnected. Cause code definitions for ISDN PRI and BRI lines are shown in Tables 16-18~16-23. Table 16-18 ISDN PRI Disconnect Cause Values DK Cause Values 5/00 01 Unallocated (unassigned) number 02 No route to specified transit network 03 No route to destination 06 Channel unacceptable 07 Call awarded and being delivered in an established channel 10 Normal Clearing 11 User busy 12 No user responding 13 User alerting, no answer 15 Call rejected 16 Number changed 1B Destination out of order 1C Invalid number format 1D Facility rejected 1E Response to STATus ENQuiry 1F Normal, unspecified 22 Circuit/channel congestion 29 Temporary failure 2A Switching equipment congestion 2B Access information discarded 2C Requested channel not available 2F Resources unavailable, unspecified 32 Requested facility not subscribed 39 Bearer capability not authorized 3A Bearer capability not presently available 3F Service or option not available, unspecified. 41 Bearer capability not implemented 45 Requested facility not implemented 4F Service or option not implemented, unspecified 51 Invalid call reference value 58 Incompatible destination 60 Mandatory information element is missing 61 Message type nonexisting 63 Information element nonexisting or not implemented 64 Invalid information element contents 65 Message not compatible with call state 66 Recovery on timer expiry 6F Protocol error, unspecified 7F Interworking, unspecified ISDN Interfaces Strata DK I&M Disconnect Cause 16-51 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Disconnect Cause Code Table 16-19 PRI National Standardized Cause Values Values Disconnect Cause 04 Vacant Code 08 Prefix 0 dialed in error 09 Prefix 1 not dialed 0A Prefix 0 dialed in error 0B Excessive digits received, call is proceeding 33 Bearer capability incompatible with service request 35 Service Operation violated 65 Protocol error, threshold exceeded Table 16-20 PRI National Standardized Cause Values Values 65 Disconnect Cause Protocol error, threshold exceeded Table 16-21 ISDN BRI Disconnect Cause Values DK Cause Values 01 16-52 Disconnect Cause Unallocated (unassigned) number 02 No route to specified transit network 03 No route to destination 06 Channel unacceptable 07 Call awarded and being delivered in an established channel 10 Normal Clearing 11 User busy 12 No user responding 13 User alerting, no answer 15 Call rejected 16 Number changed 1A Non-selected user clearing 1B Destination out of order 1C Invalid number format 1D Facility rejected 1E Response to STATus ENQuiry 1F Normal, unspecified 22 Circuit/channel congestion 29 Temporary failure 2A Switching equipment congestion 2B Access information discarded 2C Requested channel not available 2F Resources unavailable, unspecified Strata DK I&M 5/00 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Disconnect Cause Code Table 16-21 ISDN BRI Disconnect Cause Values (continued) DK Cause Values Disconnect Cause 32 Requested facility not subscribed 39 Bearer capability not authorized 3A Bearer capability not presently available 3F Service or option not available, unspecified. 41 Bearer capability not implemented 45 Requested facility not implemented 4F Service or option not implemented, unspecified 51 Invalid call reference value 58 Incompatible destination 60 Mandatory information element is missing 61 Message type nonexisting or not implemented 63 Information element nonexisting or not implemented 64 Invalid information element contents 65 Message not compatible with call state 66 Recovery on timer expiry 6F Protocol error, unspecified 7F Interworking, unspecified Table 16-22 BRI National Standardized Cause Values Values Disconnect Cause Vacant Code 08 Prefix 0 dialed in error 09 Prefix 1 dialed in error 0A Prefix 1 not dialed 0B Excessive digits received, call is proceeding 1A Misrouted call to a ported number 33 Call type incompatible with service request 35 Service operation violated 65 Protocol error, threshold exceeded ISDN Interfaces 04 Table 16-23 BRI Network Specific Cause Values Values Strata DK I&M 5/00 Disconnect Cause 08 Call is proceeding 0D Service denied 1C Special intercept announcement 1D Special intercept announcement; undefined code 1E Special intercept announcement; number unassigned 1A Misrouted call to a ported number 33 Call type incompatible with service request 35 Service operation violated 65 Protocol error, threshold exceeded 16-53 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Disconnect Cause Code 16-54 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Glossary Term Definition Auto Attendant (built-in or external). This feature acts as an automatic operator that directs incoming callers to stations by offering a menu of dialing prompts. ACD Automatic Call Distribution. Allows incoming calls to be distributed to a group of ACD agents. The ACD supervisor’s LCD telephone displays ACD Agent and Group information which allows the supervisor to monitor calls and assist agents. ACD/MIS Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with Management Information System (MIS). ADM Add-on Module—See DADM. Amphenol Connector A 25-pair connector typically used on a multi-button telephone set for interfacing cables to many electronic key and PBX systems. ANI Automatic Number Identification—Telephone number of the calling party is sent to the Strata DK system over incoming DID or Tie lines. This feature is provided by some long distance telephone service companies. BCU Represents all of the DK424i processors. The DK424i processors are: B1CU, B2CAU/ B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU, B5CAU/B5CBU. B2CAU/BU Abbreviation for the B2CAU/B2CBU. B2CAU/BU Abbreviation for the B3CAU/B3CBU. B5CAU/BU Abbreviation for the B5CAU/B2CBU. B-channel Used in ISDN. Data or voice information is transmitted on the B-channels of an ISDN line at 64kpbs. The B-channel refers to the frequency range of transmissions on a copper pair; it is a logical, rather than a physical channel. Also see BRI and PRI. B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution. BGM Background Music—Allows customer-supplied music to be sent to telephone speakers and external speakers. bps Bits Per Second—Unit of measure that refers to the transmission speed (baud rate) of electronic signals. It is used when describing data interface unit and modem operation. BRI Basic Rate Interface—ISDN line with 2B + 1D channel. BRI lines can have a U-interface with RJ11 jacks and single twisted pair wiring, or RJ45 four pair S/T interface wiring. CAMA Centralized Automatic Message Accounting. A special trunk provided by the phone company or the E911 Public Safety Answering Point Agency. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Glossary AA GL-1 Glossary CESID~DKT Term GL-2 Definition CESID Caller’s Emergency Service Identification—Telephone number for specific station or station location which is sent to the CAMA trunk. CCVY Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector—Enables two-way transmissions between the Strata DK and a host PC, or SMIS equipment, and one-way transmissions to other PCs. There are four ports on the Call Center Viewer Connector for one Strata DK, another master port, and two additional ports. CLASS Custom Local Area Signaling Services—Defines a number of features offered by local telephone companies. CLID or CND Calling Line Identification or Calling Number Delivery—Telephone number or name of the calling party sent to the Strata DK system over incoming ground or loop start CO lines. This feature is one of the “CLASS” features offered by some local telephone companies. CO Central Office—The facility which houses switching equipment that provides telephone service (CO lines, E & M Tie lines, DID lines, Centrex lines, etc.) for the immediate geographical area. CO Line A term used to define the Strata DK system hardware circuits that connect to the Central Office network line pair. Each CO line, DID and Tie line circuit is assigned a CO line number in system software. CODECs Coder/Decoder—Semiconductors that allow the system to process analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversions. DADM Digital Add-on-Module—Optional device that connects to 2000-series digital telephones to provide the telephones with 20 flexible feature buttons that can be assigned individually for Direct Station Selection, System and Personal Speed Dial, and CO line access. D-channel Used in ISDN. This channel transmits call control information (out-of-band signaling) for Bchannels. The D-channel is a logical, not a physical channel. DDCB Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with designated digital telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and provides door lock control. DDSS Digital Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a heavy load of incoming calls. The DDSS connects only to designated digital telephone circuits, and is associated with a digital telephone. DIL Direct In Line—Refers to two-way, standard CO trunk lines that are assigned to a particular extension or hunt group. DID Line Direct Inward Dialing line. DISA Direct Inward System Access—A feature that allows an outside party to access the Strata DK system internal stations or outgoing CO lines without having to go through an operator or automated attendant. An optional security code may be set to prevent unauthorized access to outgoing CO lines for through system calling. DK Digital Key. DKi Admin Toshiba's customer database programming and upload/download software package for Strata DK systems. DKi Backup Toshiba’s customer database upload/download software package for Strata DK systems. DKT Digital Telephone. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Glossary DKT2000 series~HDSS Term Definition Toshiba proprietary digital telephones consisting of four models: two 10-button models with handsfree answerback and/or LCD display and two 20 button telephones with speakerphone or a speakerphone with LCD display. DKSU14A Strata DK14 Key Service Unit (KSU) with power supply. Equipped with two loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits built-in. Includes external page interface, MOH/ BGM interface, power failure transfer and miscellaneous relay control. DKSUB280, DKSUB424 or DK424i Base Cabinet—Unit that houses the processor PCB (RCTU or BCU), as well as universal slots for station, line, and option PCBs. The Base Cabinet also contains a power supply that provides power for all of the stations and peripherals connected to the base cabinet PCBs. DKSUE280 or DKSUE424 Expansion Cabinet—Optional unit that has six universal slots for station, line, and option PCBs. The expansion cabinet has a power supply that furnishes power for all of the stations and peripherals connected to the expansion cabinet PCBs. As many as five expansion cabinets can be added to the system. DKSUB40i Strata DK40i Base Key Service Unit (KSU) with power supply and battery charger. Equipped with eight digital telephone circuits built-in, and no CO line circuits. Includes external page interface, MOH/BGM interface, power failure transfer and miscellaneous relay control. [DN] Directory Number. DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service—Telephone number of called party is sent to the Strata DK over incoming DID or Tie lines. This feature is provided by some long distance telephone companies. DPFT Power Failure/Emergency Transfer Unit—An optional backup unit that provides emergency service during power failures by automatically connecting up to eight standard telephones to designated CO lines. DSS Direct Station Selection—Feature which allows a telephone user (as well as a DSS console and ADM user) to call another station with the touch of a flexible feature button. DTMF Dual-tone Multi-frequency—Push-button tone dialing. DVSU A subassembly that equips a digital telephone with the capability to receive Speaker Offhook Call Announce (OCA) calls. DVSU is not required to receive Handset OCA (HS-OCA). E911 Enhanced 911 operation that provides more complete locator information to the responding agency. EKT Electronic Telephone. ESF Extended Super Frame. EOCU Off-hook Call Announce Subassembly—An optional upgrade to the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) or Electronic Telephone/Standard Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) that enables properly configured telephones (see HVSU2) to receive Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. FCC Federal Communications Commission—The federal agency which regulates the telecommunication industry. All Toshiba hardware is FCC listed or approved. HDCB Electronic Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with designated electronic telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and provides door lock control. HDSS Electronic Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a heavy load of incoming calls. The HDSS console connects only to designated electronic telephone circuits, and is associated with electronic telephones. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Glossary DKT2000 series GL-3 Glossary HESB~LED Term GL-4 Definition HESB External Speaker Box—A speaker/amplifier that can be configured with the system to provide a variety of functions, such as a paging speaker and/or Background Music (BGM) speaker. HESC-65A A cable used to connect an HHEU-equipped digital telephone or an HHEU-equipped electronic telephone to the external speaker box (HESB) for the Loud Ringing Bell feature. HHEU Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface—Subassembly that fits inside a digital telephone or a 6500-series electronic telephone to allow a headset or an external speaker box (HESB) to be connected to the telephone. HPFB Optional Reserve Power Battery Charger (DK14)—One or two can be connected to the power supply to maintain normal operation during a power failure. HVSU2 Subassembly that fits into a 6500-series electronic telephone enabling it to receive Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. The telephone must be connected to an Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) or a Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) equipped with an Off-hook Call Announce Subassembly (EOCU) to receive OCA, and must have three-pair wiring. IMDU Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly—A subassembly installed on an Option Interface Unit (PIOU or PIOUS) that allows the system to be connected with a remote administration/maintenance terminal or DKi Admin/DKi Backup personal computer. ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. K4RCU, K5RCU Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit—An optional PCB installed on the TMAU motherboard. The K4RCU3A, K5RCU1A or K5RCU2A must be installed to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone circuit) and it is required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) and DID. The K4RCU and K5RCU circuits are also used to detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) feature and must be installed to allow ABR to operate. K4RCU has four DTMF receivers and four ABR busy tone detectors; K5RCU1A and 2A have five DTMF receivers and four ABR detectors. KCDU CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (DK40)—The KCDU has two loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits. The KCDU digital telephone circuits can support all but one of the devices supported by either the PDKU or Base Unit integrated digital telephone circuits: digital telephones, PDIU-DIs/PDIU-D12s, PDIU-DSs, ADMs, DDCBs and RPCIs. KKYS Modular add-on keys (KKYS1~3) or integrated circuit that installs onto the K4RCU3 to add features to the DK40i (auto attendant, ACD/MIS). KSTU2 The optional PCB provides four standard telephone circuits and it can only be installed in the base unit. The KSTU2 supports the two-wire devices such as standard telephones, Auto Attendant devices, voice mail machines, and facsimile machines. The KSTU2 can also support an alternate Background Music (BGM) source on circuit four. LATA Local Access and Transport Area. LCD Liquid Crystal Display—The optional display on digital and electronic telephones that displays calling information. LCR Least Cost Routing. LDI Long Distance Information. LED Light Emitting Diode—Status indicators located on printed circuit boards (PCBs), digital telephones, and electronic telephones. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Glossary LSI~PEKU Term Definition LSI Large Scale Integration—Related to circuit design technology. Strata DK system printed circuit boards (PCBs) use LSI circuit design. MDF Main Distribution Frame—The wiring frame usually located in a phone closet. MDFB Door Phone Box—A peripheral two-way speaker box option. MOH Music-on-Hold—Customer-supplied music or announcements can be sent to parties on-hold on CO lines or the intercom. NDTU Toshiba 30-foot cable that connects the RDTU to the KSU. NT-1 Used in ISDN. Network Termination device that powers a U-interface ISDN line and enables multiple S/T ISDN devices to connect to it. The NT-1 must be UL-listed (U.S.) or CSA-certified (Canada). OCA Off-hook Call Announce. There are two types: Handset OCA and Speaker OCA. OPS Off-premises Station. PBTC A Toshiba-supplied cable used to connect customer-supplied batteries to a cabinet power supply in a one- or two-cabinet system for emergency reserve power for the entire system. PBX Private Branch Exchange—Industry-standard term which refers to a telephone switch, usually on-premises, which serves an individual company, and is connected to a public telephone exchange through the Central Office (CO). PCB Printed Circuit Board. PCM Pulse Code Modulation—A widely-used form of digital telephone switching. PCOU CO Line Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RCOU) that provides the system with four loop start CO lines. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits. PDIU-DI2 Integrated Data Interface Unit—Replaces the normal digital telephone base so that the telephone can be used for the transmission and reception of data between a terminal/ personal computer connected to the telephone and devices connected to other PDIU-DIs or to modems, printers, and computers which are in turn connected to PDIU-DSs. The PDIU-DI is also used to provide personal computer auto dialing of voice calls without a modem; and, access to outside dial-up data services and/or bulletin boards via modem pooling. Note: Replaced by RPCI-DI. Stand-alone Data Interface Unit—Used for modem pooling, printer sharing, and accessing host/mainframe computer. PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with eight digital telephone circuits. In addition to digital telephones, the PDKU can support data interface units (stand-alone and integrated), a digital DSS console (DDSS), RPCI, ADM, and a digital door phone/lock control unit (DDCB). [PDN] Primary Directory Number. PEKU Electronic Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with eight electronic telephone circuits, which can support electronic telephones, a Background Music source, a door phone/lock control unit (HDCB), an electronic DSS console (HDSS), and amplifiers for two CO-line conference calls. The PEKU is also used with older Strata systems. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Glossary PDIU-DS GL-5 Glossary PEMU~QKYS Term GL-6 Definition PEMU E & M Tie Line Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of REMU) that provides the system with support for four E & M Type I Tie lines. The PEMU is also used with older Strata systems. PEPU External Page Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides support and/or circuit interface mainly for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades associated with external paging functions. PESU Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with a combination of two standard and four electronic telephone circuits. The standard telephone circuits can support standard telephones and optional hardware peripherals, such as voice mail devices and fax machines. Except for the electronic DSS console, the PESU electronic telephone circuits can support the same stations and peripherals that the PEKU does. The PESU is also used with older Strata systems. [PhDN] Phantom Directory Number. PIOU Option Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides support and/or circuit interface for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades. PIOUS The same as the PIOU, with some exceptions; most notably, the PIOUS has one external paging interface zone, while the PIOU has four. PORT A term used to identify a station circuit or CO line circuit location. PBTC1A-3M Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to cabinet RPSU280 power supplies (102 cabinet installations). PPTC A Toshiba-supplied adapter—An adapter that is used to connect: an SMDR device, ASCII maintenance terminal, or remote maintenance external modem. PPTC A Toshiba-supplied adapter—An adapter that is used to connect: the modular SMDR, SMDI, MIS for ACD, Open Architecture (OA), maintenance ports of the PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU, or RSIS to the DB-9 (PPTC-9) connector of a call accounting machine, DK Admin, DK Backup personal computer (PC), SMIS personal computer or Open Architecture personal computer. PPTC-9 Designed to connect directly to the DB9 connector of PC COM ports, while PPTC connects directly to an ASCII terminal female DB25, not a PC COM port male DB25. PPTC-25F Used to connect a Call Center Viewer PC or SMIS PC to the RS-232 Strata DK424 MIS port on the PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSSU. PRI Primary Rate Interface. PSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RSTU2) with a built-in ring generator that provides interface for eight standard telephones or optional hardware peripherals (voice mail devices, Background Music source, fax machines, etc.). The PSTU2 has a square wave ring generator that can be set for 190V peak-to-peak or 130V peak-to-peak. The PSTU2 is also used with older Strata systems. PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network. QCDU2 CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit (DK14)—Provides one CO line (loop start) circuit and two digital telephone circuits on each PCB. The QCDU2 interfaces with digital telephones, PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s/RPCI-DI, ADMs connected to the telephones and PDIUDSs, but does not support a DDSS or DDCB console. QKYS Auto Attendant Feature Key (DK14)—Provides built-in Auto Attendant software without Program 03 assignments and installs directly onto the QRCU3 PCB. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Glossary QSTU2~RCIU2/RCIS Term Definition Standard Telephone Interface Unit (DK14)—Provides two standard telephone circuits (ports) and interfaces with standard telephones, Auto Attendant devices, separate BGM source connections, voice mail machines, and facsimile machines. QRCU2 DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit (DK14)—Provides three circuits to receive DTMF tones (required for DISA and devices connected to QSTU2s), and three circuits to detect busy tone (required for the ABR feature). RAM Random Access Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds individual system configuration and feature programming. RAM is read/write memory, and can be easily revised in programming. RATU Attendant Console Interface Unit—Optional PCB that can support up to four attendant consoles and/or PC attendant consoles. RBDB Battery Distribution Box—Interface used to connect reserve power batteries to systems with three or more cabinets (also provides six RBTC1A-1.5M cables to connect RBDB to cabinet RPSU280 power supplies). RBSU ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit—Provides two circuits, each of which provide two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data (control channel). Available for DK424 with Release 4.1. RBSS ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Subassembly—Attaches to the RBSU to provide two additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines and/or stationside connections only. Available for DK424 with Release 4.1. RBTC1A-2M Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to RBDB battery distribution box (3 or more cabinet installations). RBUU ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit—Provides two BRI “U” circuits. Each circuit provides two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data (control) channel. Available for DK424 with Release 4.2. RBUS ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Subassembly—Attaches to the RBUU to provide two additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines and/or stationside connections only. An RBUU with the RBUS subassembly provides four BRI “U” circuits in one card slot. Available for DK424 with Release 4.2. RCMS Enhanced 911 (E911) CAMA Trunk Direct Subassembly—Enables the DK424 (Release 4.0 and above) to connect to one or two CAMA trunks. Two RCMS PCBs enable connection to four CAMA trunks. RMCU Enhanced 911 (E911) CAMA Trunk Direct Interface—Enables connection from the DK424 (Release 4.0 and above) to E911 locator services without third-party equipment. The RMCU supports two subassemblies (RCMS) that provide a total of up to four ports. RCCB Conduit Connection Box—Device required for floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets to connect AC power and reserve power battery cabling to the system. Cabling from the AC power source and from the reserve power battery source can only be installed by a licensed electrician. RCIU2/RCIS Four-circuit plug-in PCB/four-circuit piggy-back PCB, each of which receives and decodes FSK Caller ID (CLID or CND) information from the Central Office ground or loops Caller ID lines. Each RCIU/RCIS circuit works in conjunction with a DK424 RGLU/RCOU/RCOS line PCB circuit. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Glossary QSTU2 GL-7 Glossary RCOS~ROMS Term GL-8 Definition RCOS Loop Start CO Line Interface Subassembly—Optional subassembly that attaches to the RCOU PCB to provide four additional CO analog line circuits to the PCB. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits. RCOU CO Line Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with four loop start CO lines. An optional RCOS subassembly can be attached to the RCOU for four more loop start analog CO lines. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits. RCTU Common Control Unit—The system’s controller PCB that contains the system's main microprocessor and microprocessor bus, ROM, RAM, time switch logic, busy tone detectors, system tones and MOH/BGM Interface. RCTUs include: RCTUA, RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, and RCTUE/F. Each RCTU supports different station and line capacities. The RCTU PCBs also provide interface for the optional RRCS PCB and RKYS key. RDDU Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides four analog Direct Inward Dialing line circuits. Supports ANI and DNIS. RDSU Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides two standard telephone and four digital telephone circuits in its basic configuration. An RSTS can be attached to the RDSU for two additional standard telephone circuits. RDTU T1/DS-1 Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides up to 24-digital channels that can individually be assigned for loop start CO line, ground start CO line, E & M Tie line, or DID line operation. Supports ANI and DNIS. REMU E & M Tie Line Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with support for four E & M Type I or Type II, Immediate or Wink Start Tie lines. Supports ANI and DNIS. RFIF Floor Mount Installation Kit—Kit that is used to floor mount systems. RGLU Analog Ground/Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit—Provides four CO line circuits that can be individually configured for loop start or ground start CO line operation. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits. RKYS Feature Key Upgrade—Subassembly that attaches to the common control unit to provide the system with optional features. There are four versions of the RKYS: the RKYS1, the RKYS2, the RKYS3 and the RKYS4, each of which provides a distinct set of features. RMDS Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly—A subassembly installed on the RSIU Optional Interface Unit that allows the system to be connected with a remote administration/ maintenance terminal or DK Admin/DK Backup personal computer. RPCI-DI Computer Data Interface Unit—Replaces the normal telephone base and provides all the functions of PDIU-D12. In addition, it can be switched to a second mode automatically and used with a Telephone Application Program Interface (TAPI) software application. RPTU ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Unit—Provides 1 data (control) channel and 23 bearer channels.All B-channels appear and program as CO lines in the DK424 system and can be individually configured for local service, FX, WATS, DID, Tie, etc., service operation. Supported by the RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D4 and RCTUE3/F4. RRCU Remote Cabinet Interface Unit—One pair supports up to two DK424 remote expansion cabinets at one location. ROM Read Only Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds static software that comprises the mechanics of the features’ functions. ROM is only revised by Toshiba software engineers. ROMS Remote Cabinet Interface Unit Subassembly—A subassembly installed on the RRCU that enables two DK424 remote expansion cabinets to at one location. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Glossary RPSB (1 and 2)~SSTU Term Definition Power Strip—Interface between cabinet power supplies and the commercial AC power source. The RPSB provides outlets for three power supplies. One RSPS is required for systems with three or four cabinets, two or three RSPSs for five- or six-cabinet systems. RPSU280 Cabinet Power Supply—Furnishes power to all of the stations and peripherals connected to the cabinet PCBs. Each Base and optional expansion cabinet has a separate power supply. RRCS Dual-tone Multi-frequency Receiver—An optional upgrade to the system common control unit (RCTU) that provides Dual-tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) receivers for system Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO lines, E&M Tie lines, DID, DNIS and ANI lines, Auto attendant announcement devices, remote change of call forward-external destination, DNIS external call routing, and stations and other peripherals that connect to standard telephone circuits. The RRCS comes in three models: the RRCS-4 (provides four DTMF receivers), the RRCS8 (eight DTMF receivers), and the RRCS-12 (12 DTMF receivers). RSIS Optional RS-232 Serial Interface Unit—A subassembly installed on the RSIU optional interface unit that allows the system to be connected to any of the following features: voice mail SMDI, MIS for ACD, SMDR, local DK Admin/DK Backup personal computer, external maintenance modem, Open Architecture personal computer. RSIU Optional RS-232 Serial Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides interface to any of the following features: voice mail SMDI, MIS for ACD, SMDR, local or remote DK Admin/DK Backup Personal computer, built-in (RMDS) or external system maintenance modem, Open Architecture personal computer. By itself, the RSIU PCB provides one interface port. With up to three RSIU/RMDS subassemblies, it can provide up to four interface ports. RSTU Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RSTU2) with a built-in ring generator that provides interface for eight-standard telephones or optional hardware peripherals (voice mail devices, Background music source, fax machines, etc.). The RSTU has a built-in 80V RMS sine wave ring generator. The RSTU also has connectors for the R48S, which extends station loop length and is described in this section. RSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB functionally identical to the RSTU. RSTU2 also contains a 90-volt DC message waiting/generator/switching circuit to operate standard telephone message waiting lamps. RWBF1 Wall bracket Fixture—Bracket that is part of an installation kit (RFIF) that is used to floor mount systems. RFMF Floor Mount Fixture—Fixture that is part of an installation kit (RFIF) that is used to floor mount systems. R48S Optional 48V Power Supply—Subassembly that can be connected to the RSTU or RDSU to extend the loop length of standard telephone circuits (including the resistance of the phone) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. [SDN] Secondary Directory Number. SF Super Frame. SLT Single-line Telephone. SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface: RS-232 link from PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIS, or RSIU modular jack connected to a voice mail machine to provide Strata DK voice mail integration. SMIS Software MIS for ACD. SSTU Factory-installed sub-unit board that is “piggy-backed” onto the PSTU or PSTU2. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Glossary RPSB (1 and 2) GL-9 Glossary S/T Interface~WSIU Term GL-10 Definition S/T Interface Reference interface points (“S” or “T”) of an ISDN network. S/T interfaces are RJ45, 8-wire connection interfaces for ISDN equipment. An NT-1 is needed to network Utype BRI lines to S/T type interfaces. TAPI Telephone Application Programming Interface. TA Terminal Adapter or ISDN modem that converts PC and other types of protocol into a signal that works with ISDN. Generally, TAs support RJ11 voice ports and RS-232C or V.35 or V.449 data interfaces. T1/DS-1 See RDTU. TCIU1 Caller ID—An optional PCB that provides the Caller ID option in the Strata DK424. TCIU2 Caller ID—An optional PCB that provides the Caller ID option in the Strata DK40. TCOU Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Board— An optional PCB providing four loop start CO line circuits in the Strata DK40. TDDU Four-Circuit DID Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit— An optional PCB providing four DID line circuits in the Strata DK40. TE Terminal Equipment. This refers to devices using ISDN service (telephones, faxes, computers, etc.). TE1 supports ISDN formats with S/T or U-type intefaces. TSPI Telephony Service Provider Interface. TSIU RS-232 Ports—An optional PCB that provides up to two RS-232 interface ports (modular jacks) enabling the DK40 to connect to various hardware devices. TTY Flexible RS-232 port which can be used for maintenance SMDI and MIS (ACD). U Interface A single twisted pair of copper wire on an RJ11 jack. The wiring is identical to POTS, with different signaling. Only one U-interface device can be attached per line. universal slot Slots in a telephone KSU/cabinet that are used for a variety of optional PCBs. WSIU Serial Interface Board (DK14)—Provides two serial ports for either a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) device or a maintenance terminal or modem, or Caller ID interface. Strata DK I&M 5/00 Index B [DN]‚ [PDN]‚ [SDN], [PhDN], BCU xvii B1CU PCB 7-46 B2CBU PCB 7-44, 7-47, 7-48 B3CAU PCB 7-49 B3CBU PCB 7-50 B5CAU PCB 7-51 B5CBU PCB 7-52 background music (see BGM) 9-18 base cabinet 4-2 base cabinet installation 5-7 base KSU (see key service unit) base KSU PCB K4RCU3 3-23 KSTU2 3-25 TCIU2 3-28 TCO 3-30 TDDU 3-33 TSIU 3-36 basic rate interface (see BRI, see also ISDN) battery DK14 reserve power battery/charger (HPFB) 1-7 removing and charging 11-32 battery backup DK40i interface 2-5 BCU installation procedures 7-44 BCU PCBs 7-46, 7-49, 7-50 beep strap 11-17, 11-22 BGM 2-5, 9-18, 12-3 alternate source installation 12-9 external installation 12-10 options 12-3, 12-6 single page zone 12-26 to connect source 12-9 BRCS 7-43 BRI 3-38 BRI circuit jack (TE or NT mode) 16-22 A ABR receiver 2-5 ACD installation guidelines 13-4 Strata DK built-in auto attendant 13-6 to voice mail or auto attendant 13-6 add-on modules capacities 6-11 ADM 2-6 installation (DKT2000) 11-18 limits 3-40 amplified conference 6-10 amplified talk path 12-33 amplifier requirements 12-33 ANI 6-10 attendant console 11-54 interface unit 9-26 attendant position options 4-17 auto attendant 2-5, 12-74 built-in ACD 13-6 ACD applications (DK424) 12-78 block diagram 12-79 DK14 1-18 installation 12-77 overview 12-74 programming 12-76 DK424 feature key 4-16 DK424i feature key 6-3 simultaneous announcements 6-10 auto dial (PC ) voice call 12-71 auto disconnect digital announcer 12-79 auto preference 11-30 automated attendant (see auto attendant) Strata DK I&M 5/00 Index Variables IN-1 Index C~D BRI wire type recommendations 16-23 built-in auto attendant (see auto attendant, built-in) busy override 11-17 BVPU configuration 9-4 station PDKU 10-8 PEKU 10-17 PESU 10-18 RDSU 10-10 RSTU2/PSTU 10-22 CTI 15-6 C cabling DDCB/HDCB/MDFB 11-26 call center viewer (CCV) 13-14 configuration 13-16 software installation 13-16 Y connector (CCVY) 13-16 call monitoring 16-43 call park orbits 6-10 caller ID 3-28, 6-10 interface 2-5, 9-27 lines (see also BRI, PRI lines) CAMA trunk direct interface (RMCU/RCMS) 9-60 camp-on ring tone 11-17 carbon headset/handset strap 11-16 CCVY 13-16 CNIS abandoned call numbers 6-10 CO line 2-4 digital interface unit 9-8 CO line digital telephone interface unit 1-13 CO lines capacities 6-11 DK424i 6-4 groups 6-10 common DIU connections 12-47 compatibility DK8/DK14 1-21 conference two-CO line 12-32 conferencing 6-10 connecting to network side (TE-mode) 16-25 connecting to station devices (NT-mode) 16-26 cordless digital telephones 6-11 cordless telephone 11-30 connect to base unit 11-31 cord connection 11-31 handset battery pack 11-32 installation 11-30 cross connect record RCOU/RCOS, RGLU, RDDU, REMU, RDDU, RDTU 10-26 IN-2 D DADM 11-35 data broadcast unit 13-18 data communication installation tests external PC to internal PC 12-69 internal PC to external PC 12-67 PC to PC 12-65 PC to printer 12-66 PDIU-DI 12-65 PDIU-DS 12-65 RPCI 12-65 DDCB 2-5, 2-6 DDCB/HDCB 9-13, 11-25 assignments guide 12-14 cabling 11-26 programming 11-27 wall mounting 11-26 DDSS 2-5, 2-6 limits 3-40 DH 6-10 DID lines 6-11 DID line circuit 2-5 digital telephones system capacities 6-11 digital add-on module (see DADM) digital announcer auto disconnect 12-79 digital telephone 1000-series 11-10 circuits 2-5 connecting to system 11-5 limits 3-40 upgrade 11-8 beep strap 11-17 busy override/camp-on ring tone over handset/headset 11-17 carbon headset/handset strap 11-16 external power strap 11-18 loud ringing bell/headset 11-14 microphone/speaker Strata DK I&M 5/00 Index D~D Strata DK I&M 5/00 hardware 4-19 interface PCB options 4-16 network requirements 5-6 PCBs PCOU2 9-36 DK424 and DK424i hardware compatibility 6-21 DK424 PCB RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS installation 9-27 RCOS 9-32 RDSU 9-40 DK424 PCBs (see Universal PCBs) DK424i architecture 6-2 base cabinet 6-3 base cabinet installation 7-6 BCU programming 7-44 BRI configurations 6-7, 6-8, 6-9 configurations 6-5, 6-6 expansion cabinet 6-4 expansion cabinet installation 7-6 expansion cabinets 7-30 functional block diagram 6-18 interface PCB options 6-16 maximum line capacities 6-4 power requirements 6-39, 7-4 remote expansion cabinet unit 7-53 DKT2000 ADM installation 11-18 DKT2004-CT 6-11 DKT2010 strap/connector locations 11-13 DKT2104-CT 6-11 DNIS 6-10 door lock control 12-10 DDCB/HDCB 12-14 relay options 12-10 door locks 6-11 door phone (see MDFB) 11-25 door phone/lock control unit (see DDCB/HDCB) door phones 6-11 DPFT installation 12-2 DSS and MDFB 4-18 DSS console configuration 11-24 system connection 11-23 DTMF ABR receiver 2-5 receiver subassembly 6-3 receiver/ABR tone detector unit Index sensitivity adjustment 11-17 simultaneous voice/data 11-8 TAPI 11-8 telephone speaker off-hook call announce 11-4 digital telephone interface unit 3-38, 9-10 digital/standard telephone interface unit 3-38, 9-40 DIP switch options 12-58 direct station selection (see DSS) DISA 12-37 distributed hunt 6-10, 9-37 DIU 12-46 common connections 12-47 limits 3-40 DK alarm sensor 12-73 DK14 PCBs compatible with DK8 1-21 QCDU2 1-13 QRCU3 1-17 QSTU2A 1-15 WSIU 1-19 reserve power battery 1-7 secondary protection 1-22 wiring to caller ID interface (WSIU) 1-25 to CO lines (KSU and QCDU) 1-24 DK40i capacities line and universal PCB slots 2-3 station and peripherals 2-3 system features 2-2 interface PCB options 2-8 PCBs (see Universal PCBs) installation in KSU 3-20 KSTU2 3-25 PCOU 3-30 RCIU2 installation 9-27 TCIU2 3-28 TDDU 3-33 TSIU 3-36 RCIU1/RCIU2 9-29 secondary protector diagram 3-41 system configuration 2-1 telephone circuits 2-9 DK424 base cabinet 4-2 DK280 compatibility 4-3 IN-3 Index E~I DK40i 3-23 tones 2-5 DTMF receiver unit 7-43 DVSU 11-4 installation 11-13 E E&M tie line unit 3-38 E911 12-83 programming considerations 12-83 see RCMS system installation 12-83 E911 CAMA trunk direct interface (RMCU/ RCMS) 9-60 EIA interface leads (signals) 12-49 electronic telephone connecting to system 11-5 interface unit 3-38, 9-12 system capacities 6-11 upgrade 11-19 beep strap 11-22 carbon headset/handset strap 11-22 handset receiver volume-up strap 11-23 loud ringing bell/headset 11-21 microphone/speaker threshold 11-23 off-hook call announce 11-19 EMC ferrite core requirement 16-25 enhanced 911 service (see E911) EOCU 9-17 illustration 9-12 expansion cabinet installation 5-7 expansion cabinets 4-2, 5-21 expansion key service unit connections 3-15, 3-16 mounting 3-15, 3-16 expansion KSU components (DK40i) 2-6 external page zones 6-10 external page 12-10 installation 12-26 with BGM 12-26 interface unit 9-15 external speaker unit (see HESB) catastrophic faults 14-11 CO line dial tone faults 14-13 DSS console faults 14-14 fault classification 14-10 remote maintenance faults 14-17 station dial tone faults 14-12 voice mail auto attendant faults 14-15 fax machine 2-5 four-circuit DID line digital telephone interface unit 3-33 loop start CO line board 3-30 loop start CO line interface unit 9-32 standard telephone interface unit 3-25 functional block diagram 6-18 G grounding terminal screws 16-22 H handset OCA stations 6-11 HDCB 9-18 installation 12-15 HDSS console 9-12 connections 11-24 headset upgrade 11-14 HESB amplified speaker installation 12-22 installation test 12-23 external speaker unit 12-19 loud ringing bell 12-19 installation for DKT 12-19 installation for EKT 12-21 test 12-21 talkback amplified speaker 12-23 installation 12-24 wall mounting 12-26 HHEU 11-14, 11-21 installation 11-15, 11-21 HVSI 11-19 installation 11-20 HVSU 11-19 installation 11-19 I F fault finding 14-1 fault isolation 14-3 fault isolation flowcharts 14-10 IN-4 IMDU 9-21 Insight DK (DK424only) 13-14 installation 11-30 ADM 11-18 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Index K~K Strata DK I&M 5/00 PRI RPTU overview 16-5 testing and troubleshooting 16-13 RBSU/RBSS 16-25, 16-26 RBSU/RBSS premise wiring guidelines 16-22, 16-23 RPTU testing and troubleshooting 16-38 SMDR output 12-36 timing and synchronization 16-39, 16-43 ISDN basic rate interface unit (RBSU) 3-38 subassembly (RSSS) 3-38 ISDN BRI RBSS PCB installation 16-18 RBSU/RBSS capacity and cabinet slot information 16-15 PS-1 backup power option 16-15 REBS PCB installation 16-18 R40S PCB installation 16-18 K K4RCU 3-21 K4RCU3 2-5, 3-23 DK40i DTMF receiver/ABR tone detector unit 3-23 K4RCU3 and K5RCU configuration 3-23 illustration 3-24 programming 3-23 K5RCU 3-21 KCDU 2-6, 9-4, 9-8 configuration 9-8 installation 9-8 programming 9-8 key service unit base to expansion unit connection 3-14 DK14 1-2, 1-5 components 1-12 DK40i 2-4 components 2-5 connectors 3-13 cords 3-13 KKYS 2-5, 3-21 KSTU2 2-5, 3-21, 3-25 configuration 3-25 Index alternate BGM source 12-9 built-in auto attendant 12-77 DADM 11-35 DK alarm sensor 12-73 door phone 11-25 DPFT 12-2 E911 12-83 external BGM 12-10 external page 12-26 HDCB 12-15 MOH 12-4 MOH/BGM as BGM 12-9 multiple PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/RSIU 12-81 PDIU-DI2 11-9 PDIU-DS to modem 12-62 PDIU-DS to printer 12-61 peripherals 12-1 RPCI-DI 11-9 SMDR printer/call accounting device 12-39 voice mail 12-46 interface leads EIA 12-49 ISDN BRI RBSU/RBSS cabinet installation 16-19 call monitor 16-30 installation 16-17 interface unit 16-13 led indications 16-19 leds and connectors 16-23 monitor jack 16-22 option switches, jumpers, and connectors 16-18 overview 16-14 passive bus configurations 16-28 premise wiring guidelines 16-22, 16-23 RBUU installation 16-30 RBUU/RBUS interface unit 16-34 led indications 16-32 location of leds and connectors 16-32 station circuits TE-1 and TA 6-11 BRI, PRI channel lines 6-11 DK424 reference model 16-3 modular jack pin configurations 16-22 performance monitoring 16-46 IN-5 Index L~P wiring 3-25 L line capacities 6-4 lines CO 2-6 station 2-6 lock control unit 11-25 loop limits 3-40 loop start line limits 3-40 loop/ground start CO line interface unit 3-38 loop-back testing 16-38 loud ringing bell upgrade 11-14 headset upgrade 11-21 M MDFB 11-25 cabling 11-26 volume control 11-27 wall mounting 11-27 microphone/speaker sensitivity adjustment 11-17 threshold 11-23 modem setup recommendations 12-64 MOH 2-5, 12-3 installation 12-4 options 12-3 relay control 12-17 MOH/BGM installation 12-9 motherboard DK14 1-12 DK40i 3-20 multiple PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/RSIU installation 12-81 music-on-hold (see MOH) N network requirements DK424 5-6 night ringing selected page zones 12-32 non-built-in auto attendant (see auto attendant, non-built in) O OCA speaker 6-11 off-hook call announce 6-11 IN-6 unit (EOCU) 9-12 upgrade 11-19 off-premises stations 6-11 option interface unit 3-38, 9-21 P P90 ring generator switch 9-18 page single zone with BGM 12-26 paging external zones 6-10 groups 6-10 max. simultaneous stations 6-10 PC attendant console system capacities 6-11 PC attendant console 11-37 wiring 10-19 PC auto dial voice call 12-71 PC interface unit 3-38 PC/data communications interface unit (see DIU) 12-46 PCB circuits, interface options and connectors 4-12, 6-12 PCOU 2-7 controls, indicators, connectors 9-36 PCOU2 9-36 controls, indicators, connectors 9-36 illustration 9-36 installation(see RCOU installation) PDIU-DI 11-8 data communication installation tests 12-65 PDIU-DI2 11-8 installation 11-9 PDIU-DS 2-5, 2-6 assembly 12-64 data communication installation tests 12-65 disassembly 12-64 installation to modem 12-62 to printer 12-61 PDIU-DS 6-11 PDKU1/PDKU2 9-10 PDKU2 2-6, 3-38, 9-10 hardware options 9-10 illustration 9-11 programming 9-10 PEKU 2-6, 3-38, 9-12 controls, indicators, connectors 9-14 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Index Q~R Strata DK I&M 5/00 PSTU2 2-7 hardware option 9-58 illustration 9-58 installation 9-58, 9-60 Q QCDU2 configuration 1-13 illustration 1-13 installation 1-13 programming 1-14 wiring 1-24 QKYS1 built-in auto attendant key 1-18 QRCU3 configuration 1-17 DTMF receiver/ABR tone detector unit 1-17 illustration 1-17 installation 1-17 programming 1-17 QSTU2 configuration 1-15 installation 1-15 programming 1-16 wiring 1-16 QSTU2/QSTS2 illustration 1-15 R R40S 16-18 R48S 2-7 illustration 9-57 RATU 9-26 controls, indicators, and connectors 9-26 illustration 9-26 installation 9-26 RBSS 16-18 RBSU 6-12 overview 16-14 RBSU 4-12 RBSU/RBSS 16-13, 16-19, 16-22, 16-23 RBUU 6-12, 16-30 installation 16-30 RBUU 4-12 RCIS 9-27 programming 9-28 RCIU1 9-27 programming 9-28 RCIU1/RCIU2 9-27 RCIU2 2-7, 9-27 programming 9-28 Index hardware options 9-12 illustration 9-14 installation 9-13 programming 9-13 PEMU (see REMU) PEPU 9-15 installation procedure 9-15 programming 9-15 peripherals 2-4 installation 12-1 PESU 2-6, 3-38, 9-17 controls, indicators, and connectors 9-19 illustration 9-20 installation 9-18 programming 9-19 pickup groups 6-10 PIOU 2-6, 2-8 controls, indicators, connectors 9-24 PIOU/PIOUS 3-38, 9-21 hardware options remote maintenance modem unit (IMDU) 9-21 installation 9-22 programming 9-22 PIOUS 2-6, 2-8 controls, indicators, connectors 9-25 power failure DK40i transfer interface 2-5 options 3-17, 12-1 power failure terminal screws 16-22 power supply DK14 PCB considerations 1-10 removal 1-8 replacement 1-9 DK40i removal 3-19 replacement 3-20 wiring 3-17 processor PCB subassemblies 6-3 processor PCBs 6-2 program checklist voice mail 12-44 programming considerations E911 12-83 Stratagy 12-42 voice mail 12-43 VP 12-42 IN-7 Index S~S RCMS installation 9-60 RCOS controls, indicators, connectors 9-35 installation 9-32 RCOU 2-7, 3-38 illustration 9-34 installation 9-33 programming 9-33 RCOU/RCOS 9-32 RCTU common control unit programming 5-51 RCTUA3, RCTUBA3/BB3, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3 5-46 RDDU 2-7, 9-37 DID line unit 3-38 illustration 9-39 installation 9-37 programming 9-38 RDSU 2-7, 3-38, 9-40 hardware options 9-40 illustration 9-42 installation 9-41 programming 9-41 R48S ring generator 9-40 RDTU 8-1, 8-2, 9-42 controls, indicators, and connectors 8-8 programming 8-3 RDTU2 6-12 RDTU2 4-12 REBS 16-18 relay control options 12-10 remote expansion cabinet unit 5-60, 6-16 remote expansion cabinets (DK424i) 7-53 REMU 2-7, 3-38 connectors, controls, indicators 9-45, 9-46 illustration 9-45 installation procedures 9-43 programming 9-44 reserve power DK40i 3-17 installation DK40i 3-18 RGLU2 2-7, 3-38, 9-47 connectors, controls, indicators 9-47 illustration 9-48 installation procedures 9-47 ring generator 9-40 RJ-45 pins in the 8-pin modular jack 16-22 RMCU 6-13 IN-8 illustration 9-62 installation 9-62 RMCU 4-12 RMCU/RCMS 9-60 programming 10-29 RMDS 9-49 ROMS1A 5-64 RPCI-DI 2-6, 6-11, 11-8 data communication installation tests 12-65 dual mode 12-47 installation 11-9 RPTU2 6-12 RPTU2 4-12 RRCS 6-3 RRCU 5-60, 5-63, 6-16, 7-53, 7-56 RRCU PCB 5-63 RS-232/modem interface unit 9-49 RSIS 9-49 RSIU 9-49 RSSU 2-6, 2-8, 3-38 RSTS 2-7, 9-40 illustration 9-42 RSTU2 2-7, 3-38, 9-57 illustration 9-59 installation 9-58, 9-60 RWIU 6-15 RWIU 4-15 S serial interface board DK14 1-19 DK40i 3-36 simultaneous voice/data upgrade 11-8 SMDI 2-5 SMDR 2-5 direct inward system access CO lines (see DISA) 12-37 printer/call accounting device installation 12-39 options 12-35 printout example 12-37 DISA internal station call 12-37 DISA outgoing CO line call 12-37 ring, no answer DISA call 12-37 programming considerations 12-38 speaker OCA stations 6-11 speakerphone 11-17, 11-23 speed dial system capacities 6-10 Strata DK I&M 5/00 Index T~V standard telephone 6-11 connecting to system 11-5 interface unit 2-5, 3-38, 9-57 standard telephone interface unit DK14 1-15 standard/electronic telephone interface unit 3-38, 9-17 station and CO lines 2-6 station apparatus 11-1 telephones 11-1 station lines 2-4 station message detail recording (see SMDR) strap beep 11-17, 11-22 carbon headset/handset 11-16, 11-22 external power 11-18 handset receiver volume-up 11-23 Strata AirLink interface unit 6-15 Strata AirLink interface unit 4-15 Stratagy 12-42 programming considerations 12-42 StrataLink 15-6 StrataLink and TAPI for Windows 95 15-2 T Strata DK I&M 5/00 U universal slot PCB KCDU 9-4, 9-8 PDKU2 9-10 PEKU 9-12 PEPU 9-15 PESU 9-17 PIOU/PIOUS 9-21 RATU 9-26 RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS 9-27 RCOU/RCOS 9-32 RDDU 9-37 REMU 9-43 RGLU 9-47 RSIU/RSIS/RMDS 9-49 universal slots 6-11 V verified account codes 6-10 voice mail options 12-41 program checklist 12-44 programming considerations (general) 12-43 SMDI 6-10 system installation 12-46 voice messaging customer-supplied 12-43 Stratagy 12-42 Index T1 interface unit 8-2, 9-42 T1/DS-1 lines 6-11 T1/DS-1 interfacing 8-1 talk path (amplified) 12-33 talkback amplified speaker (see HESB) TAPI (see Telephony Application Programming Interface) TAPI upgrade 11-8 TBSU 3-27 TBUU 16-30 TBUU Printed Circuit Board 16-33 TCIU2 2-5, 3-20, 3-28 installation 3-28 programming 3-28 TCOU 2-5, 3-20, 3-44 hardware options 3-30 installation 3-30 programming 3-31 removal 3-30 replacement 3-30 TDDU 2-5, 3-20, 3-33, 3-44 programming 3-33 telephone (see station apparatus) battery backup 3-40 installation 11-3 wall mounting 11-6 telephones DKT 6-11 EKT 6-11 telephony application programming interface (TAPI) 15-1 telephony service provider interface (TSPI) 15-1 tenants 6-10 tie lines 6-11 toll restriction 6-10 TPSU16 3-19 TSIU 2-5, 3-21, 3-36 illustration 3-37 installation 3-36 programming 3-36 TSPI (see telephony service provider interface) two-CO line external amplified conference 12-32 IN-9 Index W~W VP 12-42 programming considerations 12-42 W wall boards 13-23 Windows 11-37 wiring diagram 2-wire tie line PEMU 10-33 4-wire tie line PEMU 10-34 CO line to MDF PCOU 10-25 RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS 10-30 RCOU/RCOS 10-28 RDDU 10-31 REMU 2/4 Wire Type I/II 10-32 RGLU2 or PCOU 10-27 CO/tie line 10-25 DK40i CO lines 3-44 DK40i KSU amphenol station/relay 3-42 DK40i secondary protector 3-41 external power to DKT 10-7 MDF 3-42 PDKU DDCB/door phone/lock 10-5 DKT/DDSS 10-4 PIOU or PEPU peripherals 10-36 PIOUS page/relay/alarm connection 10-38 station to MDF PEKU amplified two-CO line conference 10-15 background music 10-14 EKT/HDSS console 10-12 PESU 10-17 RDSU 10-9 RPCI-DI and PDIU-DS 10-5 RSTU/PSTU/RSTU2 standard telephone/voice mail/DPFT 10-21 Worksheets DK40i 2-11 DK424 4-20 WSIU 1-19 installation 1-19 programming 1-19 wiring 1-25 IN-10 Strata DK I&M 5/00 ">

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Voice over Internet Protocol (IP) Gateway Unit
- Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit
- Remote Maintenance Modem Unit
- CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit
- Digital Telephone Interface Unit
- Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
- External Page Interface Unit
- Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
- Option Interface Units
- Attendant Console Interface Unit
Frequently asked questions
The BVPU is a Voice Over Internet Protocol (IP) Gateway Unit that allows you to connect to a network using IP technology. For example, you might use this to make calls from your traditional PBX system out to the Internet.
The EOCU is a Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit. It enables you to use speaker off-hook call announce, which is a feature that allows you to announce calls without lifting the handset.
The IMDU is a Remote Maintenance Modem Unit. This component allows you to administer and control the system remotely over a modem connection.